JP7252392B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In a conventional game machine, when power is supplied again after the power supply to the game machine is stopped, the variable display device (display means) recovers from the state in which power is not supplied (restoration of the game state). There is a display to that effect. In addition, among such gaming machines, there are those that display on the variable display device that the power has been restored from a state in which no power is supplied and that the game state is a specific game state (for example, patent Reference 1).

JP-A-2002-143523

The gaming machine described above has room for improvement.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a suitable gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the game machine of means A of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Abnormality determination means capable of determining abnormality in response to a plurality of types of events having different priorities;
Abnormality notification control means capable of notifying the determined abnormality when the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means;
an external output means capable of outputting an external output signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the abnormality determination means determines an abnormality;
state control means for controlling a state corresponding to the determined abnormality based on the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination means;
with
The abnormality notification control means terminates the notification and starts notification of the newly determined abnormality when the priority of the abnormality newly determined by the abnormality determination means is higher than the priority of the abnormality being reported. On the other hand, if a new abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means when the state controlled by the state control means is the predetermined state, the control of the predetermined state is triggered regardless of the priority of the abnormality. We will continue to inform you about the abnormalities that have become
When the state controlled by the state control means is a predetermined state, the external output means outputs the predetermined state regardless of the priority of the abnormality when the abnormality determination means determines a new abnormality. It is possible to continue the output of the external output signal corresponding to the abnormality that triggered the control ,
The predetermined state is a game stop state,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming machine.
The game machine of means B is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can execute a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) for a player machines, slot machines, etc.),
a shooting means capable of shooting game media based on a player's operation (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle or a ball-hitting device);
Along with controlling the progress of the game, a first control means (for example, CPU103) capable of executing recovery processing (for example, Sa41 to Sa48 in the game control main processing) of the game state when receiving power supply after stopping the power supply and,
A promotion display (e.g., a right-handed notification image) for promoting the shooting of the game medium so as to flow down a specific path (e.g., the right game area 10R) of the downflow paths along which the game medium flows, and the recovery. a display means (for example, the effect display device 5) capable of displaying a recovery display (for example, a power failure recovery screen) regarding processing;
Notification means (e.g., right-handed notification LED 30), which is means different from the display means and is capable of promoting notification for promoting shooting of the game medium so as to flow down the specific path;
Second control for controlling the display on the display means based on the information transmitted from the first control means (for example, the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command in the embodiment and the game state designation command in Modification 1) Means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Detecting means (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 136, 140, etc.) capable of detecting game media (for example, the game area 9010, etc.) used in the game;
a signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136);
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, etc.);
Abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, CPU 90103 etc. that executes the error notification process in FIG. 137);
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 906B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 9050A to 9050D that become the general winning areas, and the big winning hole a payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.;
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) For example, information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 140, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 116),
with
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is reported as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, performance display is restricted, etc.);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display means performs the promotion display and the recovery display, and the notification means performs the promotion notification, so that the game state can be easily grasped, and the information regarding the number of hit balls and the number of prize balls is not accurate. Information can be prevented from being displayed.
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can execute a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) for a player machines, slot machines, etc.),
a shooting means capable of shooting game media based on a player's operation (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle or a ball-hitting device);
Along with controlling the progress of the game, a first control means (for example, CPU103) capable of executing recovery processing (for example, Sa41 to Sa48 in the game control main processing) of the game state when receiving power supply after stopping the power supply and,
A promotion display (e.g., a right-handed notification image) for promoting the shooting of the game medium so as to flow down a specific path (e.g., the right game area 10R) of the downflow paths along which the game medium flows, and the recovery. Display means (for example, effect display device 5) capable of displaying recovery display (for example, power failure recovery screen) related to processing;
Notification means (e.g., right-handed notification LED 30), which is means different from the display means and is capable of promoting notification for promoting shooting of the game medium so as to flow down the specific path;
Second control for controlling the display on the display means based on the information transmitted from the first control means (for example, the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command in the embodiment and the game state designation command in Modification 1) Means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Detecting means (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 136, 140, etc.) capable of detecting game media (for example, the game area 9010, etc.) used in the game;
a signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136);
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, etc.);
Abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, CPU 90103 etc. that executes the error notification process in FIG. 137);
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 906B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 9050A to 9050D that become the general winning areas, and the big winning hole a payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.;
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) For example, information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 140, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 116),
with
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, performance display is restricted, etc.),
The second control means can control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part that displays a power interruption recovery screen and a right hitting notification image on the effect display device 5 by executing the process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game state is restored.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The second control means can control the notification by the notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of S705 and S708 to light the right-handed notification LED 30 part, and the part that executes the processing of S711 to turn off the right-handed notification LED 30),
Control is performed to display the promotion display together with the recovery display on the display means based on the reception of the specific route notification execution command for executing the promotion notification by the notification means from the first control means (for example, As shown in FIG. 25, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 has received the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command in the processing of S704 or S707, the processing of S705 and S706 or S708 and S709 is executed, and the right-handed The part where the lighting of the notification LED 30 and the display of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5 are started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since there is no need to provide a separate command for displaying the promotion display on the display means, an increase in the number of commands can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The first control means is capable of transmitting a command to the second control means at a transmission timing at predetermined time intervals (for example, the CPU 103 executes game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10 every 2 ms. A portion that executes command control processing (S20) and sends a command to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120)), a command different from the specific route notification execution command and notifies that the game state has been restored (for example, a power failure recovery designation command) is transmitted at the transmission timing at the same predetermined time interval as the specific route notification execution command (for example, right hitting in Sa46 and Sa48 of the game control main processing shown in FIG. 9 By performing the transmission setting of the notification LED lighting designation command and the power failure restoration designation command, and executing the command control processing in the game control timer interrupt processing of the same interruption, the right hitting notification LED lighting designation command and the electric power The part that sends the specified command for recovery from failure)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as overlooking the promotion display due to the display start time of the recovery display being different from the display start time of the promotion display.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
A means different from the display means and the notification means, and a specific path corresponding light emitting section (for example, a right-handed display section 25D) capable of notifying by light emission that the path from which the game medium should be shot is the specific path. including light emitting means (for example, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display unit 25A, second reservation display unit 25B, general design reservation display unit 25C) prepared,
The first control means is capable of controlling light emission and extinguishing of the light emitting means, and outputs a specific route notification execution command for starting the promotion notification in the notification means in accordance with light emission control of the specific route corresponding light emitting unit. While performing control to transmit (for example, the processing of Sa46 and Sa47 of the game control main processing CPU103 shown in FIG. 9, S302 and S303 of the big hit opening pre-processing shown in FIG. In addition to performing command transmission settings, a part for lighting the right-handed display section 25D), along with extinguishing control of the specific route corresponding light emitting section, transmits a specific route notification execution command for ending the promotion notification in the notification means (For example, the CPU 103 performs S196 and S197 of the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 17, S316a and S316b of the big hit end processing shown in FIG. 19, S251 and S252 of the small hit end processing shown in FIG. In processing, the transmission setting of the right-handed notification LED extinguishing command is performed, and the right-handed display unit 25D is turned off)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission state of the specific route corresponding light emitting unit and the promotion notification by the notification means are linked, the promotion notification by the notification means can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
Based on the reception of the restoration command notifying that the gaming state has been restored from the first control means, control is performed to display the promotion display together with the restoration display on the display means (for example, in Modification 1 As shown, the effect control CPU 120 displays the power failure recovery screen and the right hitting notification image on the effect display device based on the game state specified from the power failure recovery designation command received by the CPU 103)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since there is no need to provide a separate command for displaying the promotion display on the display means, an increase in the number of commands can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The game medium can change between a first state (for example, closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize, and a second state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can win more easily than the first state. A variable winning device (for example, a first special variable winning ball device 7A and a second special variable winning ball device 7B) provided on a specific path;
Game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value based on the fact that the game medium has won the variable winning device (for example, the CPU 103 performs prize ball processing (S12) in the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10). part to execute) and
with
The first control means can control the variable winning device to the second state in the advantageous state, and when the gaming state restored by the first control means is the advantageous state, the variable winning It is possible to display a display indicating that the device changes to the second state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of S625 of the power failure recovery screen display process shown in FIG. 27, so that the effect display device 5 The part that displays the image while the prize mouth is open)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the game state is restored, the player can be made to recognize that the variable winning device changes to the second state in which the game medium can be won, thereby reducing the occurrence of disadvantages for the player. can do.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
Abnormality determination means capable of determining an abnormality corresponding to a plurality of types of events with different priorities (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes an abnormality determination process for determining the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 12) ,
When an abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means, if the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being notified, the notification is terminated and the determined abnormality is notified. Abnormal notification means (for example, in S407 of the main side error processing, if an error with a higher priority than the error being notified is determined, if the game stop flag is not set, an error with a higher priority By transmitting the specified command to the effect control board 12, in the error notification process executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, the error notification of the error with the high priority is replaced with the already executed error notification. the part to be executed instead of
Based on the fact that the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means, the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 prohibits the shooting of the game ball in S411 to control the state corresponding to the determined abnormality, and the game is stopped. part) and
with
When the state controlled by the state control means is a predetermined state (for example, a game stop state in which a game stop flag is set), a new event corresponding to the abnormality occurs. , regardless of the priority of the abnormality, the notification of the abnormality that triggered the control of the predetermined state is continued (for example, in S407 of the main side error processing, an error with a higher priority than the error being notified is When the game stop flag is set when it is determined, by not transmitting the error designation command of the error with high priority to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 The part that continues the notification of the error that is already being executed without executing the error notification of the error with high priority)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent difficulty in confirming the event that triggered the control to the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The second control means can display a plurality of options (for example, as shown in FIG. 33(B) as a modification 2, the effect display device 5 can output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the jackpot game. The part that displays multiple options for each BGM),
Control execution means for ending the display of the plurality of options and executing control according to the selected option when one of the plurality of options is selected (for example, a modified As shown in Example 2, the display of the image shown in FIG. , a portion where an image is displayed as a jackpot game effect on the effect display device 5 and BGM corresponding to the determined option is output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The control execution means executes control according to a predetermined option out of the plurality of options when the power supply is restarted when the power supply is stopped during the display of the plurality of options (for example, As shown in Modified Example 2, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in a state in which which BGM is to be output has not yet been determined, power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 again. Then, among the options displayed in FIG. 33(B), one BGM (music C in the present modification 2) is determined as the BGM to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the determined BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (the part that starts the output of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when power supply is stopped while a plurality of options are displayed, when power supply is resumed regardless of which option is selected from the plurality of options, Since the control according to the predetermined option is executed, it is possible to reduce the processing.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to means C1 to means C4 below. Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that displays information (base value) regarding the number of hit balls (the number of hit balls, the number of out balls) and the number of winning balls, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-118314. Are known. However, there is a risk of displaying inaccurate information when an out ball is not accurately detected, for example. In view of this point, it is desired to provide a gaming machine that can prevent incorrect information from being displayed.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A game machine (e.g., pachinko machine, slot machine, etc.) capable of executing a game and controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state, variable probability state, time saving state, etc.) for the player,
Detecting means (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 136, 140, etc.) capable of detecting game media (for example, the game area 9010, etc.) used in the game;
a signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136);
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, etc.);
Abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, CPU 90103 etc. that executes the error notification process in FIG. 137);
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 906B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 9050A to 9050D that become the general winning areas, and the big winning hole a payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.;
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( For example, the number of hit balls, etc.) and the predetermined information ( For example, an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 140, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 116, etc.),
When the abnormality detection means detects an abnormality in the reception state, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted).
According to this, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing inaccurate display.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display mode of the information display means is changed (for example, a display mode as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139). , etc.).
According to this, it is possible to confirm without providing a new display means.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The abnormality detection means can detect disconnection of the signal line (for example, it can detect by monitoring a signal input from the out ball detector 90710),
The detection of disconnection of the signal line can be notified to the outside (for example, game effect lamp 909, speakers 908L and 908R, card unit display device, call lamp device, hall computer, etc.).
According to this, it is possible to recognize without performing the door opening operation.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C3,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit that can be placed on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 140(B)).
This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions according to means B1 to means B9 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decoration pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
In a specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area (1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning), a predetermined condition (effective starting winning to the first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening, reach and a production execution means (production control CPU 90120) for executing a specific production (specific production F (forecasting announcement production), specific production G (varying result announcement production)) when the state establishment) is established. It is a game machine (Pachinko game machine 901 of the 47th presentation mode to the 49th presentation mode).
According to this, it is possible to arouse interest in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and the specific effect is executed after the game medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to increase interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Execution of a notification effect for executing a notification effect to identifiably notify that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area (one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning to the general winning opening). The gaming machine is characterized by further comprising means.
According to this, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as a notification effect for identifiably informing that the state after the game medium has entered, the player can check whether or not a predetermined specific period has passed since the game medium entered the general winning area. and an effect in which it is easy for the player to grasp whether or not a predetermined specific period has passed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect in which a sound effect is output for a relatively short period (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general prize area, and as the latter effect, the general prize area is output. There is an effect in which the character is continuously displayed on the image display device until a predetermined specific period (for example, one minute) elapses immediately after the game medium enters the stage.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B2,
The notification effect is a effect that indicates whether or not it is the specific period (the specific period (character display period) differs depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, the interest in the game can be enhanced until the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period differs depending on the mode of the notification effect (the display period when character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display period when character C appears is 1 minute). duration is 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, interest can be improved by making the player pay attention to the mode of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to means B4 may be, for example, as follows.
First, based on the entry of the game medium into the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU90120), among a plurality of predetermined specific periods (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes) Select any one of the specific periods, determine the effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 905) based on the selected specific period, and display the notification effect (character is displayed during the specific period display) is executed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, the display of character A) is displayed more than when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is preferable to make the determined ratio high. Further, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, character B display) is displayed more than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is preferable to make the determined ratio high.
In addition, when the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond one to one (1 minute for character A, 2 minutes for character B, and 3 minutes for character C) ), the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) determines one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes based on the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. , it is preferable to execute the notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4,
The variable display means displays a starting condition based on the entry of a game medium into the starting winning area (a game ball wins a prize in the first starting winning hole when the number of first reserved memories has not reached the upper limit value (effective starting winning ), and when the number of second reserved memories has not reached the upper limit value, the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning port (effective start winning)) is established, the start condition (It is controlled to the jackpot game state and the variable display of the special game is not executed) is established, and the variable display is executed,
The effect executing means provides an advance notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (in the start prize winning storage display area 905H, it corresponds to the variable display game to be notified) A game machine (a pachinko game machine 901 of the 47th and 49th performance modes) characterized in that a pending change performance of changing a display part from a normal mode to a special mode) is executed as the specific performance.
According to this, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area is triggered by giving notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied, thereby generating an interest that the game medium does not enter the general winning area. It is possible to enhance interest from the time to the execution of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine of means B5,
Hold information corresponding to the variable display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed corresponding to the existence of the variable display game in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied) It further comprises a pending information display control means (effect control CPU 90120) for displaying the display part) on the display device (image display device 905),
Said advance notice effect is to give notice of the display result of the variable display corresponding to said reserved information depending on the mode of said reserved information (if the start winning judgment result designation command is a command to designate "big hit", the The display part corresponding to the command is changed from a normal mode (e.g. blue or red) to a special mode (e.g. gold) at a higher rate than the command specifying "miss"). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to heighten interest in announcing the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied, triggered by the entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
The effect execution means displays objects (characters A to C) on the display device to identifiably notify the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area Immediately after winning the prize, one of the characters A to C will appear) Execute the notification effect,
The advance notice effect is an effect that can be recognized by the player when the object changes the state of the reserved information (the displayed character performs some action, and the state of the display part corresponding to the reserved special game is displayed). is changed from a normal mode to a special mode).
According to this, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied can be suggested by the common object, and the game to the general winning area can be suggested. It is possible to further enhance interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific performance.
Specifically, by creating an effect in which the state of the pending information changes as the display state of the object changes (for example, a predetermined action), the player can recognize when the object changes the state of the pending information. Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific period (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period). be.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8,
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D),
The specific period differs depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered (when the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning is specified. It can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but if you win the 3rd general prize 50C or the 4th general prize gate 9050D, only 5 minutes from the general prize can be a specific period (only character C It is possible to appear)).
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B10 to B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decoration pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Action detection means (operation button 9030 and effect control CPU 90120) capable of detecting player actions,
After the game medium has entered the general winning area, when the action detection means detects the player's action (continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation), a specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo continuous effect) a game machine (a pachinko game machine 901 of the 50th to 53rd presentation modes) characterized by comprising a presentation execution means (a presentation control CPU 90120) capable of executing a notice presentation and a chance notice presentation. .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific performance is executed with the action of the player as a trigger, so that the excitement when the game medium enters the general winning area can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
A gaming machine of means B10,
The state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is identifiably notified (the button icon 904000 is incremented each time the general winning opening is won in the 50th and 51st presentation modes, the 52nd A character 904000a corresponding to the result of determination of the notice effect ("cut-in", "pseudo run", "chance eye") that can be executed each time a prize is won in the general prize-winning slot in the effect mode and the fifty-third effect mode is determined. 904000c display) is further provided with a notification effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing the notification effect.
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
The gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of action (continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for making the specific effect executable, the mode of the notification effect (“cut-in” character 904000a, “pseudo continuous” The game machine is characterized in that the character 904000b and the character 904000c of the "chance eye" are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of action enables execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
A game machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are multiple general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the rate at which the notification effect is executed differs (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning hole 9050A of the left game area 9010A or When winning the second general winning opening 9050B, it is notified at a higher rate than when winning the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the right game area 9010B). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B13,
There are multiple general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the mode of the notification effect differs (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning port 9050A or the second general winning port 9050B is won). If you do, it is possible to display either the "cut-in" character 904000a or the "simulated consecutive" character 904000b. Either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000c of "chance eye" can be displayed).
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B14,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the rate at which the notification effect is executed differs In the case (if you win the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left gaming area 9010A), if you win the general winning opening when the variable probability state or the time saving state (right gaming area 9010B first If you win 3 general prize gate 9050C or 4th general prize gate 9050D, you will be notified at a higher rate than)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately vary the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B15,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the mode of the notification effect differs (in the 51st effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, in the normal state, the characters 904000a of "cut in" and "pseudo The character 904000b of "continuation" can be displayed, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" and the character 904000c of "chance eye" can be displayed in the variable probability state or the time saving state.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately vary the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B16,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect when the predetermined action is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (in the fiftieth effect mode and the fifty-first effect mode, the general When the player wins two or more prizes in the prize-winning slot, the simulated consecutive notice effect becomes executable, and when the player wins three times or more in the general prize-winning slot, the chance notice effect becomes executable.
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B17,
There are multiple general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the execution ratio of the specific effect differs (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning port 9050A or the second general winning port 9050B In the case of winning, the advance notice effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case of winning the third general prize-winning port 9050C or the fourth general prize-winning port 9050D.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B18,
There are multiple general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the type of specific effect that can be executed differs (in the fifty-second effect mode and the fifty-third effect mode, the first general winning hole 9050A or the second general winning hole In the case of winning 9050B, either cut-in notice effect or pseudo consecutive notice effect can be executed, and in the case of winning the third general prize opening 9050C or the fourth general prize opening 9050D, the cut-in notice effect is performed. and chance eye notice production can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B19,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the execution ratio of the specific effect differs (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, when winning the general winning slot in the normal state ( If you win the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B in the left game area 9010A), if you win the general winning opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state (the third general winning opening in the right game area 9010B When winning the winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D) A notification is made to enable execution of a specific effect at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately vary the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B20,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the type of specific effect that can be executed differs (in the 51st effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, cut-in notice effect and pseudo-continuous effect are performed in the normal state). Either of the notice effects can be executed, and either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed when the variable probability state or the time saving state)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately vary the interests according to the state of the game.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B22 to means B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decoration pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect),
When the variable display is being performed (within the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being performed, within the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being performed or determined to be performed), the general winning area and when the variable display is not executed (within the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed and it is also decided to execute it). A gaming machine (pachinko with 27th performance mode to 30th performance mode) characterized in that the rate at which the specific performance is executed differs depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area during the period during which the game is not performed). gaming machine 901).
According to this, the execution ratio of the specific performance is different between when the variable display is executed and when the variable display is not executed, thereby increasing interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. can be done.

The gaming machine of means B23 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is further provided. ,
A gaming machine (a pachinko game machine 901 of the 27th presentation mode and the 29th presentation mode) characterized in that the specific presentation is a presentation not related to the display result of the variable display (specific presentation C: point giving presentation). be.
According to this, even when the variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is further provided. ,
The specific effect is a effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed. The game machine (Pachinko game machine 901 of the 28th presentation mode and the 30th presentation mode) is characterized in that the game is not executed when a game medium enters the .
According to this, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decoration pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect),
When the variable display is being performed (within the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being performed, within the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being performed or determined to be performed), the general winning area and when the variable display is not executed (within the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed and it is also decided to execute it). A gaming machine characterized in that a different specific effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area during a period during which a game medium is not played (a pachinko game machine 901 of the 31st effect mode and the 32nd effect mode). ).
According to this, the different specific effects are different between when the variable display is performed and when the variable display is not performed, so that it is possible to increase interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. .

The gaming machine of means B26 is
A gaming machine of means B25,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is further provided. ,
When the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect) is executed as the specific effect,
When a game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is not being executed, an effect unrelated to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect) is executed as the specific effect. It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 31st production mode and the 32nd production mode).
According to this, when the variable display is performed, it is possible to further enhance interest when the game medium enters the general prize area, and even when the variable display is not performed, the general prize area is displayed. It is possible to appropriately enhance interest when a game medium enters the game.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B26 (27th presentation mode to 32nd presentation mode pachinko gaming machine 901),
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs (for example, when winning the general winning slot, the special game The division of whether or not is being executed, the division of the number of pending memories at the time of winning to the general winning mouth, furthermore, the game state at the time of winning to the general winning mouth is the normal state, or the probability variable state or time saving state Specific effects are executed at different rates depending on the classification, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B27 (27th presentation mode to 32nd presentation mode pachinko gaming machine 901),
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, a different specific effect is executed (for example, a special game is executed when the general winning slot is won). The classification of whether or not there is, the classification of the number of pending memories when winning a prize to the general winning mouth, and whether the game state at the time of winning a prize to the general winning mouth is a normal state, or a variable state or a time saving state Depending on the classification, etc., different types of specific effects are executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to means B29 to means B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 66), a winning rate to a starting winning port in a game machine is calculated, and characters wearing clothes of different colors are selected according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine has been proposed that executes a presentation display to be displayed. However, it is necessary not only to simply display the information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information more visible. The inventions relating to means B29 to B39 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to facilitate the visual recognition of information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B29 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which game media (game balls) can enter. hand,
Information capable of displaying entry information related to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of wins in the general prize pool, the number of wins in the first start prize pool, the number of wins in the second start prize pool, etc.) Display means (image display device 905) is provided,
The information display means displays effect information different from the entry information (for example, decorative patterns and fourth patterns) in areas where the visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as shown in FIG. 75, each prize opening is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α where the number of prizes won is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B30 is
A gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the entry information regardless of the form of the performance information (as shown in FIG. Regardless of whether or not is variably displayed, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α (The number of prizes displayed can be updated according to the number of prizes won in each prize slot.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized regardless of the aspect of the effect information.

The invention according to means B31 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which game media (game balls) can enter. hand,
Error detection means (anomaly detection sensor group 9026) for detecting errors (for example, magnetic anomalies, vibration anomalies, radio anomalies, etc.);
Information capable of displaying entry information related to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of wins in the general prize pool, the number of wins in the first start prize pool, the number of wins in the second start prize pool, etc.) and a display means (image display device 905),
The information display means displays the error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error in an area where the visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIGS. is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α where the number of wins is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B32 is
A gaming machine of means B31,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as shown in FIG. 76, regardless of whether an error message is , the number of prizes won to the first start prize gate, the number of prizes won to the second start prize gate, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and according to the wins to each prize gate, can update the number of winnings
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which game media (game balls) can enter. hand,
Information capable of displaying entry information related to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of wins in the general prize pool, the number of wins in the first start prize pool, the number of wins in the second start prize pool, etc.) Display means (image display device 905) is provided,
The information display means displays the display result of the variable display executed based on the entry of the game medium into the starting area (for example, the display result of the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) or the fourth symbol) as the entry information. A gaming machine characterized by displaying in an area where the visibility of is not hindered (second area β different from first area α where the number of winnings to each winning hole is displayed, as illustrated in FIG. 75) is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B34 is
The gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the variable display is performed (as illustrated in FIG. 75, regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable Regardless of whether the 4th pattern is variably displayed, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening, etc. is displayed in the first area α It is possible to update the number of prizes displayed according to the number of prizes won in each prize slot.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the variable display is being performed.

The invention according to means B35 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B34,
operable operation means (operation button 9030);
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means according to the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. 38, based on the setting by the operation button 9030, and an effect control CPU 90120) for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the approach information.

The invention according to means B36 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B35,
Operation means (operation button 9030) that can be operated by the player;
Aggregation period setting means for setting the aggregation period of the entry information according to the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. 79, production control CPU 90120 for setting the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 9030); The game machine is characterized by further comprising
According to this, it is possible to set the tallying period according to the judgment of the player.

The invention according to means B37 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B36,
A game state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling the game state (jackpot game state, probability variable state, and time saving state, or low base state and high base state, etc.) is further provided,
The information display means can display the entry information according to the game state (as shown in FIG. 78, the number of wins in the low base state and the number of wins in the high base state can be displayed separately. is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information corresponding to the game state.

The invention according to means B38 is
A gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for executing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on entry of the game medium into the starting area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B) is further provided,
The game state control means includes a low frequency state (low base state in which high opening control for the second start winning opening is not executed) and a high frequency state (second 2 It is possible to control to a high base state where high opening control targeting the start winning opening is executed),
The information display means displays the entry information relating to the period during which the low frequency state is controlled (such as the number of general wins in the low base status illustrated in FIG. 78) and the entry information relating to the period during which the high frequency state is controlled. This gaming machine is characterized by being able to display information (such as the number of general wins in the high base state illustrated in FIG. 78).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the low frequency state and the entry information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B38,
Notification is made when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as exemplified in FIG. 79, notification is made when the number of prizes won per set counting period is less than a predetermined reference value). This gaming machine is characterized by further comprising notification means (image display device 905) for displaying a message.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the approach information satisfies the predetermined condition.

Further, the mode for carrying out the invention described later includes inventions related to means B40 and means B41 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 65 and 66), when the start of a game is accepted by a player entering a password, the winning rate to the start winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated. , a gaming machine has been proposed which executes a performance display in which characters wearing clothes of different colors are displayed according to the calculated winning rate. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk at the game parlor) to confirm the information regarding the entry of the game medium into the entry area such as the starting prize winning opening. The inventions relating to means B40 and B41 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to allow only persons other than the players (for example, game parlor staff) to confirm the information.

The invention according to means B40 is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko) having an entry area (e.g., first start winning port, second starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which game media (e.g., game balls) can enter gaming machine 901),
Giving means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a game value (for example, a prize ball) based on the game medium passing through the entry area;
Specific operation means (for example, mode changeover switch 9031, reset button) that cannot be operated by the player;
Reporting means ( For example, an image display device 905),
The notification means notifies the accumulated value information based on the operation of the specific operation means (for example, when the mode changeover switch 9031 is operated to enter the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device. 905)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk at the game parlor) can confirm the information.

It should be noted that the ``specific operation means that cannot be operated by the player'' may be any means that can be operated by, for example, a store clerk in a game arcade or an inspector/inspector of a game machine.

The invention according to means B41 is
A gaming machine of means B40,
Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU90120) for executing the effect related to the game is provided,
The notifying means notifies the cumulative value information in a mode corresponding to the mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means (for example, a character appearing during the advance notice effect or the ready-to-win effect receives the information of the prize number management table. Display and output voice to read aloud)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of game machine the information is from the mode of notification.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B42 to means B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-73187 (Fig. 100), when a game ball enters a normal winning hole (general winning area), the number of winning balls is counted up and displayed on a production display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a game player is notified that a memory-in-memory recurrence will occur when the counted number reaches the number of execution opportunities determined by lottery. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-73187, when a game ball enters a normal winning hole, the number of entered balls is uniformly displayed by counting up by one. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. The inventions relating to the means B42 to B51 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to enhance the interest of the game in the gaming machine having the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decorative pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (a specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is increased stepwise from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 10) is provided in which the performance mode is changed in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Executable specific production execution means (production control CPU 90120),
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (such as the period during which the variable display of special symbols is executed and the period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed), the specified The rate at which the rendering mode changes in the rendering is different (the rate at which the rendering for increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 by one level is different).
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 with 33rd presentation mode to 37th presentation mode).
According to this, the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance differs according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. can be done.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
A gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative patterns) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variable pattern designation command received by the production control CPU 90120). and
Depending on the remaining period of variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the remaining time until derivation display of the fixed decoration pattern is 10 seconds or more and less than 10 seconds) , a game machine (a pachinko game machine 901 of a thirty-fourth mode of presentation) characterized in that the ratio of changes in the mode of presentation in the specific presentation is different.
According to this, the interest of the specific performance can be further enhanced by changing the rate of change of the performance mode in the specific performance according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area.

In the gaming machine of means B43,
Remaining period of the variable display that is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (remaining time until derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern is 10 seconds or more, and less than 10 seconds) ) and the display result (jackpot pattern, losing pattern) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is made different. can be Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbols being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance may be different (for example, when the pattern is a big hit, the rate is changed at a high rate, and when the pattern is lost, the rate is changed at a lower rate). .

The gaming machine of means B44 is
A game machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 905) displays the start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed after the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special pattern, variable display of the second special pattern, variable display of decorative patterns) is executed based on the establishment of ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern);
A notice effect (forecast notice effect) that foretells that the display result of the variable display will become a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (the variable display that is the target of the predictive notice effect is executed). It further comprises a notice effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) to be executed before),
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display targeted for the announcement effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning hole designation command, the target of the pre-reading announcement effect A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance differs according to the classification of the number of times of variable display until the variable display is executed (a pachinko machine with the 35th performance mode) 901).
According to this, according to the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area to when the variable display targeted for the advance notice effect is executed, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B44,
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display targeted for the announcement effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning hole designation command, the target of the pre-reading announcement effect The division of the number of times of variable display until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display to be the target of the advance notice effect (big hit pattern, losing pattern). You may make it the ratio which a mode changes differs. Specifically, the number of times of variable display until the variable display targeted for the advance notice effect (the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice) is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range. (for example, 2 times or less), depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different (high when it becomes a big hit pattern) It may be changed at a rate and changed at a lower rate in the case of a lost pattern).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B44,
A reach effect execution means (performance control CPU 90120) for executing a reach effect along with the variable display (variable display of the first special pattern, variable display of the second special pattern, variable display of the decorative pattern) is further provided,
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the ready-to-win effect is executed (when the game ball enters the general winning hole before the ready-to-win state is established in the ready-to-win fluctuation), and after the ready-to-win effect is executed When game media enter the general winning area (the timing at which the game ball enters the general winning hole is after the ready-to-win state is established in the ready-to-win fluctuation), the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different. This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 36th presentation mode).
According to this, the performance mode in the specific performance changes depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the ready-to-win performance is executed or when the game medium enters the general winning area after the ready-to-win performance is executed. By having different ratios, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B45,
Having a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 of the thirty-seventh presentation mode) is characterized in that the rate at which the presentation mode changes in the specific presentation differs depending on whether the game ball wins in any of the above.
According to this, by varying the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance according to the general winning area into which the game medium has entered, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decorative pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (a specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is increased stepwise from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 10) is provided in which the performance mode is changed in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Executable specific production execution means (production control CPU 90120),
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (such as the period during which the variable display of special symbols is executed and the period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed), the specified In the production, the stage in which the production mode changes is different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is different).
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 with 38th presentation mode to 42nd presentation mode).
According to this, the step of changing the performance mode in the specific performance differs according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. can be done.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
A gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative patterns) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variable pattern designation command received by the production control CPU 90120). and
Depending on the remaining period of variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the remaining time until derivation display of the fixed decoration pattern is 10 seconds or more and less than 10 seconds) , a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 of a thirty-ninth presentation mode) characterized in that the stages in which the presentation mode changes in the specific presentation are different.
According to this, the stages in which the performance mode changes in the specific performance are different according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the interest of the specific performance can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48,
Remaining period of the variable display that is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (remaining time until derivation display of the fixed decoration pattern is 10 seconds or more, and less than 10 seconds) ) and the display result (jackpot pattern, losing pattern) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the step of changing the production mode in the specific production is made different. can be Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbols being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the stages in which the production mode changes in the specific production are different (for example, when the pattern is a big hit, the number of stages changes, and when the pattern is lost, the number of stages changes less than that). good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A game machine of means B47 or means B48,
The variable display means (image display device 905) displays the start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed after the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special pattern, variable display of the second special pattern, variable display of the decoration pattern) is executed based on the establishment of ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern);
A notice effect (forecast notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display will become a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is established (the variable display to be the target of the predictive notice effect is executed). It further comprises a notice effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) to be executed before),
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display targeted for the announcement effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning hole designation command, the target of the pre-reading announcement effect A gaming machine characterized in that the stage in which the presentation mode changes in the specific presentation differs according to the classification of the number of times of variable display until the variable display is executed (a pachinko machine with a 40th presentation mode) 901).
According to this, according to the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area to when the variable display targeted for the advance notice effect is executed, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B49,
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display targeted for the announcement effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning hole designation command, the target of the pre-reading announcement effect The division of the number of times of variable display until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display to be the target of the advance notice effect (big hit pattern, losing pattern). The stage at which the aspect changes may be different. Specifically, when the game media enters the general winning area, the number of times of variable display until the variable display targeted for the notice effect (the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice) is executed is within a predetermined range. (for example, 2 times or less), depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect, the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different (for example, in the case of a big hit pattern, The number of steps may be changed in a large number, and if the pattern is lost, the number of steps may be changed in a smaller number.

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B49,
It further comprises a reach effect execution means (performance control CPU 90120) that executes a reach effect with the variable display (variable display of the first special pattern, variable display of the second special pattern, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the ready-to-win effect is executed (when the game ball enters the general winning hole before the ready-to-win state is established in the ready-to-win fluctuation), and after the ready-to-win effect is executed When the game medium enters the general prize winning area (when the game ball enters the general prize winning hole after the ready-to-win state is established in the ready-to-win fluctuation), the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 41st presentation mode).
According to this, the performance mode in the specific performance changes depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the ready-to-win performance is executed or the game medium enters the general winning area after the ready-to-win performance is executed. By having different stages, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of means B51 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B50,
Having a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D The game machine (Pachinko game machine 901 of the 42nd production form) is characterized in that the stage of changing the production mode in the specific production is different in the case where the game ball wins in any of the above.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect by changing the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect according to the general winning area into which the game medium has entered.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B52 to means B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-73187 (Fig. 100), when a game ball enters a normal winning hole (general winning area), the number of winning balls is counted up and displayed on a production display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a game player is notified that a memory-in-memory recurrence will occur when the counted number reaches the number of execution opportunities determined by lottery. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, an effect (count-up display) is executed each time a game ball enters a normal winning hole. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, it is necessary to know when game media do not enter the general winning area, but this is not taken into consideration in the prior art. The inventions relating to means B52 to B56 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to make it possible to grasp that game media do not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decoration pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When the number of game media entering the general winning area during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number If the number of prizes won in the general prize gate is less than 3 in the 30 minutes during which it is detected that it is inside, etc.), a specific effect (an image that imitates the shape of the general prize gate and a message saying "There are no general prizes." and a specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying a notification image 902200 including characters on an image display device 905.
According to this, it is possible for the player and the game hall to know that the number of game media entering the general winning area is smaller than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
A gaming machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means (effect for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the game hall setting and the player setting in the display setting table control CPU 90120),
a store clerk operation receiving means (display changeover switch 9032) for receiving a setting operation by a store clerk;
When the setting operation is received by the store clerk operation receiving means, the setting means performs a setting to permit execution of the specific effect (specific effect E based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032 (notifying that there is no general winning). , announcing that the number of general prizes is small))
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53,
Storage means (winning number counter area formed in RAM 90122) for storing the number of game media entering the general winning area (number of winnings in 30 minutes),
The game machine is characterized in that the number of entries stored in the storage means is not retained when power is cut off (the value in the winning number counter area is erased when power is cut off).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control burden for keeping the number of entries in memory at the time of power failure.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B54,
Depending on the state of the gaming machine, the ratio at which the specific effect is executed differs (for example, the specific effect E is executed at different ratios between the normal state and the variable probability state or time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B55,
A different specific effect is executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed in different modes in the case of the normal state and in the case of the variable probability state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific presentation.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B57 to means B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 116), the number of prize balls (given value) obtained by entering the game medium into the big winning opening during the execution of the jackpot game, A gaming machine has been proposed that performs an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (given value) obtained by entering a game medium into a normal winning slot (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intention of the game hall or the player is not reflected as to whether or not to execute an effect when a game medium enters the general winning area. The inventions relating to the means B57 to B64 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and reflect the intentions of the game hall and the players regarding whether or not to execute an effect when the game medium enters the general winning area. We aim to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decoration pattern) when a game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (displaying information of the winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switching switch 9031, setting of the display switching switch 9032 and operation button 9030 Based on the settings, increase the number of objects each time a game ball enters a general winning slot, display the number of winnings in a general winning slot in a jackpot game state, specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look ahead a notification means (image display device 905) capable of executing an advance notice effect);
Setting means (a mode changeover switch 9031, a display changeover switch 9032 and an operation button 9030) for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means. .
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
A gaming machine of means B57,
further comprising clerk operation receiving means (mode changeover switch 9031, display changeover switch 9032) for receiving setting operation by the clerk;
The setting means performs setting to permit the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the store clerk operation receiving means (based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, when the maintenance mode is in the winning number management table). Based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032, the number of objects is increased each time a game ball enters the general winning opening, The number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is displayed, Specific effect A : Makes it possible to execute a variable result notice effect, Specific effect B: Makes it possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58,
further comprising a player operation receiving means for receiving a setting operation by a player;
The setting means performs setting to permit execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the player operation receiving means (general winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 9030 during the demonstration screen display). increase the number of objects each time a game ball enters the game, display the number of prizes won in the general winning opening in the jackpot game state based on the setting by the operation button 9030 during the demonstration screen display, specific effect A: variable result notice effect can be executed, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B59,
The specific effect notifies the number of game media entering the general winning area during a predetermined period (the period during which the jackpot game state is controlled) so as to be identifiable (the number of winning balls entering the big winning opening and the number of winning balls). and the number of winning balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls are separately displayed).
According to this, it is possible to improve the playability in the predetermined period.

The gaming machine of means B61 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B60,
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect mode and the 26th effect mode) when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B61,
The specific effect executing means executes a different specific effect (executes a twenty-fifth effect mode and a twenty-sixth effect mode) according to the number of game media entering the general winning area. is.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B62,
The specific effect is a effect for identifiably reporting the number of game media entering the general winning area (increase the number of objects each time a game ball enters the general winning hole),
When a game is not played in the gaming machine (variable display of decorative patterns is not executed, and a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a large winning opening winning command are received for a predetermined period) Effect control CPU 90120 for judging the end of the game based on the fact that there is no game end), and identifiably informs that the number of game media entering the general winning area is 0 in the specific effect (game end judgment is performed If so, erase all the objects corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winnings displayed on the image display device 905)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B63,
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that display information corresponding to the number of game media entering the general winning area (objects corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is displayed.
According to this, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game media entering the general winning area.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to means B65 to means B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 92), when a game ball wins the general winning hole during a big hit, one aspect of the starting memory display changes, and the starting memory A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is "hit" or "lose". In a gaming machine having such a general winning slot, there is room for further enhancing interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning slot. The inventions relating to means B65 to B77 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to increase the interest in games in gaming machines having general winning slots.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decoration pattern) when a game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 90120) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first game state (normal state), and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second game state (probability variable or time saving state) , The ratio of executing the specific production is different (in the normal state, the specific production is executed at a higher rate than the probability variable or time saving state)
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 with first to fourth presentation modes) characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decoration pattern) when a game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 90120) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result preview effect, specific effect B: pre-reading preview effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first game state (normal state), and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second game state (probability variable or time saving state) , Execute different specific effects (execute specific effect A in normal state, execute specific effect B in probability variable or time saving state)
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 of the fifth presentation mode to the twelfth presentation mode).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
A gaming machine of means B65 or means B66 (second presentation mode to fourth presentation mode, 10th presentation mode to 12th presentation mode pachinko gaming machine 901),
In the first game state (normal state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches the first number of entries,
In the case of the second game state (probability variable or time saving state), the specific performance is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second number of entries different from the first number of entries. It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decoration pattern) when a game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 90120) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of reach fluctuation is established), and when the game medium enters the general winning area during the second period (period other than reach fluctuation or before the reach state of reach fluctuation is established) The ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area (after the state of reach fluctuation is established, it is specified at a higher rate than before the reach state of reach fluctuation or during periods other than reach fluctuation performance is performed)
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 with 13th presentation mode to 16th presentation mode).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decoration pattern) when a game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
Giving means (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 90120) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result preview effect, specific effect B: pre-reading preview effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of reach fluctuation is established), and when the game medium enters the general winning area during the second period (period other than reach fluctuation or before the reach state of reach fluctuation is established) When the game medium enters the general winning area, a different specific effect is executed (after the ready-to-win state is established, the specific effect A is executed, and before the ready-to-win state is established, the specific effect B is executed. After the ready-to-win state is established, Specific production A is executed, and specific production B is executed during a period other than reach fluctuation or before the reach state of reach fluctuation is established)
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 with 17th presentation mode to 24th presentation mode).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70 is
A game machine of means B68 or means B69 (14th production mode to 16th production form, 22nd production form to 24th production form pachinko game machine 901),
during the first period (after establishment of the reach state of the reach fluctuation), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches the first number of entries;
During the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the attainment of the reach state of the reach fluctuation), the number of entry of game media into the general winning area is a second entry number different from the first entry number. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when the game is played.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B70 A pachinko machine 901),
Having a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a game medium enters each of the plurality of general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B71 (5th production form to 12th production form, 17th production form to 24th production form Pachinko game machine 901),
The variable display means displays a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the jackpot game state is displayed after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decoration pattern) is variably displayed based on the establishment of
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern) )and,
Before the start condition is established, pre-start determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (control to the big win game state based on the random number for big win determination extracted at the time of start winning) It further comprises a game control microcomputer 90100) that determines whether to
The specific effect execution means is
Based on the pre-start determination, an effect (pre-reading forewarning effect) that foretells control to the advantageous state is performed before the start condition of the target variable display is established (the specific effect (specific effect B)). It is a gaming machine characterized by executing as
According to this, it is possible to make the player more interested in the specific effect by announcing that the control will be in an advantageous state before the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 901 with first to twenty-fourth presentation modes),
The variable display means displays a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the jackpot game state is displayed after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decoration pattern) is variably displayed based on the establishment of
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern) )and,
When the start condition is satisfied, the start time determination means for determining the start time to determine whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state (when starting variable display of special symbols, the stored jackpot determination means A game control microcomputer 90100) that determines whether or not to control to a big hit game state based on random numbers,
The specific effect execution means is
The game machine is characterized in that, based on the determination at the time of start, an effect (fluctuation result announcement effect) for notifying that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, it is possible to make the player more interested in the specific performance by notifying that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B73 (third production form, 15th production form pachinko gaming machine 901),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution ratio of the specific effect differs according to the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B74 (11th production form, 23rd production form pachinko game machine 901),
The gaming machine is characterized in that different specific effects are executed according to the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B75 (Pachinko game machine 901 of fourth production mode, eighth production form, 12th production form, 16th production form, 20th production form, 24th production form) and
Having a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order in which the game media enter the plurality of general prize areas in a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the order in which the game media enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B76 (Pachinko game machine 901 of fourth production mode, eighth production form, 12th production form, 16th production form, 20th production form, 24th production form) and
Having other winning areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning area,
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on a specific order of entry of the game medium into the general prize area and entry of the game medium into the other prize area. .
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the order in which the game media enter the general winning area and the other winning areas.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions according to means A1 to means A9 shown below. Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-117576, a game machine has been proposed in which a number of game nails and a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of game balls are provided on the surface of the game board. In this type of game machine, the rate at which the winning openings and passage gates pass varies depending on the adjustment of the game pegs provided on the game board, and the game ball payout rate is designed by adjusting the game pegs. Sometimes. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the game machine what kind of adjustments were made to the game nails, etc., it was difficult to determine whether or not the payout rate was as designed. The inventions according to means A1 to A9 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine that allows recognition of what kind of adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.)
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 906B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the special variable winning ball device 907 that becomes the big winning hole, the normal winning ball device 906A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the general winning area and A gaming machine in which game values (for example, game balls, slot machine medals, etc.) are paid out by winning into general winning slots 9050A to 9050D, displaying a predetermined symbol combination on the activated line of the slot machine, etc. is provided on a main board (for example, the main board 9011, the main board of a slot machine, etc.) that controls the game, and predetermined information related to the game value to be paid out (for example, the combination (relation ratio), the role ratio, the machine allocation, etc.) ) can be displayed (for example, a display monitor 9029, a slot machine display monitor, etc.), and can be released by opening a door frame (for example, a game machine frame 903, a slot machine door frame, etc.) In response to the occurrence of an error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 98), the display of the predetermined information is restricted (for example, the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) ratio is stopped). It is characterized by
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made. In addition, when the error is canceled along with the opening of the door frame, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A game machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko game machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
When the above errors (for example, door opening required errors such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 98) occur, the above restrictions (for example, stopping the display of consecutive roles (consecutive ratios) ratios) are performed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A game machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko game machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
When the door frame (eg, game machine frame 903, slot machine door frame, etc.) is opened after the error (eg, error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 98 requiring door opening) has occurred Then, the restriction (for example, stopping the display of the consecutive (continuous ratio) ratio) is performed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A3 (eg, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 9029, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is operated under the condition that the above-mentioned errors (for example, door opening required errors such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 98) do not occur. , the predetermined information (for example, role combination (relation ratio), role ratio, machine ratio, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A4 (eg, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.),
After canceling the error (for example, the door opening required error such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 98), a predetermined time (for example, the measurement time t measured by the measurement timer in the display limit confirmation process of FIG. 96, etc.) ) has passed, the predetermined information (for example, the combination of roles (consecutive ratio), the ratio of roles, the machine ratio, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A5 (eg, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 9029, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) displays a plurality of the predetermined information (for example, the combination of roles (relation ratio), the role ratio, the machine allocation, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). It is possible to switch and display each.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of members.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any game machine selected from means A1 to A6 (for example, pachinko game machine 901, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 9029, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) displays the predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls (for example, the number of winning balls) as the predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls is 60000).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any game machine selected from means A1 to A7 (for example, pachinko game machine 901, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, slot machine display monitor, etc.) displays information for each predetermined unit (for example, The short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), short-term winning combination ratio) and cumulative information (for example, cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), cumulative winning combination ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to compare the information for each predetermined unit and the total information.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A8 (eg, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 9029, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is provided on the main board (for example, the main board 9011, the main board of the slot machine, etc.), and is crimped in a board case (for example, the board case). 90201, 202).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

1 is a front view showing a gaming machine in an embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table (for first special symbol), (C) is a big hit type determination table (for second special symbol) (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table, (E) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various big hits. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd special variable winning ball apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power failure detection processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of main-side error processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various errors, their priorities, cancellation conditions, and the like; It is a figure which shows the alerting|reporting aspect of an error. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small-hit completion|finish process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of right hitting information processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error notification processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power failure restoration screen display process; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode when recovery from vibration detection 1 error detection is performed in a normal state; It is a figure which shows the display mode at the time of recovering from vibration detection 1 error detection in a small-hit game state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the game control main processing in the modified example 1. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of right-handed informing processing in modified example 1. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of a power failure recovery screen display process in Modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode and output mode of BGM at the time of restoring from the power failure during BGM selection of a big-hit game. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in another embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (a) A diagram showing winning number information managed by a winning number management table, and (b) a diagram showing winning number information managed by a display control table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the game hall setting and the player setting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a display setting is performed by an operation button that can be operated by a player; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of displaying an object corresponding to winning a prize in a general winning slot; It is an explanatory diagram for displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each production|presentation performed according to a variation pattern. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change result notice effect and a look-ahead notice effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of first to fourth presentation modes; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of fifth to eighth presentation modes; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the ninth to twelfth presentation modes; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the thirteenth to sixteenth presentation modes; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the seventeenth to twentieth presentation modes; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the 21st to 24th presentation modes; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th production|presentation form and the 26th production|presentation form. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing winning number information managed by a winning number management table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of point provision production|presentation. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the twenty-seventh to thirtieth presentation modes; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st production|presentation form and the 32nd production|presentation form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of gauge update production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the 33rd to 36th presentation modes; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the thirty-seventh presentation mode; It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the thirty-eighth effect mode to the forty-first effect mode. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the forty-second presentation mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a non-winning notification effect; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the forty-third to forty-sixth presentation modes; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing appearance ratios of characters A to C in the forty-seventh to forty-ninth presentation modes; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing display periods of characters A to C in the forty-seventh to forty-ninth presentation modes; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the forty-seventh to forty-ninth presentation modes; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending|holding change production|presentation in the 47th production|presentation form. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change result foretelling effect in the forty-eighth effect mode; It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each production|presentation in the 47th production|presentation form and the 48th production|presentation form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th production|presentation form and the 51st production|presentation form. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of repeated hit operation notification and cut-in announcement effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each pattern stop operation alerting|reporting, and pseudo|simulated consecutive notice production|effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each pattern stop operation alerting|reporting, and pseudo|simulated consecutive notice production|effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all-patterns stop operation alerting|reporting, and a chance eye announcement production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all-patterns stop operation alerting|reporting, and a chance eye announcement production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd production|presentation form and the 53rd production|presentation form. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution ratio of each advance notice effect for each general winning opening in the fifty-second effect mode and the fifty-third effect mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of display areas for each effect information in the setting for displaying information on the number of prizes won; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode of an error message; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of display areas for each effect information in a setting in which winning number information is not displayed; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of winning number information items that can be displayed in the first area; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a method for setting an aggregation period; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the display area of each effect information in the setting of displaying the number-of-wins information and the setting of not displaying the number-of-wins information. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the display area of each effect information in the setting of displaying the number-of-wins information and the setting of not displaying the number-of-wins information. It is a configuration diagram showing in more detail various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. (A) is a simplified front view of a main board, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board. 4 is a diagram showing a memory map of a built-in ROM area in a CPU; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a used area program area and a non-used area program area in an internal ROM area; FIG. 4 is a table showing call instructions used in the built-in ROM area; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another configuration of a used area program area and a non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area; (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, and (C) is the processing procedure of the third interrupt processing. is a diagram conceptually showing the . (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer; It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the role consecutive (continuous ratio) and role ratio related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a role consecutive (repeated ratio) and a role ratio display control process. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display restriction confirmation processing; 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display switching control processing; It is a table showing the types of errors in the gaming machine. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow and the monitor display state when the third interrupt process is executed, and (B) is the signal flow and the monitor when the first interrupt process is executed. 4 is a time chart showing the relationship between display states such as . It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of each LED of the display part in a display monitor. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a main board on which display monitors are arranged in a first display monitor arrangement mode; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is released from the outer frame; (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a wing-shaped variable winning ball device; FIG. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball device provided in the game board from the front. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing examples of counters for the total number of winning balls, the number of winning ball balls, and the number of consecutive winning ball balls; (A) to (D) are front views showing simplified modifications of the main board. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram related to performance information; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram related to performance information; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special figure processing (special figure process processing). 4 is a flowchart showing an example of state control processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a big winning opening determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining state change switching waiting time and the like; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining state change switching waiting time and the like; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of state control processing; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining state change switching waiting time and the like; It is a configuration example of an out-sphere detector. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error notification processing; It is an example of the display mode which notifies an error. It is an example of the display mode which notifies an error. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of performance information update processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of performance information update processing; It is an example of the arrangement position of an out-sphere detector.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment. In the following embodiments, in the description of each step of the flowchart, for example, "step S1" will be abbreviated as "S1".

An embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. The front surface of the game board 2 is covered with a glass door frame 3a provided in a game machine frame (base frame) 3 so as to be openable and closable. These glass door frames 3a can be opened by the staff of the game hall inserting an open key into the open lock K to unlock it, and general players cannot open the glass door frames 3a. It's like

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), etc., and each of them is identified by a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information). A certain special design (also referred to as "special design") is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". do. In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Instead, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LEDs may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

A plurality of types of special symbols are attached with corresponding symbol numbers. As an example, the numbers "0" to "9" are assigned symbol numbers "0" to "9", and the symbol indicating "-" is assigned a symbol number "10". All you have to do is Hereinafter, the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display 4B are also called "second special symbols". .

Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed in, for example, a square shape. In addition, the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type can be different. Also, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may each be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, "00" to "99". . In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are illustrated in a square shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display device is not limited to this. Each segment constituting the indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B may be arranged irregularly.

A performance display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (effect display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the production display device 5, corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, three In the production design display area that becomes a plurality of variable display parts, production designs (also called decoration designs), which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified respectively, are variably displayed.

As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, in response to the start of either the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, Variation of the performance symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started in the “left”, “middle” and “right” performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. After that, when the fixed special symbols are stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the performance display device 5 , the fixed effect pattern (final stop pattern), which is the result of the variable display of the effect pattern, is stopped and displayed.

Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the variable display using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A, or the variable display using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B In synchronism with , variable display of a plurality of types of performance symbols each identifiable is performed, and derivation display (or simply referred to as "derivation") of a fixed performance symbol as a result of variable display is performed. It should be noted that, for example, deriving and displaying various display patterns such as special patterns and performance patterns means stopping display of identification information such as performance patterns (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) to end the variable display. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the performance symbols to the derivation display of the fixed performance symbols as the result of the variable display, the variation speed of the performance symbols becomes "0" and the performance The pattern is displayed stationary, and the display may be in a state of, for example, slightly shaking or expanding or contracting. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed definitively, the player can recognize that the fluctuation of the effect pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. becomes. Incidentally, the temporary stop display may include the complete stop display of the production pattern for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion and contraction.

For example, nine kinds of patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "9" or Chinese Numbers, English letters, 9 character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, letters or symbols and character images may be used. , symbols such as letters, or any other decorative image representing any figure). A corresponding pattern number is attached to each of the production patterns. For example, the symbol numbers "1" to "9" are attached to the alphanumeric characters "1" to "9", respectively. Incidentally, the performance symbols are not limited to 9 types, and may be any number of types (for example, 8 types, 10 types, etc.) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as big hit combinations and losing combinations can be configured.

After the variable display of the performance symbols is started, until the determined performance symbols that are the result of the variable display are derived and displayed, the respective performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are displayed. In , for example, a scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow from small to large in order from top to bottom. Then, the effect symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" performance symbol display area 5L), the symbols are displayed by scrolling from the larger symbol number to the smaller symbol number. When the performance symbol with the smallest number is displayed, the performance symbol with the maximum symbol number may be displayed subsequently.

In the display area of the effect display device 5, a first reserved memory display area 5D and a second reserved memory display area 5U are arranged. In the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U, a reserved memory display is performed to identifiably display the reserved number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol. Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol is performed by passing the game ball through the first starting winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the start winning by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display of special symbols and effect symbols has been established, but the variable display based on the previously established start condition is being executed, and the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state, etc., when the starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display is not established, the variable display corresponding to the established starting condition is held. The reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 5D is a reserved memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and in the second reserved memory display area 5U The pending memory display is a pending memory display generated based on the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening.

In this embodiment, the suspension memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening is displayed in round white (the suspension displayed in the first suspension memory display area 5D). memory display), and the suspension memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening is a round white display (the suspension displayed in the second suspension memory display area 5U memory display). In addition, based on the holding memory display generated based on the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening The display mode of the pending memory display generated by the event may be a different display mode.

In addition, in the upper right of the effect display device 5, by lighting during a big win game or after a specific big win game, during a small win game, the game ball is moved to the right game area 10R described later by operating the hitting ball operation handle. A right hitting informing LED 30 is provided for informing the player to hit out. In addition, lighting and extinguishing control of the right-handed informing LED 30 of the present embodiment is executed by the effect control CPU 120 via the LED control board 14 .

In the example shown in FIG. 1, along with the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U, on the top of the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B, the number of special figure reserved memories is emitted. A first pending display portion 25A and a second pending display portion 25B are provided for displaying so as to be identifiable. 25 A of 1st reservation|reservation display parts display the number of 1st special figure reservation memories so that they can be specified. The second reservation display unit 25B displays the number of second special figure reservation storages so as to be identifiable. The number of first special figure pending storage is the number of memories in which the execution of the variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The number of second special figure pending storage is the number of memories in which the execution of the variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The number of reserved memories of the variable display obtained by adding the number of first special figure reserved memories and the number of second special figure reserved memories is also called the total number of reserved memories. When simply referring to the "special figure reserved memory number", it usually refers to the concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number, but in particular, some of these (for example A concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total number of reserved memory).

Furthermore, above the first holding display portion 25A, by lighting (lighting) during a big win game or after a specific big win game is over, during a small win game, the game ball is operated by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle. A right-handed display section 25D is provided for notifying the player to hit the game area 10R. The right-handed display section 25D of this embodiment is turned on and off by the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103).

That is, the right-handed display unit 25D includes the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol display unit 4B, the normal symbol display unit 20, the first reservation display unit 25A, the second reservation display unit 25B, and the normal design reservation display unit. Like 25C, it is a part of light emitting means capable of informing information about games by light emission. In addition, both the right-handed informing LED 30 and the right-handed display section 25D in this embodiment are arranged closer to the right game area 10R than the left game area 10L. Therefore, when the game state is the time saving state, the big win game state, or the small win game state, the player can visually recognize the right hitting notification LED 30 and the right hitting display part 25D without moving the viewpoint. It has become.

General winning openings 50A and 50D are provided on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5, and general winning openings 50B and 50C are provided below the general winning opening 50A. Further, below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is operated by the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A normal electric accessory having a movable wing piece that changes to an expanded open state is provided to form a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, the movable wing is in a vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning hole. It becomes a normal open state that is difficult to open. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the game ball passes through the second starting winning hole by tilting control in which the movable wing is in the tilting position ( It will be in an expanded open state that makes it easy to enter. In addition, although the normal variable winning ball device 6B can enter the second start winning hole even when it is in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter than in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be lower. Alternatively, the normal variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening by closing the second starting winning opening in the normal open state, for example. In this way, the second starting winning port as the second starting area has an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and a normal open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). change to

A game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2, for example. A game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting hole switch 22B shown in FIG. 2, for example. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the number of the first special figure pending storage is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4"), the first starting condition is met. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure pending storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4"), the second starting condition is met. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the first starting port switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the second starting port switch 22B. may be the same number as each other, or may be different numbers.

In addition, the game balls that have passed through (entered) the general winning openings 50A, 50B, 50C, and 50D are the first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, It is detected by the fourth general prize winning port switch 26D, and a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

A special variable winning ball unit 7 in which a first special variable winning ball device 7A and a second special variable winning ball device 7B are integrated is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. there is

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 7 will be described. In the following description, the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front are used as a reference.

As shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball unit 7 has a first special variable winning ball device 7A on the left side and a second special variable winning ball device 7B on the right side. In addition, a cover body (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 7, and the player can touch the special variable winning ball unit through the cover body. 7, especially the game balls flowing down in the second special variable winning ball device 7B can be visually recognized.

The first special variable prize winning ball device 7A has a first big prize winning opening door 701 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the first big winning opening door 701 changes between an open state and a closed state. A first big prize opening is formed. The first big winning hole is formed in the left part of the special variable winning ball unit 7 so as to open upward. The first big prize winning opening door 701 is slidable in the longitudinal direction between a closing position for closing the first big winning opening and an open position for opening the first big winning opening by driving the solenoid 82 . ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 7A, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the first big winning hole door 701 opens the first big winning hole, and the game ball passes through (enters) the first big winning hole. make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the first big prize winning port door 701 closes the first big prize winning port to prevent the game ball from passing through (entering) the first big prize winning port. In this way, the first big winning hole changes between an open state that is advantageous for the player through which game balls can easily pass (enter) and a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player because game balls cannot pass through (enter). Instead of the closed state in which the game balls cannot pass through (enter) the first large prize winning port, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game balls are difficult to pass through (enter) the first large prize winning port is provided. may

A game ball that has passed (entered) the first big prize hole passes through a first count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first big prize hole, and is detected by the first count switch 23. . A game ball that has passed through the first count switch 23 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 . Based on the game balls being detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through (enters) the first big winning hole that is in the open state in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first special winning ball device 7A opens the first big winning hole, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole, and the second state becomes advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the first special winning ball device 7A closes the first big winning hole, it is impossible or difficult to get a game ball through (enter) the first big winning hole. , resulting in a first state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, most of the game balls that do not enter the first big winning hole are guided to the normal variable winning ball device 6B by an obstruction nail or the like (not shown). 2 It is designed to win the starting prize mouth.

The second special variable winning ball device 7B shown in FIG. 8 is formed to protrude upward from the first special variable winning ball device 7A, and is a second large ball device driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 2). A winning opening door 711 is provided, and a second winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state is formed by the second winning opening door 711 . The second big winning hole is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 7B. The second large prize winning port door 711 operates between a second state (open state) in which the second large prize winning port is opened by driving the solenoid 83 and a first state (closed state) in which the second large prize winning port is closed. It is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction.

In the second special variable winning ball device 7B, when the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 is in the ON state, the second large winning opening door 711 opens the second large winning opening, and the game ball moves to the second Make it easier to pass through (enter) the second prize-winning opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 is in the OFF state, the second large winning opening door 711 closes the second large winning opening, and the game ball passes through the second large winning opening. (enter) to make impossible. In this way, the second big winning hole changes between an open state in which game balls can easily pass (enter) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which game balls cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. Instead of the closed state in which game balls cannot pass (enter) the second large prize-winning port, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which game balls are difficult to pass through (enter) the second large prize-winning port is provided. may

A game ball passing through (entering) the second big winning hole passes through the second count switch 24A installed in the second big winning hole shown in FIG. 8, and is detected by the second count switch 24A. . Based on the game balls being detected by the second count switch 24A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through (enters) the second large winning opening that is in the open state in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, other normal winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening More prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) the mouth. Therefore, when the second special winning ball device 7B opens the second big winning hole, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole, which is the first state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning ball device 7B closes the second big winning hole, it is impossible or difficult to get a game ball through (enter) the second big winning hole. , resulting in a first state that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 8, inside the second special variable winning ball device 7B, there is formed a game ball flow path 750 through which game balls that have passed through the second big winning hole can flow down. The game ball flow path 750 consists of a main path 740 (an area along the solid line in FIG. 8) through which a game ball that has passed through the second big prize hole can pass, and a branch path 741 (a dotted line in FIG. 8) branching from the main path 740. area). A backflow prevention member 730 , which will be described later, is arranged between the main path 740 and the branch path 741 . Further, upstream of the backflow prevention member 730 in the main path 740, there is provided a first branch 742 where the branch path 741 branches off from the main path 740, and downstream of the backflow prevention member 730 in the main path 740. , a second branch portion 743 where the branch path 741 branches off from the main path 740 is provided. That is, the game ball flowing down the main path 740 can move from the first branch portion 742 or the second branch portion 743 to the branch path 741 side.

A third count switch 24B through which the game ball can pass is installed at the most downstream part of the main path 740, and the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B, thereby detected. A game ball that has passed through the third count switch 24B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 . Also, the game ball that has reached the most downstream part of the branch path 741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and passes through the fourth count switch 24C. , is detected by the fourth counting switch 24C.

In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 24B during the small winning game to be described later, the game state after the small winning game is finished is controlled to the big winning game state. . Therefore, during the period in which the second big winning opening door 711 is open during the small winning game, the course of the game ball is changed by applying vibration or the like, and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 24B. In such a case, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed to stop the game in such a case.

On the downstream side of the first branch portion 742 in the main path 740, there is provided a regulation member 721 that regulates and permits the game ball to flow down toward the third count switch 24B. The regulating member 721 protrudes into the main path 740 by driving the solenoid 85 (see FIG. 2), thereby regulating the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch 24B on the main path 740, and It is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction between an allowable state in which the game ball is allowed to flow down toward the third count switch 24B on the main path 740 by retreating from the main path 740.例文帳に追加

The upper portion of the regulating member 721 is formed as a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided on the main path 740 so as to form a downward inclination of a predetermined angle toward the branch path 741 when viewed from the front. . Therefore, when the game ball flows down the main path 740 when the regulation member 721 is in the regulation state, the game ball moves along the flat surface formed on the upper part of the regulation member 721 and passes through the second branch portion 743. It is guided to flow down toward the fork 741 via.

Between the main path 740 and the branch path 741, a backflow prevention member 730 is rotatably supported by a pivot shaft facing in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 730 consists of a plate-shaped member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot, and when a game ball guided by the flat surface of the regulating member 721 contacts from the main path 740 side, a branch path from the main path 740 side. It can be moved (rotated) so that it can pass to the 741 side. Specifically, it is rotatable between an allowable position inclined to open the space between the main path 740 and the branch path 741 and a restricted position closing the space between the main path 740 and the branch path 741. is provided. A rib 801 projecting forward is provided above the regulating member 721, and the backflow prevention member 730 abuts against the rib 801 in the regulating position from the counterclockwise direction in a front view.

In addition, the backflow prevention member 730 is usually placed at the regulated position due to its own weight, and at the regulated position, the game ball guided on the flat surface contacts from the main path 740 side (right side in front view). , is pushed by the game ball and rotates clockwise in a front view with the allowable position as the upper limit.

At this time, the vertical width dimension between the tip portion of the backflow prevention member 730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the main path provided with the third count switch 24B Movement of the game ball from the 740 side to the branch path 741 side provided with the fourth count switch 24C is permitted. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 730 is in the regulating position, even if the game ball comes into contact with the branch path 741 side (left side in front view), the backflow prevention is prevented by the backflow prevention member 730 contacting the rib 801. Rotation of the member 730 in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. At this time, the width dimension between the tip portion of the backflow prevention member 730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the game ball, so the fourth count switch 24C is provided. Movement of the game ball from the side of the branch path 741 to the side of the main path 740 provided with the third count switch 24B is surely regulated.

Returning to FIG. 1, a normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, is composed of 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs, etc., and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. The normal pattern (also referred to as "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display).

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol reservation display portion 25C is provided. The normal pattern reservation display unit 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern reservation memory number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 by emitting light. The passage gate 41 is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the special variable winning ball unit 7. As shown in FIG. A gate switch 21, which will be described later, is built in the passage gate 41. As shown in FIG.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Also, a winning opening other than the winning openings described above may be provided. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect LED 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. Decoration LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball unit 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided at the lower right position of the game machine frame 3 . For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the repulsive force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball-hitting operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping the driving of the firing motor of the ball-hitting device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided. At the bottom of the game machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. - 特許庁

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by a player is attached to a lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). ing.

On the upper plate member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). is provided.

In the present embodiment, the game area is divided into a left game area 10L and a right game area 10R on the left side of the center decoration frame surrounding the performance display device 5 arranged substantially in the center of the game area. A game ball hit weakly (left-handed) by the hitting ball operation handle flows down the left game area 10L, and a game ball hit hard (right-handed) by the hitting ball operation handle flows down the right game area 10R. It's like

In addition, the game ball flowing down the left game area 10L can win the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the general winning openings 50A to 50C, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 10R Variable winning ball device 6B, first special variable winning ball device 7A, second special variable winning ball device 7B and general winning hole 50D are provided with a large number of obstructing nails so that they can win a prize and pass through the passage gate 41. is set. That is, in the case of left-handed hitting, the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B cannot win a prize, and the passage gate 41 cannot be passed.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko game machine 1, the normal symbol display device 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbols such that the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the normal pattern start condition is satisfied, for example, the normal pattern display is based on the establishment of the normal pattern start condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the end of the fluctuation display of the previous normal pattern. The variable display of the normal map by the device 20 is started.

In this normal pattern fluctuation display, after the normal pattern fluctuation is started, when a predetermined time, which is the normal pattern fluctuation time, elapses, the fixed normal pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern hit pattern) such as a number indicating "7" is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the variable display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern hit". On the other hand, if a normal pattern other than a normal pattern per pattern, such as a number or symbol other than a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal pattern, the fluctuation display result of the normal pattern will be "normal pattern lost". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal pattern is "normal pattern hit", the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B are moved to the tilted position, and expansion open control (tilt control) is performed. After a predetermined time has elapsed, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position.

After the first start condition is satisfied, such as when the game ball passing through (entering) the first start prize opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. When the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special game or the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In addition, the second starting condition is established by detecting the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Afterwards, when the second start condition is established by, for example, completion of the variable display of the previous special symbol or the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbols is started, when the variation display time as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbols are displayed. Determined special symbols (results of variable display) are derived and displayed as variable display results. At this time, if a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special pattern (small-hit pattern) different from the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "minor win" as a predetermined display result. Also, if a special symbol different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it will be "lost".

After the variation display result in the variation display of the special figure becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. be. After the variation display result in the variation display of the special figure becomes "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state as a special game state different from the big win game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as an example, the special symbols representing the numbers ``3'', ``5'' and ``7'' are used as the big win symbols, and the special symbols indicating the number ``2'' are used as the small winning symbols. A special pattern indicating the sign of "-" is used as a lost pattern. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, and a losing symbol in the variation display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the variation display of the special symbols by the second special symbol display device 4B. You may make it become a design, and it may be made for a common special design to become a jackpot design, a small hit design, and a losing design in the fluctuation display of both special designs.

After the big win pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed special pattern in the variable display of the special symbols and becomes "big win" as the specific display result, in the big win game state, the first big prize winning port door of the first special variable winning ball device 7A. 701 opens the first big winning hole until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are produced. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 7A is placed in the second state (open state) advantageous to the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first big winning slot, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15", "10", or "5"). In addition, even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball does not win the first prize-winning opening). good too.

In addition, after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbols and becomes a "small winning" as a specific display result, in the small winning game state, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is displayed. The 2nd prize winning opening door 711 opens the second prize winning opening during a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 10) are produced. state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 7B enters a second state (open state) that is advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the second big winning opening door 711 is set to open once in the small winning game state until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses. It is not limited, and may be opened multiple times in the small winning game state.

In the small winning game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning hole passes through the third count switch 24B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B. It becomes a "jackpot" based on (V prize jackpot). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state based on the detection of passage of the game ball through the third count switch 24B. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning hole in the small winning game state passes through the fourth count switch 24C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, it does not become a "big win". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the game state to the jackpot game state based on the detection of passage of the game ball through the fourth count switch 24C.

Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big win game state based on the passage of the third count switch 24B, the second big prize winning opening door 711 of the second special variable winning ball device 7B is closed for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second big winning hole is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 7B is placed in a second state (open state) that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled to the second state when it is controlled to the big win game state based on the passage of the third count switch 24B. The invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 7A may be controlled to the second state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big prize hole, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15" or "5"). It should be noted that even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, even if the round game is terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not enter the second big winning hole, etc.) good.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state in the present embodiment, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in a predetermined variation frequency range (for example, 100 times or 20 times) and time reduction control is not performed It is controlled either with the normal state. By performing the time saving control, the variation display time (special figure variation time) in the variation display of the special figure is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a jackpot game state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after power-on) is executed) is performed. In the time saving control, the variation display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) after the end of the big hit game state, and the variation display result becomes "big hit", in the small hit game state The game may be terminated when one of the conditions of passing the game ball through the third count switch 24B is established first.

When the time saving control is performed, control to shorten the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special figure by the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B than in the normal state, Control to shorten the fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display of the normal pattern by the symbol display device 20 than in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display of the normal pattern each time is "per normal pattern" Control to improve the probability of becoming more than in the normal state, and the tilting control time for tilting control of the movable wing pieces in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the change display result being "normal hit" Increase the possibility that the second start condition will be satisfied by making it easier for the game ball to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than the time and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. Thus, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also called high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a combination of a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged open state is increased compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily satisfied, and the variable display of the special symbol can be executed frequently. , the time until the next variation display result becomes a "big win" or "minor win" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control is executable is also called the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed. A game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, and a terminal board (information output board) 16 as shown in FIG. ing. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 mainly has a function of setting random numbers used in the special game, a function of inputting signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions, and a control board on the sub side consisting of the effect control board 12 etc. , a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal, and a function of outputting various types of information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, thereby performing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. and control the variable display of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal design display device 20 to control the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display device 20 It also has control functions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 includes a magnetic sensor 60 for detecting fraud by a magnet, a radio wave sensor 70 for detecting fraud by electromagnetic waves, and a game ball by vibrating the pachinko game machine 1 . A vibration sensor 80 for detecting fraud such as changing the course, a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and the opening of the first big winning entrance door 701 1st big prize winning gate door sensor 91 for detecting, 2nd big prize winning gate door sensor 92 for detecting opening of second big winning gate door 711, game ball provided on the route flowing down to the lower tray Various sensors such as a full tank sensor 93 for detecting that the bottom tray is full of game balls, and a ball exhaustion sensor 94 for detecting that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls is less than a predetermined number. is connected, and it also has a function to determine the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It should be noted that although the bulb-out sensor 94 is shown as being directly connected to the main board 11 in FIG. there is

The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that captures detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and signals from the game control microcomputer 100. An output circuit 111 for transmitting solenoid drive signals to the solenoids 81 to 83 and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 16 are mounted.

Note that the output circuit 111 is also connected to a controller 84 for driving the solenoid 85 . The controller 84 receives a start signal from the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 111 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and starts drive control of the solenoid 85 . By driving the solenoid 85 by the controller 84, the regulating member 721 repeats the regulating state and the allowing state every second regardless of the game state.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used for controlling the image display operation in the effect display device 5, an audio control command used for controlling audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect LED 9, It contains an LED control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the right-handed informing LED 30 and the like.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is an effect that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the effect display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and effect symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "big win" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". The command 8C02H is a third variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". The command 8C03H is a fourth variation display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small win A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small win B".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating stop (confirmation) of the variation of the performance symbols in the “left”, “middle” and “right” performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the performance display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by error notification processing (see FIG. 26), which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big winning game state or the small winning game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting hole switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. , It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is issued when a game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. Based on this, it is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the number of special figure pending storage in the first pending storage display area 5D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number in the second reserved storage display area 5U or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D100H is a V prize notification specifying command for notifying that the game ball has passed the third count switch 24B and the third count switch 24B has been turned on.

The command D200H is a power failure restoration designation command for designating display of a power failure restoration screen on the effect display device 5. FIG.

The command D301H is a right-handed informing LED lighting designation command for designating lighting of the right-handed informing LED 30 .

The command D302H is a right-handed informing LED extinguishing designation command that designates turning off the right-handed informing LED 30 .

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, Numerical data indicating each of the random number MR4 for determining the result of the display of the general pattern and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

FIG. 5 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the result of the variable display is "lost", the variable display is performed corresponding to each of the cases where the variable display mode of the production pattern is "non-reach" and the case where it is "reach". A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the production pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a "big hit variation pattern". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A normal reach variation pattern may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. . In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in the present embodiment, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed However, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the degree of expectation for the big hit becomes higher in the order of the variation display result of "big hit". In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc., the type of fluctuation pattern is determined first. Therefore, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern are provided. It is also possible to first determine the type of variation pattern from the random number value, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table shown in FIG. 6A, a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. Judgment table (for the second special symbol), in addition to the small hit type judgment table shown in FIG. A table (not shown), a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 6(A), when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, only the big win can be won, and no small win will occur.

Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, a big win occurs with the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and half of these judgment values correspond to small wins. By being set as a judgment value, when the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a small hit is won with a probability (percentage) of 50% (100/200). .

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big wins shown in FIG. Also, when MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. The "probability" shown in FIG. 6A indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. A table is separately provided, and determination of a big hit is performed by using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. In this way, the determination of the small hit may be performed using different tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second buffer.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is not won. However, a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big win may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small win, and the small win may be won.

FIGS. 6B and 6C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among these, FIG. 6(B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) is a table of In addition, FIG. 6(C) shows the case of determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). is a table.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the hit type determination random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6B and 6C, the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) is provided with three types of big hits from big win A to big win C. On the other hand, the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) is provided with only one kind of big hit, the big hit C. That is, the big win generated when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of three types of big wins from the big win A to the big win C, while when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Only the big hit C will be the big hit that occurs in .

FIG. 6D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a small win pattern, the type of the small win is set to a small hit A or a small win B based on the random number (MR2) for judging the type of the hit. This table is referenced to determine In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small winning game of the small winning A, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game of the big winning D is executed. When the game ball passes the third count switch 24B during the small winning game of the small winning B, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game of the big winning E is executed. It has become so. That is, these big wins D and E are not the big win types determined by the random number value MR2 for judging the winning type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball during any of the small wins A and B. is a jackpot type determined by whether or not has passed through the third count switch 24B.

Here, the jackpot types in this embodiment will be described using FIG. A big win B, a big win C, and a big win E for which time-saving control is executed after the big win game state is finished are set.

Out of these jackpots A to E, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot A, the time saving control is not executed.

The jackpot B is a jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, after the end of the big win game state of the big win B, the time saving control is executed until the special game is executed 20 times or until another big win occurs before the special game is executed 20 times.

The jackpot C is a jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, after the end of the big win game state of the big win C, the time saving control is executed until the special game is executed 100 times or until the big win occurs again before the special game is executed 100 times.

The jackpot D is a jackpot in which four rounds (so-called four rounds) are repeated to change the second jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot D, the time saving control is not executed.

The jackpot E is a jackpot in which 14 rounds (so-called 14 rounds) are repeated to change the second jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big win game state of the big win E, the time saving control is executed until the special game is executed 100 times or until another big win occurs before the special game is executed 100 times.

In addition, in the time saving state, a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state due to the increase in the probability of becoming a "normal hit". Therefore, in the time-saving state, there are cases where a big hit occurs as a result of the variation display of the second special symbol, and there are cases where a game ball wins V during a small win game, so a big win occurs, so the big win game state is normal. It becomes a so-called continuous state that tends to occur continuously without intervening the state.

In addition, in the time saving state after the jackpot B jackpot game ends, the number of special games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, so the ratio of the jackpot game state to occur continuously without going through the normal state (The sum of the ratio of occurrence of a big hit as a variable display result of the special game during 20 special games and the ratio of a game ball winning a V prize and a big win occurring) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time-saving state after the big win C and the big win E, the number of special-games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. The rate of occurrence (the sum of the rate of occurrence of a big hit as a variable display result of the special game during 100 special games and the rate of occurrence of a big hit when the game ball wins V) is set to almost 100%. .

In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. , four or less types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. , 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, the time saving control is not executed at the end of the big win game at a rate of 50%. Further, when the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends, the number of times of the special game for which the time-saving control is executed is determined to be 20 times at a rate higher than 100 times.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(C), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), all ranges (0 to 299) of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are big hits C , the number of times of the special game in which the time saving control is always executed after the end of the jackpot game is determined to be 100 times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6 (D), in the small hit type determination table, 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 is assigned to the small hit B. For this reason, when a V winning big hit occurs during a small winning game, the number of times of the special figure game in which the time saving control is executed after the big winning game ends at a rate of 75% is determined to be 100 times. At a rate of 25%, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, there is a variation pattern determination table for big hits that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is a "big hit", and a variation display result is a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value. In this embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of jackpot is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", and when the type of jackpot is "jackpot A". is assigned so that the super reach α is easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player thinks that the "jackpot B" or the "jackpot C" will be achieved. You can raise your expectations.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. In this embodiment, only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns may be provided as a small hit variation pattern. can be

In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss that is used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less, and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4. A loss variation pattern determination table B, a loss variation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8, and a high base state in which time saving control is performed A variation pattern determination table D for deviation used for the above is prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and furthermore, the fluctuation pattern (PA1 The fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the time of the variable display, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150, for example, as shown in FIG. there is The data holding area 150 for game control shown in FIG. A control timer setting section 153 , a game control counter setting section 154 and a game control buffer setting section 155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the normal prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the result of the variation display, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not yet started. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the result of the variation display, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

I / O 105 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. and an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 provides a production control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program, fixed data, etc., and a work area for the production control CPU 120. A RAM 122 that performs random number updating, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120. A circuit 124 and an I/O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 executes the production control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing processing for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts. At this time, the performance control CPU120 fixed data reading operation to read the fixed data from the ROM121, the performance control CPU120 writes various variable data to the RAM122 and temporarily stored variable data write operation, the performance control CPU120 to the RAM122 Variation data reading operation to read various variation data temporarily stored, effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of effect control board 12 via I / O 125, effect control CPU 120 I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120 , ROM 121 , and RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12 .

The production control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting video signals to the production display device 5, wiring for transmitting sound effect signals as information signals indicating sound number data to the audio control board 13, Wiring and the like for transmitting illumination signals as information signals indicating lamp data are connected to the LED control board 14 .

Incidentally, on the effect control board 12 side, similarly to the main board 11, for example, random numbers (also called effect random numbers) for determining the types of various effects such as advance notice effects are set.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 is used to control the production operation by various production devices (for example, the production display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect LED 9 and the decoration LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be executed, a display screen displayed in reporting various errors (abnormalities), a lighting mode of the game effect LED 9, an error notification pattern such as an output sound, etc. are stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The production control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, various production control patterns, and the like.

The effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the result of the special figure display. , It consists of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as production pattern fluctuation display operation, reach production, production display operation in re-lottery production, etc., or various production display operations not accompanied by production pattern fluctuation display. It is The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control contents of the effect operation to be the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice patterns for which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations to be executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents.

Among the special figure fluctuation time production control patterns, for example, a plurality of types of ready-to-win production control patterns in which the production mode in each ready-to-win production is different for each variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win production may be included.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a production control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the effect display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the effect display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, a starting winning buffer is set in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting section to display the reserved memory in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U. In the starting winning buffer, a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory is provided. In each storage area, data indicating whether or not there is a starting prize (specifically, "0" indicating no starting prize and "1" indicating that there is a starting prize) are stored. It should be noted that the data of these starting winning buffers, the reception of the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, and the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, production control described later It is updated in the pending display update process (S72, see FIG. 24) in the process processing, and the pending in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U based on the data of the start winning buffer after the update. The memory display is updated.

Specifically, when the first start winning designation command is received based on the start winning to the first start winning opening, a round white While the display is newly added, when the first fluctuation start command is received based on the fact that the fluctuation of the first special figure is newly started, the highest of the reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 5D A reserved display is made so that the upper (reserved memory that started winning first) white display is erased and the other white white displays are shifted in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward). to update. Similarly, when the second start winning designation command is received based on the start winning to the second start winning opening, a round white display is displayed in the reserved memory display in the second reserved memory display area 5U. While newly added, when the second fluctuation start command is received based on the fact that the fluctuation of the second special figure is newly started, the highest ( The holding display is updated so that the round white display of the holding memory that started winning first is erased, and the other round white displays are shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward direction). do.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 9, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process which is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then starts the game control main process after Sa1. do. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (Sa2), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (Sa3). After initialization of internal devices (initialization of CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are internal devices (internal peripheral circuits)) (Sa4), RAM 102 is made accessible. set (Sa5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (Sa6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing (Sa10 to Sa12).

If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether or not the processing of Sd2 and Sd3 in the power failure detection processing (see FIG. 11) described later is being executed, and whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area. (Sa7).

If backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (Sa8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in Sa8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated by the same process in the power failure detection process and stored. If the power supply is restored after an unexpected power outage or other power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) will be normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stoppage of the power supply, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 103 performs game state restoration processing (processing of Sa41 to Sa48) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply was stopped. Specifically, the head address of the setting table for backup stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (Sa41), and the contents of the setting table for backup are sequentially set in the work area (area within the RAM 102) (Sa42). The working area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set in the backup time setting table. By the processing of Sa41 and Sa42, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), and a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set. In addition, the CPU 103 specifies the game state at the time of the power failure from the backup data (Sa44), and the specified game state is either the time saving state, the small winning game state, or the big winning game state, that is, the game in the present embodiment. It is determined whether or not it is in a game state in which the ball is hit toward the right game area 10R (to be hit to the right) (Sa45).

If the gaming state specified from the backup data is either the time saving state, the small winning gaming state, or the big winning gaming state (Sa45; Y), the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the LED lighting designation command for hitting to the right (Sa46 ), the lighting of the right-handed display section 25D is started. Then, the transmission setting of the power interruption restoration designation command is performed (Sa48), and the process proceeds to Sa15. In addition, when the game state is a normal state in which the game ball is hit toward the left game area 10L (performs hitting to the left) (Sa45; N), only the processing of Sa48 is executed without executing the processing of Sa46 and Sa47. and proceed to Sa15. In addition, the right-handed informing LED lighting designation command set to be transmitted at Sa46 and the power failure recovery designation command set to be transmitted at Sa48 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process described later.

If the backup data is not stored (Sa7; N) or if the result of the parity check is not normal (Sa8; N), initialization processing is executed.

In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs RAM clearing (Sa10). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining per normal symbol) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized to In addition, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol per determination) may be left as it is. Also, the head address of the table set at initialization stored in the ROM 101 is set in the pointer (Sa11), and the contents of the table set at initialization are sequentially set in the work area (Sa12).

By the processing of Sa11 and Sa12, for example, a random number counter for normal design hit determination, a special design buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of winning balls, a special design process flag, etc. Selectively according to the control state, the initial value of the flag is set.

After executing Sa48 or Sa12, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 (Sa15). CPU103, for example, by executing the processing according to the random number circuit setting program, performs the setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

Then, at Sa16, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (Sa18) and initial value random number update processing (Sa19). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (Sa17), and the interrupt enabled state is set when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed. (Sa20). In this embodiment, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and a random number for determining whether or not to be a ready-to-win when it is not a big hit. Random number update processing is processing for updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value determines the initial value of the count value of the counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number for A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as a performance display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself). processing, or processing of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, also referred to as gaming device control processing), the count value of the normal per symbol determination random number is one cycle (normal per symbol determination random number After stepping by the number of numerical values between the minimum and maximum possible values, an initial value is set in the counter.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power failure detection process (S10). By executing a predetermined switch process, the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, the third Detection signals input from various switches such as the count switch 24B, the fourth count switch 24C, the first general winning slot switch 26A, the second general winning slot switch 26B, the third general winning slot switch 26C, and the fourth general winning slot switch 26D. state is determined (S11). Subsequently, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, the third count switch 24B, and the fourth count switch 24C. , 1st general winning slot switch 26A, 2nd general winning slot switch 26B, 3rd general winning slot switch 26C, 4th general winning slot switch 26D. (S12). After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (S15), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, and payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, is output (S16). .

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side is executed (S17). . After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (S18). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the display 4B, set the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball unit 7, and the like in accordance with a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S19). CPU103, by executing the normal symbol process processing, controls the display operation of the normal symbol display device 20 (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.), the variable display of normal symbols and the movement of the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It enables setting of the tilting operation of the wing.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit the control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control boards such as the effect control board 12 (S20). As an example of these, in the command control process, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the performance control command to the performance control board 12, the performance control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time by setting the predetermined control data to the output port of the performance control INT signal. By setting the state to the OFF state, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt permission state.

Hereinafter, the contents of various processes in the game control timer interrupt process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of power failure detection processing according to the present embodiment. In this power-off detection process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (Sd1). When there is no input of the power failure signal, the power failure detection process is terminated, and when there is an input of the power failure signal, the backup data is specified (Sd2), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data provided in the RAM 102. store in the area (Sd3). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (Sd4), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off. Since the power-off signal is continuously output when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, in the power-off detection process in this embodiment, after the check data is created (after Sd4 is executed), the loop process is started. By migrating, new backup data is not stored in the backup data storage area. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent new backup data from being normally stored in the backup data storage area due to a further drop in the power supply voltage while new backup data is being stored.

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the main side error processing (S15) of this embodiment. In the main-side error processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the abnormality notification timer is operating, which indicates that the abnormality notification is being executed for a predetermined period on the performance control board 12 side (S401).

If the abnormality notification timer is not operating (S401; N), the process proceeds to S402. Further, when the abnormality notification timer is in operation (S401; Y), the process proceeds to S420, the abnormality notification timer is decremented by -1, and whether or not the abnormality notification timer after the subtraction has timed up is determined. Determine (S421).

If the anomaly informing timer has not timed up (S421; N), the process proceeds to S402. On the other hand, when the abnormality notification timer is up (S421; Y), after clearing the abnormality notification FORAG (S422), the process proceeds to S402.

In S402, abnormality determination processing for determining the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 13 is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the mode of determining errors (abnormalities) shown in FIG. 13 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be appropriately set according to the model and specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, 1 to 15 errors (abnormalities) are set, and in the abnormality determination process, it is possible to determine the occurrence of each of these 1 to 15 errors (abnormalities). .

As shown in FIG. 13, each error (abnormality) is assigned a priority order, and in principle, an error (abnormality) with a higher priority is preferentially notified.

These errors include, for example, an error caused by a short-circuit abnormality in a switch power supply that supplies power to a device, such as a switch common short-circuit error with a priority of "1", detection of electromagnetic waves by the radio wave sensor 70, and magnetic force by the magnetic sensor 60. An error with a very high possibility of fraud such as the detection of , an error with a possibility of device (switch) failure or fraud such as detection abnormality of the first count switch 23 or the second count switch 24A, There is no possibility of fraud such as a full tank error or a ball running out error, but there are errors that hinder the progress of the game.

In addition, each error has a condition for canceling the error that has occurred, and for errors with a relatively high priority, "power off" is the main cancellation condition, For an error (abnormality) with a relatively low priority, the release condition is that a certain period of time elapses or the error state is released.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, errors (abnormalities) include errors (abnormalities) that are controlled to a predetermined state, which is a game stop state, and errors (abnormalities) that are not controlled to a predetermined state, which is a game stop state. , An error with a relatively high priority is an error (abnormality) that is controlled in the game stop state, and an error (abnormality) with a relatively low priority is an error (abnormality) that is not controlled in the game stop state. .

It should be noted that some of these errors are different errors depending on the timing of detection, even if they are caused by the same sensor. For example, as an error when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80, when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 during operation of the first special variable winning ball device 7A or the second special variable winning ball device 7B is determined as a vibration detection 1 error with a high priority of "6", and is controlled to a game stop state until the power is turned off, whereas the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7A When abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 during operation of the ball device 7B, it is determined as a vibration detection 2 error with a low priority of "11", and after 60 seconds without being controlled to the game stop state. The error is now cleared.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, each error (abnormality) has its own security signal output mode. A security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 in a manner corresponding to . In addition, the security signal has a relatively high priority, and an error (abnormality) that causes the game to stop is output until the power is turned off. , is output in a certain period of time after error determination, or is not output. In addition, regarding the "unauthorized prize winning error" with priority "10", the security signal is output not only until the power is turned off, but also for a certain period of time (4 minutes in this embodiment) after the power is turned on again. is set to

Thus, in the abnormality determination process of this embodiment, the CPU 103 controls the magnetic sensor 60, the radio wave sensor 70, the vibration sensor 80, the door open sensor 90, the first prize gate door sensor 91, the second The detection state of the 2nd prize winning opening door sensor 92, the full tank sensor 93, the ball out sensor 94, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball of the second start opening switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24A Each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 13 is determined based on the above.

After executing the abnormality determination process of S402, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the abnormality determination process (S403). End the main side error processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred (S403; Y), it is determined whether or not an abnormality notification in-progress flag indicating that an abnormality notification is being performed has been set, that is, whether an abnormality has already been notified. (S404).

If the anomaly informing flag is not set (S404; N), the procedure proceeds to S410, in which an anomaly informing flag and an anomaly informing timer are set, and an error (abnormality) for starting the informing is stored. Proceed to S411.

In addition, in the abnormality notification timer, for example, if the error (abnormality) that starts notification is a vibration detection 2 error, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds is set, and the error (abnormality) that starts notification is the start port. 2 If it is an abnormal prize winning error, a timer value corresponding to 300 seconds is set. However, if the error (abnormality) that initiates the notification is an error that corresponds to the cancellation condition of "power off", the abnormality notification timer is set to "0". As a result, in S401, it is determined that the anomaly informing timer is not in operation, so that the anomaly informing flag that has been set remains set until the power is turned off. In other words, for errors corresponding to these "power off" cancellation conditions, the error notification continues until the power is turned off, so the error notification flag is not cleared until the power is turned off. It's like In the case of an abnormal prize ball error determined that the number of abnormal prize balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game is not controlled to stop the game, so the error is notified while the game is possible.

If the anomaly reporting flag is set (S404; Y), the anomaly being reported is specified from the anomaly reporting data stored in S410 (S405), and the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is determined. is the same as the reported error (abnormality) (S406).

If the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is the same as the error (abnormality) being notified (S406; Y), the main side error processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not the same as the error (abnormality) being reported (S406; N), the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is higher than the error (abnormality) being reported. It is determined whether or not there is a priority error (abnormality) (S407). If the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not an error (abnormality) with a higher priority than the error (abnormality) being reported (S407; N), the main side error processing is terminated. Therefore, if the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not an error (abnormality) with a higher priority than the error (abnormality) being notified, the process of S413 is executed and the error designation command is sent to the effect control board 12. Since there is no transmission, the notification of the error (abnormality) is not executed, and the notification of the error (abnormality) being notified is continued.

On the other hand, if the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is an error (abnormality) with a higher priority than the error (abnormality) being notified (S407; Y), the game stop state, which is a predetermined state, is further indicated. It is determined whether or not the game stop flag is set (S408).

If the game stop flag is set (S408; Y), that is, if the game is in the stopped state, the main side error processing is terminated. Therefore, when the game is stopped, even if an error (abnormality) having a higher priority than the error (abnormality) being reported is determined in S402, the processing of S413 and the processing of S414 may be executed. Since no new error designation command is sent to the effect control board 12, the notification of the error (abnormality) being notified is continued, and the output of the security signal being output changes ( There is no need to turn the signal ON/OFF.

On the other hand, if the game stop flag is not set (S408; N), that is, if the game is not in the stopped state, the process proceeds to S409, resets the abnormality notification timer, and reports an error (abnormality). is updated and stored. If the error (abnormality) that is different from the error (abnormality) being reported is determined in S402 to be an error that corresponds to the cancellation condition of "power off", as in the case of S410 described above, the abnormality By setting the notifying timer to "0", the anomaly notifying flag is set until the power is turned off.

Then, it is determined whether or not the error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) being reported is an error corresponding to game stop (S411), and if it is not an error corresponding to game stop ( In S411; N), the process proceeds to S413 without going through S412. If the error corresponds to the game stop (S411; Y), the shooting control board is set to stop shooting, disabling the shooting of the game ball from the shot ball shooting device, and the game stop flag is set. (S412) and proceeds to S413.

In S413, it is determined in S402, setting to transmit to the production control board 12 an error designation command that designates the occurrence of an error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) being notified, and then the error (abnormality) ) (S414), and the main-side error processing ends. By setting the output of the security signal in S414, the security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to an external device such as a hall computer in the information output process (S16).

In addition, the error designation|designated command by which transmission setting was carried out in S413 is transmitted to the production|presentation control board 12 by performing the command control process of S20. Then, in the effect control board 12, error notification processing (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is executed, so that error notification corresponding to the error (abnormality) specified by the transmitted error designation command is executed. be.

Thus, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment executes the above-described main error process, and the effect control board 12 executes an error notification process (see FIG. 26), which will be described later. Thus, as shown in FIG. 14, the execution mode of the error notification differs depending on whether or not the game state is the game stop state, which is a predetermined state.

Specifically, for example, when it is first determined that the vibration detection 2 error shown in FIG. Then, a pop-up window of "E-54 vibration error" corresponding to the vibration detection 2 error is notified by being displayed on the effect display device 5 for a predetermined time of 60 seconds.

Then, when it is determined that an abnormal prize ball error has occurred during the notification of these vibration detection 2 errors, the priority of the abnormal prize ball error is "7", and the priority of the vibration detection 2 error being executed is higher than "11", so instead of the "E-54 vibration error" pop-up window that reports the vibration detection 2 error that is being executed, the notification of the prize ball abnormality error, specifically, FIG. 14 ( As shown in A), a pop-up window containing the message "Please call the attendant! E-33 Abnormal prize ball error, please turn on the power again" is displayed to notify the occurrence of the abnormal prize ball error. However, in the occurrence of this prize ball abnormality error, the game is not controlled to the game stop state, and the state in which the game can be played is maintained.

Then, during notification of the abnormal prize error, for example, if it is determined that a "magnet error", which is an error with a higher priority than the abnormal prize error, has occurred, as shown in FIG. The entire display of the effect display device 5 is displayed in black to indicate that the game is stopped, and the effect display device 5 displays the message “Playing is stopped, please call the staff! Please" is displayed in white characters to notify that a "magnet error" has occurred and that the error (abnormality) that has caused the game to stop is a magnet error.

Then, after the game is stopped in this way, the occurrence of an error, for example, a "radio wave error", which is an error with a higher priority than the "magnet error" that triggered the control to the game stopped state, is determined. In this case, as described above, even if the occurrence of the "radio wave error" is determined, the error designation command corresponding to the determination of the "radio wave error" is not transmitted because the game stop flag is set. , As shown in FIG. 14(B), the "magnet error" that triggered the control to the game stop state is continued without the "radio wave error" notification being executed, and the game is stopped. It is not possible to identify what kind of error is the error that triggered the control to the state, and it is an error that triggered the control to the game stop state. You can prevent it from becoming impossible.

Also, after the game stop state, it is an error with a higher priority than the "magnet error" that triggered the control to the game stop state, for example, when the occurrence of "radio wave error" is determined , as described above, the process of S414 is not executed. changes (signal ON/OFF), and it becomes difficult to check the error (abnormality) that triggered the output of these security signals outside the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a hall computer. You can prevent it from getting lost.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S18 shown in FIG. 10 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning judgment process (S21). After executing the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S22 to S31 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting section 152.

In the starting winning process of S21, it is determined whether or not there is a first starting winning or a second starting winning by the first starting opening switch 22A or the second starting opening switch 22B. Random number MR1 for, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are extracted. It is stored in the highest position, and in the case of the second start winning, it is stored in the highest position of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

The special symbol normal process of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence or absence of suspension data stored in the first special symbol suspension storage unit 151A and the second special symbol suspension storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special figure game by the display 4B. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the variation display result, whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the performance symbol is a "jackpot" is derived from the variation display result. Decide (predetermine) before it is displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbols in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol (jackpot symbol or Either a small hit pattern or a lost pattern) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the performance symbol is determined in advance.

The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is set using numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the variation display result is a "big hit". It includes processing to determine whether When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

By the special symbol normal process of S22 and the variation pattern setting process of S23, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the fixed special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which is the result of the variation display of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process use the random number MR1 for determining the result of variation display, the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, using the special symbol and the effect symbol. It includes processing for determining the variable display mode.

The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from when the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, each time the special symbol variation process of S24 is executed, the special figure variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted by 1 or added by 1, and the first Regardless of whether it is a special game using the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer elapses A time measurement is made. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation processing of S24 includes the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using , it may be a process of controlling by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of S25 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbols, and stop display (derivation) of the confirmed special symbols that result in the variable display of the special symbols. It includes a process of setting to enable Then, whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on is determined, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". In addition, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot opening preprocessing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this jackpot opening preprocessing, a setting is made to start the round in the jackpot game state and open the first jackpot, based on the fact that the result of the variation display is "jackpot". etc. are included. At this time, the upper limit of the period in which the first big prize opening is kept open is set according to which one of "big win A", "big win B", and "big win C" is the type of the big win, for example. good too. As an example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the upper limit of the period in which the first big winning hole is open is set to "29 seconds", and the number of openings of the first big winning hole, which is the upper limit number of rounds, is set to By setting ``5 times'' for ``jackpot A'', ``10 times'' for ``jackpot B'', and ``15 times'' for ``jackpot C'', the jackpot state is set. Just do it. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The processing during jackpot opening of S27 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The processing during the opening of the jackpot includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after the first jackpot is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. , the process of determining whether or not it is time to return the first big winning hole from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the first big prize winning port to the closed state, after executing the process of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the first big prize winning port door 701, the value of the special process flag is set to "6". ” is updated.

The jackpot ending process of S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". In this jackpot end processing, the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the game effect LED 9, and other effect devices. It includes processing to wait until elapses, and processing to perform various settings (setting of the time saving flag) for starting the time saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Specifically, in the jackpot ending process, the type of the executed jackpot is specified. And when the specified jackpot type is "jackpot A", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" without setting the time saving flag. When the specified jackpot type is "jackpot B", the time saving flag is set and the count initial value ("20" in this embodiment) corresponding to "jackpot B" is set to the time saving number counter and the special figure process Update the value of the flag to "0". In addition, when the specified jackpot type is "jackpot C", the time saving flag is set and the count initial value ("100" in this embodiment) corresponding to "jackpot C" is set to the time saving counter. The value of the figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit opening preprocessing of S29 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this small win opening pre-processing, setting for starting the execution of the round in the small winning game state and opening the second big winning port based on the fact that the result of the variation display is "small win". It includes the processing of At this time, for example, based on the fact that the variable display result is a "minor win", the upper limit of the period in which the second big prize opening is opened is set to "1 second", and the upper limit number of rounds is set. By setting the number of openings of the second big winning opening to "1 time", the setting of the small winning state may be performed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8".

In this embodiment, the number of openings of the second big winning hole is set to "1 time" in the small winning state, and the upper limit of the period in which the second big winning hole is opened is set to "1 second". However, the present invention is not limited to this. The upper limit of the period to be in the state may be a period other than "1 second" as long as the game ball can win the second big prize hole.

The small hit opening process of S30 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after the second big winning hole is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the second count switch 24A. Also included is a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the second big winning port from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the second large prize winning port to the closed state, after executing the process of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 83 for the second large prize winning port door 711, the value of the special process flag is set to "9". ” is updated.

The small hit end processing of S31 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this small-hit end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which an ending performance as a performance operation for notifying the end of the big-hit game state is executed by performance devices such as the performance display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect LED 9 is performed. It includes processing that waits until the time elapses. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S22 of FIG. 15 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (S141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B. For example, in the process of S141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in S141 (S141; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit 151B , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (S142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of S142, the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating them. Along with updating like this, the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (S143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (S144), it moves to S149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in S141 (S141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (S145). The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A. For example, in the process of S145, if the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. In this way, the process of S145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" in S141, and whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" determine whether As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in S145 (S145; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (S146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of S146, by subtracting 1 from the first special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating them, etc., the first special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A The reserved data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (S147).

After that, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (S148), it moves to S149.

In S149, FIG. 6(A) shows a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, should be a "big win", a "minor win" or a "lose". Select and set the display result judgment table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is used as the judgment assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". It compares with the value and determines whether the special figure display result is "big win", "minor win" or "loss" (S150).

After determining the special figure display result in S150, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (S151). Then, when it is determined to be a "jackpot" (S151; Y), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting section 152 is set to the ON state (S152). At this time, as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of jackpot types, a jackpot type determination table corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer is selected and set (S153). At this time, when the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is "1", the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. If the value of the buffer is "2", the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6(C) may be selected and set. By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer is changed to "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" in the jackpot type determination table. , "jackpot C", which one of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be determined (S154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of S154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is either a time saving state in which time single shot control (time saving control) is performed or a normal state in which time saving control is not performed. It is determined whether to control to the game state of (1) before deriving the fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S155), the determined jackpot type is set. It stores and advances to S156. For example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if "jackpot B", "1", and if "jackpot C", "2".

On the other hand, when it is determined at S151 that it is not a "big hit" (S151; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (S151a). When it is determined to be a "small hit" (S151a; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 152 is set to ON state (S151b). At this time, a small hit type determination table (see FIG. 6(D)) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of small hit types (S151c). By referring to the small hit type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the hit type determination stored in the variable random number buffer is "small hit A", " Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each small hit type of "small hit B" matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the small hit type is (S151d).

Corresponding to the determined small hit type, for example, by setting a small hit type buffer value which is a stored value of a small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S151e), determined The small hit type is stored and the process proceeds to S156. As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "small hit B", it is set to "1".

In S156, the result of prior determination of whether or not to control to the big win game state (whether or not the big win flag is set), the result of determination of the big win type in the case of the big win game state, and the small win game state. A fixed special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control (whether or not the small hit flag is set). As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" in S151, according to the determination result of the big hit type in S154, "3", "5", and "7" which are big hit patterns. One of the special symbols showing numbers is set as a fixed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "jackpot B", a special pattern showing the number "5" is set as a fixed special pattern. A special symbol showing the number "7" is set as a fixed special symbol in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "jackpot C". In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol.

After setting the fixed special symbol in S156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S157), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

In addition, when the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in S145 (S145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (S158), the special symbol normal End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S25 of FIG. 15 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of S32 to end the variation of the special symbols, and stops the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control for deriving and displaying the pattern is performed (S181). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design indicator 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B is ended. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (S182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S183), and when the big hit flag is not set (S183; N), the process proceeds to S189a.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set (S183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag if the time saving flag is set (S184), Settings for transmitting a win start 1 designation command (jackpot A), a win start 2 designation command (jackpot B), and a win start 3 designation command (jackpot C) are made according to the type (S185). Incidentally, the winning start designation command set in S185 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S17).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (S186).

Then, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win by the effect display device 5) is set to the big win display time timer (S187). Also, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times for big win A, 10 times for big win B, 15 times for big win C) is set in the big winning opening opening times counter (S188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (S189) corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S26), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, in S189a, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (S189a). If the small hit flag is not set (S189a; Y), the process proceeds to S190. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (S189a; Y), the CPU 103 gives the effect control board 12 a hit start 4 designation command (small hit A) in accordance with the type of the stored small hit. Setting for transmitting the start 5 designation command (small hit B) is performed (S189b). Incidentally, the winning start designation command set in S189b is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S17).

Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time during which the effect display device 5 notifies that the small win has occurred) is set to the small win display time timer (S189c). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, once in the case of a small win) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (S189d). Further, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by 1 (S189e), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (S189f). If the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (S189g; Y), clear the time saving flag and proceed to S189h (S189g), if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (S189g; N) , S189g, and proceeds to S189h.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "7" (S189h), which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S26), and terminates the special symbol stop process.

On the other hand, in S190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". When the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (S190; Y), the process proceeds to S198.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (S190; N), that is, if it is a high base state (time saving state) in which the number of working hours remaining remains, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (S191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (S193). ' (S193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag (S194), the game state corresponding to the set state of the time saving flag (specifically, the low base state (normal The game state designation command corresponding to the state)) is set to be transmitted (S195). Then, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of a right-handed informing LED extinguishing designation command (S196), turns off the right-handed hitting display section 25D, and proceeds to S198 (S197). In addition, the LED extinguishing designation command for the right-handed notification set for transmission in S196 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20).

Then, in S198, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then terminates the special symbol stop processing.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S26 of FIG. 15 as the jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command transmitted flag indicating that the transmission setting of the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command has already been executed is set (S301). ). If the right-handed informing LED lighting designation command transmission completion flag is not set (S301; N), the right-handed informing LED lighting designation command transmission setting is performed (S302), and the right-handed hitting display unit is lit (S303 ). Then, the LED lighting designation command transmission complete flag for right-handed information is set, and the process proceeds to S305 (S304). In addition, the LED lighting designation|designated command for the right-handed alert|report which transmission setting was carried out in S302 is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control board 12 by performing a command control process (S20). If the LED lighting designation command transmission completion flag for right-handed notification is set (S301; Y), the process proceeds to S305 without executing S302 to S304.

In S305, the CPU 103 decrements the big hit display time timer by -1. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit display time timer has timed out (S306). When the big hit display time timer has timed out (S306; Y), the LED lighting designation command transmitted flag for right-handed notification is cleared (S307), and the opening time timer is set (S308). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big win, and the pre-opening process of the big win is ended (S309). In addition, when the big hit display time timer has not timed out (S306; N), the big hit opening pre-processing is terminated without executing S307 to S309.

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S28 of FIG. 15 as the jackpot ending process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation (S311). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (S311; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) for performing the jackpot end display on the production display device 5 is set to the jackpot end display timer. Set (S312), and end the jackpot ending process.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (S311; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by -1 (S313). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big-hit end display time has elapsed (S314). If it has not passed, the jackpot end processing is terminated. If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S314; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot D (S315).

When the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot D (S315; Y), the transmission setting of the right-handed informing LED extinguishing designation command is performed (S316a), the right-handed hit display section is turned off, and the process proceeds to S319 (S316b). ). In addition, the LED extinguishing designation command for the right-handed notification set for transmission in S316a is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20). In addition, when the jackpot type is one of jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot E (S315; N), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (S317), and after setting "100" to the time saving number counter (S318 ), and proceeds to S319.

In S319, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag and sets transmission of a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (S320). Then, after performing the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability variation flag and the time saving flag (S321), the value of the special figure process flag is processed in special symbol normal processing. is updated to "0" corresponding to (S322). Incidentally, the jackpot end designation command set to be transmitted at S320 and the game state designation command set to be transmitted at S321 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20).

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S29 of FIG. 15 as the small hit pre-start process. In the small hit start preprocessing, the CPU 103 first decrements the small hit display time timer by 1 (S201), and determines whether or not the small hit display time timer has timed out (S202). When the small hit display time timer has not timed out (S202; N), while ending the small hit opening preprocessing, when the small hit display time timer has timed out (S202; Y), the second big prize A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set in an open time timer for opening the mouth (S203). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (S204), which is a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the small hit (S30), and the process before opening the small hit is finished.

FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S30 of FIG. 15 as the small hit open process. S211). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open time timer has timed out (S212).

If the opening time timer has timed out (S212; Y), the process proceeds to S230, and if the opening time timer has not timed out (S212; N), it is determined whether it is time to open the second prize winning opening. Determine (S213). When it is time to open the second big winning slot, the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 83 for the second big winning slot door 711 to open the second big winning slot (S214). Then, the transmission setting of the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. It should be noted that the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening set for transmission in S215 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S20). If it is not the time to open the second big prize hole (S213; N), the process proceeds to S216 without going through S214 and S215.

At S216, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the second big winning opening (S216). When it is time to close the second big winning opening (S216; Y), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 83 for the second big winning opening door 711 to close the second big winning opening (S217). . Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (S218), and the process proceeds to S223. It should be noted that the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening set for transmission in S218 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S20). If it is not the closing timing of the second big prize opening (S216; N), the process proceeds to S223 without going through S217 and S218.

At S223, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 24B is turned on (S223). If the third count switch 24B is not turned on (S223; N), the process during small hit opening is terminated, and if the third count switch 24B is turned on (S223; Y), the third It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the count switch 24B has been turned on, ie, that the game ball has passed through the third count switch, is set (S224). When the V winning flag is set (S224; Y), the small winning open process is terminated, and when the V winning flag is not set (S224; N), the V winning flag is set (S225). .

And CPU103 performs the transmission setting of the V prize notification command with respect to the production|presentation control board 12 (S227). Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S20). In addition, if the second big winning opening is open, the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 83 for the second big winning opening door 711 to close the second big winning opening (S228). Clear the timer (S229).

Then, in S230, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "9" (S230), which is the value corresponding to the small winning ending process (S31), and ends the small winning opening process.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S31 of FIG. 15 as the small-hit end processing. is determined (S231). When the small hit end display timer is not in operation (S231; N), the small win flag is cleared (S232), and transmission setting of a hit end designation command corresponding to the small win is set for the performance control board 12 (S233). ). Incidentally, the hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S20). Then, a value corresponding to the small-hit end display time is set in the small-hit end display timer (S234), and the small-hit end processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the small hit end display timer is in operation (S231; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by -1 (S235). Then, it is determined whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display timer has timed out (S236). When the small hit end display time has not elapsed (S236; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 24B is turned on (S237). When the third count switch 24B is not turned on (S237; N), the minor hit ending process is terminated, and when the third count switch 24B is turned on (S237; Y), the third count has already been made. It is determined whether or not the switch 24B has been turned on, that is, whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the third count switch is set (S238). When the V winning flag is set (S238; Y), the small winning end process is terminated, and when the V winning flag is not set (S238; N), the V winning flag is set (S239).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (S241), and ends the small winning ending process. Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S20).

Also, when the small hit end display time has elapsed in S236 (S236; Y), the CPI 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S242). When the V winning flag is gusseted (S242; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the big hit flag (S243, S244). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big win type from "big win D" and "big win E" based on the small win type in which the V winning occurred (S246). As for the jackpot type, as shown in FIG. 6(D), if the jackpot type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit A", the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot D", and the V prize is determined. When the type of the small hit generated is "small win B", the type of big win is determined to be "big hit E". Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S247), the determined jackpot type is set. Store and proceed to S248. For example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot D", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "3", and if the jackpot type is "jackpot E", it is set to "4".

After the execution of S247, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" (S248), which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S26), and ends the small hit ending process.

That is, in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B not only during the small winning game but also during the period until the small winning end display time after the small winning game ends. Even if the game ball enters the second big winning hole just before the end of the small winning game, the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B, so that the big winning game is executed after the end of the small winning end process. It has become so.

Incidentally, when the V winning flag is not set in S242 (S242; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set (S249). If the time-saving flag is set, the process proceeds to S253, and if the time-saving flag is not set, the transmission setting of the game state designation command indicating the normal state is performed (S250), and the LED extinguishing designation command for the notification of hitting to the right is transmitted. Settings are made (S251). The game state designation command and the right-handed treatment LED turn-off designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S20). Further, the CPU 103 turns off the right-handed display section 25D and proceeds to S253.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S22) in S253, and ends the small winning end process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes each process in the special symbol process process, so that the game ball is moved to the right game area by operating the hitting ball operation handle during the time saving state, the small hit game state, and the big hit game state. In a game state in which the ball is hit toward the 10R (performs a right-handed hit), the right-handed display section 25D lights up, and in a normal state in which the game ball is launched toward the left game area 10L (performed a left-handed hit) by operating the hitting ball operation handle. , the right-handed display section 25D is extinguished.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. When power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (S51). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. In the main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set (ON), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following processes.

The performance control CPU 120 first analyzes the received performance control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (command analysis processing: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122 . In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 3) is the effect control command saved in the buffer area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process processing, the display control of the effect display device 5 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) among the processes corresponding to the control state.

Next, a performance random number update process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a performance random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56). After executing the error notification process (S57) shown in FIG. 26 and the power failure recovery screen display process (S59) shown in FIG. 27, the process proceeds to S52.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the effect control process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first launches a game ball such as a game state in a time saving state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc. toward the right game area 10R (performs a right hit) in a game state. In some cases, a right hitting notification process (S71) for notifying the player that the player is in a right hitting game state by displaying on the effect display device 5 or lighting the right hitting notification LED 30, and the effect display device 5 Suspended display update processing (S72) for updating the suspended storage display in the first suspended storage display area 5D and the second suspended storage display area 5U to a display corresponding to the storage content of the effect control buffer setting unit is executed.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S73 to S82 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is checked whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received in the command analysis process. If the variation pattern specification command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S74).

Effect symbol variation start process (S74): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75).

Effect symbol change processing (S75): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production symbol fluctuation stop processing (S76).

Effect symbol variation stop processing (S76): Based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols, control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbols and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). conduct. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S77), the small hit display process (S80) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

Big hit display process (S77): After the fluctuation time is over, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 5. FIG. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game process (S78).

During jackpot game processing (S78): Control during jackpot game is performed. For example, when receiving the designation command during the opening of the big winning opening or the designated command after opening the big winning opening, the display control of the number of rounds, the display control of the jackpot game production, the sound output control, etc. in the production display device 5 are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing (S79).

Big hit end effect processing (S79): The effect display device 5 performs display control for informing the player that the big win game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

Small hit display process (S80): After the fluctuation time is over, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hit on the effect display device 5. FIG. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small winning game processing (S81).

Processing during small winning game (S81): Control during small winning game is performed. For example, when a designation command during the opening of the big winning opening or a designated command after opening the big winning opening is received, display control of the number of rounds on the effect display device 5 and the like are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (S82).

Small win end effect processing (S82): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to inform the player that the small win game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73) or the big hit display process (S77).

In this embodiment, when the supply of power to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being stopped, the operation of only the performance control board 12 side is unstable, including the shooting of game balls. The game itself can be continued. For this reason, in particular, it is possible to control the big hit game state by executing the variable display as in this embodiment, and the game ball passes through the specific area (third count switch 24B in this embodiment) during the small hit game. A pachinko game machine of a type that can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on what is done (so-called 1 type 2 type pachinko game machine), and a jackpot game end based on the game ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game. In the pachinko game machine in which the probability variation control is performed later, the effect display device 5 displays a blackout recovery screen and a right hitting notification image so that the player can hit the game ball to the right game area 10R. If it is not urged, the game ball loses the chance to pass through the specific area, and the player suffers a disadvantage. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 displays the power failure restoration screen, the game hall clerk or the like should ask the player to stop shooting game balls until the power failure restoration screen is displayed. Therefore, it is conceivable that the game parlor may not be able to take appropriate measures when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted by executing the following right-handed notification processing and power interruption recovery screen display processing. In this case, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the right hitting notification process (S71) of the present embodiment. In the hitting to right notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hitting to right notification image is being displayed in the second mode on the effect display device 5 (S701). In addition, the right-handed notification image is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display device 5 so as to face the right game area 10R side in order to notify that it is in a time saving state, a big win game, or a small win game. It is an image of an arrow. Further, as the display mode of the right-handed notification image in this embodiment, the first mode and the above-described second mode can be displayed on the effect display device 5, and the second mode is different from the first mode. is a form of displaying an image of a large rightward arrow.

If the hitting-right notification image is being displayed in the second mode (S701; Y), the process proceeds to S713, and if the hitting-right notification image is being displayed in the first mode or the hitting-right notification image is not displayed (S701; N) further determines whether or not the right hitting notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S702). If the hitting-right notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S702; Y), the process proceeds to S710, and if the hitting-right notification image is not being displayed in the first mode, that is, the hitting-right notification image is not displayed. If (S702; N), the process proceeds to S703.

In S703, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a power restoration designation command is received. If the power restoration designation command is received (S703; Y), the process proceeds to S707, and if the power restoration designation command is not received (S703; N), there is further reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command. (S704). If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command (S704; N), the right-handed notification processing is terminated, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command (S704; Y), for effect control The CPU 120 starts turning on the right-handed informing LED 30 by controlling the LED control board 14 (S705). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the hitting right notification image in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 5 (S706), and ends the hitting right notification process.

In addition, in S707, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an LED lighting designation command for hitting to the right has been received. If there is no reception of the LED lighting designation command for hitting to the right (S707; N), the hitting to the right notification process is terminated, and if there is a reception of the LED lighting designation command for hitting to the right (S707; Y), for effect control The CPU 120 starts turning on the right-handed informing LED 30 by controlling the LED control board 14 (S708). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the hitting right notification image in the upper right portion of the effect display device 5 in the second mode (S709), and ends the hitting right notification process.

In addition, in S710, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a right hitting notification LED extinguishing command has been received. If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command (S710; N), the right-handed notification processing is terminated, and if there is a reception of the right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command (S710; Y), for effect control The CPU 120 turns off the right-handed informing LED 30 by controlling the LED control board 14 (S711). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the right hitting notification image in the upper right portion of the effect display device 5 (S712), and ends the right hitting notification process.

In addition, in S713, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not any of the pattern confirmation command, the designation command after opening the big winning opening, and the winning end designation command is received. If any of the pattern confirmation command, the designation command after opening the big winning opening, or the winning end designation command is received (S713; Y), the processing of S711 and FIG. (End of display) is executed to end the right-handed notification process, and if none of the symbol confirmation command, the designation command after opening the big winning opening, and the winning end designation command is received (S713; N), S711 and The right hitting notification process is ended without executing the process of S712.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the game state (time saving state, jackpot game state, small hit game state) in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area 10R during the game, the effect control CPU 120 , the right hitting notification LED 30 is lit, and the right hitting notification image is displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 5 in the first mode. Then, when the game state is controlled to the game state (normal state) in which the game ball is hit toward the left game area 10L, the effect control CPU 120 extinguishes the right hitting notification LED 30, and the right hitting in the first mode. End the display of the hitting notification image.

In addition, if an error that interrupts the game such as the radio wave error, the magnet error, or the vibration detection error occurs during the game, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (the power is turned off), and the clear switch is activated. If the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed (the power is turned on) without operating If it is a game state (time saving state, big win game state, small win game state) to hit toward the area 10R, the right hitting notification LED 30 is lit, and the right hitting power interruption recovery screen is displayed on the effect display device 5 as the second. display in the form. Then, the reception of the pattern confirmation command, the designation command after opening the large winning prize port, and the winning end designation command, that is, the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the closing of the first or second large prize winning port, the state of the big winning game or the small winning game After shifting from the state to the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right hitting notification LED 30 and ends the display of the right hitting notification image in the second mode.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10, 17, 19, 22 and 25, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 regularly executes the command control processing in the game control timer interrupt processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). By executing (S20) and transmitting a right-handed notification LED lighting designation command and a right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 is linked to lighting the right-handed display unit 25D. Then, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the right-hand hitting notification LED 30, and the CPU 103 turns off the right-hand hitting display part 25D. Therefore, even if the player does not visually recognize the right-handed display part 25D, by visually recognizing the right-handed notification LED 30, the game state can be changed to a short-time state, a big-hit game state, or a short-time state in which the game ball is hit toward the right-handed game area 10R. It is possible to determine whether it is in one of the winning game states.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the error notification process (S57) of this embodiment. In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the error notification timer is in operation (S501).

If the error notification timer is not operating, that is, if the error notification is not being executed, the process proceeds to S502.

On the other hand, if the error annunciation timer is in operation, that is, if the error annunciation is being executed, the error annunciation timer is decremented by -1 (S510), and then the error annunciation timer after the subtraction is up. It is determined whether or not (S511).

If the error notification timer has not timed up (S511; N), the process proceeds to S502 without going through S512 and S513.

On the other hand, when the error notification timer has timed up (S511; Y), the error notification flag is cleared (S512), the error notification being executed is terminated (S513), and the process proceeds to S502.

In S502, it is determined whether or not the error designation command reception flag is set. The error designation command reception flag is set in the command analysis processing (S54) when the command transmitted from the main board 11 is identified as an error designation command in the command analysis processing (S54).

If the error designation command reception flag is not set (S502; N), the error notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if the error designation command reception flag is set (S502; Y), the set error designation command reception flag is cleared (S503), and the error designation command stored in the error designation command storage area is The error type is specified from (specifically, the value of EXT) (S504), and the notification mode set for the specified error type, specifically, the content displayed on the effect display device 5 and the game effect The lighting mode of the LED 9 and the sound to be output are specified (S505), and the error notification is started in the specified notification mode (S506).

Next, the error type specified in S504 is an error with a notification period, for example, a vibration detection 2 error with a release period (notification period) of 60 seconds, or an error with a release period (notification period) of 300 seconds. It is determined whether or not it is a startup opening 2 abnormal prize winning error or the like.

If the error type is an error with a notification period (S507; Y), the error notification flag and the error notification timer are set to a value corresponding to the notification period, and the timer count of the error notification timer is started. to terminate the error notification process. As a result, the error notification started in S506 ends when the error notification timer is up.

On the other hand, if the error type is not an error with a reporting period (S507; N), only the error reporting flag is set, and the error reporting process ends without starting the timer count of the error reporting timer. As a result, since it is not determined in S501 that the error notification timer is in operation, the error notification started in S506 continues until the next error designation command is received.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the power interruption recovery screen display process (S59) of the present embodiment. In the power failure recovery screen display process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a recovery screen display process timer, which will be described later, is operating, that is, whether or not the power failure recovery screen is being displayed on the effect display device 5 . (S611). If the restoration screen display process timer is in operation (S611; Y), the process proceeds to S618. If the restoration screen display process timer is not in operation (S611; N), whether or not a power failure restoration designation command has been received. is determined (S612). If no power interruption restoration designation command is received (S612; N), the power interruption restoration screen display process is terminated. It is determined whether or not an LED lighting designation command has been received (S613).

If no right-handed notification LED lighting command is received (S613; N), a power failure recovery screen (left-handed power failure) that notifies the effect display device 5 to launch the game ball toward the left game area 10L is displayed. Select the left-handed recovery screen display process table for displaying the recovery screen), proceed to S616 (S614), and if there is a reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting command (S613; Y), the effect display device In step 5, a right-handed recovery screen display process table for displaying a power failure recovery screen (right-handed power failure recovery screen) for notifying to launch the game ball toward the right game area 10R is selected, and the process proceeds to S616. (S615).

Then, in S615, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the recovery screen display process data 1 of the recovery screen display process table selected in S614 or S615. The recovery screen display process table selected in S614 or S615 contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each restoration screen display process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect display device 5 as a component for effect, effect (speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are executed, and display of the power failure restoration screen is started (S617). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display a power failure recovery screen corresponding to the recovery screen display process table selected in S614 or S615 in the effect display device 5 . Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the power failure restoration screen display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in S618, the effect control CPU 120 decreases the value of the recovery screen display process timer by -1. Then, it is determined whether or not the recovery screen display process timer has timed out (S619). If the recovery screen display process timer times out (S619; Y), the recovery screen display process data is switched (S620). That is, the recovery screen display process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the recovery screen display process table to the recovery screen display process timer (S621). Also, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, sound control execution data, etc., which are set next (S622). Then, the process proceeds to S624.

On the other hand, if the recovery screen display process timer has not timed out (S619; N), the rendering is performed according to the contents of the recovery screen display process data (display control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) corresponding to the recovery screen display process timer. The control of the device (performance component) is executed (S323), and the process proceeds to S624.

Then, in S624, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a reception of a designation command during opening of the big winning opening. When there is a reception of the designation command while the big winning opening is open (S624; Y), in addition to the power failure recovery screen being displayed on the effect display device 5, the effect display device 5 is displayed in the big win game state or the small win game state. The display of a notification image indicating that the 1st or 2nd big winning opening is open is started, and the process proceeds to S629. Also, if the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening is not received (S624; N), it is determined whether or not the image for notifying that the opening of the big winning opening is being displayed (S626). If the big winning mouth opening notification image is not being displayed (S626; N), the process proceeds to S629. It is determined whether or not there is reception, that is, whether or not the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is closed in the big winning game state or the small winning game state (S627). If no designated command is received after the opening of the special prize opening (S627; N), the power failure recovery screen display process is terminated. The display of the open notification image is ended, and the process proceeds to S630 (S628).

Then, in S629, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not either the pattern determination command or the hit end designation command is received. If either the pattern determination command or the win end designation command is received (S629; Y), the recovery screen display process timer is cleared, the power failure recovery screen display is terminated, and the power failure recovery screen display processing is terminated. do. Also, if neither the symbol determination command nor the win end designation command is received (S629; N), the power failure recovery screen display process is terminated without executing S630.

That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 stops the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the occurrence of an error that interrupts the game such as the radio wave error, the magnet error, the vibration detection error, or the like. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (the power is turned off) and the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted (the power is turned on) without operating the clear switch, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. If the game state at the time of playing is the normal state, the performance display device 5 displays a power interruption recovery screen for left-handed hitting. Then, when the symbol determination command is received, that is, when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the power interruption recovery screen for left-handed hitting.

In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted (the power is turned on) without operating the clear switch, the game state at the time when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped is the game ball. toward the right game area 10R (time saving state, big win game state, small win game state), the effect control CPU 120 displays a power interruption recovery screen for right hitting on the effect display device 5. Then, the reception of the pattern confirmation command, the designation command after opening the large winning prize port, and the winning end designation command, that is, the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the closing of the first or second large prize winning port, the state of the big winning game or the small winning game After shifting from the state to the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display of the power interruption recovery screen for right-handed hitting.

Further, when the command for opening the big winning opening is received while the power interruption recovery screen for right-handed hitting is displayed, that is, when the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. , the effect control CPU 120 displays a large winning hole opening notification image on the effect display device 5 to notify the player that the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole is being opened. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the power failure recovery screen is being displayed during the big winning game or the small winning game, the effect display device 5 displays the notification image during the opening of the big winning opening to the player. On the other hand, since the game ball can be urged to be launched toward the right game area 10R so that the game ball enters the first big prize hole or the second big prize hole, the first big prize is won during the big win game. The number of prize balls that the player can obtain is reduced because the game ball does not enter the opening or the second winning opening, and the game ball does not enter the second winning opening during the small winning game. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of disadvantages for the player, such as the possibility that the big win game is started (controlled to the big win game state) without passing through the third count switch 24B. In other words, the game value in this embodiment is the number of prize balls given when the game ball enters the first big prize hole or the second big prize hole, and the number of prize balls given when the game ball enters the second big prize hole It refers to being controlled to the jackpot game state by passing the third count switch 24B.

In this embodiment, the image for notifying that the main winning opening is open is displayed only during the opening of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening during the display of the blackout recovery screen for right-handed driving. Although the display and non-display of the informing image during the opening of the big winning opening is repeatedly executed by repeating opening of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the notification image during the opening of the big winning prize opening is displayed until the big winning game or the small winning game ends, or the opening of the last first big winning hole or the second big winning hole in the big winning game or the small winning game ends. may be displayed continuously.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to inform that the first or second big prize opening is open while the power failure restoration screen for right-handed hitting is being displayed, the effect display device 5 opens the big prize opening. Although the mode of displaying the middle notification image has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening is open while the power interruption recovery screen for right-handed driving is displayed. In addition to the display of the image on the effect display device 5, or alternatively, the notification of the event may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the game effect LED 9, or the like.

Next, FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 show the lighting mode of the right-handed informing LED 30, the display mode of the right-handed informing image, the display mode of the power failure recovery screen, and the display mode of the informing image during opening of the big prize opening in this embodiment. will be explained based on

First, the case where the game state is the normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. 28(A), since the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is hit toward the left game area 10L, the right hitting notification LED 30 is extinguished. As shown in FIG. 28(B), when an error such as a vibration detection 1 error that stops the game is detected during the execution of the variable display in the normal state, the pachinko game is started by the operation of a store clerk or the like. Power supply to machine 1 is stopped. Then, when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started again by the operation of the game hall clerk or the like, as shown in FIG. A message such as "Please wait for a while" is displayed.

Next, the case where the game state is the time saving state, the small winning game state, and the big winning game state will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the right hitting notification LED 30 in the time saving state, the small winning game state, and the big winning game state, the display mode of the right hitting notification image, the display mode of the power interruption recovery screen, and the notification during opening of the big winning opening Since the display mode of the image is the same, an example in the small winning game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 29 (A), the small winning game state (and the time saving state, the big winning game state) is a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area 10R, so the right hitting notification LED 30 is lit. there is In addition, during the small winning game state (and time saving state and big winning game state), the right hitting notification image is displayed in the first mode in the upper right part of the effect display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 29(B), when an error such as vibration detection 1 error that stops the game is detected in the small winning game, power to the pachinko game machine 1 is supplied by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like. supply is stopped. Then, when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started again by the operation of the game hall clerk or the like, as shown in FIG. A message such as "Middle Please continue hitting to the right" is displayed.

During the display of the power interruption recovery screen for right-hand hitting, the game state at the time when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped is the small win game state, so the right-hand hitting notification LED 30 is lit. In the upper right part of the effect display device 5, the right hitting notification image is displayed in the second mode. When the second big winning opening (the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening during the jackpot game) is opened during the display of the blackout recovery screen for right-handed hitting, the big winning opening is displayed at the bottom of the effect display device 5. A message such as "the big prize mouth is open" is displayed as the notification image during the opening of the mouth.

In this embodiment, during the display of the power failure recovery screen for right-handed hitting, a common big winning hole opening notification image is displayed in the case where the game state is the big win game state and the case where the game state is the small win game state. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is the big win game state or the small win game state while the right-handed power interruption recovery screen is displayed. You may display the informing image during opening of a big prize-winning opening of a different aspect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the big winning hole to be opened during the display of the power interruption recovery screen for right-handed hitting is the same for the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and a mode in which the first and second big prize openings that open during the display of the blackout recovery screen for right-handed hitting are different. The notification image during the opening of the big winning opening may be displayed so that the player can easily recognize which of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening the game ball should enter.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in the game states such as the time saving state, the big win game state, the small win game state, etc. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted without operating the clear switch after the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the performance display device 5 displays a power interruption recovery screen for right-handed hitting and a right-handed informing image, thereby realizing a pachinko game machine. 1, the game area for shooting the game ball is not displayed on the effect display device 5, thereby reducing the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the right-handed informing LED 30 is controlled when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted and when the game state is changed from the normal state to the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the display mode of the right hitting notification image on the effect display device 5 is the first mode when the game state is controlled from the normal state to the jackpot game state, etc., and the pachinko game machine 1. and the second mode when the supply of electric power is restarted, and the player confirms whether the display mode of the right-handed notification image is the first mode or the second mode. By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the power supply is restarted.

In addition, since the effect control CPU 120 displays the power failure recovery screen and the right hitting notification image on the effect display device 5 based on the reception of the right-hand hitting notification LED lighting designation command from the CPU 103, the effect display device 5 Since there is no need to provide a dedicated command for designating the start of display of the power failure recovery screen or a dedicated command for designating the start of display of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5, the number of commands can be increased. can be suppressed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even at a timing other than when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, the right-hand hitting notification LED lighting designation command and the right-hand hitting notification LED extinguishing designation command are used. The turning on/off of the LED 30 can be interlocked with the start/end of display of the right-hand hitting notification image.

In addition, the CPU103 executes a game control timer interrupt process every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), executes the command control process (S20) in the game control timer interrupt process, and executes the command control process of the same interrupt. Since the power failure restoration designation command and the right hitting notification LED lighting designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the power failure restoration designation command and the right hitting notification LED lighting designation command, the power failure restoration in the effect display device 5 The display start timing of the screen and the display start timing of the right hitting notification image can be the same. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as the player overlooking the hitting notification image.

In the present embodiment, the display start timing of the power failure restoration screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5 are exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the display start timing of the right-handed notification image may be different from the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen as long as the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a right-handed display unit 25D capable of notifying that the game area where the game ball should be shot is the right game area 10R by lighting control and extinguishing control by the CPU 103. sends a right-handed notification LED lighting designation command to the production control board 12 in accordance with the lighting control of the right-handed display unit 25D, and to the production control board 12 in accordance with the lighting control of the right-handed display unit 25D Since the right-hand hitting notification LED extinguishing command is transmitted, the lighting state of the right-hand hitting display unit 25D and the display state of the right-hand hitting notification image on the effect display device 5 are linked. The display of the hitting notification image can be executed appropriately.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment includes a first special variable winning ball device 7A that can control the first big winning hole between a closed state in which game balls cannot win and an open state in which game balls can win. and a second special variable winning ball device 7B capable of controlling the second big winning hole between a closed state in which the game ball cannot win and an open state in which the game ball can win, and the first big winning hole. and a prize ball process (S12) for awarding a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second big prize hole, and the game ball that has won the second big prize hole during the small winning game The game state can be controlled to the jackpot game state based on the passage of the third count switch 24B. Then, the effect display device 5 displays the notification image during the opening of the big winning prize opening based on the fact that the first big winning prize hole and the second big winning prize hole are opened, so that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When restarting, the player can be made to recognize that the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole are in an open state in which the game ball can win, and the game ball is not shot, thereby making the first big winning hole. The game balls do not enter the winning opening or the second big winning opening so that the winning balls cannot be obtained, or the game balls do not pass through the third count switch 24B, so that the game balls are not controlled to the jackpot game state. Profit generation can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, an image for notifying that the big winning opening is open is displayed on the production display device 5 based on the fact that the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the power failure recovery screen is being displayed during a big win game or a small win game, the notification image during the opening of the big winning hole is displayed in the first big winning hole or the second big prize opening may be displayed on the effect display device 5 before the opening, so that the player can recognize that the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening will be opened.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an image for notifying that the big winning opening is open is displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the fact that the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened during the display of the power failure restoration screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the display of the power failure recovery screen, even if the first or second big winning opening is opened, the large winning opening open notification image may not be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an image for notifying that the big winning opening is open is displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the fact that the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened during the display of the power failure restoration screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a game ball can be won in the second start prize opening while the power failure restoration screen is displayed (normally variable prize ball device 6B is normally opened When the state is changed to the enlarged open state), the effect display device 5 may display an image notifying that the game ball can be won in the second start winning hole. In other words, the "variable winning device" of means 5 in this embodiment may be the first special variable winning ball device 7A or the second special variable winning ball device 7B as in this embodiment, or the second starting winning hole. It may be a normal variable winning ball device 6B to be formed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an image for notifying that the big winning opening is open is displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the fact that the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened during the display of the power failure restoration screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the fact that only is opened.

Also, after the game stop state, it is an error with a higher priority than the "magnet error" that triggered the control to the game stop state, for example, when the occurrence of "radio wave error" is determined , as described above, the process of S414 is not executed. changes (signal ON/OFF), and it becomes difficult to check the error (abnormality) that triggered the output of these security signals outside the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a hall computer. You can prevent it from getting lost.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays a power interruption recovery screen ( Although the form of displaying the right-handed power interruption recovery screen) and the right-handed notification image is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 can be displayed when the power supply is restarted. A power failure recovery screen (right-handed power failure recovery screen) and a right-handed notification image may be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the reception of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state from the CPU 103 . By doing so, there is no need to provide an individual command for displaying the right-handed informing image on the effect display device 5, and an increase in the number of commands can be suppressed.

Specifically, Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 30, in the game control main process in the present modified example 1, the CPU 103 executes the processes of Sa1 to Sa8 and Sa41 to Sa44, and then changes the game state corresponding to the game state specified in the process of Sa44. The specified command is set to be sent (a46a), and the processes of Sa48 and Sa15 to Sa20 are executed. In addition, the game state designation command set for transmission in Sa46a is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the command control process (S20).

Then, as shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU120 executes S701 to S703, and when it is determined that there is reception of the power failure restoration designation command in S703, from the gaming state designation command received together with the power restoration designation command A game state is specified (S707a). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified game state is a normal state (S707b), and if the specified game state is either a time saving state, a big hit game state, or a small hit game state (S707b; N) , S708 and S709 are executed, and lighting of the hitting-to-right notification LED 30 and display of the hitting-to-right notification image in the first mode on the effect display device 5 are started.

In addition, when the game state changes from the normal state to the jackpot game state or the like by executing the special symbol process processing by the CPU 103, as shown in the processing of S704a to S704c, the effect control CPU 120 receives the The game state is specified from the game state designation command, and if the specified game state is not the normal state, that is, if it is a jackpot game state, S705 and S706 are executed to turn on the right hitting notification LED 30 and the effect display device 5. , the display of the right hitting notification image of the first aspect may be started. Then, when it is determined in S702 that the hitting to right notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S702; Y), as shown in the processing of S710a to S710c, the effect control CPU 120 changes the gaming state received from the CPU 103. The game state is specified from the designated command, and if the specified game state is the normal state, S708 and S709 are executed to turn off the hitting-to-right notification LED 30 and display the hitting-to-right notification image of the first mode on the effect display device 5. display should be terminated.

As described above, in the present modification 1, since there is no need to provide an individual command for displaying the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5, the game state corresponding to the game state is suppressed while suppressing an increase in the number of commands. It is possible to realize the display of the power failure recovery screen and the right hitting notification image on the effect display device 5 in detail by the specified command.

In addition, in this modification 1, the CPU 103 transmits a game state designation command corresponding to the game state to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, Although the effect control CPU 120 displays a power interruption recovery screen and a right hitting notification image on the effect display device 5 according to the game state specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103, the present invention is directed to this. Not limited to this, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command according to the game state to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120) when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, The effect control CPU 120 may display the power failure recovery screen and the right hitting notification image on the effect display device 5 according to the game state specified from the power failure recovery designation command received from the CPU 103 .

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the mode of executing the display of the big win game effect on the effect display device 5 during the big win game is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big win game effect includes: Not only one effect but also a plurality of effects may be executable. Further, when a plurality of effects can be executed as the big win game effects, the player may be able to select the effects to be executed during the big win game by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in which the player can select the effect to be executed during the jackpot game by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in this way, power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 during selection of the effect. is stopped, the processing of the performance control CPU 120 can be reduced by executing a predetermined one performance as a jackpot game performance when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted. may

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33(A) to 33(E) as Modified Example 2, the effect control CPU 120 performs derived display in a combination in which the effect symbols indicate a big hit, and then the first round of the big win game. , options of BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed as a jackpot game effect during the jackpot game (options of tune A, tune B, and tune C shown in FIG. 33(B)).

On the screen shown in FIG. 33(B), the player or the like operates the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A to select any one of the options, and performs a decision operation to change the image shown in FIG. 33(B). After the display is finished, an image is displayed as a jackpot game effect on the effect display device 5, and BGM corresponding to the determined option is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, in a state in which it is not yet determined which BGM to output, that is, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped while BGM options are being displayed, the power is restored to the pachinko game machine 1. When the ball is turned on, the effect display device 5 displays the blackout restoration screen for hitting to the right and the image for notifying the hitting to the right, as in the above-described embodiment.

Then, when the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole is closed and the first round ends, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image as a big win game effect on the effect display device 5, ), one BGM (music C in this modified example 2) is determined as the BGM to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and output of the determined BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is started.

In addition, in the second modification, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped during the display of the BGM options, after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted, the speakers 8L and 8R Although the form of uniquely determining the BGM to be output has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. After the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, the BGM to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be randomly selected from displayed options.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the game state is controlled to a game state such as a time saving state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc., in which a game ball is hit toward the right game area 10R. Although the form in which the hitting notification image is displayed and the player is urged to hit the game ball toward the right game area 10R is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is the normal state, that is, , When it is controlled to a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the left game area 10L, the effect control CPU 120 detects that the game ball has been launched toward the right game area 10R. A warning notification may be given to launch the game ball toward the left game area 10L by display on the device 5, sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect LED 9, or the like. In this way, in the pachinko game machine 1 that issues a warning to launch the game ball toward the left game area 10L based on the detection that the game ball has been launched toward the right game area 10R, When the effect symbols are derived and displayed as a result of variable display during execution of the warning notification in a combination indicating a big hit or a small hit, the warning notification may be stopped.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, the CPU 103 outputs the power failure recovery designation command and the right hitting notification LED Although the mode of displaying the power failure recovery screen and the right hitting notification image on the effect display device 5 by transmitting the lighting designation command to the effect control board 12 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, A performance control board 12 is provided with a storage part capable of storing at least a part of processing being executed by a CPU 120 for performance control when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, and the pachinko game machine 1 is sent to the pachinko game machine 1. When the power supply is resumed, the effect display device 5 based on the contents stored in the storage unit without receiving a power failure restoration designation command, a right hitting notification LED lighting designation command, etc. from the CPU 103 It is also possible to display the power failure restoration screen and the right-handed notification image in the display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole are provided in the right game area 10R so that only game balls flowing down the right game area 10R can win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first big winning opening and second winning opening may be provided at positions where game balls flowing down the left game area 10L can win. In addition, in this way, when the first big winning hole and the second winning hole are provided at the position where the game ball flowing down the left game area 10L can win, the pachinko game machine 1 during the big win game or the small win game When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped and the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, the effect display device 5 displays a left-handed power failure recovery screen, and the game ball is directed to the left game area 10L. A left hitting notification image may be displayed to prompt the player to hit the ball. In other words, the "specific route" in the present invention is a route on which the large winning opening that is open when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed is arranged regardless of the left or right of the game area. Just do it.

Furthermore, as long as it is possible to hit the game ball, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening can be set to the right game area 10R or the left game area such as the upper part of the center decorative frame surrounding the performance display device 5. It may be provided in a region other than the region 10L. In this way, when the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole are provided in the area other than the right game area 10R and the left game area 10L, the electric power to the pachinko game machine 1 is supplied during the big win game or the small win game. When the power supply is stopped and the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, the game ball is placed on the effect display device 5 at the position where the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole is provided (for example, the center A notification image may be displayed to urge the player to shoot toward the upper part of the decorative frame.

Further, in the above embodiment, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped during a winning game or a small winning game, and when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, the right-handed informing Although the form in which the LED 30 and the right-handed display part 25D are lit is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped during a winning game or a small winning game. , when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, the LED 30 for notifying hitting to the right need not be lit. Further, the LED 30 for notifying hitting to the right and the hitting to the right display section 25D in the above-described embodiment are omitted, and a promotion display for promoting the shooting of the game medium so as to flow down a specific path is performed on the effect display device 5. good too. Furthermore, in place of the notification by the right-handed informing LED 30 and the right-handed hitting display section 25D in the above-described embodiment, the notification may be performed by voice output from the speakers 8L, 8R or the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 controls lighting and extinguishing of the right-hand hitting display section 25D, and the effect control CPU 120 controls lighting and extinguishing of the right-hand hitting notification LED 30, but the present invention is applied to this. The CPU 103 may control both lighting and extinguishing of the right-hand hitting display section 25D and the right-hand hitting notification LED 30, without being limited thereto.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. , and the number of balls lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine that stores In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control CPU 120 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect, an example of transmitting one variation pattern specification command when starting the variation Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when the two commands are used for notification, the CPU 103 uses the first command to determine, for example, the variation time and variation mode before reaching the reach (if not reaching the reach, before the so-called second stop). In the second command, the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc., after reaching the reach (if not reaching the reach, after the so-called second stop). Commands may be transmitted, or only the variation time is notified by the first command and the second command, and the specific variation mode executed at each timing is determined by the effect control CPU 120. You can also make a selection with . When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. ), a second command may be sent. By notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands in this manner, the amount of data that must be stored as variation pattern specifying commands can be reduced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball is hit from below the game area by the hitting ball launching device, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball may be launched from the upper position of the game area by providing it at the upper position of the game area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, there are two starting prize openings, the first starting prize opening and the second starting prize opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be set to only one, or the number of start winning openings may be set to three or more.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, there are two special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one special symbol Alternatively, the number of special symbols may be 3 or more.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol as the display result, respectively, and then stop display the final stop symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols without including the final stop symbol that is the display result, the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. can be In other words, the final stop symbol to be displayed may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the time-saving control is performed after the end of the jackpot game (the game state is controlled to the time-saving state). A jackpot type may be provided in which probability variation control is performed to increase the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot after the jackpot game is over. In the pachinko game machine 1 capable of performing the probability variation control, the probability variation control may be performed after the big win game is over based on the fact that the game ball has passed the third count switch 23B during the big win game.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and modifications, and the configurations shown in the examples and modifications described later, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims, not by the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, it is also possible to execute games using game media (eg, game balls), and advantageous states for the player (eg, jackpot game state, probability variable state, time saving state, etc.) ) is a game machine (e.g., pachinko game machine, slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled by a player, and a shooting means (e.g., a ball operating handle or a ball shooting device) capable of shooting game media based on the player's operation; Along with controlling the progress of the game, a first control means (for example, CPU103) capable of executing recovery processing (for example, Sa41 to Sa48 in the game control main processing) of the game state when receiving power supply after stopping the power supply and a promotion display (e.g., a right-handed notification image) for promoting the shooting of the game medium so as to flow down a specific path (e.g., the right game area 10R) of the downflow paths along which the game medium flows; Display means (e.g., effect display device 5) capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., power failure restoration screen) relating to the restoration process, and means different from the display means, which flow down the specific route. Notification means (for example, right-handed notification LED 30) capable of promoting notification for promoting shooting of game media, and information transmitted from the first control means (for example, right-handed notification LED in the embodiment Based on the lighting designation command and the game state designation command in Modification 1), the second control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) for controlling the display on the display means, and the game medium used for the game (for example, the game 136, 140, etc.) and a signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, signal line 90734 shown), receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, etc.), and detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal Possible abnormality detection means (for example, CPU 90103 etc. that executes the error notification process of FIG. 137) and predetermined conditions are satisfied Payout means (for example, balls Payout device, payout mechanism, etc.) and a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (eg, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) The detection the number of game media detected by the means (for example, the number of balls that have been driven); Information display means (e.g., display monitor 901130 in FIG. 140) capable of displaying (e.g., performance display) predetermined information (e.g., performance information in FIG. 116) calculated based on When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, performance display is restricted, etc.), The second control means can control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part that displays a power failure recovery screen and a right hitting notification image on the effect display device 5 by executing the process) game machine.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game state is restored. In addition, it is possible to prevent the information display means from displaying inaccurate information.

In the gaming machine described above, when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the execution of the promotion display or the promotion notification may be restricted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inaccurate information from being given to the player by performing the promotion display or the promotion notification in an abnormal state. Note that the restriction is not limited to not executing the promotion display or the promotion notification, but may be to execute the promotion display or the promotion notification in a manner in which it is possible to specify that an abnormality has been detected.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, the form of promotion display and promotion notification may be varied according to the calculated predetermined information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the calculated predetermined information as well, thereby enhancing interest.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can prevent the display of inaccurate information, a game can be executed, and an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player ) controllable game machine (e.g., pachinko game machine, slot machine, etc.), and detecting means (e.g., FIGS. 136, 140 etc.), a signal line through which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136, etc.), and a receiving means for receiving the detection signal ( For example, the main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, etc.) and an abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 137 etc.), and a predetermined condition is established (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A serving as the first starting winning opening, the normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as the second starting winning opening, the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D serving as the general winning areas, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media based on winning a prize in a special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a big winning opening, and a predetermined state (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) For example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the number of game media detected by the detection means (for example, the number of hit balls, etc.) in the state where the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off. , predetermined information (for example, performance information in FIG. 116, etc.) calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 140, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance display), and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the information display A game machine that restricts display by means (for example, notifies an error as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, restricts performance display, etc.). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another form.

(Other form examples)
As described above, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area has a greater impact on the game than the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area where the variable display of the special symbols is executed by the entry of the game medium. is low. In addition, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbols becomes the specific display result, the control is performed in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Compared to entering, the player's interest is low, making it difficult to increase interest. Due to such circumstances, there is a case where the game nail is maintained on the game hall side so as to substantially make it difficult for the game medium to enter the general winning area.

However, game machine manufacturers usually design the game board so that game media enter the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Therefore, originally, it is desirable that the maintenance state of the game nail is such that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test) on the game hall side. Therefore, it is necessary to increase the player's interest in the entry of game media into the general winning area and to make the player aware of the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. A gaming machine according to an embodiment, which will be described later, makes it possible to enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

Other embodiments will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 901 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 902 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 supporting and fixing the game board 902 . In addition, the pachinko game machine 901 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 903a provided in the game machine frame 903 so as to be openable and closable. The gaming machine frame 903 is attached to the outer frame by a hinge mechanism so as to be openable and closable. This outer frame is fixed to a so-called game island where a plurality of pachinko game machines are arranged side by side. By opening the game machine frame 903 with respect to the outer frame, the back side of the game machine frame 903 and the inside of the game island can be visually recognized by a store clerk or the like.

A substantially circular game area 9010 surrounded by guide rails is formed on the game board 902 . In this game area 9010, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and struck. Also, the game area 9010 consists of a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B. The game area 9010 is an area through which a game ball can pass on the game board 902. With the center of the game area 9010 as a reference, the left side is a left game area 9010A and the right side is a right game area 9010B.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (the right side of the game area 9010 in the example shown in FIG. 34). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light-emitting diode) or the like, and is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol"), which is a plurality of possible types of identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variably displayed). For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B each variably display multiple types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". do. In addition, the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Not limited. Below, the special design variably displayed by the first special design display device 904A is also referred to as "first special design", and the special design variably displayed by the second special design display device 904B is also referred to as "second special design". . In addition, the number of special symbol display devices may be one.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game board 902 . The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A in the special symbol game and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B. In the decorative pattern display area which is divided into a plurality of variable display portions, for example, three, decorative patterns, each of which is a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (decoration identification information), are variably displayed. The variable display of this decoration pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, in response to the start of either the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A or the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, "Left , 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). After that, when fixed special symbols are stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of the image display device 905, , the determined decorative pattern (final stop pattern), which is the variable display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. Thus, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A, or the special symbol using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B In synchronism with the drawing game, a plurality of types of ornamental patterns that can be individually identifiable are variably displayed, and a fixed ornamental pattern resulting from the variable display is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping the display of the identification information such as the decoration pattern (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) to end the variable display.

In the image display device 905, as the display areas to be the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, three areas may be adhered, separated, or adhered and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 905 is controlled by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed by the first special symbol display device 904A, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the image display device 905 to perform the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol. When the variable display of the second special figure is being executed on the display device 904B, the image display device 905 is made to execute the performance display along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

Decorative patterns variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R include, for example, eight types of patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). There are numerals "one" to "eight", English letters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, letters or symbols and character images, etc. Note that character images. may be a decorative image representing, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a letter, or any other arbitrary figure.). In addition to these 8 types of decorative patterns, there are also decorative patterns (designs composed of the letters "Tokutoku") corresponding to becoming a "definite hit" (also known as "2R probability variation jackpot") and blank designs ( Symbols that do not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding design number is attached to each of the decorative designs. Note that the number of decoration patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations, such as a winning combination or a losing combination, can be formed.

During the variation of the decorative patterns, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are displayed sequentially from the top to the bottom, for example, from small to large pattern numbers. Flowing scroll display is performed, and when the decorative pattern with the largest pattern number (for example, "8") is displayed, the decorative pattern with the smallest pattern number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" decorative design display area 905L, etc.), scroll display is performed from the large design number to the small one, and the design is displayed. When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed subsequently.

In the lower right portion of the display screen of the image display device 905, there are provided fourth pattern display areas 905A and 905B for displaying the fourth pattern next to the decorative pattern, the special pattern and the normal pattern which will be described later. In this embodiment, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. The fourth symbol display area 905A for the second special symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the derived display of the display result of the variable display is performed. A fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure is provided.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative design is executed in synchronism with the variable display of the special design (however, precisely, the variable display of the decorative design is the variation pattern designated by the production control CPU 90120 side. (This is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the command.) When the effect using the image display device 905 is performed, for example, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. are performed, and an effect is performed in which all or part of the screen is shielded by a movable object. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen of the image display device 905, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by further performing variable display of the fourth pattern on a part of the display screen of the image display device 905, it is possible to check the state of the fourth pattern to determine whether it is currently in the state of variable display. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the fourth pattern is always variably displayed in a constant motion and is always visible because it does not disappear from the screen or is blocked by a shield.

In addition, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol and the second special symbol The fourth symbol display area 905B for drawing may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

In the variable display (variable display) of the fourth symbol, the fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B are displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is white, and the second special symbol is displayed in white. The 4-symbol display area 905B is black), and is realized by continuing a blinking state in which lighting (display) and extinguishing (non-display) are repeated at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start and end points of variable display are the same, and the period of variable display is the same.

Further, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device 904A, the fourth pattern display area 905A for the first special pattern is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. remain. In addition, you may change a display color according to a jackpot classification. In addition, when the missing symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is illuminated (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) that evokes the failure. remain. Thus, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is stop-displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 905A.

Further, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display device 904B, the fourth pattern display area 905B for the second special pattern is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. remain. In addition, you may change a display color according to a jackpot classification. Further, when the second special symbol display device 904B stops displaying the missing symbol, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is illuminated (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the failure. remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special figure is stop-displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 905B.

In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning memory display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a reservation memory display that displays the number of reservations of the variable display (the number of special figure reservation memories) so as to be identifiable is performed. Here, suspension of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first starting winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 906A or the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B. do. That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special game or a variable display of decorative patterns has been established, the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. or the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established starting condition is suspended when the starting condition for starting the variable display game is not established. done.

As an example, the starting prize memory display area 905H is provided with a plurality of display portions whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game for which the starting condition is satisfied first based on the occurrence of the starting prize. there is Then, when the starting condition (first starting condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display portions in the mode (transparent color) (for example, the display portion at the left end of the display portions in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. In addition, when the starting condition (second starting condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, non-display One of the display parts in the mode is changed to red display. After that, when either the starting condition of the special game using the first special figure (first starting condition) or the starting condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second starting condition) is satisfied, for example The display at the leftmost display portion is removed, and the display at each display portion is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display portions that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the rightmost display portion among the display portions whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

That is, when a starting prize is generated, in the starting prize storage display area 905H, hold information (an object indicated by a circle in FIG. 34, FIG. 64, etc.) corresponding to a special game to be executed based on the starting prize is stored. Newly displayed display control is performed. For example, the pending information is displayed in order from the left in accordance with the order in which the starting conditions for the special game corresponding to the pending information have been established (in the above example, the order in which the starting conditions are established). When n pieces of pending information are displayed (when n special game is pending), when a new starting prize occurs, n+1th pending information from the left corresponding to the new starting prize will be newly displayed. Then, when the condition for starting the reserved special game is satisfied, the leftmost reserved information corresponding to the special game is erased, and the n-th (n≧2) reserved information from the left is left one by one. , and displayed at the (n-1)th position.

In addition, the order in which the starting conditions for the special game are established is not limited to the order in which the starting conditions occur, and the starting condition for the special game regarding the second special is higher than the starting condition for the special game regarding the first special. It may be established preferentially (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). Also, on the contrary, the start condition of the special figure game related to the first special figure is established with priority over the start condition of the special figure game related to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation) You can do it.

It should be noted that, in the start winning memory display area 905H, by displaying a number indicating the special figure reservation memory number, etc., the player and the like may be able to recognize the special figure reservation memory number. Together with the starting winning prize storage display area 905H, or instead of the starting winning prize storage display area 905H, an indicator for displaying the number of special figure pending memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 34, along with the start winning memory display area 905H, on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, the first suspension for displaying the number of special symbol suspension storage can be specified. An indicator 9025A and a second pending indicator 9025B are provided. The first reservation display 9025A identifiably displays the first reservation memory number as the number of effective starting winning balls entered into the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. The second reserve display 9025B displays the second reserve storage number as the number of effective starting winning balls entered into the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B so as to be identifiable. 1st reservation indicator 9025A and 2nd reservation indicator 9025B respectively, for example, the number (for example, 4) corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, "4") in each of the first reservation storage number and the second reservation storage number LED is composed of A movable accessory 901000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 905 .

The movable accessory 901000 incorporates a motor and a lamp for operating the star-shaped member. The movable accessory 901000 operates (rotates and lights up) when an effect for notifying a big hit, for example, a variable result foretelling effect or a look-ahead foretelling effect, which will be described later, is executed.

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a normal open state, which is a vertical position, and an enlarged open state, which is a tilted position, by means of a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normal variable prize ball device 906B, when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, the movable wing is in a vertical position, so that the game ball does not enter the second start prize hole or enters It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the game ball enters the second starting winning hole by tilting control in which the movable wing is in the tilting position. It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to use.

A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 35, for example. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 35, for example. Based on the detection of game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the number of first reserved storage is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ), the first starting condition is met. Based on the detection of game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the number of second reserved storage is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ), the second starting condition is met. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the second start port switch 9022B may be the same number as each other, or may be different numbers.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9028 for a large winning opening door shown in FIG. form the mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening when the solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door is in the OFF state. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening when the solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door is on. A game ball entering a large winning hole formed in the special variable winning ball device 907 is detected by a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. 35, for example. Based on the game balls being detected by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition are established, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, etc. When the start condition for starting the game is not met, suspension of the variable display occurs. For example, when the first starting condition is satisfied, if the first starting condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first starting condition is not satisfied, the first reservation storage The number is incremented by 1, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Also, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second reservation storage The number is incremented by 1, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when execution of the special game using the first special figure is started, the number of first reserved memories is decremented by 1, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. is decremented by 1 from the second reserved storage number. It should be noted that the sum of the number of first reserved storage and the number of second reserved storage may be called the total number of reserved storage or the number of special figure reserved storage.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 34). As an example, the normal symbol display device 9020, like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, etc., and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. A normal pattern (also referred to as "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of normal symbols is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of, for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". In addition, the normal symbol display device 9020 is not limited to those that variably display numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-" as normal symbols, for example, "○" and "×" By alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) shown, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle", and "right" in a predetermined order, the normal pattern is variably displayed. can be anything. Above the normal pattern display 9020, a normal pattern holding display 9025C is provided. The normal map reservation display 9025C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal map reservation memory number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gates 9041A and 9041B.

On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above configuration, there are provided windmills and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as the winning openings different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, there are four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A prize area is provided.

The general prize winning openings 9050A to 9050D are constituted by ball receiving members projecting forward (toward the player) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above through the opening. smaller than an individual diameter. Therefore, two or more game balls are prevented from passing through the opening of the ball receiving member in a row in the horizontal direction. Further, the intervals between the ball receiving members provided with the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D are intervals through which at least one or more game balls can pass. In addition, a winning ball device for switching the opening and closing of the openings of the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D (for example, a function corresponding to the normal variable winning ball device 906B for switching the opening and closing of the second starting winning port) is not provided. It is always open. Also, even if the game ball wins in the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, neither the condition for starting the variable display of the special game nor the condition for starting the variable display of the normal game is satisfied based on the winning.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded to the player as a specific value based on the winning of the game balls in the general prize winning opening. With the game ball entering the winning opening, a variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B for controlling the opening and closing of the second start winning opening and a special variable for performing opening and closing control of the large winning opening Actuating the winning ball device 907 to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole or the big winning hole may be the specific value given when the game ball enters the general winning hole.

Also, the specific value given to the player may be varied according to the general winning opening. prize balls are given, but when game balls win the first general prize winning port 9050A or the fourth general prize winning port 9050D, 10 prize balls are given (that is, specific values of different sizes are given granted). In addition, although the specific value given when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is a predetermined number of winning balls, the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening When a game ball wins in 9050D, the normal variable winning ball device 906B or the special variable winning ball device 907 may be operated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

Also, different effects may be executed according to the specific value that is given according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening. is awarded, and when the variable winning ball device operates according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole (that is, when the type of the specific value is different), different effects are executed. Also good. In addition, there are cases where 10 prize balls are given according to the winning of game balls to the general winning opening, and cases where 5 winning balls are given according to the winning of game balls to the general winning opening. (That is, when the magnitude of the specific value is different), different effects may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 35, the winning of game balls to the first general winning port 9050A, the second general winning port 9050B, the third general winning port 9050C, and the fourth general winning port 9050D is the corresponding first general winning port. It is detected by an opening switch 9024A, a second general winning opening switch 9024B, a third general winning opening switch 9024C, and a fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. When the game balls are detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out as prize balls.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the winning port switches corresponding to the four general winning ports 9050A to 9050D are provided, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the game balls win the general winning ports. It is possible to detect not only the fact that the game ball has won, but also which general winning hole the game ball has won.

It should be noted that the structure is not limited to the configuration in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for each general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning slot switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning slot provided in the left game area 9010A has been won) is provided for the first general winning slot 9050A and the second general winning slot 9050B. , A common general winning port switch (switch for detecting that the general winning port provided in the right game area 9010B has won) is provided for the third general winning port 9050C and the fourth general winning port 9050D. You can do it. In addition, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that one of the general winning openings has been won) is provided for all the general winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It may be possible to

At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports. The game balls taken into the out port are recovered to the game island via a ball recovery passage (not shown) communicating with the out port. Game balls that have entered each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st to 4th general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball collection trough (not shown), and the balls It is designed to be collected to the game island via the collection passage. An out ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball recovery passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, the game ball that was driven into the game area 9010 (the game ball that was led to the out port without winning any of the winning ports, and the winning ball set that entered any of the winning ports Game balls collected in the gutter) Detect all game balls. Every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 9012, so that the effect control CPU 90120 counts the number of game balls hit into the game area 9010, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. If the out-ball detector is configured to have a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, each time the value of the counter increases by a certain number (for example, 10), effect control is performed. By outputting a number-of-outs increase signal to the substrate 9012, the number of outs may be tallied in units of a certain number (for example, units of 10) on the CPU 90120 side for effect control.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided at the periphery of the game area. Decoration LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, normal winning ball device 906A, normal variable winning ball device 906B, special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 903a, there is an upper tray 9060 that holds (stores) game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to the ball launching device. is provided. For example, an operation button 9030 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is installed at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate 9060 on the front side.

A keyhole 9061 of a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 9060 . By inserting the key corresponding to the keyhole 9061 into the keyhole 9061 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, the glass door frame 903a can be opened forward with respect to the frame 903 for a game machine. Also, by inserting the key into the keyhole 9061 and rotating the key in the other direction, for example, clockwise, the gaming machine frame 903 can be opened forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built in the keyhole 9061, and when the key is inserted into the keyhole 9061 and rotated counterclockwise or clockwise and then released or pulled out, the keyhole 9061 rotates in the opposite direction. direction to return to the neutral position. When the keyhole 9061 is at the neutral position, the glass door frame 903a can be closed and locked with respect to the game machine frame 903, and the game machine frame 903 can be closed and locked with respect to the outer frame. becomes possible. In addition, by opening the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the frame 903 for the game machine, maintenance of the game board (gauge board including the game nail and the prize winning opening) 902 (for example, countermeasures for removing ball jam) Alternatively, a mode switching switch 9031 and a display switching switch 9032, which will be described later, can be operated.

Immediately below the upper tray 9060, a lower tray 9062 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 9060 is provided. A hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 9063 is provided which is operated by a player or the like for shooting. For example, the hitting ball operation handle 9063 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball-hitting operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping the driving of the firing motor of the ball-hitting device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

The operation button 9030 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. Note that the operation button 9030 is not limited to one that can be pressed or rotated. It may be one that can be operated, or one that can be pushed and tilted like a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 9030, a sensor such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, which can detect a predetermined act of operation by the player, may be used. In other words, the operation button 9030 may be configured so as to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined act of operation by the player. The player's act of operating the operation button 9030 is detected by a depression detection switch (not shown) that detects the depression of the operation button 9030 and a rotary encoder (not shown) that detects the direction and amount of rotation of the operation button (jog dial) 9030. not shown).

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko game machine 901, game balls that have passed through the first passage gate 9041A provided in the left game area 9010A and the second passage gate 9041B provided in the right game area 9010B enter the first passage gate 9041A shown in FIG. Corresponding 1st gate switch 9021A, detected by the second gate switch 9021B corresponding to the second pass gate 9041B, normal pattern display device 9020 normal pattern starting condition for executing the variable display of normal symbols After establishment, for example, based on the establishment of the general pattern start condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the end of the previous general pattern game, the normal pattern display device 9020 starts the general pattern game. be.

In this general pattern game, after the normal pattern variation is started, when a predetermined period of normal pattern variation time elapses, the determined normal pattern that results in the variable display of the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) such as a number indicating "7" is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the result of variable display of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern other than a normal pattern per pattern, such as a number or symbol other than a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal pattern, the variable display result of the normal pattern will be "normal pattern lost". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal pattern is "normal pattern hit", expansion opening control (tilting control) is performed so that the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B are at the tilting position. After a predetermined time has elapsed, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position.

The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is triggered by the fact that the game ball entering the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting port switch 9022A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is established, the game is started based on the establishment of the first start condition due to, for example, the end of the previous special game or the jackpot game state. In the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B, the game ball entering the second starting winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting port switch 9022B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by, for example, the second start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when a predetermined time to become the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol To derive and display the finalized special symbol (special symbol display result). At this time, if a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "big hit" as a result of the specific display, and if a special pattern (lost pattern) other than the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, it is "losing." ”. A specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as a fixed special symbol differs depending on the type of the big win, and for example, the fixed special symbol differs between the definite variable big win and the non-definite variable big win. After the variable display result in the special game becomes ``big win'', the game is controlled to a big win game state as a specific state in which a round game (also simply called ``round'') advantageous to the player is executed for a predetermined number of times.

In a jackpot game state that is controlled after a jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern in a special game, the opening/closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 907 is operated for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number of times, which is the first period. A round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is changed to a first state that is advantageous to the player by opening the big winning hole until (for example, 9) winning balls are generated. be. In this way, the opening/closing plate that opens the large winning opening during the execution of the round game catches the game balls falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby providing a special variable winning ball device. 907 is changed to a second state that is disadvantageous to the player to end one round of play. In the jackpot state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the cycle of opening the jackpot, is, for example, 15 times. In addition, you may provide the jackpot classification of several types from which the number of times of execution of a round game differs.

After the jackpot state is over, as one of the advantageous states for the player, a time reduction control is executed in which the variable display time of the special symbols in the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) is shortened compared to the normal state. It is controlled to a time saving state that is performed, and a probability variation state that probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed along with time reduction control.

Here, the normal state is a normal state as a game state different from a specific state such as a jackpot game state, a time saving state, and a variable probability state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when the system is reset) , the same control as in the state where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on) is performed. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special game is executed, or the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", one of the conditions is met first Then you can exit. In addition, in the probability change state, in the variable display of each special game and decorative pattern, the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is further controlled to the big hit game state is higher than the normal state and the time saving state. improves. Such a variable probability state continues until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) of special figure games are executed.

A big hit (type) that is controlled to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state is finished is also called a variable probability big hit. A big hit (type) that is controlled in a time-saving state without being controlled in a probability variable state after the jackpot game state is completed is also called a non-probability variable jackpot.

In the probability variable state and the time saving state, the normal pattern display device 9020 controls the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) in the normal pattern game to be shorter than the normal state, and the normal pattern variable in each normal pattern game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be a "normal hit" than in the normal state, tilting control of the movable wing in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being a "normal hit" The second start condition is set by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to be longer than in the normal state, control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. By increasing the possibility of success, control is performed that is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole in the variable probability state or the time saving state and is advantageous for the player is also called high open control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged open state is increased compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 904B is easily satisfied, and the special pattern game can be executed frequently, so that the following In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, it becomes easier to become a big hit game state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the game state in the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the probability variable state or the time saving state. A state in which high opening control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which high opening control is not being performed is also referred to as a low base state.

In the "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A , and the special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B. A period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative design in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C and 905R. Then, the variable display state of the decoration pattern may be a predetermined ready-to-win state. Here, the ready-to-win state means a decorative pattern that is not stopped and displayed yet when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitute a part of the jackpot combination (“ready-to-win fluctuation pattern”). ) is a display state in which fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating synchronously while constituting all or part of a big winning combination. Specifically, in some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905R, etc.), When the decorative patterns (for example, the decorative patterns showing the alphanumeric character "7") constituting the determined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative pattern display areas (for example, the "medium" decoration) that are not yet stopped are displayed. In the pattern display area 905C, etc.), the display state in which the decorative patterns are fluctuating, or the decorative patterns in all or part of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are big hits. It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while forming all or part of a combination.

Also, in response to reaching the ready-to-win state, the variation speed of the decoration pattern is reduced, or a character image (a production image imitating a person or the like) different from the decoration pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decoration pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decoration pattern, a different production operation than before reaching the ready-to-win state is executed. may be Such production operations such as display of character images, changes in the display mode of background images, playback display of moving images, and changes in the variation of decoration patterns are referred to as ready-to-win effects display (or simply ready-to-win effects). In the ready-to-win effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 905, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) of the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are performed in the ready-to-win state. A different mode of operation than the previous mode of operation may be included. As the effect action in the ready-to-win effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "ready-to-win patterns") having different operation modes (ready-to-win mode) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") differs in each reach mode. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" depending on which one of the plurality of ready-to-win effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. Then, when the ready-to-win mode of super-reach appears, the possibility (reliability of big win) of the variable display result to be a "big hit" is higher than when the ready-to-win mode of normal reach appears.

During the variable display of the decorative patterns, unlike the ready-to-win effect, the variable display state of the decorative patterns may be the ready-to-win state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". A variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed by means of a variable display mode of symbols. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "pseudo run" and "slip" can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 9011 side. It is determined whether

During the variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or variable display effects such as "pseudo run" and "slip", decoration images such as predetermined character images and message images are displayed. The player is notified that the variable display state of decorative patterns may become a ready-to-win state or that the result of variable display may be a "jackpot" by a performance action different from the variable display action of the patterns. A notice effect for doing may be executed.

When a special symbol that is a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not enter the ready state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the predetermined A fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of decorative symbols is referred to as a variable display mode of "no reach" (also referred to as "no reach") when the variable display result is "loss".

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in a special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the ready-to-win effect is executed, or without the ready-to-win effect being executed, there are cases where the determined decorative symbols that form a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also referred to as a ready-to-win losing combination) are stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of decorative symbols is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss". It should be noted that the determined decorative symbols that are a non-reach combination and the determined decorative symbols that are a reach-losing combination are also collectively referred to as the determined decorative symbols of the losing combination (non-specific combination).

When a special pattern to be a jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern in a special pattern game, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the change in the variable display state of the decorative pattern to the ready-to-win state. Afterwards, fixed decorative symbols that will be a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are the jackpot combination are, for example, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of the image display device 905, and the symbol numbers are variably displayed as “1”. , 905L, 905C and 905R in the ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 905L, 905C and 905R. Anything is fine.

In addition, after the decorative symbols to be the jackpot combination are derived and displayed, a pre-reading for notifying and announcing that pending data with the special pattern display result as "jackpot" is stored during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state. An advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, the game area 9010 consists of a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B. It is possible to switch between left-handed hitting that shoots a game ball toward and right-handed hitting that shoots a game ball toward the right gaming area 9010B.

In the pachinko game machine 901, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 9010A (when a game ball enters the left game area 9010A), the right game area is moved by disposing a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game balls enter the first start winning hole at a higher rate than when the game balls are shot to 9010B. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (normal pattern fluctuation time) is longer than when the game state is the probability variable state and the time saving state, and the variable display result of the normal pattern is "normal pattern hit". Since the probability is low, the ratio of the game balls launched to the left game area 9010A in the normal state to win the second start winning opening is extremely low compared to the ratio of winning to the first starting winning opening. there is

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball is launched into the right game area 9010B (when a game ball enters the right game area 9010B), the left Compared to the case where the game ball is shot to the game area 9010A, the rate of the game ball winning the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win the first starting winning opening. there is Therefore, even if the game ball hits right in the normal state, the percentage of the game balls winning the starting prize opening (either the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening) is the same as hitting left in the normal state. It is extremely low compared to the percentage of game balls that sometimes win the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player hits to the left in the normal state.

In addition, the rate at which the game ball shot to the right game area 9010B passes through the second passage gate 9041B is determined by the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), so that the game ball shot to the left game area 9010A is second. It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 9041A. Then, the ratio of the game ball shot to the right game area 9010B to enter the second start winning opening in the open state is determined by the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guide member (not shown), etc. It is higher than the percentage of balls winning the second start winning opening in the open state.

Then, in the probability variable state and the time saving state, the variation time of normal patterns (normal pattern variation time) is shortened more than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of normal patterns is ``per normal pattern'' is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, when the game ball hits right in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the ratio of winning the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is left in the variable probability state and the time saving state. It is higher than the percentage of the game ball winning the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when hitting. Therefore, the player hits to the right in the variable probability state and the time saving state.

In addition, the rate at which the game ball shot to the right game area 9010B enters the large winning opening in the open state is determined by the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), so that the game ball shot to the left game area 9010A is It is higher than the rate of winning the big prize mouth of the open state. Therefore, the player hits to the right in the jackpot game state. In this way, the player hits to the left in the normal state, switches to hitting to the right when the big win game state occurs, continues to hit to the right in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game state, and returns to the normal state. With the transition (for example, the end of the variable probability state or the time saving state without the jackpot game state), it will be returned to the left hand.

In addition, the ratio of the game ball launched to the left game area 9010A winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming area 9010A is the first general winning opening 9050A and the second Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050B is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball shot to the right gaming area 9010B is the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening. It is higher than the percentage of winning 9050B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball launched to the right game area 9010B to win the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D provided in the right gaming area 9010B is the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050D is provided, and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball shot to the left gaming area 9010A is the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the percentage of winning 9050D.

In addition, for some or all of the plurality of general winning openings (first general winning opening 9050A and second general winning opening 9050B) provided in the left gaming area 9010A, only the game ball launched to the left gaming area 9010A It is possible to win a prize, and the game ball launched to the right game area 9010B may not win a prize. 9050D), only the game balls shot to the right game area 9010B can win, and the game balls shot to the left game area 9010A may not win.

Thus, since left-handed hitting is performed in the normal state, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B among the four general winning openings, and the jackpot game state and , In the probability variable state and the time saving state, since right-handed hitting is performed, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D among the four general winning openings. In accordance with the game state and the like, the general winning opening through which the game ball is likely to win changes as the game area where the game ball is shot changes. In addition, in the left game area 9010A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball can easily win, and the right game where the game ball enters in the jackpot game state, the probability variable state and the time saving state In the region 9010B, the frequency of winning the general winning openings may be changed according to the game state, such as providing the general winning openings at positions where it is difficult for game balls to win (or vice versa).

Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a sound control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 are mounted on the pachinko game machine 901 as shown in FIG. In addition, the pachinko game machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the performance control board 9012 . In addition, various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and the like are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine 901 . The power board is a board that supplies power to each board such as the main board 9011 and the performance control board 9012 . The power supply board is connected to the main board 9011, the performance control board 9012, as well as other boards such as the sound control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, and the relay board 9015 to supply power. The power board is provided with a power switch, and when the power switch is turned on, the power is turned on, and the power supply board starts supplying power to each board. Also, by turning off the power switch, the power supply to each substrate is stopped. Further, the main board 9011 includes a payout control board. In addition, the payout control board may be provided separately from the main board 9011 . The payout control board is a board for controlling the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is composed of a ball payout device (not shown) and the like in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 9011). A payout mechanism (mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to execute the payout of prize balls.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 mainly includes a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions, and a sub-side control board consisting of an effect control board 9012 etc. , a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal, and a function of outputting various types of information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special symbol and the second special symbol. To control the variable display of, and to control the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display device 9020 by performing the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal design display device 9020, the variable display of the predetermined display design It also has control functions. The main board 9011 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that captures detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and signals from the game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9027 and 9028 is mounted.

In addition, the switch circuit 90110 takes in signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 (details will be described later) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100 . Although details will be described later, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is for detecting an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 901 .

The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and controls the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R. and a game effect lamp 909, various circuits for controlling performance operations by electrical parts for performance. That is, the effect control board 9012 controls the display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, all or part of the lighting/light-out operation in the game effect lamp 909, etc. It has a function of determining the contents of control for causing the electric parts for the performance to execute a predetermined effect operation.

The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012, outputs sounds from the speakers 908L and 908R. A processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose is installed. Lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from production control board 9012, based on commands and control data from production control board 9012, lighting / extinguishing in game effect lamp 909 etc. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit for driving.

As shown in FIG. 35, the main board 9011 includes a first gate switch 9021A, a second gate switch 9021B, a first starting switch 9022A, a second starting switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general winning opening switch 9024A. , 2nd general winning slot switch 9024B, 3rd general winning slot switch 9024C, and 4th general winning slot switch 9024D.

In addition, the first gate switch 9021A, the second gate switch 9021B, the first start switch 9022A, the second start switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D are, for example, Any configuration, such as a sensor, that can detect a game ball as a game medium may be used. In addition, the main board 9011 has a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display device 9020, a first reservation display device 9025A, a second reservation display device 9025B, and a general pattern reservation display device 9025C. A wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. Wiring for transmitting signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is connected to the main board 9011 .

A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015 . The main board 9011 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 90100. The output buffer circuit can pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, and blocks the input of the signal from the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011. Therefore, there is no room for the signal to be transmitted to the main board 9011 side from the performance control board 9012 or the relay board 9015 side.

The relay board 9015 may be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit has a diode whose anode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 9011 and whose cathode is connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 9012, and one end is connected to the cathode of the diode. and a resistor whose other end is grounded (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can block the input of the signal from the effect control board 9012 to the relay board 9015 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the production control board 9012 side to the main board 9011 side. In this embodiment, along with providing a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting the control signal in the relay board 9015, output buffer circuit between the game control microcomputer 90100 and the main board side connector in the main board 9011 By providing the , it is possible to prevent the input of an unauthorized signal to the main board 9011 from the outside.

Control commands transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 are, for example, effect control commands transmitted and received as electric signals. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 905, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. and lamp control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Such production control commands include, for example, a game state designation command that designates a game state (normal state, variable probability state, or time saving state), a variation start command that designates the start of fluctuation in a special game, a special in a special game Variation pattern specification command for specifying variation pattern such as pattern variation time and decoration pattern in image display device 905, variable display result notification command for specifying variable display result such as special pattern and decoration pattern, decoration pattern in image display device 905 A decorative pattern stop command that designates the stop of the variable display, a jackpot start designation command that designates the start or end of the jackpot game state, a jackpot end designation command, a game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening The start winning command output when the game ball wins, the general winning mouth designation command output when the game ball wins in the general winning mouth, the big winning mouth winning command output when the game ball wins in the big winning mouth, etc. included.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and work for game control. RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data that indicates a random value independently of CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 90105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. At this time, the CPU 90103 performs a fixed data read operation to read fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data write operation to write and temporarily store various variable data in the RAM 90102, and a variable data write operation to temporarily store the various variable data in the RAM 90102. To the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 through the I / O90105 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

Thus, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform game control, so the game control microcomputer 90100 (or CPU 90103) executes ( or perform processing) specifically means that the CPU 90103 executes control according to the program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the main board 9011 .

As shown in FIG. 35, the production control board 9012 provides a production control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores a program for production control, fixed data, etc., and a work area for the production control CPU 90120. Display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of display operation in image display device 905, and CPU 90120 for effect control A random number that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of RAM 90122 that performs A circuit 90124 and an I/O 90125 are mounted. As an example, in the production control board 9012, the production control CPU90120 executes the production control program read from the ROM90121, thereby executing the processing for controlling the production operation by the electric parts for production. At this time, effect control CPU90120 fixed data reading operation and read fixed data from ROM90121, effect control CPU90120 to RAM90122 to temporarily store the variable data writing operation to write various variable data, effect control CPU90120 to RAM90122 Temporarily stored variable data reading operation to read various variable data, effect control CPU90120 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 through I / O90125 receiving operation, effect control CPU90120 I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

The production control board 9012 includes wiring for transmitting video signals to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting sound effect signals as information signals indicating sound number data to the audio control board 9013, Wiring for transmitting illumination signals as information signals indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 9014, wiring for transmitting control signals to the movable accessory 901000, and the like are connected. In addition, to the effect control board 9012, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation act on the operation button 9030 is detected is sent from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Furthermore, the effect control board 9012 includes wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 9031 described later, and the operation in the display changeover switch 9032 described later. A wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the part (first position or second position) is also connected.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the production control board 9012 contains the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, the light emitters such as the decorative LEDs, the operation buttons 9030, the movable accessories 901000, and the production accessories. A plurality of types of pattern data constituting a production control pattern are stored in advance in order to control the production operation using a production device (electric parts for production) including a movable member etc. provided by.

The display control unit 90123 mounted on the production control board 9012 shown in FIG. 35 determines the control contents of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control command from the production control CPU 90120 and the like. For example, the display control unit 90123 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905, and executes various effect displays such as the variable display of decorative patterns and the effect display in the ready-to-win effect. control. The display control unit 90123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD driving circuit, and the like.

I / O90125 mounted on the production control board 9012, for example production control command transmitted from the main board 9011, operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and rotary encoder, and confirm the state of the mode changeover switch 9031 An input port for capturing various signals such as a signal that enables confirmation of the state of the display changeover switch 9032, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the production control board 9012. Configured. For example, from the output port of the I/O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 9013, a command transmitted to the lamp control board 9014, etc. A command (driving signal) or the like to be transmitted to the movable accessory 901000 is output.

The audio control board 9013 includes, for example, an input/output driver, an IC for voice synthesis, an audio data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like. As an example, in the voice control board 9013, the sound number data indicated by the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the voice synthesizing IC via the input/output driver. The voice synthesizing IC generates voice and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit amplifies the output level of the voice synthesizing IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume, and outputs the voice signal to the speakers 908L and 908R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesizing IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voices and sound effects. The data stored in the voice data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of voices and sound effects in a time series for a predetermined period.

An input/output driver, a lamp driver, and the like are mounted on the lamp control board 9014, for example. As an example, in the lamp control board 9014, the illumination signal transmitted from the production control board 9012 is input to the lamp driver via the input/output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the illumination signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 909 or the like.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko game machine 901, the abnormality is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 908L and 908R via the voice control board 9013, or by controlling the lamp control board 9014. Through the display control unit 90123, an abnormality notification image (error message) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 by controlling the lighting/extinguishing driving of the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED. Notify by displaying. Abnormalities include magnetic anomaly, vibrational anomaly, radio wave anomaly, and the like, and are detected using an abnormality detection sensor group 9026 and the like.

The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is composed of one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality that occurs in the pachinko game machine 901 . The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is not limited to sensors, and may include circuits for detecting abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to sensors, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be composed of sensors for detecting abnormality. One or more sensors, etc. included in each abnormality detection sensor group 9026 are prepared according to each type of abnormality. What the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 specifically includes may be determined according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 901 or the like. Abnormalities that occur in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are phenomena that do not occur or are extremely unlikely to occur in normal games played on the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, and and phenomena such as abnormal radio waves) and phenomena that can interfere with the progress of games, especially those that require notification to players and employees of gaming halls (pachinko parlors, etc.).

The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 includes, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects predetermined radio waves (such as radio waves in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 . It should be noted that a well-known method can be appropriately used to detect an abnormality. When the game control microcomputer 90100 detects magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, and radio anomaly based on the output signal from the anomaly detection sensor group 9026, an anomaly detection designation command specifying that an anomaly has occurred is issued on the main board. 9011 to the production control board 9012, the display of an error message in the image display device 905, the output of warning sounds from the speakers 908L and 908R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 909 when an abnormality occurs, etc., indicating that an abnormality has occurred. Notification is made. For example, when an abnormality occurs, an image of characters "An error has occurred." is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905, as shown in FIG. 76(f).

Here, the notifying means such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909 not only indicate that an abnormality has occurred, but also indicate any type of abnormality such as a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, or opening of the front door. It may be notified in a identifiable manner whether an abnormality is detected.

The magnetic anomaly notification is an anomaly notification performed when a magnetic anomaly (an anomaly in which a magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko game machine 901, in which case there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. There is cheating such as moving a game medium by a magnet to win a prize, or clogging a predetermined area with a game medium in order to guide the game medium to the prize winning opening. By notifying the magnetic anomaly, such an act is prevented in advance. For example, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 . The CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of magnetic abnormality by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (indicates magnetic force→magnetic abnormality present). When the magnetic anomaly is detected, an anomaly detection designation command specifying that the magnetic anomaly has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the magnetic anomaly is notified in the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of characters "Magnetic error has occurred."

Notification of vibration abnormality is, for example, notification of abnormality that can be executed in a pachinko game machine or the like in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is provided. There is a fraudulent act of intentionally shaking a pachinko game machine to change the flowing direction of a game medium toward a winning opening such as a big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, such actions are prevented in advance. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 . The CPU 90103 determines whether there is an abnormality due to vibration (vibration abnormality) by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration with strength equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (vibration abnormality). → vibration abnormal). When the vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command specifying that the vibration abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the vibration abnormality is notified in the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of characters "a vibration error has occurred."

The radio wave anomaly notification is an anomaly notification performed when an radio wave anomaly (predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko game machine 901, in this case, there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. By applying radio waves to the starter switch (first starter switch 9022A and second starter switch 9022B), the count switch 9023, etc., these switches are switched on/off, etc., and winning is illegally generated and prize balls are generated. There is cheating to get. To prevent such an act from being performed by announcing radio wave anomaly. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.) is provided. The CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of radio wave abnormality by determining whether the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicates reception of predetermined radio wave→abnormal radio wave). When the radio wave anomaly is detected, an anomaly detection designation command specifying that the radio wave anomaly has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the radio wave anomaly is notified in the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of characters "A radio wave error has occurred."

Both the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are configured by DIP switches (Dual In-line Package switches) and are provided outside the game area of the game board 902 . The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032, which are DIP switches, are operated by switching the operating portion between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of a slide type, the position of the knob can be changed between one end and the other end). By switching to the side), it is possible to switch the processing (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 90120. When the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 903, the glass door frame 903a covers the front surface of the game board 902, so the player cannot operate the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032. It has become. Note that the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 operate when the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 903 (the state shown in FIG. 34). Since it is installed in an invisible position, it is not shown in FIG.

As described above, the game arcade clerk inserts the key into the keyhole 9061 to open the locking device (not shown), and opens the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the game machine frame 903. It is possible to operate the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 provided on the game board 902 (switching of DIP switches). When the operation of the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 is completed, the glass door frame 903a is returned to the closed state with respect to the game machine frame 903, the key is inserted into the keyhole 9061, and the locking device (not shown) is activated. ) are closed.

When the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the first position, the voltage of the mode changeover terminal of the effect control CPU90120 is in a Low state, and when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, effect control The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 90120 becomes High. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the operating portion of the mode switching switch 9031 is at the first position, that is, the image display device 905 displays information for players (for example, demo screen, etc.), and does not display the information of the prize number management table, which will be described later, on the image display device 905 . On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operating portion of the mode switching switch 9031 is at the second position, that is, the image display device 905 displays information for the clerk (for example, The number of winnings to each winning slot, etc.) is specified, and information of a winning number management table, which will be described later, is displayed on the image display device 905 .

When the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in a Low state, and when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, effect control The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 90120 becomes High. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operating portion of the display switching switch 9032 is at the first position, that is, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905. By specifying that display is not permitted, display of information (information that can specify the number of winnings to the general winnings) based on a display control table to be described later on the image display device 905 is prohibited. On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the operating portion of the display switching switch 9032 is at the second position, that is, the image display device 905 is displayed to the general winning opening. Permission to display the number is specified, and information based on a display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winnings) is permitted to be displayed on the image display device 905. do.

In this embodiment, the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are provided on the front side of the game board 902 (the surface facing the player). , may be provided on the back side of the game board 902 (on the game island side). In such a configuration, by rotating the game machine frame 903 forward with respect to the outer frame, the mode changeover switch 9031 and/or the display changeover switch 9032 provided on the back side of the game board 902 are activated. can be operated.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, there is a starting winning command as described above. As the starting winning command, a starting winning mouth designation command indicating whether the starting winning mouth has occurred for the first starting winning mouth or the second starting winning mouth, and a starting winning mouth designation command for the first starting winning mouth or the second starting winning mouth There is a determination result specifying command at the time of start winning, which indicates the big hit determination result and the big hit type determination result at the time of winning of the game ball.

The CPU 90103 determines the effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the number of game balls to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When winning is detected, the random number for judging the jackpot and the random number for judging the jackpot type are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted random number for judging the jackpot and the random number for judging the jackpot type are stored in the first random number storage area for the first special figure. It stores in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the number of first reserved memories after addition including the effective start winning prize), and sets a command designating "first starting prize winning opening" as a starting winning prize opening designation command. In addition, the CPU 90103 extracts (stores) the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state). Execute the determination at the time of starting winning to determine whether or not.

In this startup winning judgment, if the big-hit judgment random number does not match the big-hit judgment value in the big-hit judgment table, a startup winning judgment result designating command designating "loss" is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is stored in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in . Then, a determination result designation command at the time of start winning, which designates "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching judgment value, is set. For example, a command specifying "non-probability variable big hit" or a command specifying "probability variable big hit" is set as the command for specifying the judgment result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set starting winning opening designation command (“first starting winning opening” designation) and starting winning timing determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012 .

In addition, the CPU 90103 determines that the starting winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value When it detects an invalid starting prize that is paid out but is not a target for a special game, it sets a command to designate the "first starting prize opening" as a start prize opening designation command, and specifies the judgment result at the time of start winning. As a command, set blank data specifying that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set starting winning opening designation command (“first starting winning opening” designation) and starting winning timing determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012 .

The CPU 90103 determines the effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, the number of game balls to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When winning is detected, the random number for judging the jackpot and the random number for judging the jackpot type are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted random number for judging the jackpot and the random number for judging the jackpot type are stored in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. It stores in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the number of second reserved memories after addition including the effective start winning prize), and sets a command designating a "second starting prize winning opening" as a starting winning prize opening designation command. In addition, the CPU 90103 extracts (stores) the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state). Execute the determination at the time of starting winning to determine whether or not.

In this startup winning judgment, if the big-hit judgment random number does not match the big-hit judgment value in the big-hit judgment table, a startup winning judgment result designating command designating "loss" is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is stored in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in . Then, a determination result specifying command at the time of starting winning that specifies "big hit" of the big win type corresponding to the matching determination value is set. For example, a command specifying "non-probability variable big hit" or a command specifying "probability variable big hit" is set as the command for specifying the determination result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set starting winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and starting winning timing determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012 .

In addition, the CPU 90103 determines that the starting winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value When it detects an invalid start winning that is paid out but is not the target of the special game, it sets a command to specify the "second start winning opening" as the starting winning opening designation command, and specifies the judgment result at the time of starting winning. As a command, set blank data specifying that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set starting winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and starting winning timing determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012 .

In addition, in this embodiment, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the start winning is determined, and based on the determination result Although the pre-reading notice effect is executed, it is not limited to such a form, based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, the variation pattern of the variable display corresponding to the start winning is determined, Based on the determination result, the pre-reading announcement effect may be executed. For example, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a variation pattern of super reach, compared to the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a non-reach variation pattern, so that the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate. good to do

Specifically, when the CPU 90103 detects the effective start winning of the game ball into the first start winning hole, the CPU 90103 extracts a variation pattern determination random number from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted variation pattern determination random number as a jackpot determination. Together with the random number and the random number for judging the jackpot type, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the random number storage area for the first special figure (the first reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning prize). In addition, when the CPU 90103 detects the effective start winning of the game ball into the second start winning opening, the CPU 90103 extracts the variation pattern determination random number from the random number circuit 90104, and converts the extracted variation pattern determination random number into the big hit determination random number and the big hit. Together with the random number for type determination, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number in the random number storage area for the second special figure (the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning prize).

Here, in the ROM 90101, a variation pattern determination table for loss in which a random number range corresponding to each of the loss variation patterns shown in FIG. 41 (A) is set, and each of the big hit variation patterns shown in FIG. A big hit variation pattern determination table in which the random number range is set is stored.

CPU 90103 refers to the variation pattern determination table for loss and extracts (stores It is determined whether the random number for determining the variation pattern is included in the random number range of any variation pattern, and the variation pattern corresponding to the random number for determining the variation pattern is specified, and the specified variation pattern is "non-reach out". , "Normal Reach Loss", and "Super Reach Loss".

On the other hand, the CPU 90103, when the judgment result of the start winning judgment (the display result specified by the start winning judgment result designation command) is either "non-probability variable big hit" or "probability variable big hit", the big hit variation With reference to the pattern determination table, determine which variation pattern random number range the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination random number is included in, and specify the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number Then, a variation pattern determination result specification command at the time of starting winning is set to specify whether the specified variation pattern is a "normal reach jackpot" or a "super reach jackpot".

In addition, when the CPU 90103 detects the invalid start winning, it sets blank data designating that the start winning is not a valid start winning as the variation pattern determination result designation command at the start winning.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set starting winning timing fluctuation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 9012 as a starting winning timing command together with the aforementioned starting winning opening designation command and starting winning judgment result designation command.

The effect control CPU 90120 includes a start winning opening designation command specifying "first starting winning opening" and a start winning judgment result designation command including valid data that is not blank data (and a starting winning opening including valid data that is not blank data) When the winning variation pattern judgment result designation command) is received, the start winning judgment result designation command (and the start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) are stored in the first reservation in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of memories (the number of first reserved memories after addition including the valid start winning prize), and store the start winning mouth designation command designated as "second start winning mouth" and valid data that is not blank data When receiving a start winning judgment result designation command including valid data other than blank data (and a start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command containing valid data that is not blank data), the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment Result designation command) is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number (the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning prize) in the start winning prize command storage area for the second special figure. Effect control CPU90120 is stored in the start winning command storage area by confirming the start winning judgment result designation command (and the start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command), the first special before the start condition is established. By estimating the display result (and variation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure, it is possible to execute the pre-reading announcement effect.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120 includes a start winning opening designation command and a start winning opening designation command including blank data (and a start winning timing determination result designation command including blank data) is received, the invalid start winning to the first start winning opening is specified, and the start winning determination result designation command (and start winning variation pattern determination result designation command) for the first special figure It is possible to store the winning history to the first starting winning port in the winning history storage area described later without storing it in the starting winning command storage area (excluding it from the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect). When receiving the starting winning mouth designation command specified by "starting winning mouth" and the start winning judgment result designation command including blank data (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command including blank data), to the second start winning mouth Identifying that an invalid start winning has occurred, do not store the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure (prefetch It is possible to store the winning history of the second start winning opening in the winning history storage area described later.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the production control board 9012, there is a variation pattern designation command as described above. As shown below, the main board 9011 determines a variation pattern according to the special figure display result to be derived and displayed when starting the variable display of the special symbol, and notifies the effect control board 9012 of the variation pattern. Outputs a variation pattern specification command for The effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern is stored in advance in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012, and the effect control CPU 90120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern specification command. Data is selected, and performance control is executed according to the selected performance control data.

CPU90103, when the first start condition is established and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for judging the kind of the big hit stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure, And among the random numbers for determining the variation pattern, the random number for determining the jackpot and the random number for determining the type of the jackpot in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of retained memories = 1), and the random number for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent The random number for judging the big win, the random number for judging the type of big win, and the random number for judging the variation pattern in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, start judging whether or not the read-out big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value stored in the big hit determination table corresponding to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state). Execute time determination.

In this start time determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command specifying "loss", and together with the big hit determination random number It is determined whether the random number for determining the variation pattern read from the storage area at the beginning is included in the random number range of any variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, and the random number for determining the variation pattern is determined. By specifying the variation pattern, the "loss variation pattern" is determined.

When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, along with setting a variable display result notification command that specifies "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching judgment value, the random number for judging the variation pattern read out from the first storage area together with the random number for judging the big hit is the variation for the big hit. A ``jackpot variation pattern'' is determined by determining which variation pattern is included in the random number range set in the pattern determination table and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, CPU90103 outputs a variation pattern specification command that specifies the set variable display result notification command and the determined variation pattern along with the variation start command that specifies the variation start of the first special figure.

CPU90103, when the second start condition is established and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for judging the kind of the big hit stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure, And among the random numbers for determining the variation pattern, the random number for determining the jackpot and the random number for determining the type of the jackpot in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of retained memories = 1), and the random number for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent The random number for judging the big win, the random number for judging the type of big win, and the random number for judging the variation pattern in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, start judging whether or not the read-out big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value stored in the big hit determination table corresponding to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state). Execute time determination.

In this start time determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command specifying "loss", and together with the big hit determination random number It is determined whether the random number for determining the variation pattern read from the storage area at the beginning is included in the random number range of any variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, and the random number for determining the variation pattern is determined. By specifying the variation pattern, the "loss variation pattern" is determined.

When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, along with setting a variable display result notification command that specifies "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching judgment value, the random number for judging the variation pattern read from the top storage area together with the random number for judging the big hit is used as the variation for the big hit. A ``jackpot variation pattern'' is determined by determining which variation pattern is included in the random number range set in the pattern determination table and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, CPU90103 outputs a variation pattern specification command that specifies the set variable display result notification command and the determined variation pattern along with the variation start command that specifies the variation start of the second special figure.

Production control CPU90120, when receiving the variation start command specifying the start of variation of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, it determines a fixed decoration pattern (final stop pattern) according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure, the first storage area = storage area corresponding to 1) Delete the start winning determination result designation command (and start winning variation pattern determination result designation command), and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result designation command (and start winning command) is shifted one by one to the previous storage area.

In addition, the effect control CPU90120 is stored in the ROM90121 the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the variation pattern, so that the reach state is established at the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command, decoration Controls variable display of symbols. That is, in the production control CPU 90120, it is possible to grasp the establishment timing of the ready-to-win state according to the variation pattern.

Production control CPU90120, when receiving the variation start command specifying the start of variation of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, it determines a fixed decoration pattern (final stop pattern) according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure, = storage area corresponding to 1) Delete the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning variation pattern judgment result designation command), and the subsequent storage area start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted one by one to the previous storage area.

Also, when the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D detect that the game ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, any general winning opening to the game ball A general winning hole specification command specifying whether has won is output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 . That is, when the game ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, a general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the first general winning opening 9050A is output, and the game ball is detected by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. When detected, a general winning opening designation command specifying winning to the second general winning opening 9050B is output, and when the game ball is detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C, the third general winning opening 9050C A general winning hole designation command designating winning is output, and when the game ball is detected by the fourth general winning hole switch 9024D, a general winning hole designation command designating winning to the fourth general winning hole 9050D is output. .

Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and the winning of the game ball to any of the general winning openings based on the received general winning opening designation command. . In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, starts winning to specify which starting winning opening the game ball wins. It is designed to receive mouth-specified commands. As a result, the effect control CPU 90120 stores information capable of identifying the general winning opening in which the winning has occurred and information capable of identifying the starting winning opening in which the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 in accordance with the order of occurrence of the winning. It is possible.

The effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the general winning opening specified by the received general winning opening designation command (the general winning opening in which the game ball has won). Also, the starting winning opening specified by the received starting winning opening designation command (the starting winning opening in which the game ball has won) is either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , Winning histories for each general winning opening and each starting winning opening are stored in the RAM 90122 . For example, when the game ball wins in the order of the second general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening 9050C, [Second general winning opening winning opening, first starting winning opening, first general winning opening, second starting winning opening, third general winning opening] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 .

In addition, when the winning to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 issues a starting winning opening designation command and a starting winning judgment result designation command. , may be transmitted prior to the general winning slot designation command. For example, detection by one of the first start switch 9022A and the second start switch 9022B, and one of the first general winning switch 9024A to the fourth general winning switch 9024D By the general winning switch When the detection is confirmed at almost the same time (for example, in the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 90100 replaces the starting winning opening designation command and the starting winning judgment result designation command with the general winning opening designation command. It is better to give priority to sending first. By using such a transmission order, the effect control CPU 90120 recognizes that it has already received the starting winning opening designation command and the starting winning judgment result designation command when it receives the general winning opening designation command. It is possible, and as a specific effect to be executed based on the winning in the general winning hole, it is possible to execute a pre-reading advance notice effect based on the previously received start winning determination result specifying command.

It should be noted that, if winning to the general winning opening occurs multiple times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a plurality of general winning opening designation commands according to a predetermined priority order. do. For example, the detection by the first general winning opening switch 9024A and the detection by the second general winning opening switch 9024B are confirmed at almost the same time (for example, in the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 90100 , the general winning slot designation command for designating the winning of a general winning slot, which is more difficult to win, may be transmitted first with priority. In addition, if the number of prize balls to be given differs depending on the general prize winning opening, the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning of the general winning opening with the larger number of winning balls may be transmitted first with priority. good.

In addition, when the count switch 9023 detects that the game ball has entered the large winning opening, a large winning opening winning command specifying that the game ball has entered the large winning opening is sent from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the production control board 9012. output to Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening based on the received large winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the start winning opening described above and the winning to the general winning opening As with the history, it is possible to store the winning history for the big winning opening in the winning history storage area.

In addition, the production control CPU90120 receives the jackpot start designation command that designates the start of the jackpot game state and receives the jackpot end designation command that designates the end of the jackpot game state. , and the number of receptions of the general prize-winning port designation command can be counted separately. As a result, the number of winnings to the big winning openings and the number of winnings to the general winning openings during the period in which the jackpot game state is controlled can be counted separately. It is also possible to display it on 905 .

Also, when the game ball is launched into the game area 9010, the game ball usually wins any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening at a certain frequency. When the variable display of the decoration pattern is not executed and the game ball has not won any of the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), the game There is a high possibility that the player is in a non-playing state in which the player is not playing a game. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decoration pattern, and receives the start winning opening designation command, general winning opening designation command, and large winning opening winning command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to determine the end of the game to determine that the game has ended.

FIG. 36A is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 90122. FIG. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings to each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of wins to each general winning hole for each game state based on the jackpot start designation command, jackpot end designation command, game state designation command, and general winning gate designation command. . In addition, the game state designation command is the timing at which the game state changes (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state to be controlled, for example, when the jackpot game state ends or when the time saving state ends). ), or at the timing when the variable display of the special symbols is started (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state when the special game is executed).

In this example, the number of winnings to the second general winning opening 9050B is 50 (total for the entire period), of which the number of winnings in the normal state is 46, the number of winnings in the jackpot gaming state is 2, and the number of winnings in the variable state. is 1, and the number of prizes in the time saving state is 1. That is, the number of wins during the left-handed period is 46, and the number of wins during the right-handed period is 4. The total number of winnings to the general winning openings is 108, of which the number of winnings during the left-handed period is 81, and the number of winnings during the right-handed period is 27.

In this way, along with the number of winnings to each general winning slot, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored and displayed on the image display device 905 (or corresponding to the pachinko game machine 901 is transmitted to a game device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided as a controller and displayed on a display device provided in the game device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device provided in the information management device. Therefore, in the game arcade, it is possible to grasp the ease with which a game ball enters each general winning hole and use it for the maintenance of the game nail. For example, when the number of winning game balls into a certain general winning hole is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail in the vicinity of the general winning hole is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

Winning number information in the winning number management table (number of winnings to each general winning slot, number of winnings to general winning slots in each game state, number of winnings to general winning slots during left-handed period and right-handed period, to general winning slots ) is displayed on the image display device 905 when the operation part of the mode switch 9031 is in the second position (in the case of maintenance mode), and when it is in the first position (in the case of game mode) Do not show. The game hall clerk switches the mode changeover switch 9031 from the first position to the second position to display the winning number information on the winning number management table, and performs maintenance of the game nail with reference to this, and accesses the general winning opening. To make the winning frequency of game balls appropriate. After the maintenance is completed, the mode changeover switch 9031 is returned from the second position to the first position.

In this embodiment, the winning number information in the winning number management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability variable state, time saving state, jackpot game state), and the execution status of the special symbol game (special symbol Whether or not the variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the special game), the execution status of the general game (whether the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed, and the number of reserved memories of the general game) Regardless, the image is continuously displayed on the image display device 905 while the operating portion of the mode changeover switch 9031 is at the second position. However, it is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information of the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the game state. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and even if the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the variable probability state, the time saving state, and the big hit game state. You can do it.

Also, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the special game. It is possible to display only during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game is 0, even if the operation part of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position , the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or the period during which the reserved memory number of the special symbol game is not 0, may not be displayed. Also, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the normal game. It is possible to display only during the period when the variable display of the normal pattern is not executed and the number of reserved memories of the normal pattern game is 0, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. , During the period when variable display of normal symbols is being executed, or during the period when the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol game is not 0, it may not be displayed.

The winning number information stored in the winning number management table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (settings (1) to (3) in FIG. 38). Settings on the screen), it is updated based on the reception of the general winning hole designation command. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko game machine 901 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the game hall is closed. Then, the winning number information for each game machine is stored in the game information management device for each business day. In addition, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is erased (reset) when the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased (reset) based on the execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area. is not erased, and after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, or the reset operation by the clerk (for example, the operation button when the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 9030).

For example, in a state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 (the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (display setting)), the game hall clerk presses the operation button 9030 in a predetermined manner. By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of prizes for all items (the number of prizes for each general prize gate and the total number of prizes for general prize gates) stored in the prize number management table can be reset to 0. It is possible.

FIG. 36(b) is a diagram showing an example of win number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 90122. As shown in FIG. In this display control table, the number of prizes won to each of the general prize winning ports of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can tally the number of prizes awarded to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening designation command. In this example, the total number of prizes won to the general prize gates is 11, of which the number of prizes won to the first general prize gate 9050A is 3, the number of prizes won to the second general prize gate 9050B is 5, and the number of prizes won to the third general prize gate 9050B. The number of prizes won to 9050C is two, and the number of prizes to the fourth general prize gate 9050D is one.

As shown in FIG. 37, the number-of-wins information in the display control table (specifically, the number of objects displayed in accordance with the total number of wins) is displayed when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the second position (display setting). case) and the operation button 9030 is used to set the display of the number of general winnings, it is displayed on the image display device 905 . When the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), regardless of whether or not the operation button 9030 is set to display the number of general winnings, the winnings of the display control table are displayed. Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Also, even if the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of display setting), if the operation button 9030 is not set to display the number of general winnings (in the case of non-display setting) , the winning number information in the display control table is not displayed.

That is, when the store clerk of the game arcade sets the display prohibition of the winning number information with the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. there is Only when the store clerk of the game parlor performs display permission setting of the winning number information with the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect) is executed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole. As for effects, as shown in FIG. 37, when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (execution permission setting) and the operation button 9030 is used to set the display of the number of general wins (execution of a specific effect). setting) is performed. When the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of execution disapproval setting), it depends on whether or not the operation button 9030 is used to set the display of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect). However, the specific effect is not executed (execution is prohibited). Also, even if the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), if the operation button 9030 is not set to display the number of general winnings (in the case of non-execution setting). , no specific effect is executed.

That is, when the game arcade clerk sets the display changeover switch 9032 to prohibit the execution of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the player's execution setting operation. Only when the game arcade clerk sets the execution permission of the specific effect with the display changeover switch 9032, the specific effect can be executed according to the player's execution setting operation.

Thus, in this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Game hall side: display changeover switch 9032, player side: operation button 9030). Not limited to such a form, whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning openings and whether or not to enable execution of a specific effect may be individually set, and may be set by different operating means. can be

The winning number information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode switching switch 9031, the setting state of the display switching switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (settings (1) to (3) in FIG. 38). Settings on the screen), it is updated based on the reception of the general winning gate designation command. Also, the winning number information (the number of winnings to each general winning slot and the total number of winnings) stored in the display control table is a specific winning history corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the production (A or B), it is not erased, and when the game end determination is performed by the production control CPU 90120, for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. It is erased (reset to 0) when the start winning opening designation command, general winning opening designation command, and big winning opening winning command are not received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute).

When the number of wins and the total number of wins to each general winning slot stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning slot displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed. The winning number of is also reset to 0. For example, the coin-shaped object (win-win display) displayed on the right side of the characters "general win" on the screen of FIG. It should be noted that when the number of winnings to the general winning openings is not displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are used to determine the end of the game. is reset to 0 based on , next time the number of winnings to the general winnings is displayed on the image display device 905, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total winning number) is displayed.

Further, the store clerk or the player of the amusement center presses the operation button 9030 in a state in which the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905 (a state in which objects corresponding to the total winning number are displayed). By pressing the button for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings for all items stored in the display control table (the number of winnings for each general winnings opening and the total winnings for general winning openings) is displayed regardless of the game end determination. number) can be reset to 0, and along with this, the winning number information displayed on the image display device 905 is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are erased).

As shown in FIG. 38, the player's display setting operation is accepted by operating the operation button 9030 during the display of the demo screen that is not related to the progress of the special game and the progress of the normal game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the variable display of the decoration pattern is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening winning command are set for a predetermined period (for example, 1 38(1) is displayed at predetermined intervals during the display of the demonstration screen.

On the screen of FIG. 38(1), a message "Press the enter button to set the display of the number of general wins." An arrow prompting you to press is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 9030 according to the instruction, the selection screen of FIG. 38(2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon including the characters "display" and an icon including the characters "not display" are displayed, along with a message "select button after selection with jog dial". After rotating the jog dial, an arrow prompting the user to press it is displayed.

If the number of prizes won in the general prize pool is to be displayed, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is turned to the left to select the icon containing the characters "display" and display the number of prizes in the general prize pool. If the winning number is not to be displayed, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is rotated to the right to select an icon including the characters "not displayed". In this example, an icon containing the characters "display" is selected.

Then, when the operation button 9030 is pressed while the icon including the word "display" is selected in FIG. 38(2), as shown in FIG. A message is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal demo screen shown in FIG. 38(4). By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the number of winnings to the general winning openings can be displayed on the image display device 905 so that the player can grasp it. Here, it is assumed that the total number of prizes stored in the display control table (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of prizes in FIG. 39) is immediately displayed when the setting operation is completed. The total winning number is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 905 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You can do so.

On the other hand, when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the characters "not displayed" selected in FIG. return to the normal demo screen. By this setting operation, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening is not displayed on the image display device 905 .

Here, in this embodiment, only when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the second position, that is, on the game arcade side, the winning number information stored in the display control table is sent to the image display device 905. Only when the display is permitted, the image display device 905 displays a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings for the general winnings, as shown in FIGS. shall be displayed. When the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall does not permit the image display device 905 to display the winning number information stored in the display control table, The screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of prizes won in the general prize slots, as shown in FIGS. 38(1) to 38(3), is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37 described above, it is determined that the number of prizes won in the general winning slot is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 9032 regardless of the display setting/non-display setting of the player. be done.

In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game hall and the players regarding whether or not to display the number of winning game balls into the general winning openings. In this embodiment, only when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) on the gaming arcade side, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings for the general winnings. It is possible. In other words, in this embodiment, the intention of the gaming facility takes precedence over the intention of the player. Therefore, if the game hall does not want the player to know the number of winnings in the general winnings, it is preferable to set the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 to the first position (non-display position).

Also, in the case where the intention of the amusement arcade takes precedence over the intention of the player, even if the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the amusement arcade side ( Despite the fact that it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winnings regardless of the settings on the player's side, the player's side as shown in FIGS. If the setting screen is displayed, the player may misunderstand that the number of winnings to the general winnings can be displayed by the player's own setting operation.

In order to prevent such erroneous recognition, in this embodiment, when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game arcade side (regardless of the settings on the player side) When it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the winning opening, the setting screens for the player side as shown in FIGS. 38(1) to 38(3) are not displayed. In other words, the fact that "the number of winnings in the general winnings can be displayed according to the setting operation on the player's side" itself is not performed.

The display setting on the game arcade side (the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (the icon containing the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 38(2) If it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winnings by pressing the operation button 9030 in the selected state, as shown in FIG. The characters "general prize" are displayed. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), as shown in FIG. (Winning correspondence display) is displayed.

The number of coin-shaped objects displayed on the image display device 905 corresponds to the total winning number of the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 39 (3), each time a game ball wins a prize in a general winning port (first general winning port 9050A to fourth general winning port 9050D), the total winning number of the display control table is incremented by one. As a result, the number of coin-shaped objects also increases. Also, the coin-shaped object includes the number "10", which indicates the number of prize balls to be awarded when the game balls win in the general prize winning opening. Therefore, the player can also grasp the number of prize balls given according to the winning in the general prize opening. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be given when the game ball wins in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, big winning opening) is stored in advance in the ROM 90121. and

In this way, by displaying the objects corresponding to the winning of game balls into the general winning openings and increasing the number of displayed objects according to the increase in the number of winnings, the player can use the general winning openings. It is possible to easily grasp that a game ball has won a prize in the normal winning slot and the number of game balls that have won a prize in a general winning hole.

When the performance control CPU 90120 determines the end of the game, as described above, the winning number of game balls into each general winning opening and the total winning number stored in the display control table are reset to 0. As a result, as shown in FIG. 39(4), all the coin-shaped objects displayed on the right side of the characters "general winning" are erased. In other words, it is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is 0.

In this way, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in the non-game state, the notified number of winnings to the general winning opening is reset to 0 (general It is possible to prevent the number of winnings in the general winnings from being grasped by the player who plays the game on the gaming machine after that. .

In this embodiment, the condition for judging the end of the game and the condition for shifting to the above-described demo screen are set as common conditions, so that when the demo screen is displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning slots notified is 0. will be reset to In this way, when the demo screen is displayed, the reported number of winnings to the general winnings may be reset to zero.

As described above, when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (Fig. 38), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each winning to the general winnings opening shown in Fig. 39 is not executed. . In these cases, the characters "general winning number" shown in FIG. Do not show.

It should be noted that if the number of objects (regular objects) displayed for each winning in the general prize pool is increased, the screen becomes more difficult to see as the number of winnings increases. In that case, instead of the predetermined number of normal objects, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a different aspect from the normal object containing the number "100"). As a result, it is possible to notify a predetermined number of wins and the number of winning balls corresponding to the predetermined number of wins in one special object display area without requiring a predetermined number of normal object display areas.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of displayed objects increases by one each time a prize is won in the general prize gate. Objects may be displayed in accordance with winning times. For example, the number of displayed objects may be incremented by one for each five wins made to the general prize pool.

In addition, the display setting on the game arcade side (the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 38(2) Pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon selected), if it is determined to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, as shown in FIG. , the number of prizes won to the general prize gates is displayed together with the number of prizes won to the big prize gates.

FIG. 40(1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 905 when the jackpot game state is controlled. When the first round game is started, characters of ``general winning number'' are displayed, and on the right side thereof, the number of winnings to the general winning openings in the jackpot game state is displayed, and ``large winning number'' is displayed. is displayed, and the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big winning game state is displayed on the right side of the character. In this example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls to be given when the game ball wins to the general winning opening is 10 [0 x 10]. is displayed. In addition, since the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big winning game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins to the big winning opening is 15, [0×15] is displayed. It is Also, in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls [0×10] given in accordance with the winning of the general prize opening and the number of prize balls given in accordance with the prize winning of the big prize opening [0×15] is displayed as [total 0 balls].

As shown in FIG. 40 (2), as a result of the first round game, the game ball wins seven times in the big winning hole (special variable winning ball device 907), and the general winning hole (first general winning hole 9050A The number of general prizes is 1 and the number of big prizes is updated to 7 by winning one game ball in the 4th general prize-winning port 9050D). In addition, the total number of the number of prize balls [1 x 10] given for winning the general prize and the number [7 x 15] given for winning the big prize is 115. Therefore, it is displayed as [total 115 balls]. In addition, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general prize opening [1 x 10 = 10 balls] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the big prize opening [7 x 15 = 105 balls] and may be displayed separately.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 40 (3), as a result of performing the 2nd to 15th (final) round games, in the jackpot game state, the game balls are counted in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907). With 105 wins and game balls winning a total of 3 times in the general prize gates (1st general prize gate 9050A to 4th general prize gate 9050D), the number of general prizes will be 3, and the number of big prizes will be updated to 105. ing. Also, in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning to the general winning opening [3×10] and the number of prize balls given according to winning to the big winning opening [105×15] is displayed as [total 1605 balls] because the total number is 1605.

In this way, by displaying the number of wins to the general winning slots during the period in which the jackpot game state is controlled, separately from the number of winning prizes to the big winning slots, the player can only see the number of wins to the big winning slots. Not only that, but they will also be interested in the number of prizes won in the general prize pool. Also, by distinguishing between the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the main prize opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize winning prizes in the general prize opening, the player can easily win the prize in the main prize opening. They are interested not only in the number of prize balls given in accordance with the prize, but also in the number of prize balls given in accordance with the winning in the general prize opening.

In addition, not only the number of winnings to the general winnings opening in the period controlled to the big hit game state, but also the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state may be displayed on the image display device 905, The image display device 905 may display the number of winnings to the general winnings in the normal state. In addition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the right-handed period (jackpot gaming state, variable probability state or time-saving state) may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state) The number of wins to the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 905 . Also, the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game) may be displayed on the image display device 905.

As described above, when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). is set so as not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (Fig. 38), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period when the jackpot game state shown in Fig. 40 is controlled is displayed. No display control is performed. In these cases, the number of winnings to the general winning openings and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings during the period in which the character "general winning number" shown in FIG. 40 is not displayed and the jackpot game state is controlled , and the sum of the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes won in the general prize opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes won in the big prize opening are not displayed. Only the number of winnings to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winnings are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general prize opening is displayed on the object has been described, but the image display device 905 does not display the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening. You can set it so that it is not displayed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 40, the example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general prize opening and the number of prize balls given according to the winning in the general prize opening are displayed has been described. These items may not be displayed on the device 905 .

In this way, only the number of winnings to the general winning openings may be displayed, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning openings and the number of winning balls given according to the winning of the general winning openings may not be displayed. . With such a configuration, when the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening is changed in the design process of the game machine, the display information of the image display device 905 must be changed according to the change. You can prevent it from disappearing. Conversely, it is also possible to display only the number of prize balls awarded according to the winning in the general prize opening.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game arcade side, the player settings of FIGS. An example has been described in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that the number of wins can be displayed/hidden). Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. The player may be notified that the

In the case of such a configuration, even if the player sets to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the player setting screen of FIGS. 38(1) to (3), The effect control CPU 90120 displays the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 905 based on the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 being set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side. (Priority is given to playground settings). At this time, the image display device 905 may display that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to priority given to the game hall settings.

When the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen of FIG. is notified to the player), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, even if the operation button 9030 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 38(1), the selection screen of FIG. It is also possible to make it impossible to select whether or not to

As described above, in this embodiment, the game hall settings are prioritized over the player settings, but conversely, the player settings may be prioritized over the game hall settings. That is, the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 9030 is pressed while an icon including the word "display" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. When the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon displayed in 905 (the display control of FIGS. 39 and 40 is executed) and the icon including the characters "Do not display" selected on the selection screen of FIG. The number of wins to the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 905 (the display control in FIGS. 39 and 40 is not executed).

Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening according to the order of received setting operations, with the same priority given to the game hall setting and the player setting. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning openings with priority given to the last accepted setting operation (latest setting operation). For example, even if the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screens shown in FIGS. When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening is displayed (the display control of FIGS. 39 and 40 is executed). 38 (1) to (3), even if it is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winnings slot, after that the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position. If (display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (the display control of FIGS. 39 and 40 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winnings slot is displayed on the player setting screens shown in FIGS. is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning openings is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 39 and 40 is not executed). 38 (1) to (3), even if it is set to display the number of winnings in the general winnings slot, the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position after that. If it is set to (non-display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 39 and 40 is not executed).

Further, in this embodiment, the game arcade clerk can operate the display changeover switch 9032 to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 905. By operating the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 905. By operating the switch 9032, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 905. It is also possible to make it impossible to set whether or not to display (for example, setting screens on the player side as shown in FIGS. 38(1) to 38(3) are not provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winnings on the image display device 905 only on the gaming arcade side.

Conversely, by operating the operation button 9030, the player (and the store clerk of the game arcade) can set whether or not to display the number of prizes won in the general prize winning slot on the image display device 905. On the other hand, it is also possible to omit the means for enabling only the game arcade side to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 905 (for example, omitting the display changeover switch 9032). In the case of such a configuration, the player and the store clerk of the game parlor can determine whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). can be set. In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 905 by a setting operation common to the player and the gaming arcade.

Further, in this embodiment, the number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table is displayed on the image display device 905. The information is transmitted to an information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 901, for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the information is displayed. It may be displayed on the device. Also, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The number of prizes won may be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition, since the pachinko game machine 901 is not provided with the mode switching switch 9031, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the game machine (image display device 905). It may be displayed only on the information management device.

In this embodiment, the win number information stored in the win number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 by setting the mode changeover switch 9031, and is stored in the display control table by setting the display changeover switch 9032. An example has been described in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 905. In this way, the winning number management table and the display control table can be displayed without separate switches for controlling the display of each of the winning number management table and the display control table. A common switch may be provided for controlling the display of both the number management table and the display control table. For example, by setting the common switch to the display setting, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are both displayed on the image display device 905, and the common switch is displayed. may be set not to be displayed on the image display device 905.

In FIG. 41(A), when a special symbol (loss symbol) other than a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is stop-displayed as a fixed special symbol, the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) determines. The deviation variation pattern is exemplified. In addition, FIG. 41(B) illustrates a big hit variation pattern determined by the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) when a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern. It is By setting the special figure fluctuation time for each variation pattern, the production control CPU 90120 that receives the variation pattern designation command can execute the production according to the special figure fluctuation time.

Of the loss variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are production modes of non-reach loss, PX003 is a variation pattern that is production mode of normal reach loss, and PX004 is a production mode of super reach loss. It is a variation pattern. Of the jackpot variation patterns, PY003 is a variation pattern for a normal reach jackpot presentation mode, and PY004 is a variation pattern for a super reach jackpot presentation mode. Here, the super ready-to-win variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is executed after the ready-to-win state is established. The variation pattern of normal reach is a variation pattern in which the battle effect is not executed after establishment of the reach state.

A battle effect is a effect that suggests whether or not a ally character and an enemy character battle and win or lose a big win. In PX004, which is the change pattern of losing super reach, a defeat effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. A performance is performed.

As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command when the start condition is satisfied in the game control microcomputer 90100 and the variable display of the special figure is executed. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed (before the fixed special symbols are stopped and displayed), a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol of the variable display (that is, the big hit). It is possible to execute a variable result announcement effect that announces that the game is controlled to the game state.

In the variable result notice effect shown in FIG. 42(a), only the voice effect of outputting the sound "Now is your chance!" is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. It is possible to execute the variable advance notice effect of the second mode in which the role product effect in which the movable accessory 901000 operates (rotates and lights up) is executed. Due to such a difference in presentation mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that a big hit symbol will be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is satisfied).

The effect control CPU 90120, when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning slot is satisfied, based on the foretelling effect determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124, Determines the aspect of the variable result announcement effect. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (timing when the winning condition based on winning in the general winning opening is established), the aspect of the variable result notice effect is determined, and the determined aspect , the variable result announcement effect is executed. It should be noted that, as will be described later, if the variable display of the special design (variable display of the decorative design associated with this) is not executed, the execution of the fluctuation result notice effect is suspended, or the fluctuation result notice effect is performed. don't run

For example, if the variable display result specified by the variable display result notification command received last (the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specifies "missing", the voice effect is given at a rate of 80%. The variable advance notice effect of the first mode accompanied by the only performance is executed, and the variable notice effect of the second mode accompanied by the voice effect and the character object effect is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the variable display that is currently being executed) specifies "jackpot", the voice effect is given at a rate of 25%. The variable advance notice effect of the first mode accompanied by the only performance is executed, and the variable notice effect of the second mode accompanied by the voice effect and the character object effect is executed at a rate of 75%.

In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120, when the effective start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs in the game control microcomputer 90100, the starting winning opening designation command and starting winning Receives the hour determination result specification command. As a result, a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern of variable display which has not yet been executed before the condition for starting the special pattern is established (that is, control to the big win game state). ) can be executed.

In the pre-reading forewarning effect shown in FIG. 42(b), only the voice effect of outputting the sound "Chance coming soon!" from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed. It is possible to execute the second aspect of the look-ahead foretelling effect in which the character object effect in which the object 901000 moves (rotates and lights up) is executed. Due to such a difference in presentation mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed as a variable display result of a variable display in which the starting condition is not satisfied even though the starting condition is satisfied. there is

Effect control CPU 90120, when the conditions for executing a specific effect (specific effect B: pre-reading advance notice effect) based on the winning of a prize in the general winning opening are established, pre-read based on the random number for determining the notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Determines the manner of advance notice production. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (timing when the winning condition based on winning in the general winning opening is established), the aspect of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, and in the determined aspect A look-ahead notice effect is executed. As will be described later, if the number of pending memories is 0, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is suspended or is not executed.

For example, if the starting winning judgment result specifying command that specifies "big hit" is not included in the starting winning judgment result specifying command stored in the starting winning command storage area If it is a time determination result designation command), the first mode of pre-reading announcement effect with only voice effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with voice effect and character effect is executed at a rate of 15%. Execute the pre-reading forewarning effect. On the other hand, if the starting winning judgment result specifying command that specifies "big hit" is included in the starting winning judgment result specifying command stored in the starting winning command storage area, 10% of the voice effect will be given. The first aspect of the fore-reading foretelling effect accompanied by only one is executed, and the second aspect of fore-reading foretelling effect accompanied by the sound effect and the character object effect is executed at a rate of 90%.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a specific effect that is executed based on the winning of a game ball into a general winning hole. A variable result announcement effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed will result in a big win pattern is executed as the specific effect A in this embodiment. In addition, the pre-reading forewarning performance for foretelling whether or not the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied will be a big hit pattern, that is, whether or not the reserved memory includes the one determined as the big hit, is the result of this implementation. It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning openings also serves as the setting of whether or not to enable execution of the specific effect, and the number of winnings to the general winning openings is notified. When the setting is performed (when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 9030 sets the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect) Only when it is performed), the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the specific effect.

As described above, every time the effect control CPU 90120 receives a general winning opening designation command and a start winning opening designation command, it stores the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122. However, this prize winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, a prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are separately provided. When winning occurs in the order of the general winning opening 9050B, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and [1st general winning entry, 2nd general winning entry, 1st start winning entry, 2nd starting entry, 3rd general entry, 4th entry] in each of the winning history storage areas corresponding to the specific effect B will be stored.

In the effect mode in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (the timing at which the winning to one of the winning holes occurs). ), it confirms whether or not the prize winning condition has been established, and determines the execution of the specific effect A based on the fact that the prize winning condition has been established. In addition, in the performance mode in which only the specific performance B can be executed, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B (at the timing when the winning to any of the winning openings occurs). It confirms whether or not the condition is satisfied, and determines the execution of the specific performance B based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. In addition, in the effect mode in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (either at the timing of the winning to the winning slot), it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect A is established in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and the specific effect A is supported. The execution of the specific performance A is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific performance B is established in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B. , execution of the specific performance B is determined based on the establishment of the prize winning condition corresponding to the specific performance B.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a specific effect A execution flag when execution of the specific effect A (fluctuation result advance notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, when the variable display of the special symbols (variable display of the decorative symbols accompanying this) is executed at the timing when the winning condition is established, as described above, the specific effect A corresponding to the result of the variable display is executed. A mode (only voice performance or both voice performance and character product performance) is determined, and the variation result announcement performance of the determined mode is executed, and the specific performance A execution flag is erased. That is, the specific performance A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole without suspending the variable result notice performance.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbols (variable display of the decorative symbols associated with this) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is established, there is no target for the variable result notice effect, so the specific effect A is executed. is suspended and the specific performance A execution flag remains set. The effect control CPU 90120 can grasp that execution of the specific effect A is determined by setting the specific effect A execution flag, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the conditions for starting the variable display of the special symbols (variable display of the decorative symbols associated therewith) are established, the mode of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, and the status is set as a pending state. The set specific performance A execution flag is erased while executing the specified performance A which has been set.

It should be noted that the execution of the specific effect A is suspended when the variable display of the special symbols (the accompanying variable display of the decorative symbols) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is met, without being limited to such a form. Execution of the specific effect A may be stopped without any change, and the specific effect A may not be executed even when the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied after that.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a specific effect B execution flag when execution of the specific effect B (prefetching advance notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, if the number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1 or more, as described above, 1 Determine the aspect of the specific effect B (only voice effect, or both voice effect and character effect) according to the above start winning judgment result, execute the pre-reading advance notice effect of the determined mode, and execute the specific effect Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific performance B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole without suspending the pre-reading notice performance.

On the other hand, when the number of pending memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is established, there is no target for the pre-reading advance notice effect, so the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag remains set. state. The effect control CPU 90120 can understand that execution of the specific effect B is determined by setting the specific effect B execution flag, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more) due to the occurrence of a prize in the start prize winning port, the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the result of determination at the time of start prize winning, The specific performance B in the pending state is executed, and the set specific performance B execution flag is erased.

In addition, not limited to such a form, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without suspending the execution of the specific effect B, and then Even if the start condition is satisfied and the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more, the specific performance B may not be executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 901 is stopped (for example, when a power failure is detected), the winning history storage area (the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and The winning history stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B) and the specific performance execution flag (the specific performance A execution flag and the specific performance B execution flag) are all erased. As a result, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 901 is performed during execution of the specific performance (fluctuation result notice performance, pre-reading notice performance), or in a state where the specific performance is not yet executed after the execution of the specific performance is determined. is stopped and the power supply is restarted after that, the specific effect being executed or the specific effect decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, for a predetermined period after power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the specific effect is not executed because the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased. When it is confirmed that the prize winning condition is established based on the prize winning history after the power supply is started, the specific performance is newly executed.

[First presentation mode]
In the first effect mode shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (1) normal state, the game ball in one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D A winning condition (which will be referred to as a first winning condition) is established every time a wins. When the first winning condition is met, the presence or absence of execution of the specific performance is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and execution of the specific performance A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning hole 9050A to the fourth general winning hole 9050D that are the first winning condition) (including the winning history to either) is deleted.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) variable probability state or time saving state, each time a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D A prize winning condition (referred to as a second prize winning condition) is established. When the second prize winning condition is established, the presence or absence of execution of the specific performance is determined based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and execution of the specific performance A is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D that are the second winning condition) (including the winning history to either) is deleted.

In the first production form and the second production form to the fourth production form described later, (1) the ratio of executing the specific production based on the game ball winning the general winning opening in the normal state is (2 ) It is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening in the probability variable state or the time saving state. In the probability variable state and the time saving state, the player is usually more interested in the winning state of the game ball into the second start winning hole and the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning state of the game ball into the general winning hole. Even if the specific effect is executed, it is difficult to create the same interest as in the normal state. Therefore, in the variable probability state or the time saving state, the execution ratio of the specific performance is reduced compared to the normal state, and the decline in interest in the specific performance is suppressed.

Note that, in the second to fourth presentation modes, which will be described later, unlike the first presentation mode, execution or non-execution of the specific presentation is not determined based on the random number for determining execution of the specific presentation. The second production form to the fourth production form described later are all capable of executing a specific production when the winning condition is established, but (2) the winning condition in the probability variable state or the time saving state is (1) normal The number of wins required is greater than the win condition in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution ratio of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than the execution ratio of the specific effect in the (2) probability variable state or the time saving state.

Thus, by varying the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins in the general winning hole. In addition, contrary to the examples of the first production form to the fourth production form, (2) the ratio of executing the specific production based on the game ball winning the general winning opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state is 1) It may be set to be higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening in the normal state.

It should be noted that, in the second to fourth presentation modes, which will be described later, similarly to the first presentation mode, when the winning condition is established, whether or not to execute the specific presentation is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific presentation. You can do it. For example, in the second production form to the fourth production form, the first winning condition required in the normal state and the second winning condition required in the probability variable state or the time saving state are the same winning conditions, Like the performance form, by differentiating the lottery probability when the winning condition is met in the normal state and the lottery probability when the winning condition is met in the variable probability state or the time saving state, the ratio of executing the specific performance normally and the variable probability You may make it differ from the ratio with which specific production|presentation is performed in a state or a time saving state.

Further, the specific effect may be executed at different rates depending not only on the game state but also on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of start winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot pattern, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is a losing pattern, and when the start winning is won. When there is a pending memory determined to be a big hit, compared with a case where there is no pending memory determined to be a big hit at the time of starting winning (when there is only a pending memory determined to be a deviation at the time of starting winning), A specific effect may be executed at a high rate. In addition, the number of times the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or different types of specific effects can be may be executed only once each time).

[Second production form]
In the second effect form shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (1) normal state, selects two or more of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. A winning condition (first winning condition) is established when a game ball wins one or more times in each of the winning holes. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, to two or more general winning openings out of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, respectively A winning condition (as a second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins two or more times. When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

Thus, in the second production form, and the third production form and the fourth production form described later, the number of winnings to the general winning opening required to execute the specific production in the normal state, the variable probability state or By differentiating the number of winnings to the general winning openings required for executing the specific performance in the time saving state, the number of winnings of the game balls to the general winning openings can be made interesting according to the game state. .

In addition, in the second effect mode, in order to execute the specific effect, at least one game is played for each of two or more general prize winning ports among the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D. Winning the ball is a condition. In this way, by making winning for each of a plurality of general winning holes a condition for executing a specific effect, not only whether or not a general winning hole wins, but also whether a game ball wins any of the general winning holes It can be interesting to see how it was done.

It should be noted that, in the second effect mode, and the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode described later, the start of the big win game state is specified based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 has controlled the game control microcomputer 90100 to the big win game state. When the production control CPU 90120 receives the jackpot start designation command, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific production A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific production B are both erased. It is assumed that

In addition, in the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode which will be described later, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area is not deleted based on the game state being changed. . Therefore, when the first winning condition is met, it means that the first winning condition is met as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state. Based on this, the first winning condition is not necessarily established. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the variable probability state or the time saving state. The second prize winning condition is not always satisfied based on the prize winning history of only the time saving state. In addition, not limited to such a form, the winning history of the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the variable probability state or the time saving state, and the transition from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state Also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition has been established based on the winning history of only the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition has been established is confirmed based on the winning history of only the variable probability state or the time saving state. You can check it.

[Third production mode]
In the third effect mode shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (1) normal state, within 120 seconds, the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening A winning condition (first winning condition) is established when a game ball has won a prize three times or more in the winning hole 9050D). When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU90120, when the gaming state is (2) probability variable state or time saving state, within 120 seconds, general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D) A winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of five times or more. When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history of the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). set). Then, if the winning condition is not established within the period of 120 seconds (when the timer for the specific performance A times out), the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance A is erased without executing the specific performance A. . On the other hand, if the winning conditions are satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (if the winning conditions are satisfied before the timer for the specific effect A times out), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history of the specific effect A winning history storage area. is erased.

In this way, the winning frequency required to execute the specific effect in the normal state (the number of winning prizes within a predetermined period) and the winning frequency required to execute the specific effect in the variable probability state or the time saving state (predetermined period The number of prizes in the number of wins) is different, so that the frequency of winning prizes in the general prize openings can be made interesting according to the game state.

In addition, in the third effect mode, when the specific effect A targeting the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning hole in the predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only one variable display period If the winning conditions are satisfied based on the winning history), a specific effect A is executed that targets a variable display different from the variable display that was executed when the first general winning slot was won in a predetermined period (120 seconds). In some cases, the winning condition is established based on the winning history in a plurality of variable display periods.

It should be noted that, as in the third effect mode, when the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slots in a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number, the specific effect is executed, and the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. The specific effect may be executed when the number of winnings to the general winning openings in the period reaches a predetermined number. For example, until the reserved memory of the special game is completely consumed, that is, when the number of prizes won in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number within the period during which the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories is executed. A production may be executed.

[Fourth presentation mode]
In the fourth effect mode shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (1) normal state, the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) , starting winning mouth (either the first starting winning mouth or the second starting winning mouth), general winning mouth (one of the first general winning mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning mouth 9050D), and the game ball wins in that order. Winning a prize condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is established by winning a prize. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), starting winning opening (first starting Winning mouth and second starting winning mouth), general winning mouth (any of 1st general winning mouth 9050A to 4th general winning mouth 9050D), general winning mouth (1st general winning mouth 9050A to 4th general winning mouth) General winning hole 9050D), the winning conditions (second winning conditions) are established by the game balls entering the winning holes in this order. When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

In this way, the specific effect is executed on the condition that the winning order of the general winning opening and other winning openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning opening becomes a specific order. Thus, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the winning state of the general winning openings but also in the winning order of the general winning openings and the other winning openings.

It should be noted that the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in the general winning opening and the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in other winning openings may be varied. For example, the winning conditions may be established by winning two or more consecutive prizes in the general prize winning opening after three or more consecutive winnings in the starting prize winning opening. In addition, which one of a plurality of general prize openings or which of a plurality of other prize openings the player has won may be used as a prize condition. For example, the winning conditions are established by the game balls winning the winning openings in the order of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, and the second general winning opening 9050B. Also good. In addition, the winning condition is not limited to the order in which the winning in the starting winning opening is followed by the winning in the general winning opening. may be established.

Also, the winning condition may be established based on the fact that the winning order of the game balls into the plurality of general winning holes becomes a specific order. For example, when the game state is (1) normal state, the winning condition ( When the first winning condition) is established and the gaming state is (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, and the third general winning opening The winning condition (second winning condition) may be established when the game ball wins a plurality of general winning holes in the order of the hole 9050C and the fourth general winning hole 9050D.

Also, the winning condition may be established based on the fact that the winning order of the game balls to a plurality of general winning holes and the winning order of the game balls to one or a plurality of starting winning holes becomes a specific order. . For example, when the game state is (1) normal state, the winning condition ( When the first winning condition) is established and the gaming state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the first start winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, Furthermore, even if the winning condition (as the second winning condition) is established by winning the game balls in the order of the third general winning opening 9050C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. good.

In addition, the order of entering the general winning gate and entering the start winning gate is not limited to the order of entering the general winning gate and entering the main winning gate in a specific order. The condition may be established, and the winning condition is established based on the specific order of entry into the general winning opening and entry into the first pass gate 9041A or the second pass gate 9041B. You can do it. Also, if there is a specific area in which the type of jackpot (for example, variable jackpot) is determined based on the entry of the game ball, the order of entering the general winning opening and entering the specific area is specified. The winning condition may be established based on the order.

In addition, in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, an example of executing the variable result notice effect (specific effect A) as the specific effect has been described, but as the specific effect, the pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed. can be

[Fifth Rendering Form to Eighth Rendering Form]
In the fifth production form to the eighth production form shown in FIG. 44, unlike the first production form to the fourth production form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the variable probability state or the time saving state. , there is no difference in the winning conditions, and the winning conditions are common. In the examples of the fifth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, respectively, the first winning condition in the first to fourth effect modes, that is, the winning condition adopted in the normal state, is provided as a common winning condition. ing. Then, (1) when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the variable result announcement effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. As a result, the type of the specific effect can be differentiated according to the game state when the game ball enters the general winning slot, and the specific effect executed based on the game ball entering the general winning slot. Interest can be improved.

In the fifth effect mode shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 90120 determines execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. Then, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and All the prize winning histories in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A , and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are all erased.

In the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the specific effect A when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) normal state, Each time the specific performance A is executed, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B are erased. On the other hand, when the game state when the winning condition is established is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, the specific performance B is executed, and each time the specific performance B is executed, the specific performance A is performed. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased.

It should be noted that, in the sixth effect form ~ eighth effect form, based on the control to the big hit game state by the game control microcomputer 90100, a big hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit game state is issued to the effect control CPU 90120 , the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specified performance B are both deleted. Further, in the sixth to eighth presentation modes, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the change of the game state. In addition, not limited to such a form, the winning history of the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the variable probability state or the time saving state, and the transition from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state Also good.

In the seventh effect mode, the specific effect timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history of the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage areas of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. . When the specific effect timer times out, neither the specific effect A nor the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history in the specific effect A winning history storage area and the winning history in the specific effect B winning history storage area are stored. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are satisfied before the specific effect timer times out, (1) in the case of the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect B of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All of the winning history in the winning history storage area are erased, and (2) in the case of the variable probability state or the time saving state, the specific performance B is executed, and the winning history and the specific performance in the winning history storage area of the specific performance A All of the winning history in the winning history storage area of B are erased.

[Ninth production form to 12th production form]
In the ninth production form to the 12th production form shown in FIG. 45, unlike the first production form to the eighth production form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the variable probability state or the time saving state , the winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is established in the normal state, the variable result announcement effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probability variable state or the time saving state. is established, a pre-reading announcement effect (specific effect B) is executed as a specific effect. As a result, the execution ratio of the specific performance and the type of the specific performance can be varied according to the game state when the game ball enters the general winning slot, and the game ball wins the general winning slot. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance that is executed based on this.

In the ninth production mode shown in FIG. 45, the production control CPU 90120, when the game state is (1) normal state, the game ball in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B A winning condition (first winning condition) is established each time is won, and execution of the specific performance A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, each time the game ball wins in either the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In the tenth effect mode shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (1) normal state, 1 A winning condition (first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins one or more times, and execution of the specific performance A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, both the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, each two times or more game ball wins a prize, a prize-winning condition (as a second prize-winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

It should be noted that, in the ninth production form ~ 12th production form, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 is controlled to the big hit game state, the big hit start designation command for specifying the start of the big hit game state is issued to the production control CPU 90120 , the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specified performance B are both deleted. Further, in the ninth to twelfth presentation modes, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the game state. In addition, not limited to such a form, the winning history of the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the variable probability state or the time saving state, and the transition from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state Also good.

In the eleventh effect mode shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (1) normal state, within 120 seconds, to the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B A winning condition (first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of three times or more, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, the game ball wins a total of 5 times or more in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. As a result, the winning condition (referred to as the second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In addition, in the eleventh effect mode, the specific effect A timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history of the first general winning hole is stored in the specific effect A winning history storage area. Then, when the timer for the specific performance A times out, only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance A is erased without executing the specific performance A. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the first winning condition is established in the normal state before the timer for the specific performance A times out, the specific performance A is executed and only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance A is erased. In addition, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning hole is stored in the winning history storage area for the specific effect B. - 特許庁Then, when the timer for the specific performance B times out, only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance B is erased without executing the specific performance B.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the second prize winning condition is satisfied in the variable probability state or the time saving state before the timer for the specific performance B times out, the specific performance B is executed and only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance B is erased. be done.

In the twelfth production mode shown in FIG. 45, the production control CPU 90120, when the gaming state is (1) normal state, the first start winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, A winning condition (first winning condition) is established when the game ball enters the winning hole in this order. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, the second start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 9050C, the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game balls enter the winning opening in the order of 9050D. When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

As in the ninth production form to the 12th production form, the general winning opening (general winning opening and starting winning opening in the 12th production form), which is the winning target of the game ball for executing the specific production, is changed according to the game state. , the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the game state. In addition, in the ninth production form to the 12th production form, in order to establish the target winning opening to win in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state and the second winning condition in the probability variable state or the time saving state The target winning openings to be awarded are all different examples, but not limited to such a form, the target winning opening in the normal state and the target winning opening in the probability variable state or the time saving state are partially It may be common. For example, both the first winning condition and the second winning condition may include winning to the second general winning opening 9050B.

[13th to 16th production forms]
The thirteenth effect mode to the sixteenth effect mode shown in FIG. 46 are the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. However, when the timing at which the second prize winning condition is established is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific performance A is higher.

Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is specifically, the reach state is established in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern with the reach production (normal reach, super reach), and the fixed decorative pattern (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. In addition, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, specifically, the period during which the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach production (normal reach, super reach) is executed. It is a period excepted, or a period from after the start of the variable display of the variation pattern accompanied by the ready-to-win effect (normal reach, super reach) to before establishment of the ready-to-win state.

The first and second winning conditions for the 13th to 16th presentation modes are the same as the first and second winning conditions for the 1st to 4th presentation modes, respectively. It's becoming Regarding any production form, when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is When the established timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is higher. In this way, by differentiating the execution ratio of the specific performance according to the game period when the prize winning condition is established, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general prize winning opening.

[17th presentation form to 20th presentation form]
In the 17th performance mode to the 20th performance mode shown in FIG. 47, when the timing at which the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the ready-to-win condition is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning condition is is established (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

The prize winning conditions in the 17th to 20th performance modes are the same as the prize winning conditions (common prize winning conditions) in the 5th to 8th performance modes, respectively. In any production form, if the timing at which the winning condition (common winning condition) is established is (1) the period after the ready-to-win condition is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific production A is executed and the winning condition is established. When the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific performances according to the game period when the winning condition is established, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning hole.

[21st presentation mode to 24th presentation mode]
In the 21st to 24th presentation modes shown in FIG. 48, when the timing at which the first prize winning condition is met is (1) the period after the ready-to-win condition is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific presentation A is executed. If the timing at which the second prize winning condition is met is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

The first and second winning conditions for the 21st to 24th presentation modes are the same as the first and second winning conditions for the 9th to 12th presentation modes, respectively. It's becoming In any production mode, if the timing at which the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the ready-to-win condition is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific production A is executed, and the second winning condition is established. If the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by varying the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied and executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, To improve interest when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole.

[25th Rendering Mode and 26th Rendering Mode]
In the 25th production form shown in FIG. 49, unlike the 1st production form to the 24th production form, regardless of the game state or the game period, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D) The first winning condition is established when the game ball wins three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. In addition, regardless of the game state or the game period, the second winning condition is established when the game ball wins a total of five times or more in the general winning openings (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In the 26th production form shown in FIG. 49, unlike the 1st production form to the 24th production form, a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050A to 4th general The first winning condition is established when the game ball has entered the winning hole 9050D) three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. In addition, regardless of the game state or the game period, within 120 seconds, the second winning by winning a total of 5 or more game balls in the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D) Condition is met. When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In this way, regardless of the game state or the game period, different effects are executed according to the number of prizes won in the general prize gates and the frequency of prize wins (the number of prizes won in a predetermined period), thereby increasing the number of prizes in the general prize gates. and the frequency of winning prizes. In this example, the effect mode (output sound) differs according to the number of prizes won in the general prize gate and the frequency of winning, and the variable display that is the target of the notice differs (specific effect A: variable display being executed, Specific effect B: variable display that is not executed), but not limited to this, depending on the number of prizes won in the general prize gate and the frequency of winning, a different effect ( For example, an effect that foretells the display result of the variable display and an effect that is not related to the display result of the variable display) may be executed, and effects that indicate whether or not the game state is suggested (for example, high probability It may be possible to execute an effect for notifying that it is in a state and an effect that is not related to the game state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, and receives the general winning opening specifying command, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls has won, and by receiving the start winning mouth designation command, the fact that the winning to the starting winning mouth has occurred and the first starting winning mouth and the second starting winning mouth The game It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won a prize, and it is possible to specify that a prize has been won in the large prize opening by receiving a prize command for the large prize opening. Therefore, as the winning number management table, the winning number management table of the form shown in FIG. 50 can be stored and updated.

The second starting winning hole is formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B, and the opening of the normal variable winning ball device 906B is controlled (from the closed state where the game ball does not win or is difficult to win, the opening allows the game ball to win or is easy to win). By switching to the state), the game ball can win a prize. In addition, the large winning opening is formed by a special variable winning ball device 907, and the opening of the special variable winning ball device 907 is controlled (from a closed state in which a game ball does not win or is difficult to win, a game ball can or easily wins). By switching to the open state), game balls can win prizes. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, the second starting prize winning port and the special variable winning ball device 907 are divided into prize winning ports in which game balls can be won by actuation of the prize. On the other hand, the first general prize-winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize-winning port 9050D and the first starting prize-winning port are always open, and are non-accessory prize-winning ports in which game balls can win regardless of the operation of the role. classified into

In the winning number management table of FIG. 50, a game ball wins each of the winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening. The number of prize balls (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) to be awarded at the time is stored. Then, for each winning hole, the winning number (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420 in this example), which is the number of times the game ball has won the winning hole, is multiplied by the winning ball number. The number of payouts (the total number of balls paid out due to the winning of game balls in the winning hole, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

Then, as the winning ratio, (1) the number of winnings of each winning opening (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420 respectively) with respect to the total number of winning winnings of each winning opening (1572 in this example) and (2) the total number of winnings of each winning opening (1572 in this example), non-accessory winning openings (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D and first starting winning opening (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754) and the ratio of the number of prizes (315 + 420) for the prize winning gate (2nd start winning gate and big winning gate), and (3) the total number of winning prizes for each winning gate ( In this example, the ratio of the number of prizes other than the big prizes (11+36+22+14+754+315) and the ratio of the number of prizes (420) of the big prizes are stored.

In addition, as a payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts of each winning opening (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 respectively) with respect to the total number of paying out of each winning opening (9268 in this example) and (2) the total number of payouts of each winning opening (9268 in this example) for non-accessory winning openings (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D and first start winning mouth) payout number (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508), and the ratio of the payout number (630 + 6300) of the role winning mouth (second start winning mouth and big winning mouth), and (3) the total number of payouts of each winning mouth ( In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the big winning opening (110+360+220+140+1508+630) and the ratio of the number of paying out big winning openings (6300) are stored.

Here, as described above, during the period in which the operating portion of the mode changeover switch 9031 is set to the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 90120 displays each piece of information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Display on device 905 . Therefore, the store clerk at the amusement arcade determines the total number of balls (9268) paid out due to the winning of game balls in each winning opening. It is possible to grasp the ratio of the number of balls (110+360+220+140+1508) (hereinafter referred to as "first payout ratio", which is 74.77% in this example). In addition, the total number of balls paid out due to the game balls winning in each winning opening (9268) is compared to the number of balls paid out due to the game balls winning in the big winning opening (6300). The ratio (hereinafter referred to as "second payout ratio", which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

Here, if the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that effect in an identifiable manner. . In the example of FIG. 50, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first standard ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame. In addition, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that effect in an identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 50, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second standard ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame.

In this way, the effect control CPU 90120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 905, and compare the result of comparison with the predetermined first standard ratio and second standard ratio. It can be displayed in a comprehensible manner. The first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 905 by, for example, setting the display changeover switch 9032 and operating the operation button 9030 regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031. Better, when the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Also, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the setting of the game hall side or the player side. Also, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the game state, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to a game device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko game machine 901, In the device, the received first payout ratio and second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and the information management device controls the first payout ratio and second payout ratio of each gaming machine. It is possible to store the ratio and display it on the display device.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general winning opening designation command, a start winning opening designation command, and a large winning opening winning command to the effect control CPU 90120, external output information corresponding to these commands As a result, information that can specify that the winning to the general winning opening has occurred and which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D the game ball has won, and the winning to the starting winning opening has occurred and information that can specify whether the game ball has won the first start winning port or the second starting winning port, information that can specify that the winning to the big winning port has occurred, and the corresponding gaming device (card unit, call lamp device), information management device (hall computer), or other external device.

This makes it possible to specify the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the special winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received the information, it is possible to store a win number management table in the form shown in FIG. 50 for each game machine and update it. Thereby, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine can be grasped. Further, it is possible to grasp whether or not the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether or not the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio for each gaming machine.

In addition, regarding the aggregation period of the winning number information (the values of each item in FIG. 36 or FIG. 50) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901, if the aggregation period is not set at all, the pachinko This is a period from when the power supply to the gaming machine 901 is started until the power supply is stopped. As the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings to each winning hole becomes 0), and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is restarted. Sometimes, the number of winnings to each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is in a state of zero. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted without being backed up.

The aggregation period for the number-of-wins information (the value of each item in FIG. 36 or 50) stored in the number-of-wins management table of the pachinko machine 901 can be set by the gaming facility. Using a button 9030, it is possible to set a tallying period (for example, 10 hours, 3 hours, etc.) for the gaming machine. Also, in the game device (card unit or call lamp device), the game parlor clerk inputs a desired tallying period using an input device or the like, and the entered tallying period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko machine 901, and the tallying period (stored in the RAM 90122). In addition, in the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game hall inputs a desired total period using an input device or the like, and the input total period is set for each pachinko machine 901 (for example, pachinko selected as a setting target). It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 901) and set as a counting period (stored in the RAM 90122). Then, in the pachinko game machine 901, a winning number management table is created for each totaling period set (for example, 10 hours) and displayed on the image display device 905, or a corresponding game device (card unit, call lamp device) and displayed on the display device of the game device, or output to the information management device (hall computer) and displayed on the display device of the information management device. .

Also, based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the special winning opening winning command output from the pachinko game machine 901, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is determined. In an external device that stores and updates information (values of each item in FIG. 36 or FIG. 50), by setting a tabulation period with an input device provided in the external device, for each set tabulation period (for example, 10 hours) It is possible to create a prize number management table and display it on a display device provided in an external device. For example, if the external device is a gaming device (a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the display device displays a winning number management table for each predetermined period for the corresponding gaming machine. When the external device is an information management device that manages game information for each game machine, it is possible to display the winning number management table for each predetermined period on the display device for each game machine. becomes.

[27th presentation mode]
The above-mentioned specific effect A and specific effect B both predict the variable display result in the special game depending on the effect mode, but are executed in relation to the winning of the game ball to the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game. FIG. 51 illustrates a specific effect C (point giving effect) as an effect unrelated to the variable display result in the special game and the variable display result in the normal game.

In the twenty-seventh performance mode shown in FIG. 52 and the twenty-ninth performance mode described later, each time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 90124 Whether or not the specific performance C is to be executed is determined based on the execution determination random number, and the specific performance C is executed when it is determined to be executed. By executing the specific effect C, the total points in the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 is incremented by 1, and as shown in FIG. 902000 is displayed.

That is, each time a game ball wins in one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to give one point. In this case, the effect mode is such that a point giving effect in which one point is given is executed. A privilege is given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

For example, when the total points reach 5 (when the player wins 5 times), the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server. The player accesses the image providing server by having the two-dimensional code read (captured) by the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and can download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. . Also, when the total points reach 10 (when the player wins 10 times), a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 905 . The player can read the two-dimensional code (picture an image) with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, access the music providing server, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

In the 27th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) ), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), at a rate of 80% Execute specific effect C. It should be noted that the effect control CPU90120, the variation pattern specification command to specify the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game and the variation pattern in the image display device 905 to specify the variation start in the special game and the image display device 905 , by receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed.

As with the specific effect A and the specific effect B, a prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C is provided. Every time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least the winning to any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D that are the winning conditions history) is erased.

Here, the total points in the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 is set to 10 regardless of the winning history in the winning history storage area (even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased, it will not be reset). After reaching (in this example, after the two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the specific effect C is executed.

In the twenty-seventh production form and the twenty-ninth production form described later, (1) during the period during which the variable display of the special pattern is being executed (within the pattern fluctuation period), the specific production is performed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general prize-winning opening. The ratio of execution is (2) lower than the ratio of executing the specific effect based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). is set. During the period of (1), the effect corresponding to the special game (for example, the variable result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects including the variable display of decorative patterns rather than winning prizes of game balls into the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the period (1), the interest in the specific effect may rather be lost. On the other hand, in the period (2), since the effect corresponding to the special game, which should be the target of interest, is not executed, by executing the specific effect, the player can I'm in a situation where it's easy to get interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than during the period (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game, Therefore, the specific performance can be executed at appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific performance is not spoiled. For example, if a specific effect related to the variable display result in the special game is adopted as the specific effect A, the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole is (2) the variable display of the special pattern is executed. If it is during the period (outside the symbol variation period), there is no target for the variation result announcement at this timing. Therefore, either do not execute the specific effect (stop the execution of the specific effect based on the winning to the general winning slot), or suspend the execution until the condition for starting the variable display regarding the special game is met (general winning The specific effect is not executed at the timing of winning the prize, and the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special game is satisfied. As a result, there is a risk that the frequency of execution of the specific effect will decrease, or that interest will decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting, as the specific effect, a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game.

In addition, in the 27th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol fluctuation If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only when it is a period (outside the symbol fluctuation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 27th production mode, (1) during the period during which the variable display of the special pattern is executed (within the pattern fluctuation period), the game ball is specified based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning hole. (2) The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). can be set to be higher.

[28th Production Form]
In the twenty-eighth performance mode, unlike the twenty-seventh performance mode, it is not determined whether or not the specific performance is to be executed based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 90124 . In the 28th effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) ), the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%; , the specific effect A is not executed.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 42(a), the specific effect A is either a first mode in which only the voice effect is executed or a second mode in which the character effect is executed together with the voice effect. This is a variable result announcement performance suggesting the possibility of deriving and displaying a jackpot pattern as a variable display result of a variable display whose start condition is satisfied by, before deriving and displaying the variable display result. Also, as shown in FIG. 42(b), the specific effect B is either the first mode in which only the sound effect is executed or the second mode in which the character object effect is executed together with the sound effect. This is a look-ahead foretelling performance suggesting the possibility that a big hit pattern is derived and displayed as a variable display result of a variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 51, the specific effect C includes the display result of the variable display related to the special game (whether it will be a big hit pattern) and the display result of the variable display related to the general game (whether it will be a hit pattern). ), and points are given to the player according to the winning in the general winning slot.

In this way, when the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), the specific effect A is not executed (the above-mentioned " The execution of the specific effect A is suspended, and the process of "executing when the condition for starting the variable display regarding the special game is satisfied" is not performed), and only when it is the period of (1), the specific Production A is to be executed. Every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A history) is erased.

In the 28th production form, as a specific production, by executing a specific production A (variable result notice production) related to the variable display result in the special game that is being executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, He is trying to improve his interest in a specific performance. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning slot is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a target for the variation result notice at this timing. do not. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning slot), and after that, when the start condition of the variable display regarding the special game is satisfied, the specific effect is specified. If the effect A is executed, there is a possibility that the timing of winning a prize and the execution timing of the specific effect will deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest. Therefore, in the twenty-eighth effect mode, when a game ball wins in the general winning hole during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect A is not executed.

In addition, in the 28th effect mode, if the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20% during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). In the case of such a form, when the winning to the general winning opening occurs during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (to the general winning opening The specific performance A is not executed at the winning timing), and then the specific performance A is executed when the condition for starting the variable display regarding the special game is met. In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins in the general winning hole is either during the period (1) (within the symbol variation period) or during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). Also, the specific effect A may be made executable, and the specific effect A may be executed at different ratios.

In addition, when the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period), the special The execution ratio of the specific effect A may differ according to the result of the variable display of the figure game, whether or not the ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed, and the like. For example, when the production control CPU 90120 determines that the finalized decorative pattern is the big hit pattern, the specific production A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the finalized decorative pattern is the winning pattern. If it is determined, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th presentation mode]
In the 29th effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories ) is within a period of 1 or more; In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period when the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display of special symbols is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

That is, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole, the variable display of the special symbols is executed, or at least when it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbols (above (1) or (2) period), the specific performance C is executed at a rate of 20%, and at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol is performed. is not determined (in the period of (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

Every time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least the winning to any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D that are the winning conditions history) is erased.

In the 29th effect form, at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or at least when it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol (above (1) or in the case of the period of (2)), at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed and the variable display of the special symbols is performed. It is set lower than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when no decision has been made to execute it (in the period of (3) above). In the period of (1) and (2), the effect corresponding to the special game (for example, the variable result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. , players are usually more interested in these effects including the variable display of decoration patterns than in the winning state of game balls into general winning holes. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest in the specific effect may rather be lost. On the other hand, in the period of (3), the effect corresponding to the special game, which should be the target of interest, is not executed, so that by executing the specific effect, the player can I'm in a situation where it's easy to get interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than during the periods (1) and (2), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game, Therefore, the specific performance can be executed at appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific performance is not spoiled. For example, as a specific effect, when adopting a pre-reading notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more like the specific effect B, the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole is the number of reserved memories. is 0, there is no pre-reading notice target at this timing. Therefore, either do not execute the specific effect (stop the execution of the specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening), or suspend the execution until the number of pending memories becomes 1 or more (If you win the general winning opening The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the starting condition of the variable display regarding the special game is satisfied). As a result, there is a risk that the frequency of execution of the specific effect will decrease, or that interest will decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting, as the specific effect, a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game.

In addition, in the 29th production form, at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, and the special symbols The specific effect C may be made executable only when it is not decided to execute the variable display (in the period of (3) above). Also, contrary to the example shown in the 29th production mode, at the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, whether the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Or at least when it is determined to perform the variable display of the special symbols (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the ratio at which the specific effect is performed is the variable display of the special symbols. It may be set so as to be higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when the specific effect is not executed and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is not determined (in the period of (3) above).

Also, the timing at which the variable display relating to the special game is started (the timing at which the start condition is established) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including simultaneous). In the case of , the specific effect may not be executed immediately, but may be executed after a predetermined period of time (for example, after 5 seconds have passed) after the start of the variable display. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is established (for example, when it is the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is established It is possible to prevent misleading that it is related to the special game. In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in the start winning opening (the timing at which the starting condition is established) and the timing at which the game ball wins in the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including at the same time). In some cases, the specific effect may not be executed immediately, and the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period of time (for example, after 5 seconds have passed) after the number of reserved memories increases. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the starting condition is established (for example, when it is the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the starting condition is established It is possible to prevent misleading that it is related to the special game.

[Thirtieth production form]
In the thirtieth effect mode, unlike the twenty-ninth effect mode, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is to be executed based on the random number for determining execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 . In the thirtieth effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. is the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed (within the symbol variation period); , the specific effect B is not executed.

In this way, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (It is assumed that the above-mentioned process of "holding the execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more" is not performed), and only in the period of (1), A specific effect B is executed. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B history) is erased.

In the thirtieth production form, as a specific production, by executing a specific production B (pre-reading advance notice production) related to the variable display result of the special game held at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, I'm trying to improve my interest in directing. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general prize-winning slot is the period (2) or (3) in which the number of pending memories is 0, there is no target for the pre-reading notice at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning slot), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of pending memories becomes 1 or more. If it is executed, there is a possibility that the timing of winning the prize and the execution timing of the specific effect will deviate from each other, which may actually reduce the interest. Therefore, in the thirtieth production mode, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole during the period (2) or (3) (the period when the number of reserved memories is 0), the specific production B is not executed. .

It should be noted that, in the thirtieth production form, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory) , the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and in the period of (2) or (3) (within the period without pending memory), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 20%. You can do it. In the case of such a form, execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended when a prize is won in the general prize winning slot during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without pending memory). (The specific performance B is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize winning slot), and thereafter, the specific performance B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. In this way, the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is during the period of (1) (within the period with reserved memory), and the period of (2) or (3) (within the period without reserved memory) ), the specific effect B can be executed in both cases, and the specific effect B may be executed at different ratios.

In addition, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1) (within the period with reservation memory), the reservation The execution ratio of the specific effect B differs depending on whether or not the ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable display result of the special game related to memory and the variable display of the decorative pattern accompanying the execution of the special game related to the reserved memory. You can do it. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the starting winning prize determination result specifying command specifying "big hit" in the starting winning prize command storage area (that is, the variable display result of the special game is a jackpot symbol). exists), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and if the start winning judgment result designation command designating the "jackpot" is not stored in the start winning command storage area (that is, When there is no reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special game is a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[Thirty-first staging mode]
In the 31st effect mode shown in FIG. 53, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed ( If it is within the symbol variation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) In some cases, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1) and the period of (2), Different types of specific effects are to be executed. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the effect that is executed when the game ball wins in the general winning hole, and to improve the amusement. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth winning history to any of the general winning openings 9050D) is erased.

In the 31st effect form, by executing a specific effect A (variable result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, I try to improve my interests. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning slot is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a target for the variation result notice at this timing. do not. In this case, if no specific effect is executed, the execution frequency of the specific effect will decrease. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the special game If the specific effect A is executed when the condition for starting the variable display is met, there is a possibility that the timing of winning the prize and the execution timing of the specific effect will deviate from each other.

In the 31st production mode, if the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the pattern fluctuation period), instead of the specific production A, the variable display result in the special game or the variable in the general game Such a problem can be avoided by executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result. It should be noted that for each winning to the general winning opening, any type of specific effect is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%), and for each winning to the general winning opening, one of the types A specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%).

[32nd presentation mode]
In the 32nd effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. is the period during which the variable display of special symbols is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of pending memories is 0 and when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the specific performance C (point giving performance) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1), the period of (2), and the In the period of 3), different types of specific effects are executed. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the effect that is executed when the game ball enters the general prize winning hole, thereby improving the interest. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history (at least the first general winning condition that is the winning condition) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect 9050A to 9050D, including winning history to any of the fourth general winning openings 9050D) is erased.

In the 32nd effect form, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning hole is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the pre-reading notice exists, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice Effect) is executed, and if it is within the period of (2), that is, if there is no target for advance notice but there is a target for change result notice, specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed, and when it is the period of (3), that is, when there is neither the target of the advance notice nor the target of the fluctuation result notice, the specific performance C (point giving performance) is executed.

In this way, by selecting and executing a specific effect which can be executed immediately at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole, the excitement when the game ball wins the general winning hole is appropriately improved. I am trying to let It should be noted that for each winning to the general winning opening, any type of specific effect is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%), and for each winning to the general winning opening, one of the types A specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%).

In addition, in the 32nd effect form, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is an object for which the change result is to be announced, the pre-reading announcement effect is executed. That is, in the case where "both the target of the variable result notice and the target of the pre-reading notice exist", the pre-reading notice effect is preferentially executed. Not limited to such a form, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing, the fluctuation result notice When the effect is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at that timing, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. In other words, when "both the target of the variable result announcement and the target of the pre-reading announcement exist", the variable result announcement effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modified Examples of 27th Rendering Form to 32nd Rendering Form]
Further, in the twenty-seventh to thirty-second presentation modes, the execution ratio of the specific presentation may be varied according to the state when the game ball enters the general winning hole. The “state” referred to here is a result of a game played on the gaming machine, and is a state based on the game played on the gaming machine. Depending on the classification of the state, the execution ratio of the specific effect shall be changed. For example, in the 27th effect mode, if the timing at which the game ball wins in the general winning hole is within (1) the pattern fluctuation period, the specific effect at a rate of 30% if the game state at that time is the normal state C is executed, and if the game state at that time is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the specific performance C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning hole is outside the (2) symbol variation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific performance C is executed at a rate of 100%, If the game state at that time is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the specific performance C is executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, it is possible to further enhance interest when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole.

Further, in the twenty-seventh to thirty-second performance modes, the type of the specific performance to be executed may be changed according to the state when the game ball wins in the general winning hole. For example, in the 31st effect form, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning hole is within (1) the pattern fluctuation period, and the number of pending memories at that time is 0, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed, and if the number of pending memories at that time is 1 or more, a specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning hole is outside the (2) pattern variation period, if the number of pending memories at that time is 0, a specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed, If the number of pending memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) is executed. According to this, it is possible to further enhance interest when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole.

In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the classification of the state for differentiating the type of the specific effect is (1) the game state is the normal state, or (2) the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state. or (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. For example, it may be divided into (1) a period after establishment of the reach state in reach fluctuation, or (2) a period before establishment of reach state in reach fluctuation. Also, (1) a period during which variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed, or (2) a period during which variable display (reach variation) with reach effect is executed, It may be a division. Also, it may be divided into (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effect is performed, or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effect is performed. . Furthermore, whether it is (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect good. Furthermore, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may differ according to the difference in these categories.

The specific effect C (point giving effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. It's like Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display (second position), and the display is set by the player's operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 38). It is executable only when In this way, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect C.

In addition, the specific performance C (point award performance) is not limited to the one in which 1 point is awarded for each winning in the general winning opening, but 2 points or 3 points are awarded for each winning in the general winning opening. It may be something that is done. The number of points to be given may differ, for example, depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the game ball has won the general winning opening, for example, The game state may differ depending on whether it is a normal state, or whether it is a probability variable state or a time saving state.

In addition, in the specific performance C (point awarding performance), points may be awarded according to factors other than winning a prize in a general winning slot. For example, points may be awarded in accordance with winning a prize in a start winning slot. Alternatively, points may be given according to establishment of a ready-to-win state.

[Thirty-third production form]
FIG. 54 exemplifies a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes step by step according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole. As shown in FIG. 54, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) means that the fill area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 displayed on the image display device 905 is changed according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole. It is an effect that can be changed in stages from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages.

In the example of FIG. 54(a), in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, the filling area 902100a (black part in the gauge image) in the gauge image 902100 is changed to 0 level. (10/10 white portion) to 1 step (1/10 black portion and 9/10 white portion) (gauge +1). In addition, in the example of FIG. 54(b), according to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 changes from 0 to 3 stages (black part occupies 3/10 and the white portion occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

In this way, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening and reaches 10 stages (the black part in the gauge image occupies 10/10 If the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is For example, similar to the specific effect C described above, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or music providing server is displayed on the image display device 905, and the player selects a desired image or music from the image providing server or music. It becomes possible to download from the providing server to the information terminal.

Not limited to this, when the filled area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 905, and a special music piece may be output as BGM during the game. It may be made possible. Alternatively, at the timing when the filling area 902100a reaches level 10, it is also possible to execute a variable result foretelling effect for foretelling the possibility that the display result of the variable display relating to the special game being executed will become a big hit symbol. At the timing when the region 902100a reaches 10th stage, it is also possible to execute a pre-reading forewarning effect for foretelling the possibility that the display result of the variable display relating to the reserved special game will become a big hit symbol.

That is, the benefit provided when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels may be an effect unrelated to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game. It may be an effect related to a variable display result in a game or a variable display result in a general-purpose game. Further, the effect may be related to the game state, or may be the effect not related to the game state. Also, a different effect may be executed every time the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages. In addition, different effects may be executed according to the game state or the like when the filled area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches the 10th level.

When the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches the 10th stage, the message is displayed on the image display device 905, the voice is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the like, and then the gauge image 902100 is notified. is reset to 0 level. After the reset, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases again according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening.

In the 33rd to 37th presentation modes shown in FIGS. 55 to 56, each time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a specific character extracted from the random number circuit 90124 Based on the effect execution determination random number, it is determined whether or not to increase the stage of the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 (hereinafter referred to as the gauge level) by one stage. Increase by one step. That is, each time a game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D, a lottery is conducted to determine whether the gauge level is to be increased by one step. When winning, the gauge level is increased by one stage.

In the 33rd effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) in a period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), at a rate of 80%. increases the gauge level by one step. It should be noted that the effect control CPU90120, the variation pattern specification command to specify the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game and the variation pattern in the image display device 905 to specify the variation start in the special game and the image display device 905 , by receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed.

As with the specific effects A to C, a prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 stages, along with notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is erased.

In the 33rd production form, and the 34th production form, the 36th production form, and the 37th production form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of a game ball during (2) the period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) It is set lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on. During the period of (1), the effect corresponding to the special game (for example, the variable result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. They are more interested in these presentations including the variable display of decorative patterns than in winning prizes of game balls into the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (2), since the effect corresponding to the special game, which should be the target of the player's interest, is not executed, by increasing the gauge level, the player can I'm in a situation where it's easy to get interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than during the period (1), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 33rd effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol fluctuation (2) If it is a period (outside the symbol variation period) in which variable display of special symbols is not executed, the gauge level can be increased. Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 33rd production form, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the variable display of the special pattern is executed (within the pattern fluctuation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on (2) winning of a game ball in a general prize-winning slot during the period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). You can set it so that

[34th presentation form]
In the 34th effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) and the special When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by one stage at a rate of 40%. The timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) and the special When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU90120, the variation pattern specification command to specify the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game and the variation pattern in the image display device 905 to specify the variation start in the special game and the image display device 905 , By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed, and until the variable display of special symbols ends (fixed special symbols It is possible to specify the remaining time until the stop display). For example, when receiving the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern designation command, by setting the fluctuation time of the special symbol designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command as the value of the fluctuation time timer, the effect control CPU90120, the fluctuation time The remaining time until the value of the timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the special symbol ends (until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed). In addition, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special game, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that is the variable display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, so the effect control CPU 90120 The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decoration pattern ends (until the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the thirty-fourth effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the pattern is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) when the pattern is stopped for less than 10 seconds. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in how the fixed decorative symbols to be stopped are displayed than in the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (3), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than during the period (3), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 34th effect form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is the period of (2), it is possible to increase the gauge level. However, the gauge level may not be increased during the period (3). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 34th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning the general winning opening when the symbol stop is 10 seconds or longer is (3) ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the symbol stop is less than 10 seconds.

Also, in the thirty-fourth effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the winning pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 is the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D during the period of (2). When the display result of the variable display is a jackpot pattern, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and when the display result is a losing pattern, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the first general prize is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins any of the openings 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D is the period (3), and when the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed is a jackpot symbol. , the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 30%, and if the display results in a lost pattern, the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%.

[35th presentation mode]
Specific effect B is exemplified as described above as the pre-reading forewarning effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 42(b), whether the starting winning judgment result specifying command designating "jackpot" is included in the starting winning judgment result specifying command stored in the starting winning prize command storage area. Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the pre-reading advance notice effect is the first mode (sound effect only) or the second mode (sound effect and character object effect). That is, in the pre-reading notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display to be the subject of the pre-reading notice (hereinafter referred to as target change) is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target change. It is difficult.

It is also possible to employ an effect for notifying target change as the look-ahead forewarning effect. For example, as described above, in the starting winning memory display area 905H, there are a plurality of display portions whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game for which the starting condition is satisfied first based on the occurrence of the starting winning. is provided. When the CPU 90120 for effect control receives the start winning determination result designation command, if it is a command that designates "big hit", the display part corresponding to the command is displayed corresponding to the command that designates "miss". It is possible to execute a pending change effect that is displayed in a special mode (for example, gold color) different from the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display part displayed in the special mode, and the player can grasp the remaining number of times of variable display to be executed before the target variation.

For example, when a command specifying the judgment result at the time of start winning is received, if it is a command specifying "big hit", the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30% The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a normal mode. On the other hand, when the start winning judgment result designation command is received, if it is a command that designates "missing", the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95% The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. In this way, when the display part corresponding to the reserved memory generated by the start winning is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is met). When the condition for starting the variable display game corresponding to the display part of the special mode (the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice) is satisfied, the special mode will move to the left every time). The display part disappears from the starting prize winning storage display area 905H. In such a mode, the pending change effect is executed during the period from the starting winning to the fulfillment of the start condition of the variable display game corresponding to the starting winning.

That is, when the conditions for starting the variable display game are satisfied in the order in which the conditions for starting the variable display game are satisfied, the display part displayed in the special mode (target Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to the pending memory of the variable display that is not the target of the pending change effect) existing to the left of the display information corresponding to the pending memory of the variable display that is , it is possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the pending change effect is executed.

It should be noted that the timing for displaying the display portion in the special mode is not limited to the start winning. For example, the display part may be displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and after a predetermined effect has passed, the normal mode may be changed to the special mode. may be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing of shifting to the left. In these aspects, the time from the timing when the display portion corresponding to the variable display targeted by the pre-reading notice changes from the normal state to the special mode until the condition for starting the variable display targeted by the pre-reading notice is established. During the period, the pending change effect is executed.

In the thirty-fifth effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is determined by (1) the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed and the target variation is not being executed. If it is a period without special mode (when there is no display part of the special mode in the pending change effect and it is not a period of execution of target variation), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

Also, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is being executed and the number of remaining variable display times until the target change is 2 or more. If it is a period (when there are two or more special games in which the start condition is satisfied before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the rate of 40% increases the gauge level by one step.

In addition, when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D, (3) the pre-reading notice effect is being executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1. If it is a period (if there is 1 special game in which the start condition is satisfied before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the gauge at a rate of 20% Increases level by 1.

In addition, when the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (in the pending change effect When the variable display is executed based on the fulfillment of the special game start condition corresponding to the display part of the special mode), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the thirty-fifth production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) until the target change (4) When the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) period) is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target variation to be executed next than in the winning state of the game ball into the general winning opening. Also, during the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target variation than in the winning state of the game ball into the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific presentation. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target variation is executed, increasing the gauge level tends to attract the player's interest. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than during the periods (3) and (4), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 35th effect form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), the gauge level is increased. However, the gauge level may not be increased during periods (3) and (4). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 35th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of variable displays remaining until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining variable until the target change. It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the display count is 1, and (4) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target variation.

Also, in the 35th effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) ), the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target variation and when the winning pattern is stopped. For example, the effect control CPU 90120, when the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is When a jackpot pattern is obtained, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and when the variable display result is a losing pattern, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and the first general prize winning opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening are increased. When the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the prize winning openings 9050D is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target variation is a big hit pattern, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%, When the variable display result is a lost pattern, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4). In the period of , if the variable display result in the target variation is a jackpot symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 15%, and if the variable display result is a losing symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 10%. may be increased.

[36th presentation form]
In the 36th effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. In addition, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without the reach effect is executed. In this case, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%.

In addition, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is (3) the period in which the variable display (reach variation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed, and If it is the period before the ready-to-reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the ready-to-win effect is being executed and the ready-to-reach state is in progress. If it is a period after establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the thirty-sixth effect form, (3) the rate of increase in the gauge level based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening before the ready-to-win state is established in the ready-to-reach fluctuation is (4) general It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the winning opening. During the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the rest of the decorative symbols that have not been stopped after the ready-to-win state is established, rather than the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the ready-to-reach state is not established, increasing the gauge level is likely to attract the player's interest. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than during the period (4), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 36th effect form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is the period (3), it is possible to increase the gauge level. It may be possible, and the gauge level may not be increased during the period of (4). Also, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-sixth effect mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach variation is being executed and during the period before the reach state is established is (4 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach fluctuation is executed and after the establishment of the reach state.

[37th presentation form]
In the thirty-seventh effect mode shown in FIG. 56, the rate at which the gauge level is increased differs depending on which one of the plurality of general prize-winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by 1 at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins either the first general prize winning port 9050A or the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by 1 stage at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when the timing when the game ball wins either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). , the gauge level increases by 1 stage at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). , the gauge level increases by 1 level at a rate of 80%.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the thirty-seventh effect mode, the ratio of increase in the gauge level is different between (1) within the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and furthermore, the second general prize opening 9050B or the third general prize opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between when a game ball wins in 9050C and when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. By varying the rate at which the gauge level increases according to the general prize winning opening into which the game ball has won, the player is also interested in which general prize winning opening the game ball has won in, thereby improving interest. be able to.

For example, the first general winning that is provided near the end of the game area 9010 than the winning of the game ball to the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C that are provided near the center of the game area 9010 When it is difficult for the game ball to enter the opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball enters the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the second general prize winning port 9050B and the third general prize winning port 9050C, so that the interest in winning in the general prize winning port, which is more difficult to win, is increased. It is better to raise it.

In addition, in the 37th production mode, when the game ball wins the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening When the game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 37th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening 9050B. Or you may set it so that it may become lower than the rate by which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins the 3rd general prize-winning mouth 9050C.

[38th presentation mode]
In the 38th to 42nd presentation modes shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, whether or not to execute the specific presentation is not determined based on the random number for determining execution of the specific presentation extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In addition, in the 38th to 42nd presentation modes, the gauge level that increases in accordance with one winning in the general winning slot is not limited to one stage. For example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), there is a case where the gauge level is increased by three steps in response to one winning in the general winning slot.

In the 38th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1), and (2) when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the gauge level is increased by three stages. Increases (gauge +3).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 38th production form, and the 39th production form, the 41st production form, and the 42nd production form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) The number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the winning of a game ball in (2) the period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the game ball winning in the general winning opening It is set less than the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on. During the period of (1), the effect corresponding to the special game (for example, the variable result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects including the variable display of decorative patterns rather than winning prizes of game balls into the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (1), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (2), since the effect corresponding to the special game, which should be the target of the player's interest, is not executed, the gauge level is greatly increased. are in a position to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than during the period (1), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 38th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol fluctuation period), the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is set to, for example, 20% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 80%), and (2) the period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed ( outside the symbol variation period), the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more may be set to 80% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 20%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 38th production mode, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). (2) The number of stages in which the level increases is greater than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). may be set to be larger.

Also, as a privilege given when the gauge level reaches ten stages, there are cases where a privilege with a different value is given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, there are cases where a two-dimensional code for downloading only images is displayed, and there are cases where a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music is displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is greater than that to the former. The number of stages in which the gauge level increases may indicate the size of the privilege value to be given when the gauge level reaches ten stages. For example, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more stages is set at, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one stage is 80%), and when the privilege value is large, the gauge level is increased by two stages or more. For example, if the rate of increase is 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), (2) when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the privilege value is small. , the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is, for example, 50% (the percentage of changing only one stage is 50%), and if the privilege value is large, the percentage of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is, for example, 80%. (The ratio of changing only one step is 20%).

[39th presentation form]
In the 39th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level increases by three stages (gauge +3). The timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) and the special When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or longer, the gauge level is increased by two stages (gauge +2). The timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) and the special When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 39th effect mode, (2) the number of gauge level steps that increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening when the pattern is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) the pattern is stopped in less than 10 seconds. Sometimes it is set higher than the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in how the fixed decorative symbols to be stopped are displayed than in the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (3), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than during the period (3), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 39th presentation form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more stages. For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level by 80% (the rate of changing by one level is 20%), and in the period of (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more levels is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing by one level). is 80%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 39th production form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening when the symbol stops for 10 seconds or more is ( 3) It may be set to be smaller than the number of stages by which the gauge level increases based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the symbols are stopped in less than 10 seconds.

In addition, in the 39th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed or the winning pattern is stop-displayed as a variable display result in the special game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 is the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D during the period of (2). When the display result of the variable display is a big win pattern, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and when the display result is a winning pattern, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps, while the first general prize winning opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050A are increased. When the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the prize winning openings 9050D is the period (3), if the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is a big win pattern, the gauge level is increased to two stages. The gauge level may be increased by one step when the displayed result is a missing symbol.

[40th Production Mode]
In the 40th effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is (1) the pre-reading notice effect is not executed and the target variation is also executed. If it is a period without (a period in which there is no special mode display part in the pending change effect and it is not a target variation execution period), the gauge level is increased by four stages (gauge +4).

Also, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is being executed and the number of remaining variable display times until the target change is 2 or more. In the case of the period (when there are two or more special games in which the start condition is satisfied before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the gauge level is 3 Gradually increases (gauge +3).

Also, when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D, (3) the pre-reading notice effect is being executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1. If it is a period (if there is one special game in which the start condition is satisfied before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the gauge level is increased by two stages. (gauge +2).

In addition, when the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (in the pending change effect When the variable display is executed based on the fulfillment of the special game start condition corresponding to the display part of the special mode), the gauge level increases by one step (gauge +1).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 40th effect form, (2) the number of stages of the gauge level that is increased based on the game ball winning the general winning opening when the number of remaining variable display times until the target change is 2 or more is (3) target change (4) When the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 0 (target change execution period) is set to be larger than the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target variation to be executed next than in the winning state of the game ball into the general winning opening. Also, during the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target variation than in the winning state of the game ball into the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during periods (3) and (4), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target variation is executed, increasing the gauge level a lot makes the player more interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (3) and (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 40th presentation form, if the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two stages or more. For example, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by 20% (the ratio of changing by one stage is 20%), and in the period of (3) and (4), the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is, for example, 20% (by one stage The rate of change may be 80%). Also, contrary to the example shown in the 40th presentation mode, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the number of variable displays remaining until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining number until the target change. It may be set to be smaller than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the number of times of variable display is 1, and (4) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the target variation execution period.

Also, in the 40th effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) ), the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target variation and when the winning pattern is stopped. For example, the effect control CPU 90120, when the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is The gauge level is increased by 4 stages when the pattern becomes a big win, and the gauge level is increased by 3 stages when the variable display result is a losing pattern, and any one of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is selected. When the timing when the game ball wins is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target variation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three stages, and if the variable display result is a losing symbol , the gauge level is increased by two stages, and the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (4), variable display in target fluctuation The gauge level may be increased by two steps when the result is a big hit pattern, and the gauge level may be increased by one step when the variable display result is a losing pattern.

[Forty-first production mode]
In the 41st effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level is increased by four stages (gauge +4). In addition, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without the reach effect is executed. In this case, the gauge level increases by three stages (gauge +3).

In addition, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is (3) the period in which the variable display (reach variation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed, and If it is the period before establishment of the ready-to-reach state, the gauge level increases by two stages (gauge +3), and (4) it is a period in which the variable display (variable reach) accompanied by the ready-to-reach effect is being executed and the ready-to-reach state is established. If it is the subsequent period, the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 41st effect mode, (3) the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the game ball entering the general winning hole before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, (4) after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation It is set to be larger than the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the rest of the decorative symbols that have not been stopped after the ready-to-win state is established, rather than the winning state of the game ball into the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (4), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the ready-to-reach state is not established, increasing the gauge level by a large amount is likely to attract the player's interest. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than during the period (4), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 41st effect mode, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is the period of (3), the gauge level is increased by two stages or more. For example, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by 80% (the ratio of changing by one step is 20%), and in the period of (4), the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the ratio of changing by one step). is 80%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 41st presentation mode, (3) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach variation is being executed and during the period before the reach state is established is ( 4) It may be set to be smaller than the number of steps by which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach variation is executed and after the establishment of the reach state.

[Forty-second production mode]
In the forty-second effect mode shown in FIG. 58, the number of stages for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which one of the plurality of general prize-winning slots is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by one stage (gauge +1). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins either the first general prize winning port 9050A or the fourth general prize winning port 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by two stages (gauge +2).

Also, when the timing at which the game ball wins either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). , the gauge level increases by 3 stages (gauge +3). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). , the gauge level increases by 4 stages (gauge +4).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the forty-second presentation form, (1) within the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, the number of increasing gauge levels is different, and furthermore, the second general prize-winning port 9050B or the third general prize-winning The number of steps of the increasing gauge level differs between when a game ball wins in the opening 9050C and when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased according to the general prize-winning port into which the game ball wins is different, the player is also interested in which general prize-winning port the game ball has won, thereby improving interest. can be made

For example, the first general winning that is provided near the end of the game area 9010 than the winning of the game balls to the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C that are provided near the center of the game area 9010 When it is difficult for the game ball to enter the opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the gauge level increases when the game ball enters the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. By setting the number to be larger than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the game ball enters the second general prize winning port 9050B and the third general prize winning port 9050C, the winning to the general prize winning port which is more difficult to win is achieved. It's good to make it more interesting.

In addition, in the 42nd effect form, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is, for example, 80% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 20 %), and when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is set to 20% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 80%). Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production mode, the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening. It may be set to be smaller than the number of stages by which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C.

[Modifications of the 33rd production form to the 42nd production form]
In the 33rd to 37th presentation modes, the division that serves as a reference for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level, and in the 38th to 42nd presentation modes, the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased is determined. The categories that serve as the criteria for this are not limited to the above examples. For example, the division for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level and the division for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased are (1) whether the game state is normal or (2) whether the game state is It may be a division of whether it is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Also, the classification may be (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0 or not. Also, it may be divided into (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effect is performed, or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effect is performed. . Furthermore, whether it is (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect good.

Note that the gauge image 902100 is displayed even when the filling area 902100a is at the minimum level of 0, but a condition for displaying this gauge image 902100 may be provided. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the gauge image 902100 is displayed, and an effect for increasing the gauge level can be executed, but when the gaming state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the gauge image 902100 is not displayed (gauge The effect for increasing the level is not executed).

The display of the gauge image 902100 and the effect of increasing the gauge level are executed during the period when the predetermined effect is being executed, and may not be executed during the period when the predetermined effect is not being executed. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when a game ball wins a prize in the general prize winning opening only during a period (predetermined performance stage period) in which the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 905 is a predetermined background image. Alternatively, the gauge level may increase. In addition, only during the period in which the display portion in the starting winning memory display area 905H is displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, white indicating that there is a possibility of changing to a special manner), the game ball wins in the general winning opening. The gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when the

In addition, the production control CPU 90120 performs simultaneous production at the timing when the RTC (real time clock) (not shown) provided on the production control board 9012 reaches a predetermined time (simultaneously executed when the same model of game machine reaches a predetermined time) effect), the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when a game ball wins a prize in the general prize winning opening during the execution period of the simultaneous effect.

Also, when increasing the gauge level, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. At this time, a different effect sound may be output according to the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. Alternatively, the volume of the effect sound may be increased.

Moreover, it is preferable to output the effect sound for increasing the gauge level with a volume different from the effect sound related to the special game and the effect sound related to the normal game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound associated with the normal game, but smaller than the volume of the effect sound associated with the special game. Also, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game, but smaller than the volume of the error sound for notifying the game machine error.

Also, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be changed according to the state. For example, the volume in the normal state may be higher than the volume in the variable probability state or the time saving state.

In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes step by step according to the winning in the general winning slot is not limited to the specific effect D in which the gauge level is changed, and the displayed character mode is changed step by step. It may change (for example, the size of the displayed character increases, or the item owned by the character changes), and the characters that can be selected by the player increase step by step. Also good. Also, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed stepwise, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed stepwise. Also, the sounds output from the speakers 908L and 908R may change step by step.

The specific effect D (gauge update effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. It's like Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by the player's operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 38). It is executable only when In this way, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect D.

[Forty-third production mode]
The above-mentioned specific effects A to D are all effects executed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not enter the general winning hole. You can do it. For example, the effect control CPU 90120, in the game period of 10 minutes, when the game ball does not win any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, as shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a specific effect E in which a notification image 902200 or the like including an image simulating the form of a general winning opening and the characters "No general winning" is displayed on the image display device 905.

In this way, the specific effect is not limited to the effect executed based on the game ball entering the general winning hole, but the effect executed based on the non-winning of the game ball in the general winning hole (general winning It may be a production that suggests the difficulty of winning a prize to the mouth). That is, the specific effect may be any effect that is related to the game event of winning a game ball into a general winning hole (effect that is executed with the occurrence of a game event or non-occurrence of a game event).

In the 43rd production mode shown in FIG. 60, the production control CPU 90120 stores a non-winning judgment timer for judging the period in which the game ball has not won in the general winning opening. Effect control CPU90120, from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the value of the non-winning judgment timer is 0 (assuming that the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), start winning opening designation command, general winning opening When one of the specified command and the big winning opening winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started. Then, before the non-winning judgment timer times out (before 10 minutes have passed since the timer was set), if the general winning mouth specification command is received, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning judgment timer, and again. Start a timer.

On the other hand, when the non-winning judgment timer times out due to the fact that the general winning mouth designation command is not received until the non-winning judgment timer times out, a notification image 902200 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. It should be noted that when the specific effect E is executed, the value of the non-winning determination timer is set to 10 minutes again, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of notification image 902200) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The value of the non-winning determination timer in this case is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the start winning opening designation command, general winning opening designation command, and large winning opening winning command are issued once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it does not receive either, it judges that the game has ended, and suspends the update of the non-winning determination timer (prevents the value of the timer from being updated). When the update of the non-winning judgment timer is suspended, the processing (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) due to the timeout of the non-winning judgment timer is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited) during the period in which the game is not played. In addition, when the update of the non-winning judgment timer is not suspended, the effect control CPU 90120 performs processing due to the non-winning judgment timer timing out (specifically, the value of the timer is 0). Execution of specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any one of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command while the update of the non-winning judgment timer is suspended. , resumes updating the non-winning judgment timer.

That is, the non-win determination timer is updated while the player is playing the game (the end of the game is not determined), and is generally set for 10 minutes during the period when the player is playing the game. When the number of winnings to the winning opening becomes 0, it times out (the effect control CPU 90120 detects the time out). As a result, when the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed if no winning to the general winning opening occurs for 10 minutes.

It should be noted that, in the above presentation mode, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined by whether or not the game ball is being shot toward the game area 9010 . For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance of the game area 9010, and whether or not the player is playing a game is determined according to whether the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the ball operating handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the shooting motor of the ball shooting device is operating). good.

As described above, when the player does not win a prize in the general prize winning slot for a predetermined period (10-minute game period) despite the fact that the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed, To notify that no prize has been awarded to a general prize winning slot. By this notification, the player can understand that no prize has been won in the general prize-winning slot, which can be used as a reference when playing a game (for example, as a basis for determining machine selection). Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko game machine 901 on which the specific effect E is executed (or the frequency of execution of the specific effect E is high), it is possible to increase the frequency of winning to the general winning holes. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on

In addition, when the player is playing a game but no prize is awarded to the general prize winning slot, the specific effect E is executed, but the player is not playing the game. When the winning to the general winning opening has not occurred, temporarily stop the non-winning determination timer (production control CPU90120, so as not to execute the processing based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer), Execution of the specific performance E is restricted.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the player has not played the game and thus no prize has been awarded to the general prize winning slot. The specific performance E may be executed at a lower rate than when it is determined that no prize is awarded to the general prize-winning port even though the player is playing the game.

[Forty-fourth presentation mode]
The specific effect E is not limited to notifying that no prizes have been won in the general prize-winning slot within a predetermined period (the number of prizes in the general prize-winning slot was less than 1). It may be identifiably notified that the number of winnings in the winning opening is less than a predetermined number. In the forty-fourth effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the winning number of game balls into the general winning hole in a predetermined period. Production control CPU90120, from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (assuming that the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), start winning opening designation command, general winning opening When one of the specified command and the big winning opening winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122 is set to zero. Then, during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes after the timer is set), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area each time a general winning opening designation command is received.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), in the specific effect E, within a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number and/or the number of prizes won within a predetermined period is notified. For example, the image display device 905 displays a message "the number of general prizes won in 30 minutes is less than 3" and/or a message "the number of general prizes won in 30 minutes is only 1".

It should be noted that, when the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is set again as the value of the prize number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time after the specific effect E is started. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the specific effect E is not executed, and the winning number determination timer is reset. Set the value to 30 minutes again and start the timer again.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the start winning opening designation command, general winning opening designation command, and large winning opening winning command are issued once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it does not receive either, it judges that the game has ended, and suspends the update of the prize number judgment timer (prevents the value of the timer from being updated). When the update of the number-of-wins determination timer is suspended, the processing (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) due to the timeout of the number-of-wins determination timer is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited) during the period in which the game is not played. In addition, when the update of the winning number determination timer is not suspended, the effect control CPU 90120 performs processing due to the timeout of the winning number determination timer (specifically, the value of the timer is 0). Execution of specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any one of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended, , restarts the update of the winning number determination timer.

That is, the winning number determination timer is updated during the period when the player is playing the game (the end of the game is not determined), and 30 minutes have elapsed during the period when the player is playing the game. (The timeout is detected by the effect control CPU 90120). At the timeout, the specific performance E is executed only when the number of winnings to the general winning openings during the 30-minute game period is less than a predetermined number.

It should be noted that, in the above presentation mode, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined by whether or not the game ball is being shot toward the game area 9010 . For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance of the game area 9010, and whether or not the player is playing a game is determined according to whether the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the ball operating handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the shooting motor of the ball shooting device is operating). good.

In this way, although the player is playing the game, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings during the predetermined period (30 minutes of playing time) is less than the predetermined number, the specific effect E is executed. to notify that the number of winnings to the general winning openings in a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number. By this notification, the player can understand that the frequency of winning in the general winning slot is low, and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for machine selection) when playing a game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko game machine 901 on which the specific effect E is executed (or the frequency of execution of the specific effect E is high), it is possible to increase the frequency of winning to the general winning holes. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on

Further, when the number of winnings in the general winning openings in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not played by the player. If the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number due to the fact that it is not open, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 90120 executes processing based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer Execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may also be executed when it is determined that the number of prizes won in the general prize winning openings during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the player is not playing the game. , In this case, the specific effect is performed at a lower rate than when it is determined that the number of prizes won in the general prize winning openings during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game. E may be executed.

[Forty-fifth presentation mode]
In the 43rd production form and the 44th production form, the production control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Although the specific effect E is executed regardless of the condition, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be changed according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-fifth effect mode, the game state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) in the case of the normal state, the specific effect E is executed, and (2) in the case of the variable probability state or the time saving state, the specific effect E is not executed.

In addition, the game state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1 ) In the case of the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) In the case of the variable probability state or the time saving state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. can be In this way, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E at a different rate according to the game state when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number.

[Forty-sixth presentation form]
In the 43rd production form and the 44th production form, the production control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Although the specific effect E is executed in a common mode regardless of the determination, the effect mode of the specific effect E may be changed according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-sixth effect form, the game state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, timing when the winning number determination timer times out) However, (1) when it is in the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output), and (2) when it is in the variable probability state or the time saving state, the specific effect E is executed as the first It is designed to be executed in two modes (image display only).

Specifically, the first mode of the specific effect E is, on the image display device 905, an image display that indicates that the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning openings during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number, and also conveys the fact. This is a mode in which notification is performed by voice output in which sounds are output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which only notification by image display is performed, and notification by voice output is not performed.

In addition, the game state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1 ) In the case of a normal state, for example, the specific production E is executed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (performed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), , the specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of 20% (performed in the second mode at a rate of 80%), for example. In this manner, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the game state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modified Examples of 43rd Rendering Mode to 46th Rendering Mode]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is similar to the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole, the display setting table of FIG. You can switch between execution and non-execution according to Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by the player's operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 38). It is executable only when In this way, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect E.

For example, if the game parlor side does not want to execute the specific effect E, by switching the display changeover switch 9032 to the non-display setting (first position), the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player's setting. . With such a configuration, the intention of the game hall side is preferentially reflected as to whether or not to execute the specific effect E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning a prize in the general winning opening. can be made

In addition, the value of the non-winning judgment timer in the 43rd production form, and the value of the winning number judgment timer and the value of the winning number counter area in the 44th production form, which are stored in the RAM 90122, are all electronic. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 901 is stopped, it is erased when the power supply is stopped. Then, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 901 is restarted, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd presentation mode and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th presentation mode are both disabled. , and the value of the timer is not referred to until a predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 90120 . Also, the initial value of the win number counter area in the forty-fourth presentation mode becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is restarted.

In this way, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 901 is stopped, the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slots is erased without being backed up, and when the power supply is restarted, the addition starts again from 0. become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the control burden of having to provide a backup means for when power is cut off.

As in the forty-fifth effect mode and the forty-sixth effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the classification for changing the effect mode of the specific effect E is (1) the normal state of the game state, or (2) ) It is not limited whether the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state. For example, (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. Also, (1) whether it is a period after establishment of the reach state in reach fluctuation or (2) whether it is a period before establishment of reach state in reach fluctuation may be classified. Also, (1) a period during which variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed, or (2) a period during which variable display (reach variation) with reach effect is executed, It may be a division. Also, it may be divided into (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effect is performed, or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effect is performed. . Furthermore, whether it is (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect good. Furthermore, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the mode of the specific effect E may differ according to the difference in these categories.

Note that the specific effect E executed in the 43rd to 46th effect forms is executed when the number of winnings to the general winning openings during a predetermined game period is less than a predetermined number. Not limited to such a form, only a specific general winning opening among the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is targeted, and the number of winnings in the specific general winning opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when the number is smaller. For example, targeting only the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, which have a higher winning frequency of game balls than the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, general winning openings in a predetermined game period It is possible to count the number of winning prizes to and execute the specific effect E when the counted number of winning prizes is less than a predetermined number.

In addition, in the 43rd to 46th presentation modes, when the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slot within a certain period of time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is less than a predetermined number, the specific presentation E is executed. However, the period for judging the number of winnings to the general winning openings is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of executions of the special game, for example, it may be a period during which the variable display relating to the special game is executed 100 times. Also, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the game machine to the present time, or a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period during which the game state is controlled to a predetermined state. It may be the period during which the state is controlled (the period during which the game is played with the right hand).

Furthermore, the following method may be used as a method of determining whether or not the number of winnings of game balls into the general winning openings during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number.

(a) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning openings with respect to the predetermined number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is smaller than a predetermined number. Approximately 100 game balls are shot to the game area 9010 in 1 minute while the shooting motor provided in the hitting ball shooting device is being driven. Therefore, for example, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than a predetermined number with respect to the number of hit balls of 1000 (corresponding to the game period of 10 minutes), the specific effect E may be executed. . Also, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls shot to the game area 9010 is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific effect E is executed. can be

Also, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 9010 is lower than a predetermined ratio, and the case is equal to or higher than the predetermined ratio. A specific effect may be executed. For example, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning openings to the number of balls fired into the game area 9010 is low, the frequency of winning the general winning openings due to the appearance of the character A is low. When the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 9010 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio, the character B appears. to notify that the frequency of winning the general winning holes is at a medium level, and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning holes to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of the ratio, the character C may appear to notify that the frequency of winning the general prizes is high.

(b) It may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out according to winnings to the general prize winning opening during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number. For example, if 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, the number of prize balls paid out according to winning in a general winning hole during a game period of 30 minutes is less than 30 (for 3 wins), the specific effect E may be executed. Also, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning in the general prize opening for a predetermined number of shot balls (for example, 1000 shots) shot into the game area 9010 is less than a predetermined number. may be determined, and the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general prize opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 9010 is calculated, and the ratio is predetermined , the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general prize opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 9010 is lower than a predetermined ratio, or more than a predetermined ratio It is also possible to execute a specific effect in a different mode depending on the case of .

In this way, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general prize opening is smaller than a predetermined number. Such a form can be applied even in cases where different numbers of prize balls are paid out depending on the general prize winning opening in which the game ball has won.

(c) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winnings opening is less than a predetermined number (e.g. 5) with respect to the predetermined number of winnings to the starting winnings opening (e.g. 100), It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the number of winning prizes to the general winning openings to the number of winning prizes to the starting winning openings, and execute the specific effect E when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10000) of the winning balls paid out according to winning to the starting winning opening. It may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out according to winning to the general winning opening is smaller than the number of winning balls paid out according to winning to the starting winning opening. The ratio of the numbers may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, if the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general winning opening to the number of winning balls paid out according to winning to the starting winning opening is lower than a predetermined ratio. , and when the ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio, different aspects of the specific effect may be executed.

Also, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out during a predetermined period when the game state is normal Calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general prize opening to the total number of prize balls paid out), and if the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio , the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, it is also possible to execute different forms of the specific effect according to the ratio.

(d) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times) for a predetermined amount of consumption (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine. Alternatively, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning openings to the amount of money spent in the gaming machine may be calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific effect E may be executed. In such a form, depending on the lending unit price (for example, 4 yen or 1 yen) of the game media used in the gaming machine, a different predetermined number (for example, 2 times for 4 yen, 8 times for 1 yen, etc.) times, etc.), or a different predetermined rate (for example, 2 times/1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times/1000 yen for 1 yen, etc.) is applied. In addition, specific effects are executed in different modes depending on whether the ratio of the number of prizes won to the general prize gates to the amount consumed by the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined ratio or higher than the predetermined ratio. You can make it work.

[Forty-seventh production mode]
In the forty-seventh effect mode shown in FIG. 63, a character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening, and during the period in which the character is displayed, the first start winning opening is displayed. Effective start winning of game balls (that is, winning of game balls to the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit) and playing to the second starting winning opening Based on the occurrence of any of the effective start winning of the ball (that is, the game ball winning the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value) , in the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold change effect is executed to change the display part corresponding to the held variable display game, including the variable display game based on the valid start win, from the normal mode to the special mode. .

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120, based on the occurrence of an effective starting prize, holds the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective starting prize to be displayed in a special mode from the beginning without going through the normal mode. You may make it perform change production. For example, when a new valid starting prize is generated, the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new valid starting prize is accompanied by the action of the displayed character raising the cane. may be displayed in a special mode instead of the normal mode (from the beginning of the display of the pending information, the state where the pending information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game whose start condition is finally satisfied may exist).

Here, in the forty-seventh presentation mode, and the forty-eighth presentation mode and the forty-ninth presentation mode to be described later, the random number circuit 90124 Extract a random number for character determination from Then, based on the extracted random number for character determination, whether or not to make a character appear and, if a character is to appear, which of characters A to C is to appear is set in the character determination table of FIG. Determined by the percentage indicated.

It should be noted that the character determination random number extraction by the effect control CPU 90120 may be performed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting the random number for determining the character under the condition that the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state, it is possible to limit the appearance of the character during the period when the game game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. . In addition, it is possible to prevent the character from appearing after the ready-to-reach state is established by not extracting the random number for character determination after the ready-to-reach state is established during the period in which the variable display game is executed.

In the example of FIG. 61, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to make the character A appear at a rate of 10% when receiving the general winning opening specification command specifying the winning to the first general winning opening 9050A, It is decided to make the character B appear at a rate of 30%, and to make the character C appear at a rate of 60%. Also, when a general prize winning port specification command designating a prize to the second general prize winning port 9050B is received, it is determined that none of the characters will appear at a rate of 50%, and the character A will appear at a rate of 35%. Character B is determined to appear at a rate of 10%, and Character C is determined to appear at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the production control CPU 90120 receives a general winning opening designation command that designates winning to the third general winning opening 9050C, it determines that no character appears at a rate of 90%, and 10%. It is decided to make character C appear at a rate. Also, when receiving a general prize winning port specification command designating a prize to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D, it is determined that none of the characters will appear at a rate of 75%, and the character C will appear at a rate of 25%. decide to let

That is, in this example, when the game ball wins either the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left game area 9010A, the third game ball provided in the right game area 9010B Characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in either the general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The player shoots the game ball to the left game area 9010A when the game state is the normal state, and shoots the game ball to the right game area 9010B when the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state. A character will appear at a higher rate than a state or a time-saving state.

Then, in the forty-seventh to forty-ninth production modes, a specific production (specific production F (suspended change production) is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (effective start winning, ready-to-win state) during the period in which the character is displayed. , Specific effect G (variation result notice effect by dialogue)) is executed, so in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state. A specific effect can be executed at a certain rate.

In this way, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous compared to the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the player's interest in the game, for example, the variable display of the special game, is low. By increasing the frequency of execution, interest is enhanced. On the other hand, in the probability variable state and the time saving state, it is advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's interest in the game, for example, the variable display of the special game is high. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect If it remains high, it may actually spoil the interest. Therefore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

It should be noted that it is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 61, and even when game balls enter the same general winning hole, the rate at which characters appear may differ according to the game state. When the game ball wins in the second general winning port 9050B, the character appears at a rate of 50%. The characters may appear at a ratio of .

Also, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the variable probability state and the time saving state. In this way, ``making the execution ratio of the effect in one state different from the execution ratio of the effect in the other state'' means that the effect can be executed only in one state, and the effect is not executed in the other state. shall be included. Further, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 61, the character appearance ratio in the variable probability state and the normal state may be higher than the character appearance ratio in the normal state.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 61, when a game ball wins the first general prize winning port 9050A, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins the second general prize winning port 9050B. there is Also, when a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 9050D, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C. In this embodiment, when the game ball is launched to the left game area 9010A, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second general winning opening 9050B is higher than the first general winning opening 9050A, and the right game area 9010B When the game ball is shot, the frequency of winning the game ball in the third general winning opening 9050C is higher than that in the fourth general winning opening 9050D. That is, when a game ball wins in a general prize-winning port where it is difficult for a game ball to win, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in a general prize-winning port where a game ball easily wins. Conversely, when a game ball enters a general winning port where a game ball is likely to enter, the character wins at a higher rate than when a game ball enters a general winning port where it is difficult for a game ball to enter. You can make it appear.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 61, characters that may be displayed when a game ball wins in the first general prize winning port 9050A and the second general prize winning port 9050B, which have a high frequency of game ball winning in the normal state, are: Possibility of being displayed when a game ball wins in the third general winning port 9050C and the fourth general winning port 9050D, which are characters A to C but have a high frequency of winning the game ball in the variable probability state and the time saving state. A certain character is character C only. In the variable-probability state and the time-saving state, which are game states in which the game interest is higher than in the normal state, a situation occurs in which "a character appears, but a character display period elapses without a predetermined condition being satisfied" occurs. Only the character C, which has the longest display period, can be displayed because it is conceivable that the display time may be lowered.

It should be noted that, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 61, even when game balls enter the same general winning hole, different characters may appear depending on the game state. When the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, the characters A to C may be displayed, but in the variable probability state and the time saving state, when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, the character Only C may be displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 61, the number of characters that can be displayed in the variable probability state and the normal state is set to be larger than the number of characters that can be displayed in the normal state. can be

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the display period of each character displayed on the image display device 905. As shown in FIG. Characters A to C are all displayed on the image display device 905 immediately at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning in the general winning slot. That is, the character is displayed immediately after the winning of the general winning slot occurs, so that the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning slot has occurred.

When the character A is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (valid start winning, ready-to-win state established) within 1 minute from the start of display, the display of the character A is started. Character A is erased from the screen after one minute has elapsed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within one minute from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (suspended change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), the character A is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (including a condition related to an effect executed as the game progresses). Even if a valid starting prize is generated, if the number of pending variable display games including the variable display game corresponding to the valid starting prize is 1, the starting condition for the variable display game is met. Since the start condition is established (retaining information is erased) immediately after this, it becomes difficult to secure a period for executing the reserving change performance by the displayed character. Therefore, when the number of pending variable display games after an effective start winning is less than a predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of pending variable display games after an effective start winning is a predetermined number. If the number is greater than (1 in this example), a pending change effect may be executed.

In addition, the character may be erased when the game is shifted to the jackpot game state or when the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120 described above. It is also assumed that the character displayed on the image display device 905 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko game machine 901 is stopped will not be displayed again after the power supply is restarted. In other words, it is assumed that the backup processing for displaying the characters displayed before the power failure on the image display device 905 again after the power supply is resumed is not performed.

It should be noted that the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed in accordance with the appearance of the character performing a predetermined action (that is, in accordance with the change in the mode of the displayed object). Both the case where the mode of the corresponding display part changes and the case where it does not change shall be included. Further, the timing at which the specific effect F (suspended change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, character A is used, but character B or character C may appear in a specific effect F (suspended change effect). This is the timing at which an action effect in which the corresponding display portion is covered is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

65(f) and (g), the fact that the specific effect G (fluctuation result forewarning effect) is executed means that the character 903100 that has appeared (in this example, the character is character B, but the specific effect G Character A may appear or character C may appear in (variation result notice effect)) will utter a predetermined line, and the timing at which the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) ends is This is the timing at which the dialogue of the character is displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined dialogue display period has passed).

When the character B is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) if the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, ready-to-win state) are not satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of the display, the display of the character B is started. Character B is erased from the screen when two minutes have passed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within two minutes from the start of display, a specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (suspended change effect ), the character B is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

When the character C is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) if the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, establishment of ready-to-win state) are not satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, the display of the character C is started. Character C is erased from the screen when 3 minutes have passed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (suspended change effect ), the character C is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

In this way, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 905 based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, thereby informing the player of the state after the game ball has won in the general winning opening. can be recognized. Also, the period during which the character is displayed is a specific period during which a specific effect can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and even if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period when the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player recognizes that ``the specific effect will be executed if the predetermined condition is established while the character is being displayed,'' and starts the game to satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, interest in the game is heightened until the specific performance is executed.

In addition, since the display period differs depending on the character to be displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is being displayed. A player who has confirmed the type of the character can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period during which a predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. As a result, interest can be enhanced until the specific effect is executed.

In addition, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the setting ratio of the specific period in which the predetermined condition must be satisfied, differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can enter any of the general winning openings with a game ball. It will be interesting to see if it wins.

(Concrete example of specific effect F (suspended change effect))
In the forty-seventh effect mode shown in FIG. 63, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905, the displayed character is displayed as a specific effect F when an effective start win occurs. is executed. As described above, the occurrence of an effective start winning prize means the winning of a game ball to the first start prize winning port in a state where the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first start winning prize is less than the upper limit value, and the second Winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening occurs in a state in which the second reserved memory number corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

The effect control CPU 90120 received a start winning opening designation command specifying "first starting winning opening" or "second starting winning opening" and a start winning judgment result designation command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, the occurrence of a valid start winning can be recognized. FIG. 64 shows a specific example of the pending change effect in the 47th effect form.

In FIG. 64(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Assume that the number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is two. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game whose start condition is met first among the variable display games in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met. is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied second is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to make the character A appear at a rate of 35% based on the winning of the game ball in the second general winning opening 9050B (see FIG. 61). In FIG. 64(b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character 903000 (character A) holding a cane 903001 on the image display device 905. FIG. It is assumed that the character A appears on the screen immediately after winning the general prize.

Then, within one minute from the appearance of the character A, an effective starting prize is generated in the first starting prize winning port, and a predetermined condition is established. In FIG. 64(c), accordingly, the number of reserved memories is 3, and the display part (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied thirdly is displayed in the normal mode. The effect control CPU 90120, which has detected the occurrence of an effective starting prize, that is, the establishment of a predetermined condition in the state in which the character is displayed, determines whether or not to change the display portion corresponding to each of the three reserved memories from the normal mode to the special mode. Each determines whether

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the start winning prize command storage area for the first special figure and the start winning prize command storage area for the second special figure Each start winning judgment result designation command (not blank data contains valid data). Then, as shown in FIG. 64(d), with respect to the start winning determination result specifying command specifying "big hit", the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. At a rate of 20%, it is decided not to change the aspect of the display portion corresponding to the command to the normal aspect. On the other hand, with respect to the start winning judgment result specifying command that specifies "missing", it is decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate of 90%. , the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is determined not to be changed to the normal mode.

In this example, with respect to the start winning determination result specification command corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first and second, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command shall not be changed to the normal mode. (No pending change) is determined, and only with respect to the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied thirdly, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. It is assumed that it has been decided to allow (with pending change).

Then, as shown in FIG. 64(e), the effect control CPU 90120 causes the character 903000 (character A) to turn the tip of the wand 903001 toward the starting winning memory display area 905H, and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the wand 903001. to execute an action presentation in which the display part corresponding to each reserved memory is surrounded by.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 64(f), the effect control CPU 90120 changes the display mode of the left end and the second display part from the left to the normal mode, as shown in FIG. As for the third display part from the left, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the determination described above. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period, the character 903000 (character A) holding the wand 903001 and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the wand 903001 disappear from the screen.

As a result of the change in the appearance of the display part accompanying this action effect, for the player, the character 903000 (character A) that appeared based on the winning in the general winning slot performed the action, and the third display part from the left was displayed. has changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and expects the variable display game to be executed three games after the variable display game currently being executed.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 64(c) and 64(d), with respect to the start winning determination result specifying command corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is not satisfied, the display part mode corresponding to the command is changed to normal. If it is determined not to change the mode (no pending change), even after the action effect shown in FIG. 64(e) is performed, as shown in FIG. All three corresponding retention sites are unchanged in the normal fashion.

In this way, the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed with the trigger of ``the occurrence of the effective starting prize during the period in which the character is displayed'', thereby generating the effective starting prize during the character display period. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game ball wins a prize in the general winning hole, and to increase the interest until the specific performance is executed. In addition, the event of winning a prize in a general prize gate that is not related to the progress of the variable display game is used as a trigger to predict the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been met, so that the game ball is placed in the general prize gate. It is possible to further enhance interest from winning to execution of the specific performance.

Also, according to the action of the character 903000 (character A), the display mode of any one of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied changes from the normal mode to the special mode. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not the display mode changes, and furthermore, if the display mode changes, which display part changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, by suggesting a variable display game that the player can expect, interest can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect (appearance of character A) that suggests winning the general prize slot and the effect (character A's action) that suggests the display result of the variable display game in which the start condition is not satisfied are common objects ( By being composed of the character A), it is possible to further enhance interest from the time when the game ball wins in the general winning hole until the execution of the specific effect. Winning in a general prize-winning slot unrelated to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game in which the start condition is not satisfied are suggested by the common object, thereby making it possible to relate to the appearance and action of the character. The player's interest can be heightened.

In addition, the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is a variable display game ( The display result is announced by targeting each suspended variable display game including the last variable display game in which the starting condition is satisfied. Target only the variable display game (the last variable display game where the starting condition was satisfied) corresponding to the effective start winning prize that triggered the start (the effective start winning prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied). The display result may be announced in advance. Conversely, a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning that triggered the execution of the pending change effect (the effective starting winning that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was established) (finally the starting condition The variable display game other than the variable display game in which is established may be targeted, and the display result thereof may be announced.

(Character deletion processing)
As with the specific effects A to D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the third 4 Winning history of one or more times to the general winning opening 9050D and winning history of one or more times to either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) are deleted (winning history in FIG. 63 reset condition).

Further, if the displayed character is erased after a predetermined display period has elapsed without the specific effect F being executed, the winning history (at least including one or more winning history to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 63).

FIG. 66(A) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative pattern variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. FIG. When the variable display 1 is executed, at the timing of (1), one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the game ball winning in one of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. be.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing of (2) when one minute has passed since the appearance without occurrence of an effective starting prize. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, but with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden and is continuously displayed. there is In addition, when the effective start prize is generated within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is hidden after the end of the action presentation.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B disappears at the timing of (3) when two minutes have passed since the appearance without any valid start winning. During this time, variable display 1 ends and variable display 2 starts, and variable display 2 ends and variable display 3 starts. With the end of display 2 and the start of variable display 3, character B is not hidden and is continuously displayed. In addition, when the effective start prize is generated within two minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the end of the action presentation.

When the displayed character is the character C, the character C disappears after 5 minutes have passed since its appearance without the occurrence of an effective starting prize. In this example, since the effective start winning has occurred at the timing (4) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C, the action effect is executed without the character becoming hidden, and the action is performed. At the timing (5) when the effect ends, the display part corresponding to one or more reserved memories changes from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, variable display 1 ends and variable display 2 starts, variable display 2 ends and variable display 3 starts, and variable display 3 ends and variable display 4 starts. With the end of display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not hidden. displayed continuously.

In this manner, once the character is displayed, it is continuously displayed until ``predetermined condition is satisfied'' or ``a predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied''. ing. Then, the character is hidden at the earlier timing of "a predetermined condition is satisfied" or "a predetermined period elapses without a predetermined condition being satisfied".

[48th presentation mode]
In the forty-eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 63, a character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening, and the ready-to-win state is established within the period during which the character is displayed. Based on this, lines corresponding to the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game with a variation pattern involving a reach state) are displayed. That is, the character display control is the same as in the 47th presentation mode, but the predetermined condition to be established within the character display period and the type of specific presentation to be executed when the predetermined condition is met are different.

(Specific example of specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect))
In the forty-eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 63, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905 and the ready-to-reach state is established, a specific effect G is performed on the displayed character. A variable result forewarning effect accompanied by dialogue display is executed. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the ready-to-win state according to the variation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the ready-to-reach state is being executed and the remaining time of the variable display game with the ready-to-reach state reaches a predetermined timing for establishment of the ready-to-reach state, it is determined that the ready-to-reach state has been established. It is possible to execute the specific effect G if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 65 shows a specific example of the change result announcement effect in the forty-eighth effect mode.

In FIG. 65(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, vertical scrolling display) is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Assume that the number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is one. At this time, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode in the start winning memory display area 905H. .

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 determines to make the character B appear at a rate of 30% based on the winning of the game ball in the first general winning opening 9050A (see FIG. 61). In FIG. 65(b), the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character 903100 (character B) holding a cane 903101 on the image display device 905 based on this determination. It is assumed that the character B appears on the screen immediately after winning the general prize.

Then, in FIG. 65(c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decoration pattern that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of "2" on the left, "1" on the right, and "3" on the middle is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 65(d), the next variable display game is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is fulfilled but the start condition is not fulfilled. is no longer present, and the display portion on the left end is in a non-display mode.

Then, it is assumed that the ready-to-reach state is established within two minutes from the appearance of the character B, and the predetermined condition is established. In FIG. 65(e), characters 903050 of "reach!" are displayed at the top of the screen as the reach state is established. The effect control CPU 90120, which has detected the establishment of the ready-to-win state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines the lines of the character B. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game being executed is determined to be a big winning combination or a losing combination. It should be noted that the last variation pattern specification command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a variation pattern specification command for big hits, or it may be confirmed whether it is a variation pattern specification command for loss. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 65(f), when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is to be a big hit combination, 25% of the characters displaying the words "chance!" It is decided to display it horizontally, and at a rate of 75%, it is decided to display the line "Geki-netsu!!" next to the character being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is to be a losing combination, it is determined to display the line "chance!" It is decided to display the line "Geki-netsu!!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of 100%.

In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line "Gekietsu!!" next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, the production control CPU 90120 creates a production in which the character 903100 (character B) swings up the cane 903101 and utters the line 903102, "Kanetsu!!", as shown in FIG. 65(g). to run. When the line 903102 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the character 903100 (character B) holding the cane 903101 and the line 903102 uttered by the character 903100 are erased from the screen.

As a result, for the player, the lines of the character 903100 (character B) appearing based on the winning in the general winning slot may result in the final stop display of the decorative symbols that are the jackpot combinations as a result of the ready-to-win effect. high can be grasped.

In this way, by executing the specific effect G (fluctuation result forewarning effect) with the trigger of ``the ready-to-reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed,'' whether the ready-to-reach state is established during the character display period. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game ball wins in the general prize-winning hole, and to increase the interest until the specific performance is executed. In addition, with the event of winning a prize in a general prize gate that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, the display result of the variable display game for which the display result has not yet been derived and displayed is announced. Amusement can be further enhanced from when the ball wins to when the specific performance is executed. In addition, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the dialogue of the character 903000 (character A), thereby improving the interest of the character display effect.

In addition, an effect suggesting winning in the general prize slot (appearance of character B) and an effect suggesting the display result of the variable display game for which the display result is not derived and displayed (character B's dialogue) are common objects. By being composed of (character B), it is possible to further heighten the interest from when the game ball wins in the general winning hole to when the specific effect is executed. Winning in general winning slots unrelated to the progress of the variable display game and display results of the variable display game that have not been determined are suggested by the common object, thereby allowing the player to understand the character's appearance and dialogue. can arouse interest.

In the forty-eighth production form, when the ready-to-win state is established, that is, when the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes a predetermined mode, the character executes a specific production G in which the character utters a predetermined line. The specific effect G may be executed when the variable display of the decorative design is executed regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative design. In addition, for example, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, a predetermined notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed. , the specific effect G may be executed.

In addition, in the forty-eighth effect mode, an example was described in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening regardless of the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern. The character may be displayed under the condition that the variable display of the decoration pattern executed when the game ball wins the general winning slot becomes a predetermined mode, for example, the game ball wins the general winning slot. The character may be displayed under the condition that the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed when the game is executed is in a ready-to-win state (that the variable display game of the ready-to-win fluctuation pattern is being executed).

(Character deletion processing)
As with the specific effects A to D and the specific effects F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (fluctuation result announcement effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the third 4 including one or more winning history to the general winning opening 9050D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 63).

In addition, if the displayed character is erased after a predetermined display period elapses without the specific effect G being executed, the winning history (at least including one or more winning history to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 63).

FIG. 66(B) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect G (fluctuation result announcement effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative pattern variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4, and the ready-to-win effect is executed only in the variable display 4 among these, in the ready-to-win state. shall be established. When the variable display 1 is executed, at the timing of (11), one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the game ball winning in one of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. be.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing of (12) when one minute has passed since the appearance without the ready-to-reach state being established. During this time, with the end of variable display 1 and the start of variable display 2, character A is not hidden and is continuously displayed. If the ready-to-reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is hidden after the dialogue display effect ends.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is hidden at the timing of (13) when two minutes have passed since the appearance without the ready-to-reach state being established. During this time, when the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, and when the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, the character B continues to be displayed instead of being hidden. It should be noted that if the ready-to-reach state is established within two minutes from the appearance of character B, character B is hidden after the dialogue display effect ends.

When the displayed character is the character C, the character C disappears after 5 minutes have passed since its appearance without the ready-to-reach state being established. In this example, since the ready-to-reach state is established at the timing (14) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C, the dialogue display effect is executed without hiding the character. During this time, the character C is not displayed at the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, and the end of the variable display 3 and the start of the variable display 4. It is displayed continuously.

[Forty-ninth production mode]
In the above-described 47th production mode and 48th production mode, the specific effects are executed as long as the predetermined conditions are satisfied, regardless of which type of character among the characters A to C is displayed. However, only when a character of a specific type is displayed, a specific effect of a corresponding type may be executed.

For example, in the forty-ninth effect mode shown in FIG. 63, a specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed based on the occurrence of an effective start winning during the period in which either character A or B is displayed. Thus, even if an effective start winning occurs during the period when the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is not executed. Further, a specific effect G (fluctuation result forewarning effect) is executed based on the establishment of the ready-to-reach state during the period in which the character C is displayed. Even if the ready-to-win state is established within the period, the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is not executed.

Thus, according to the type of character to be displayed, that is, the notification mode for notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, a predetermined condition for making the specific effect executable, and the condition of the predetermined condition. Different types of specific effects may be executed based on establishment.

Although the predetermined conditions for enabling execution of the specific effect are common regardless of the type of character to be displayed, a specific effect to be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied depends on the type of character to be displayed. The types of presentation may be different. For example, when a valid starting prize is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is not executed). However, if a valid start winning occurs during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is not executed). can be

In addition, although the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect differs depending on the type of character to be displayed, it is executed when the predetermined condition corresponding to each is established regardless of the type of character to be displayed. The type of the specific effect to be displayed may be common. For example, if a valid start winning occurs during the period when character A or B is displayed, specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed (even if reach state is established during that period, specific effect F is not executed), but even if the ready-to-win state is established during the period in which character C is displayed, specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed However, the specific effect F is not executed).

Also, during the period in which the character is displayed, (1) when the effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established, a specific effect F (suspended change effect) in which the character being displayed performs an action is performed. After the character is executed, the character is erased, and (2) if the ready-to-reach state is established before the effective start winning, the character is removed after executing a specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) in which the character being displayed emits a line. It may be deleted. In this way, it is possible that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition that is satisfied first among the plurality of predetermined conditions is selected. A specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

Also, during the period in which the character is displayed, (1) when the effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established, a specific effect F (suspended change effect) in which the character being displayed performs an action is performed. After execution, the character is erased, and (2) even if the ready-to-win state is established before the effective start winning, the character is erased after executing a specific effect F (suspended change effect) in which the character being displayed performs an action. You can make it work. In this way, it is possible that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied, a specific effect is produced. You can make it run.

[Modified Examples of 47th Rendering Form to 49th Rendering Form]
In the example of FIG. 62, when a predetermined condition is established within a predetermined specific period after the character is displayed and a specific effect is executed, the character is erased before the end of the specific period. However, it is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may continue to be displayed until the specific period ends even after the specific effect is executed. good.

In such a form, the specific effect may be executed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period in which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on winning a prize in the general winning slot, the character C does not disappear from the screen during the 5 minutes during which the character C is displayed, even if an effective start winning occurs. is displayed, and the specific effect F (suspended change effect) may be executed each time an effective start winning prize is generated during the five minutes.

In the example of FIG. 62, the character display period is a predetermined period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes). , it may be a period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times, or it may be a period until the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed is completed. It may be a period until the game state (for example, normal state, probability variable state or time saving state, jackpot game state) ends.

Also, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the display period. That is, once such a character is displayed, the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

Also, the character display period may be determined prior to determining the type of character to be displayed, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which period of the character display period is 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. , if character B is selected at a rate of 70%, character A is selected at a rate of 15%, character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, the character C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B at a rate of 20%, and character A at a rate of 10%. For example, different display periods may be determined according to which general winning hole the game ball has won, or according to the game state.

In addition, the predetermined conditions to be established in order to be able to execute the specific effect are not limited to the establishment of the above-described effective start winning and ready-to-win state, the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the jackpot game state of a predetermined type (for example, a probability variable jackpot, or Occurrence of a jackpot with the largest number of rounds), the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot game states (continuous number = variable probability state or time saving after the end of the jackpot game state The number of consecutive jackpot game states controlled by the state + 1) reaches a predetermined number of times, the end of the jackpot game state, the control to a predetermined game state (for example, variable probability state), and the display result becomes a losing combination. A predetermined number of consecutive variable display games, a predetermined number of consecutive variable display games with a variation pattern of "non-reach" ("no reach"), the number of pending memories reaching a predetermined number, etc. Conditions, that is, conditions that are established as a result of a game, may be used. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period in which the variable display of the special symbols is executed, but the variable display of the special symbols (effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols) is executed during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled. It may be performed during a period when it is not performed.

In the forty-seventh presentation mode and the forty-ninth presentation mode, an example is shown in which the foretelling effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied is the pending change effect. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 42(b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot pending, an effect with only sound is executed, or an effect with sound and movable accessory 901000 is executed. It may be a look-ahead forewarning effect in which the ratio of whether or not to play is different, or may be a chance forewarning effect as shown in the 50th and 51st performance modes, which will be described later. Also, a countdown notice effect may be used in which the player is notified of the number of remaining variable displays until the target variable display of the prefetch notice.

In the forty-seventh presentation mode and the forty-ninth presentation mode, after the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, the displayed character is displayed in the form of the pending information by the occurrence of the effective start winning. Although an example of executing a pending change effect that changes is shown, it is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, a start winning judgment corresponding to each variable display game being held After confirming the result designation command and the start winning variation pattern judgment result designation command, if there is a variable display game where the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate is higher than when it does not exist. A character may be made to appear. Also, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big win or a variable display game with a reach state, the appearance rate of a specific character may be higher than when there is no such variable display game. Also, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big win or a variable display game with a reach state. Then, when an effective start prize is generated after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable to execute a suspension change performance in which the displayed character changes the mode of the suspension information.

In the forty-seventh to forty-ninth performance modes, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the displayed character is erased, and during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled, the game ball is inserted into the general winning opening. It is also possible to prevent the execution of the specific effect by preventing the appearance of a new character even if the player wins the prize. As a result, the player's attention is focused on various performances (for example, fanfare performance, round performance, ending performance, etc.) executed in conjunction with the control to the jackpot game state so as not to interfere with these various performances. be able to.

In the forty-seventh to forty-ninth presentation modes, an example has been described in which a specific presentation is always executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period. Even if a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. For example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period of character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period of character B, the specific effect is performed at a rate of 50%. is executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, a specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%. The execution ratio may be made different.

Here, in the 47th performance mode to the 49th performance mode, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning port while a character is displayed, a new character based on the winning in the general winning port is not displayed. Instead, the characters that have already been displayed are to be displayed continuously. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence or absence of character display and the character to be displayed at the ratio shown in FIG. and the character is displayed based on the determination.

In addition, not limited to such a form, if a character is displayed when a game ball wins in the general winning opening, instead of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (already displayed It is also possible to erase the character that has been selected) and display the character based on the general winning later.

Also, comparing the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed and the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is longer. If it is longer, it will continue to be displayed, and the character based on the later general prize will not be displayed. If the display period of the character based on the later general prize is longer, the character based on the previous general prize will be The character that was displayed may be erased), and the character based on the general winning may be displayed later.

In such a form, when the character based on the later general prize is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (the character that has already been displayed is erased), the display period of the character based on the later general prize In addition, the remaining display period of the character already displayed based on the previous general winning may be added (the period obtained by adding the two may be used as the display period of the character to be newly displayed).

In addition, in the 47th to 49th presentation modes, when a game ball wins a prize in a general prize-winning slot within the character display period, a new character is not displayed based on the winning in the general prize-winning slot. , the remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed may be extended. The extended period (the time to be added to the remaining display period) may be the display period determined for the characters already displayed (for example, 1 minute if character A is displayed). In addition, even when a prize is won in the general prize pool during the display period of the character, one of the characters is determined according to the ratio shown in FIG. A display period (for example, two minutes for character B) corresponding to the character that is not displayed may be added to the remaining display period of the already displayed character.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, if a character is displayed when a game ball wins a prize in the general prize opening, the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed (without erasing the character that has already been displayed) will be displayed later. The characters based on the general winnings may also be displayed together. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning slot while character A is being displayed, and it is decided to newly display character B, a new character is added in addition to character A which has already been displayed. B may also be displayed on the image display device 905 .

In such a form, the period obtained by adding the display period of the character based on the later general prize to the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize should be the common display period of both characters. can be In this case, if the predetermined condition is established before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed and either one character or both characters are erased. Also, when the common display period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied, both characters are erased.

In a state in which both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 905, the first predetermined condition (for example, valid When the start win) is established and a first specific effect (for example, a specific effect F (suspended change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is erased and only the second character is displayed. Then, a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is established, and a second specific effect (for example, specific effect G (variation result The second character may also be erased when the advance notice effect)) is executed. Here, the first character and the second character may be characters of the same type.

In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be a common condition (for example, occurrence of an effective start winning prize). In that case, both the first character and the second character may In the state displayed on the image display device 905, a first specific effect by the first character and a second specific effect by the second character based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, occurrence of valid start winning only once). Both effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are erased.

Also, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, specific effect F (suspended change effect)). In the state displayed in 905, when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the first character (for example, effective start winning) is established, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (suspended change effect)) is executed. One character is erased and only the second character is displayed. Next, when a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, the same type of specific effect (specific effect F ( A pending change effect)) may be executed to erase the second character.

In addition, as in the forty-ninth production mode, if the first character (character A or B) is displayed, the first specific production (specific production F) can be executed, and a second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed in accordance with the establishment of the second condition (establishment of reach state) during the period when the second character (character C) is displayed. form, only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed at the same time). Here, when the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is higher when the second specific effect is executed than when the first specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character. It shall be displayed with priority over characters. For example, when it is decided to display the second character based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning slot while the first character is displayed, the first character is erased and the second character is displayed. shall be newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, it is assumed that the control for displaying the first character instead is not performed.

On the other hand, when the configuration is such that the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed in response to the establishment of the first condition, and the second condition is displayed. It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, if both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects for the same variable display game and their execution periods overlap (for example, both are variable result announcement effects for the same variable display game and reach When the second specific effect is executed immediately after establishment of the state), the second specific effect is executed with priority over the first specific effect, and the first specific effect is not executed at this time.

[Fifty production mode]
In the fiftieth effect mode shown in FIG. 67, every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning hole, a button icon 904000 is newly displayed on the image display device 905 (see FIG. 68 etc.), and the displayed button icon 904000 The types of specific effects that can be executed differ according to the number of . Here, all of the specific effects in this mode of effect prompt the player to perform some kind of operation, and are effects capable of giving advance notice of the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's motion. As the specific effects, there are provided three types of cut-in advance notice effects (specific effects H), pseudo continuous advance notice effects (specific effects I), and chance eye advance notice effects (specific effects J).

The display information condition in FIG. 67 is the number of button icons 904000 displayed necessary for executing each specific effect. No performance is performed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, the pseudo continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the chance notice effect is not executed. It is not executed unless three or more button icons 904000 are displayed.

The button icon 904000 displayed on the image display device 905 is incremented by 1 each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning hole, and up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 905. Assume that there is Then, when the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of displayed button icons 904000 required for execution of the specific effect from the number of displayed button icons 904000 before the execution of the specific effect is displayed. It will be displayed on the image display device 905 after execution of the specific effect. For example, when five button icons 904000 are displayed, (1) cut-in notice effects (required number of button icons to be displayed=1) are executed. The number of display of 904000 becomes 4, and when (2) pseudo consecutive notice effect (number of required button icon displays=2) is executed, the number of display of button icon 904000 after execution of pseudo consecutive notice effect becomes 3. , (3) When the chance prediction effect (required number of button icons to be displayed=3) is executed, the number of button icons 904000 displayed after the execution of the chance prediction effect becomes two.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect for notifying the display result of the variable display of the variable display pattern by the contents of the characters displayed on the screen after establishment of the ready-to-win state. As shown in FIG. 67, the cut-in notice effect is performed when (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed and (2) a variable display game is executed with a variable pattern involving a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined repeated hitting operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined repeated hitting operation, thereby enabling execution.

Note that when the variable display game is executed with the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win state in a state in which none of the button icons 904000 are displayed, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice is not given. No performance is performed. Further, in a variable display game with a variable pattern that does not involve a ready-to-win state, repeated hitting operations related to the cut-in notice effect are not notified, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

In addition, in the cut-in notice effect, the ready-to-win state is established during the period in which the variable display game is being executed, and after that the player operates the operation button 9030 multiple times, so the ready-to-win effect is executed. It is conditioned on execution of a variable display game according to a variation pattern that is displayed. A specific aspect of the cut-in announcement effect will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 68(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, vertical scrolling display) is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Assume that the number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is one. At this time, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode in the start winning memory display area 905H. .

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the first button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the game ball winning in any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 68B, the screen is updated from a state in which no button icons 904000 are displayed to a state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed. In addition, as a total of one or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen, characters 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" are displayed. is displayed. Here, the predetermined operation suggestion condition is that (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game with a variable pattern involving a reach state is executed.

Then, in FIG. 68(c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decoration pattern that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of "4" on the left, "2" on the right, and "8" on the middle is derived and displayed as the determined decorative symbols.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach state based on establishment of the conditions for starting the next variable display game. Confirm based on the variation pattern specification command received from 90100. Then, when the variable display game to be started has the reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in announcement effect is satisfied.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68(d), the next variable display game is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is fulfilled but the start condition is not fulfilled. is no longer present, and the display portion on the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect of displaying characters 904080 of "reach!" when the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 68(e). Then, based on the establishment of the operation suggesting condition, as shown in FIG. 68(f), the characters "Continue hitting!" Repeated hit suggestion information 904100 composed of an image and a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is effective is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 should be performed continuously.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 erases one button icon 904000 required for executing the cut-in advance notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 as the repeated hitting suggestion information 904100 is displayed. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is erased from the screen as there is no executable specific effect.

It is assumed that the player who has recognized the repeated hitting suggestion information 904100 continuously presses the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times or more. The effect control CPU 90120 updates the display of the time bar according to the elapsed time after displaying the repeated hitting suggestion information 904100 . When the time bar is displayed, it is in a state of 5 stages out of 5 stages, and the time bar decreases by 1 stage each time one second elapses from the display. The effect control CPU 90120, as shown in FIG. 68(g), operates the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 out of 5 steps (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operations are performed, a cut-in mode is determined, and a cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 905 .

Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120, when the continuous hitting suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. decided to display the characters "Chance!" at a rate of 20% and the characters "Enthusiasm!" In the case of the final stop symbol, it is decided to display the characters "Chance!" at a rate of 80% and the characters "Enthusiasm!!" at a rate of 20%.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a cut-in announcement effect for displaying a screen including the determined characters on the image display device 905 . In the example of FIG. 68(i), the characters 904200 of "Enthusiasm!!" are displayed in large size on the entire screen.

In addition, if the operation button 9030 is not operated more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100, the effect control CPU 90120 will say, "Chance!" and "Super heat!!" shall not be displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo consecutive notice production)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is a re-variation that scrolls the temporarily stopped decoration pattern again in the vertical direction in one variable display game, as if it were repeated multiple times. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of decorative patterns is continuously executed. In the case of re-fluctuation, in accordance with the player's symbol stop operation, a pseudo-continuous symbol (constituted by the characters "NEXT" in this example) is displayed as a decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C. shall be temporarily suspended.

As shown in FIG. 67, the pseudo-repeated notice effect is performed by (1) displaying two or more button icons 904000 and (2) performing a variable display game with a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds or longer. In this case, it is notified to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can perform the predetermined symbol stop operation.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive notice effect, the player operates the operation button 9030 three times (each symbol stop operation is performed three times) during the period in which one variable display game is executed. The condition is that a variable display game with a variation pattern requiring a certain operation time and a variation time of at least a certain period of time (eight seconds in this example) is executed. A specific aspect of the pseudo consecutive notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG.

In FIG. 69(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, vertical scrolling display) is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Assume that the number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is one. At this time, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode in the start winning memory display area 905H. .

In addition, one button icon 904000 is displayed at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won the first general prize winning port 9050A to the fourth general prize winning port 9050D. Characters 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that the in-notice effect can be executed are displayed.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the second button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the game ball winning in any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 69(b), the screen is updated from the state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed to the state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, as a total of two or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen, characters 904000b of "pseudo-continue" indicating that "the pseudo-continuation notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" are displayed. is displayed. Here, the predetermined operation suggestion condition is (1) a state in which two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds or longer. be.

Then, in FIG. 69(c), it is assumed that after the second button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decoration pattern that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of "5" on the left, "1" on the right, and "7" on the middle is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 receives from the game control microcomputer 90100 whether or not the variation time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the conditions for starting the next variable display game. Check based on the variation pattern specification command. Then, when the variable display game to be started has a variation time of 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect has been established.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120, as shown in FIG. decides to temporarily stop (perform re-fluctuation) the pseudo-continuous symbols with a probability of 15%, and decides not to temporarily stop (perform the re-fluctuation) the pseudo-continuous symbols at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach state, it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols (execute variation again) with a probability of 100%.

When it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the effect control CPU 90120 temporarily stops the decorative symbols in the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L in response to each symbol stop operation of the player, and , determines the decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decoration symbol display area 905R, and determines to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 905C.

As described above, the production control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command, and the variable display result A fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) is determined according to the notification command. When it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the "left" and "right" decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R in accordance with the player's respective symbol stop operation are determined. It may be different from or the same as the "left" and "right" decoration symbols constituting the decoration symbol (final stop symbol).

When it is determined not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 905L according to the player's respective symbol stop operation. The ``left'', ``right'' and ``middle'' decorative patterns that constitute the determined fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) are swung and stopped in the area 905R and the ``middle'' decorative pattern display area 905C. to decide. That is, when the re-fluctuation is not performed, it is decided to stop swinging the fixed decoration pattern (final stop pattern) according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

In this way, when the presence or absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbols for re-variation are determined, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the left end display portion is in the non-display mode. Along with the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, as shown in FIG. 69(f), the characters "Press!" Operation suggestion information 904050 composed of simulated images is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative design in the "left" decorative design display area 905L.

In addition, when the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the two button icons 904000 required for execution of the pseudo continuous advance notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 . As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and the characters 904000a of "cut-in" and the characters 904000b of "pseudo-continuation" are erased from the screen as there is no executable specific effect.

When the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the "left" decoration symbol display area 905L presses the operation button 9030, the "left" decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 69(g). A decorative pattern ("1" in this example) is stopped from swinging in the pattern display area 905L. The swinging stop is a state in which the ornamental pattern is not scrolled in the vertical direction, but is swinging without stopping completely (the final stop is not displayed). Here, if it is decided to stop the pseudo continuous symbols, the decoration symbol to be swing-stopped is the “left” decoration symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of temporarily stopped symbols. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbols, it is the "left" decoration symbol that constitutes the combination of the predetermined determined decoration symbols (final stop symbols).

When the "left" decorative pattern is stopped from swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays operation suggestion information 904050 in the "right" decorative pattern display area 905R, as shown in FIG. 69(g). . As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative design in the "right" decorative design display area 905R.

When the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the "right" decoration symbol display area 905R presses the operation button 9030, the "right" decoration appears as shown in FIG. 69(h). A decorative pattern ("2" in this example) is stopped from swinging in the pattern display area 905R. Here, the decoration symbol to be swing-stopped is the “right” decoration symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it has been decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbols, it is the "right" decoration design that constitutes the combination of the predetermined determined decoration designs (final stop design).

When the "right" decorative pattern is stopped from swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays operation suggestion information 904050 in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 905C, as shown in FIG. 69(h). . As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative design in the "middle" decorative design display area 905C.

It is assumed that the player who has recognized the operation suggesting information 904050 displayed in the “medium” decoration symbol display area 905C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030 .

At this time, the effect control CPU 90120, based on the table of FIG. A pseudo-continuous pattern composed of the characters "NEXT" is stopped from swinging in the ornamental pattern display area 905C. As a result, the predetermined combination of "left", "middle" and "right" temporarily stopped symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(j), after a temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decorative patterns change (for example, The vertical scroll display) is restarted and re-fluctuation is performed. After the re-fluctuation, the combination of fixed decorative patterns (final stop patterns) is finally displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, and the decorative patterns are variably displayed. The display result of the game is determined.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120, based on the table of FIG. The "middle" decoration design that constitutes the combination of the predetermined decoration design (final stop design) in the decoration design display area 905C swings and stops. As a result, the predetermined combination of "left", "right", and "middle" fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is stopped from swinging. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(l), after the rocking is stopped for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative patterns (final stop symbol) is displayed at the final stop, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols even when the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. In this case, the combination of temporarily stopped symbols decided in advance is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the re-fluctuation is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols is automatically temporarily stopped and displayed, and the re-fluctuation is executed even if no operation is performed. and

In this example, when two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or longer, the operation suggestion condition is satisfied. The operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern accompanies the ready-to-reach state (that is, regardless of the effect mode of the specified variation pattern), but not limited to such a form, The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and that the variable display game is executed in a variation pattern involving a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggesting condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the ready-to-win state is a big hit, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is a loss. It's good to be

In addition, if the presence or absence of execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is preset for each variation pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 90100 side, that is, by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 In the case where it is designated to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the effect control CPU 90120 is instructed to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols when two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. (executing a variable display game with a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo continuous notice effect) may be the operation suggestion condition, and as in the above example, regardless of the specified variation pattern , two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the variable display game is executed for a variable time equal to or longer than a predetermined time may be set as the operation suggestion condition.

(Chance eye notice production)
The chance notice effect provided as the specific effect J is a display result of the variable display game executed prior to the variable display game targeted for the foreseeing notice, and is different from the display result of the decoration pattern that becomes the big hit combination. The display result of the variable display game, which is the target of the advance notice, is announced to the player by displaying the chance number, which is the display result, in the final stop.

In this example, the same odd-numbered decorative symbols are finally displayed in the "left" and "middle" decorative design display areas 905L and 905C, and the "right" decorative design display area 905R displays the "left" By finally stopping and displaying an even-numbered decorative pattern larger by 1 than the odd-numbered decorative pattern displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display areas 905L and 905C, "left", "middle", and "right", which are chances. It is assumed that the combination of the decoration patterns of "Right" is completed.

That is, in this example, the combinations of "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbols that are chances are any of "112", "334", "556" and "778". In response to the player's all-symbols stop operation, it is possible to finally stop and display the combination of decoration symbols that will be the chance.

As shown in FIG. 67, the chance notice effect is: (1) a state in which three or more button icons 904000 are displayed; When none of the variable display games executed before the display game is accompanied by a ready-to-win state, the player is notified to perform a predetermined all-symbols stop operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined all-symbols stop operation. It becomes executable by doing

In addition, in the chance notice effect, when the player operates the operation button 9030 only once in one variable display game, the combination of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative patterns oscillates. be stopped. That is, unlike the simulated consecutive notice effect in which each pattern stop operation is required three times to stop the swinging of the respective decorative patterns of "left", "right", and "middle" in one variable display game, Only one operation (all symbols stop operation) is required in one variable display game. A specific aspect of the chance eye announcement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72 .

In FIG. 71(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, vertical scrolling display) is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Assume that the number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is three. At this time, in the starting winning memory display area 905H, each display part corresponding to the three variable display games in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied (left end, second from left, and third from left) th) are displayed in a normal manner.

Here, the effect control CPU90120 is stored in the starting winning prize change pattern determination result designation command stored in the starting winning prize command storage area for the first special figure, and the starting winning prize command storage area for the second special figure Confirm the command for specifying the determination result of the variation pattern judgment result at the time of start winning, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (leftmost display part) in which the start condition is satisfied first among the 3 variable display games that are on hold. is the non-reach variation pattern, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) in which the start condition is met second is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is met third. It is assumed that the player knows that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the third display part from the left) is the reach variation pattern.

In addition, two button icons 904000 are displayed at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won multiple times (at least twice) in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. "Cut-in" characters 904000a indicating that the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, and the fact that the pseudo continuous notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is met. The character 904000b of "pseudo-run" indicating the is displayed.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the third button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the game ball winning in any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 71(b), the screen is updated from the state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed to the state in which three button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, as a total of three or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen, characters 904000c of "chance" indicating that "after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the chance prediction effect can be executed" are displayed. is displayed. Here, the predetermined operation suggestion conditions are (1) a state in which three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game involving a reach state is suspended, and the variable display game is suspended. None of the variable display games that are run before .

Then, in FIG. 71(c), it is assumed that after the third button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decoration pattern that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of "5" on the left, "9" in the middle, and "6" in the middle is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative symbols.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the variation pattern of the variable display game in which the start condition is met is a non-reach variation pattern that does not involve the ready-to-win state, based on the establishment of the start condition for the next variable display game. Of the two pending variable display games, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (leftmost display portion) in which the start condition is satisfied first is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) is the reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the second chance advance notice effect has been established.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the variable display game (including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied) to be executed before the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern. variable display game), it is determined to request the player to perform an all-symbols stop operation after the variable display is started. In addition, whether the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a big win combination or a losing combination is determined by a determination result designation command at the time of starting winning or a variation pattern at the time of starting winning corresponding to the variable display game. Check based on the judgment result specification command.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(d), when the display result of the variable display game with the pending reach variation pattern is a big winning combination, all symbols of the player are displayed in the variable display game in which the start condition is met. In response to the stop operation, it is decided to stop chance eyes at a rate of 75% and stop non-chance eyes (losing combinations other than chance eyes) at a rate of 25%, and variable of the pending reach variation pattern. If the display result of the display game is a losing combination, it is decided to stop the chance eyes at a rate of 25% in response to the player's operation to stop all symbols in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, We decide to stop non-chance eyes 75% of the time.

When it is decided to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 90120 configures the chance eye according to the player's all-symbol stop operation, and the "left" and "middle" decoration symbol display areas 905L. and 905C, and even-numbered decorative symbols to stop swinging in the "right" decorative design display area 905R.

When it is determined not to stop the chance eyes, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the player's all-symbols stop operation, the "left" decorative design display area 905L and the "middle" decorative design display area 905C. , and, in the "right" decorative design display area 905R, the decorative patterns that constitute the final decorative design (final stop design) that does not become a chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command are respectively swung. Decide to stop. In other words, it is decided to stop swinging the fixed decoration symbol (final stop symbol) which is a non-chance eye according to the player's all-symbol stop operation.

When the presence or absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for the chance eye stop are determined in this way, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. 71(e). As a result, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is in the non-display mode. Along with the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, as shown in FIG. 71(f), characters 904200 reading "Stop all patterns!" , and operation suggestion information 904050 composed of an image simulating an operation button 9030 is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decoration symbols in all the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R. do. It should be noted that in the second chance notice effect, unlike the above-described pseudo consecutive notice effect, by operating the operation button 9030 only once, all the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, Decoration symbols are stopped at 905C and 905R.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120, along with the display of the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" Delete the icon 904000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and as there is no executable specific effect, the characters 904000a of "cut-in", the characters 904000b of "pseudo-continuation", and the characters 904000b of "chance" 904000c is erased from the screen.

Next, the player who has recognized the characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” and the operation suggestion information 904050 presses the operation button 9030 .

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to stop the non-chance eye based on the table of FIG. 71(d), as shown in FIG. In the "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, a combination of fixed decorative patterns (final stop patterns) that are not a chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is shaken. motion stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 71(h), after the rocking is stopped for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative patterns (final stop symbol) is displayed at the final stop, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of left "4", middle "9", and right "7" is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative symbols of the non-chance eye.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120, when the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the character 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "Stop all symbols!" If it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to the all pattern stop operation, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command combination shall stop swinging.

Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the player is requested to stop all symbols for the next variable display game as well. Even when the game is established, it is determined whether or not to stop chance eyes in the same manner as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 72(i), when the display result of the variable display game with the pending reach variation pattern is a big winning combination, all symbols of the player are displayed in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. In response to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eyes at a rate of 75% and to stop the non-chance eyes at a rate of 25%, and the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a losing combination. In this case, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% and stop the chance eye at a rate of 75% in response to the player's operation to stop all symbols. decide to stop

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 90120, as in the previous variable display game, when it is determined to stop the chance eye or when it is determined to stop the non-chance eye, the player's all symbol stop operation A combination of ornamental patterns to stop swinging is determined.

When the presence or absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for the chance eye stop are determined in this way, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. 72(j). , Accordingly, there is one variable display game in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met, and the second display part from the left is in the non-display mode. Along with the start of the variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 72(k), characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" and operation suggestion information 904050 are displayed in the center of the screen. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decoration symbols in all the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R. do.

Next, the player who has recognized the characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” and the operation suggestion information 904050 presses the operation button 9030 .

At this time, the effect control CPU 90120, based on the table of FIG. The combinations of decorative patterns forming the determined chance number are stopped from swinging in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "middle" and "right". Then, as shown in FIG. 72(m), after the rocking is stopped for a predetermined period, the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are confirmed (final stop). symbol) is displayed at the final stop, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of "1" on the left, "1" on the middle, and "2" on the right is derived and displayed as the determined decoration pattern of the chance eye.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120, when the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the character 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "Stop all symbols!" Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye in response to the all pattern stop operation, the final stop symbol (final stop The combination of symbols) shall stop swinging.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to request the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern which is the target of the chance prediction effect. Therefore, when the condition for starting the next variable display game is established, whether or not to stop the second chance is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 72(n), the next variable display game is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is fulfilled but the start condition is not fulfilled. is no longer present, and the display portion on the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect of displaying characters 904080 of "reach!" when the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 72(o).

In the fiftieth effect mode described above, the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo consecutive notice effect, and the chance notice effect are all in the state after the game ball has won the general winning hole, that is, the button icon 904000 is In the displayed state, it can be executed with the player's operation corresponding to each notice effect as a trigger. Thus, by providing the specific performance executed on the condition of the player's operation after the game ball enters the general winning hole, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning hole.

In addition, every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the number of button icons 904000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can place the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that has won a prize.

In addition, when the operation suggesting condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied in a state where one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, a notification is given to prompt a continuous tap operation as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the conditions for suggesting the operation of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect are established in the state where the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is performed, an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect is notified to prompt each symbol stop operation, and in the state where three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, a chance is given. When the conditions for suggesting the operation of the advance notice effect are established, a notification is given to prompt the all-symbol stop operation as an operation corresponding to the chance notice effect, so that what kind of operation the player performs makes it possible to execute the specific effect. It is possible to grasp whether

Further, according to the number of displayed button icons 904000, when the displayed number is 1 or more, the characters 904000a of "cut in" are displayed, and when the displayed number is 2 or more, the characters 904000b of "pseudo continuous" are displayed. is 3 or more, the character 904000c of "chance" is displayed, so that the player can grasp the type of specific effect that can be executed according to the number of displayed button icons 904000.例文帳に追加Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of winnings of game balls into the general winning opening.

It should be noted that the operation required for executing the specific effect may be notified together with the type of the specific effect that can be executed. For example, depending on the number of displayed button icons 904000, when the number of displayed buttons is 1 or more, the characters ``continuous hit'' are displayed next to the characters 904000a of ``cut in'', and when the number of displayed buttons 904000a is 2 or more, the characters ``pseudo consecutive'' are displayed. The characters ``Stop each symbol'' are displayed next to the characters 904000b, and when the number of displayed characters is 3 or more, the characters ``Stop all symbols'' are displayed next to the characters 904000c ``Chance eye''. It is possible to grasp the operation required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

Here, in this embodiment, there is a case where operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of a plurality of types of specific effects are satisfied at the same time. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the condition for starting the variable display game is met, the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a reach state, and the variation pattern has a variation time of 8. In some cases, the time may be longer than a second, and in this case, a notification (display of repeated hit suggestion information 904100) prompting a continuous hit operation for executing a cut-in notice effect, and prompting each symbol stop operation for executing a pseudo continuous notice effect. The problem is which of the notifications (display of the operation suggestion information 904050 in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R) should be performed. In this embodiment, the one with the larger number of button icons 904000 required for execution of the specific effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (requires two or more button icons 904000) is the notification prompting the continuous hitting operation for executing the cut-in notice effect (requires one or more button icons 904000). shall take precedence over

Further, in a state where three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the condition for starting the variable display game of the non-reach variation pattern is established, the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and In some cases, the variable display game that is on hold may be a reach variation pattern. Display of operation suggestion information 904050) or notification prompting an operation to stop all symbols for execution of the chance prediction effect (display of characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" and operation suggestion information 904050 in each variable display game) The question is whether to do In this case, the notification prompting the all-symbols stop operation for executing the chance notice effect (3 or more button icons 904000 are required) is the notification prompting the symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo consecutive notice effect (button icon 904000 must be 2 or more).

Further, in this embodiment, the number of button icons 904000 displayed is the number of button icons 904000 required for execution of the specific effect (1 for cut-in notice effect, 2 for pseudo consecutive notice effect, chance In the case of an eye notice effect, if the number is greater than 3), the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect from the number of button icons 904000 that were initially displayed is displayed as the specific effect. It is supposed to continue to be displayed even after execution of the production.

For example, when four or more button icons 904000 are displayed, if the chance's advance notice effect is executed, there remains one button icon 904000 to be displayed even after the chances' notice effect is executed. Cut-in" characters 904000a remain displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggesting condition for the cut-in announcement effect is established, and the notification prompting the continuous hitting operation is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is established (the number of button icons 904000 is confirmed). The variation pattern of the variable display game is confirmed together with the variable display game). You may make it determine whether it is not. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established. You may make it display. Also, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether two or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivation display of the display result) reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). It is possible to determine whether or not, and if displayed, the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the variable display game with the ready-to-win state (including the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) is suspended at the timing when the effective start winning is generated, and the variable display game When none of the variable display games executed before is accompanied by the ready-to-win state, it is determined whether or not three or more button icons 904000 are displayed. 904200 and operation suggesting information 904050 may be displayed to indicate "Stop all symbols!" That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the conditions for starting the next variable display game to be satisfied), a predetermined A notification that an operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed has the reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening. In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the repeated hit suggestion information 904100 for performing repeated hits may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120, at the timing when the number of the button icons 904000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, determines the remaining time until the end of the variable display game being executed (derivation display of the display result). It is determined whether or not the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining), and if it is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivation display of the display result) is a predetermined time (for example, At the timing of 10 seconds remaining), operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120, at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening, starts the variable display game with the reach state (the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning). ) is suspended and any variable display game executed prior to the variable display game is not accompanied by a reach state, and a variable display game accompanied by a reach state is determined. is suspended and none of the variable display games executed prior to the variable display game involve the ready-to-win state, the all-symbols stop operation is performed in the variable display game being executed. 904200 and operation suggesting information 904050 may be displayed to indicate "Stop all symbols!" That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the conditions for starting the next variable display game to be satisfied), a predetermined A notification that an operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

In addition, in the fiftieth effect mode, the operation suggestion conditions for notifying to perform predetermined operations (continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) are all conditions related to the variable display game (display mode, variable time), and a specific effect is executed during execution of the variable display game due to the execution of a predetermined operation. Conditions related to the game state (for example, whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot, and whether or not the number of rounds is greater than a predetermined number, etc.) A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the game state. For example, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number within the period during which the jackpot game state is controlled, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. Sometimes, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the big win game state is a variable probability big win, or whether or not the number of rounds in the big win game state is greater than a predetermined number. In addition, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number within a period during which the game state is controlled to the variable probability state (however, the variable probability state is set as an effect mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize), A notification may be given to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the game state is the variable probability state.

Further, in the fiftieth effect mode, even when the number of displayed button icons 904000 is 1, a notification prompting a repeated hit operation is performed based on the satisfaction of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed in response to the repeated hit operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and unless the number of displayed button icons 904000 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), notification prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, No notification prompting any operation of repeated hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operation), specific effect is not executed (for example, cut-in notice effect, pseudo consecutive notice effect, and chance eye notice effect specific effect is not executed).

(Example of one-shot notification)
In addition, in the fiftieth effect mode, in order to stop the temporary stop symbols in each of the decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the operation is performed three times for each area. ) in each of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, three operations may be performed for each area. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines the fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 905L, and the operation button 9030 is displayed. The left symbol constituting the final stop symbol is rocked and stopped according to the operation of , then the operation suggesting information 904050 is displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R, and the final stop according to the operation of the operation button 9030 The right pattern constituting the pattern is stopped from swinging, and finally, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the "middle" decoration pattern display area 905C, and the middle pattern that forms the final stop pattern according to the operation of the operation button 9030. may be stopped from swinging. In such a configuration, when the combination of the jackpot symbols becomes the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 905L, 905R, 905L, 905R, 905L, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905L, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905R, 905L By sequentially stopping the same decorative symbols at 905C, the player's expectation for the operation can be heightened.

In addition, in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” pattern display areas, a combination of special decoration patterns that is different from the combination of normal decoration patterns (for example, images of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”) By stopping, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and furthermore, depending on the player's predetermined operation, the display result of the variable display game will be a big win or a loss (or a variable probability big win). It is also possible to execute a specific effect that notifies whether the game will be a hit or a non-probable variable jackpot, etc.). For example, in the “left” and “right” pattern display areas, the special decoration patterns, which are images imitating the operation buttons 9030, are stopped (or normal decoration patterns are displayed in the “left” and “right” pattern display areas). The pattern is stopped), and the image of the character "Continuous hit!" is stopped in the "medium" pattern display area. When the player who recognizes the image of the character "Continuous hit!" ”) may be displayed.

In addition, in the case of such a form, according to the image of the character stopped in the "medium" symbol display area (according to the notification mode suggesting to perform a predetermined operation), the variable display game The ratio of the display result to be a big hit (or the ratio of the probability variable big win) may be different. For example, in the "middle" symbol display area, the operation button 9030 is extended longer than when the image of the characters "Continuous hits!" It is also possible to make the percentage of the display result of a big hit higher when the character image of "long press!" suggesting a single pressing operation is stopped as a special symbol. In this manner, an effect in which the display result of the variable display game is notified according to the player's operation may be executed as the specific effect without going through the ready-to-win state. During the period during which one variable display game is being executed, special decoration symbols are displayed in the "left", "right", and "middle" symbol display areas by stopping the combination of the special decoration symbols a plurality of times. The player may perform a predetermined operation each time the combination of is stopped. In this case, for each predetermined operation (except for the last predetermined operation), a notice effect suggesting the display result may be executed, and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. .

In addition, in the fiftieth production form, each pattern stop operation becomes effective on the condition that two or more winnings to the general winning slot are performed, and further, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stopping operation, and the general winning slot is entered. An example has been shown in which the all-symbols stop operation is valid under the condition of winning three times or more, and furthermore, the chance eye notice effect is executed in response to the all-symbols stop operation. The condition for validating the operation) may be conditional on winning four or more prizes in the general prize winning slot.

[Fifty-first staging mode]
In the fifty-first performance mode shown in FIG. 67, unlike the fiftieth performance mode, the specific performance that can be executed according to the game state is different. In the fifty-first presentation form, the cut-in notice presentation requiring repeated hitting operations can be executed in any of the normal state, the variable probability state, and the short working time state. On the other hand, the pseudo consecutive notice effect that requires each pattern stop operation can be executed only when the game state is normal, and the chance eye notice effect that requires all pattern stop operation is the game state. It is executable only when

It should be noted that there is a case where the operation suggesting condition is satisfied simultaneously in the normal state for the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, but in this case, the pseudo-continuous notice effect requiring a larger number of button icons 904000 is executed. Each symbol stop operation for is preferentially urged. On the other hand, since the game states that can be executed are different between the pseudo consecutive notice effect and the chance notice effect, the operation suggesting conditions are not satisfied at the same time.

Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the normal state is 3 or more, the character 904000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo-run" are not executed in the normal state. characters 904000b are displayed, but characters 904000c of "chance eye" are not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the probability changing state or the time saving state is 3 or more, the pseudo consecutive notice effect is not executed in the probability changing state or the time saving state, so that the character "cut-in" 904000a and the characters 904000c of "chance" are displayed, but the characters 904000b of "pseudo run" are not displayed.

In this way, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect to be executable is different according to the game state when the game ball wins in the general winning hole. It is possible to have different interests.

It should be noted that, in this production form, the announcement production requiring a larger number of button icons 904000 is preferentially executed, but the invention is not limited to this form, and the announcement production with higher expectations for the player can be executed. It may be executed with priority. For example, if the operation suggestion condition for cut-in notice effect and the operation suggestion condition for pseudo-continuous notice effect are satisfied for the same variable display game, the notice effect with a higher percentage of winning (for example, pseudo-continuous notice effect) ) should be executed with priority.

[52nd presentation mode]
In the 52nd production mode shown in FIG. 73, unlike the 50th production form and the 51st production form, the button icon 904000 is not displayed in response to the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening, and the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening is not displayed. Whether or not to display any one of the characters 904000a to 904000c for each winning, and if displayed, the characters 904000a for "cut-in", the characters 904000b for "pseudo run", and the characters 904000c for "chance" is to be displayed. FIG. 74(A) shows whether or not any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed, and if so, which of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed, depending on the winning in each general winning slot. 4 shows a display information determination table for determining .

The effect control CPU 90120 determines to display the characters 904000a of "Cut in" on the screen at a rate of 25% when the game ball wins the first general prize winning opening 9050A, and at a rate of 75% " It is decided to display the characters 904000b of "pseudo-run" on the screen. In addition, when the game ball wins in the second general winning hole 9050B, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 50%, and the character 904000a of "Cut in" is displayed at a rate of 25%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the characters 904000b of "pseudo-ren" on the screen at a rate of 25%.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the third general winning hole 9050C, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 80%, and the character 904000a of "cut in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the characters 904000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the game ball wins in the fourth general winning hole 9050D, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 70%, and the character 904000a of "cut in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the characters 904000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 20%.

Then, similarly to the fiftieth and fifty-first rendering modes described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in a state in which the characters 904000a of "cut-in" are displayed, a continuous hitting operation is performed. A variable display game with a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds or more is started in a state in which a cut-in notice effect is executed in response to a continuous hit operation, and the characters 904000b of "pseudo continuous" are displayed. In this case, it is notified that each symbol stop operation is performed, and a pseudo consecutive notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation, and the reach variation pattern is variable in the state where the characters 904000c of "chance eye" are displayed. When the display game is suspended and all the variable display games executed before it are of the non-reach variation pattern, an all-symbols stop operation is notified, and the all-symbols stop operation is performed. Executes the chance-eye forewarning effect.

In the example of FIG. 74(A), when the game ball wins the first general prize winning port 9050A, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and the game ball enters the second general prize winning port 9050B. When a prize is won, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and when the game ball wins the third general winning hole 9050C, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. When a game ball wins in the fourth general winning hole 50C, one of characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

In this way, according to the general winning opening into which the game ball has won, the ratio of notifying the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio of enabling the specific effect to be executed are different, so that any general winning opening It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the game ball enters into the game ball, thereby enhancing interest.

In addition, the game ball shot to the left game area 9010A is more likely to win the second general winning opening 9050B than the first general winning opening 9050A, and the game ball shot to the right gaming area 9010B is the fourth general winning opening. If it is configured to be easier to win the third general winning opening 9050C than 9050D, the general winning opening that is more difficult to win When the game ball wins in the fourth general prize winning port 9050D), the ratio of execution of the specific effect is high.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first general prize winning port 9050A or the second general prize winning port 9050B, there is a possibility that either the "cut-in" character 904000a or the "simulated consecutive" character 904000b is displayed. However, the characters 904000c of "chance" are not displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, there is a possibility that either the "cut-in" characters 904000a or the "chance eye" characters 904000c will be displayed. However, the characters 904000b of "pseudo-run" are not displayed.

In this way, depending on the general prize winning opening in which the game ball has won, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different, so that the game ball enters any general winning hole. It can attract attention and improve interest.

In addition, when the game state is the normal state, the game ball is shot to the left game area 9010A, and when the game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state, the game ball is shot to the right game area 9010B, so the first general winning opening In the normal state where the game ball wins in the 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, the characters 904000a to 904000c than the variable state or the time saving state in which the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is displayed at a high rate, and the execution rate of the specific effect is high.

When the game state is the normal state, interest tends to be lost. Therefore, by increasing the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed, the loss of interest is prevented. On the other hand, when the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the player's interest is directed to the special game or the normal game, so the execution of the specific effect based on the display of the characters 904000a to 904000c and the establishment of the operation suggestion condition is rather the game. Therefore, the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are made lower than in the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately vary the interest of a game ball winning a prize in a general winning hole according to the game state.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 74 (A), when the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the ratio of appearance of characters 904000a to 904000c and the specific effect are executed more than when the game state is the normal state The ratio may be increased, and contrary to the example shown in FIG. 74(A), when the game ball wins the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first general winning opening The characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when a game ball wins the opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B. Also, in FIG. 74(A), the pseudo consecutive notice effect can be executed only when winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, but similarly, the third general winning opening 9050C Alternatively, a specific effect that can be executed only when a prize is won in the fourth general prize winning port 9050D may be provided.

Also, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 74A, as shown in FIG. When the game state at the time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are higher than when the game state when the game ball wins is the probability variable state or the time saving state. can be made higher. In addition, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state, when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the normal state The characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate. In addition, in FIG. 74 (B), a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the normal state may be provided, and a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state. may be provided.

In addition, depending on whether the game state is a normal state, or a probability variable state or a time saving state, the ratio of displaying the characters 904000a to 904000c and the ratio of executing the specific effect are not limited to examples that differ, For example, whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot game states (continuous number = end of jackpot game state) Whether or not the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states that are later controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, whether or not the variable display game in which the display result is a losing combination has continued for a predetermined number of times, Depending on other conditions such as whether or not the variable display game of the variation pattern of "reach" ("no reach") has continued for a predetermined number of times, whether or not the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number, characters 904000a to The rate at which 904000c is displayed and the rate at which the specific effect is executed may be varied.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 905]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 is (X+1) pixels, and the maximum height is (Y+1) pixels. Let the coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen be (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixel at the lower right corner of the display screen be (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 75(a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a+1, 0) are defined as a first area α. and coordinates (X, Y) are defined as a second area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β. Further, in this example, the second area β is a wider area than the first area α.

In the first area α, there are prizes related to the number of wins to each prize gate, such as the number of wins to the general prize gate, the number of wins to the first start prize gate, and the number of wins to the second start prize gate. Numerical information can be displayed. In the second area β, as shown in FIG. 75(a), an error message display area 5E, fourth pattern display areas 905A and 905B, decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, and a starting prize memory display area 905H. is provided. In the examples of FIGS. 75 and 76, the background image is visible in the second area β, but the background image is invisible in the first area α.

In this example, the overall image of the background image stored in the ROM 90121 as effect data has an overall width of (X+1) pixels, as shown in FIGS. The image has a height of (Y+1) pixels, character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. In the examples of FIGS. 75(b)(c) and 76(e)(f), the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] Among them, only the area corresponding to the second area β [rectangular area defined with coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is visible to the player. Of the entire area of the background image, the area corresponding to the first area α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] is invisible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 75(b)(c) and 76(e)(f), the player is defined with coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area is visible, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is not visible.

In the examples of FIGS. 75(b), (c), 76(e), and (f), (1) "today's general winnings", which is the total number of winnings to the general winnings on the day, is displayed in the first area α. , (2) "Today's navel prize number" which is the total number of prizes won in the first start prize gate on the day, and (3) "Today's prize number" which is the total number of prizes won in the second start prize gate on the day Three items of "number of electric chew winning prizes" are displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D when the winning in the general winning opening occurs. When a general winning opening designation command specifying whether or not is received, and when winning to the starting winning opening occurs, the starting winning opening to specify which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball won Receives a specified command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can individually tally the number of winnings to the general winnings opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening, and the number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening. In this example, (1) "today's number of general wins" is 70, (2) "today's navel wins" is 521, and (3) "today's electric tune wins" is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of prizes won to the general prize holes and the number of prizes won to the starting prize holes so that they can be compared, it is possible to relatively grasp the state of prizes won to each prize hole.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 75(b) and 76(e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905A. In this state, decorative patterns are variably displayed in the pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. In addition, in the starting winning prize storage display area 905H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one suspension information corresponding to suspension of one special game. The image of the fourth symbol being variably displayed, the image of the decorative symbol being variably displayed, and the image of the pending information are all displayed only in the second area β.

The display layer of the fourth pattern, the display layer of the decorative pattern, and the display layer of the reserved information are all higher than the display layer of the background image. Here, the fact that the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image means that when a certain image and another image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the visibility of a certain image is higher than that of the other image. In other words, display control is performed with priority given to quality. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 75(b)(c) and 76(e)(f), the area where each image of the fourth pattern, the decorative pattern, and the pending information is displayed and the background image In this case, with respect to the overlapping area, the fourth pattern, the decorative pattern, and the reserved information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image invisible (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth pattern, the decoration pattern, and the reserved information appear to be displayed in front (on the player's side) of the background image.

Also, in this embodiment, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative pattern display layer. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(f), the area where the decorative pattern is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap. Regarding, display control is performed to make the error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative pattern easy to see (including visible), and to make the decorative pattern difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front (on the player's side) of the decorative symbols.

As display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image visible to the player, only the area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image is displayed as the background. It is set to the display layer of the image, and the area corresponding to the first area α in the entire area of the background image is not set to the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, It is also possible to use image data of only a rectangular area defined by Y) as a vertex].

Further, as another display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image visible to the player, the entire area of the background image is set in the display layer of the background image (that is, The entire background image [using image data of a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is in a display layer higher than the display layer of the background image, the first By setting another background image (for example, a plain white image) for the winning number information in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer is made invisible. You can do it. In the case of such a configuration, another background image for the winning number information (for example, a white plain image) has a predetermined transmittance (e.g., the visibility of the image of the display layer below the display layer). , becomes invisible at 0%), the image of the lower display layer may be made visible, and by setting a predetermined transmittance, the background image of the lower display layer An area corresponding to the first area α becomes visible, and the character E becomes visible.

Also, the display layer of the winning number information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layers of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the display of other information in the first area α does not reduce the visibility of the winning number information. In addition, the display layer of the winning number information may be the same display layer as the error message that does not have a display area in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message. may be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer of the winning number information is the highest among all the display layers, and in the display area of other information (whether displayed in the first area α or the second area β) Instead, it may be arranged so that the visibility is not lowered.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the pending information are all performed within the second area β, so these images are Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to the general winnings ("today's general winnings"), the first starting winnings as the winning number information displayed in the first area α The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth (“today's number of navel winnings”) and the number of winnings to the second starting winning port (“today's number of electric chew winnings”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the pending information.

Then, in the image display device 905, when the variable display of the fourth pattern, the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the display of the reserved information are being performed, if a prize is won in the general prize opening, the display shown in FIG. 75 ( As shown in d), based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the number of winning to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α ("today's general winning number") is updated. In this way, when the winning to the general winning slot occurs while the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the reserved information are being performed, the general winning displayed in the first area α The number of wins to the mouth is updated without impeding visibility. That is, the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the reserved information do not interfere with the visibility when the win number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that a prize has been won in the general prize-winning slot and, as a result, the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slot has been updated.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is stopped, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol ends and the display result stops. Along with the display, the variable display of the decoration pattern is terminated and the display result is stopped. In this example, it is assumed that the fourth symbol display area 905A remains illuminated (displayed) in a display color reminiscent of a failure (the display result is stopped), and the final decorative symbol is: Lost symbols of "5, 3, 1" are stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

Here, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the fourth pattern that is stopped (in which the display result is derived and displayed) and the fourth pattern that is stopped (in which the display result is derived and displayed) ) are all displayed in the second area β, the number of prizes displayed in the first area α may be increased by displaying these images on the image display device 905 As information, the number of prizes won in the general prize gate ("Today's general prize number"), the number of prizes won in the first start prize gate ("Today's navel prize number"), and the number of prizes won in the second start prize gate The visibility of the number ("Today's Electric Chew Winning Number") is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decoration symbol.

Then, in the image display device 905, when the fourth symbol is stopped and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, if a prize is won in the general winning slot, as shown in FIG. 75(d). , Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning hole designation command, the number of winning prizes to the general winning hole displayed in the first area α ("today's general winning number") is updated. In this way, when a prize is won in the general winning slot while the fourth symbol is stopped and the decorative symbols are stopped, the number of winnings in the general winning slot displayed in the first area α increases. , is updated without impeding visibility. That is, the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol do not interfere with the visibility when the win number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that a prize has been won in the general prize-winning slot and, as a result, the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slot has been updated.

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 75(b), (c) and (d), the number of prizes won to the general prize gates is updated without impeding visibility, but the number of prizes won to the first start prize gate is shown. Even when a prize is generated, as in the case of the general winning opening, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the 4th design and the variable display and stop display of the decorative design, the winning to the first start winning opening The numbers are updated without impeding visibility. Also, even when a prize is won in the second starting prize opening, as in the case of the general prize opening, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening is updated without impeding visibility.

As shown in FIGS. 76(e) and (f), when the effect control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection designation command designating that an abnormality has occurred, the image display device 905 displays an error message (in this example, "an error has occurred ) is displayed. As described above, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative pattern display layer. Therefore, when the decorative design is variably displayed, or when the decorative design is stopped and displayed, if the effect control CPU 90120 receives the abnormality detection designation command, the area where the decorative design is displayed and the error Regarding the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, display control is performed to make the error message easy to see (including visible) and to make the decorative pattern difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 76(b), when viewed from the player, the error message is displayed in front (on the player's side) of the decoration symbol being displayed in a variable manner (or the decoration symbol being displayed in a stopped state). appear to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 76(f), the error message is displayed in the second area β. As the number of winning information displayed in the The visibility of the number of prizes won in the 2-start prize slot (“today's number of electronic chew prizes”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information without depending on the display of the error message.

Then, when the error message is displayed on the image display device 905, when the winning to the general winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. Based on the reception of the mouth designation command, the number of prizes won for the general prize mouth displayed in the first area α (“today's general number of prizes won”) is updated. In this way, if a prize is won in the general prize pool while the error message is being displayed, the number of prizes won in the general prize pool displayed in the first area α is displayed without impeding visibility. Updated. In other words, the display of the error message does not impede the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that a prize has been won in the general prize-winning slot and, as a result, the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slot has been updated.

In the examples of FIGS. 76(f) and (g), the number of prizes won to the general prize gates is updated without impeding visibility, but the number of prizes won to the first start prize gate is Even when this occurs, the number of prizes won in the first starting prize gate is updated without obstructing visibility, regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general prize gate. In addition, even when a prize is won in the second starting prize opening, the visibility of the number of prizes won in the second start prize opening is hindered regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general prize opening. updated without

In addition, in the example of FIG. 76(f), the text "An error has occurred." is displayed to simply notify that an abnormality has occurred based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Alternatively, different error messages may be displayed according to the type of abnormality designated by the abnormality detection designation command. For example, when an abnormality detection designation command specifying that a magnetic abnormality has occurred is received, the characters "Magnetic error has occurred." Sometimes, the text "A vibration error has occurred." .

In this example, as shown in FIG. 75(a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as the first area α, and coordinates (a+1) are defined as the first area α. , 0) and coordinates (X, Y) are defined as the second area β. The second area in which information and error messages can be displayed is not limited to a rectangular area, and may be any area that does not overlap with each other on the screen.

(Display/non-display setting of winning number information)
As described with reference to FIG. 37, the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 (which can be operated by the store clerk but is inoperable by the player) to open the glass door frame 903a forward is set to the display position (second position), and when the player setting screen (see FIG. 38) is set to display the number of prizes won in the general prize gate by the operation of the player, the general prize gate is set. Winning number information related to the number of winnings in the game is to be displayed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 are display modes of the screen in a state in which the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed in this way. In the first area α, not only the number of winnings to the general winnings, but also the number of winnings to the first starting winnings (so-called "navel") and the number of winnings to the second starting winnings (so-called "electric chew") The number shall also be displayed. That is, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening according to the operation of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030 .

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 37, when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to non-display (first position), the operation button 9030 can be used to select the winning number information (the number of winnings to the general winning slots). , and the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening and the number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening, etc.), the winning number information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. Do not show. Also, even if the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display (second position), if the operation button 9030 is not set to display the winning number information (non-display setting) ), the winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 .

The examples shown in FIGS. 77(b) and 77(c) are display modes of the screen when the setting is made so that the winning number information is not displayed. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening is not displayed in the first area α, and the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening (so-called "belly button") and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening (so-called "electric chew") are displayed. The number of prizes won is not displayed.

In this way, by making it possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information according to the setting operation on the game hall side and according to the setting operation on the player side, Also, it is possible to display information on the number of prizes according to the player's judgment.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a), (b), and (c), when the winning number information is set not to be displayed, the error message display area 5E, The fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, and the start winning memory display area 905H are common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth pattern, the decorative pattern, and the pending information displayed in the second area β are set to display the winning number information and the winning number It does not change with the setting that does not display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change for setting whether or not to display the number-of-wins information.

On the other hand, when the winning number information is set not to be displayed, the winning number information is set to be displayed as shown in FIGS. , the background image is visible in the first area α and the second area β. In the examples of FIGS. 77A, 77B, and 77C, the first area of the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] A region corresponding to α [rectangular region defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices], and a region corresponding to the second area β [coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates ( X, Y)], that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 77(a), (b), and (c), the player moves the character included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (a+1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. D is visible, and character E, which is included in a rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices, is also visible.

In this way, regarding the display position and display range (image size) of specific images (error message, fourth pattern, decoration pattern, and reserved information), the setting to display the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. While reducing the control burden by not changing (common) with the setting that does not change, other images (background images) can be visually recognized with the setting that displays the winning number information and the setting that does not display the winning number information. By making the ranges different, it is possible to improve interest in the case where the winning number information is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 77(b), in the image display device 905, when the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the pending information are being performed, the winning to the general winning slot is performed. Even when a is generated, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed by setting the information of the number of winnings not to be displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 77(c), in the image display device 905, when the fourth symbol is stopped and the decoration symbol is stopped, even if a prize is won in the general winning slot. , as shown in FIG. 77(d), the number of winnings to the general winning slots is not displayed by setting the winning number information not to be displayed.

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 77(b), (c) and (d), even when a prize is won in a general prize slot, the number of prizes won in the general prize slot is not displayed. If it is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings to the first start winning mouth will not be displayed even if winning to the first starting winning mouth occurs, and if winning to the second starting winning mouth occurs Also, the number of winnings to the second start winning opening is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in each winning hole according to the player's operation.

(Each item of winning number information)
FIG. 78 shows an example of winning number information items that can be displayed in the first area α. FIG. 78 shows items related to the number of prizes won to the general prize pool, but similarly to this, there are items related to the number of prizes won to the first start prize pool and to the second start prize pool. can be displayed in the first area α.

It is possible to display "today's general winnings (assumed to be A1)", which is the total number of winnings to the general winnings since the gaming machine was turned on. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and adds 1 to the value of the general winning number counter each time a general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, it is possible to aggregate A1.

In addition, it is possible to display the "today's general winning ratio (assumed to be A2)", which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the gaming machine was turned on. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and changes the value of the out number counter each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. By adding 1, the total number of outs can be calculated, and by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs, A2 can be calculated.

In addition, it is possible to display "today's general number of prize balls (assumed to be A3)", which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the respective general prize holes since the power of the gaming machine was turned on. In addition, it is possible to display the "today's general prize ball ratio (assumed to be A4)", which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine was turned on.

The ROM 90121 stores the number of prize balls determined for each of the first and second start winning openings, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, and the large winning opening. . When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and every time a general winning opening designation command is received, the general winning opening designation command is designated. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole to the value of the counter for the number of general prize balls, A3 can be totaled. In addition, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and executes the start winning hole designation command, the general winning hole designation command, and the big winning hole designation command. The total number of prize balls can be totaled by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize mouth specified by each command to the value of the prize ball counter each time a prize command is received that specifies a prize to be won. By calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls, A4 can be totaled.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies whether the current game state is the low base state or the high base state by specifying the game state by the game state designation command, and wins in the low base state. The number information (B1-B4) and the winning number information (C1-C4) in the high base state can be sorted and tabulated.

Specifically, it is possible to display the "low base state general winning number (assumed to be B1)", which is the total number of winnings to each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state. It is possible to display the "high base state general winning number (assumed to be C1)" which is the total number of winning prizes.

The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium general winning number counter and the value of the high base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. . Then, during the period in which the gaming state specified by the received gaming state specifying command is the normal state, the value of the low-base middle general winning number counter is incremented by 1 each time the general winning opening specifying command is received, thereby reducing B1. During the period when it is possible to aggregate and the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability variable state or the time saving state, the value of the high base medium general winning number counter is changed each time the general winning mouth designation command is received. By adding one by one, C1 can be totaled.

In addition, it is possible to display the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, ie, the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state. can be displayed.

The effect control CPU 90120 sets both the value of the out number counter during the low base and the value of the out number counter during the high base stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. In the normal state, the number of outs during low base is counted by adding 1 to the value of the counter for the number of outs during low base each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. B2 can be totaled by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of outs during low base. On the other hand, in the probability variable state or the time saving state, by adding 1 to the value of the high base out count counter for each reception of the detection signal output from the out ball detector, the high base out count can be aggregated. C2 can be tallied by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of outs during high base.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the low base state (assumed to be B3)", which is the total number of prize balls awarded based on the winning in each general prize opening in the low base state, and the high base state. It is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the high base state (assumed to be C3)", which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning in each general prize opening in the state.

The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. and Then, during the period in which the gaming state specified by the received gaming state specifying command is the normal state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole specified by the received general winning hole specifying command is counted by the low base middle general prize ball number counter. By adding to the value of B3 ("general number of prize balls in low base state") can be aggregated, and the game state specified by the received game state designation command is either a probability variable state or a time saving state During the period, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize mouth specified by the received general prize mouth designation command is added to the value of the high base middle general prize ball number counter, and C3 ("the number of general prize balls in the high base state ) can be aggregated.

In addition, the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, "general prize ball ratio in low base state (assumed to be B4)" can be displayed, and the ratio to the number of prize balls in high base state can be displayed. It is possible to display the "high base state general prize ball ratio (assumed to be C4)" which is the ratio of C3.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. . In the normal state, each time a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a large winning opening designation command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening designated by each command is set to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the number of balls counter, the number of prize balls in the low base state can be aggregated, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, B4 ("low base state General prize ball ratio”) can be aggregated. On the other hand, in the probability variable state or the time saving state, each time the start winning mouth designation command, general winning mouth designation command, and large winning mouth winning command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is increased. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be aggregated, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls C4 ("high It is possible to aggregate the general prize ball ratio in the base state.

In this way, since information related to the number of wins to the general winning slots can be aggregated for each game state, the player can grasp information corresponding to the current game state. For example, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), attention is paid to items B1 to B4, and when the game state is a high base state (probability variable state or time saving state), attention is paid to items C1 to C4. Become.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU90120, when the game state is a low base state, while displaying the items of B1 to B4 in the first area α, does not display the items of C1 to C4, when the game state is a high base state , C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while the items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. In addition, although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the game state, the items B1 to B4 are more visible than the items C1 to C4 in the low base state. In the high base state, the items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner (for example, larger) that is easier to see than the items B1 to B4.

(Aggregation of winning number information during the set period)
In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 can aggregate the number of winning information in the period set by the player, and is the total number of winnings to each general winning opening during the set period "General winning number during the set period ( D1)” can be displayed in the first area α.

Effect control CPU90120, when the counting period corresponding to the operation of the player shown in FIG. The value of the timer is set for a set period (counting period according to the player's operation), and the counting timer is started. Then, each time a general winning slot designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by 1 during the set period, and when the counting timer times out (when the set counting period has passed), the general winning during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

In addition, while the counting timer is updated during the period when the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period after the last detection signal is received from the out ball detector), the period when the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the detection signal was last received from the out-ball detector, the counting timer may be stopped without being updated. In this way, the period during which the game ball is not shot to the game area 9010 may be excluded from the tally period.

Also, when the tally timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the tally timer is reset again for the set period (player's operation), and the counting timer starts again. Then, the value of the general winning number counter during the set period is incremented each time a general winning opening designation command is received, and when the tally timer times out again (when the set tally period has passed again), the general winning number counter during the set period is displayed in the first area α as D1. In this manner, D1 corresponding to each totaling period set by the player is displayed.

In addition, it is possible to display the “general winning rate of the set period (assumed to be D2)” which is the ratio of D1 to the number of outs of the gaming machine during the set period. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general win number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and also sets the value of the out number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. By adding 1 to the value of the number of outs counter during the set period each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received, the number of outs during the set period can be counted. D2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in a set period (assumed to be D3)", which is the total number of prize balls given based on winnings in the respective general prize openings in the set period. In addition, it is possible to display the "general winning ball ratio of the set period (assumed to be D4)" which is the ratio of D3 to the number of winning balls during the set period.

Effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning ball number counter during the set period stored in RAM 90122 to 0 when the tallying period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 79 described later is set, A counting timer value is set for a set period (a counting period according to the player's operation), and the counting timer is started. Then, each time a general winning hole designation command is received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole designated by the general winning hole designation command is added to the value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period, and the tally timer is activated. The value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period when timed out (when the set tally period has passed) is displayed as D3 in the first area α.

Also, when the tally timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning balls counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the tally timer is reset again for the set period (player , and the counting timer starts again. Then, the value of the general prize ball counter is added during the set period each time the general prize mouth designation command is received, and when the total timer times out again (when the set total period has passed again), the general prize ball during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. In this manner, D3 corresponding to each totaling period set by the player is displayed.

In addition, when the production control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, along with this, the prize ball number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 is set to 0, and each time a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a large winning opening winning command specifying winning to a large winning opening are received, the winning opening specified by each command is received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls to the value of the counter for the number of prize balls during the set period, the number of prize balls during the set period can be aggregated, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls during the set period D4 can be aggregated by calculating .

In addition, since the general winning opening designation command received by the production control CPU 90120 specifies which general winning opening the game ball has won, the production control CPU 90120 includes the first general winning opening 9050A to the third 4 The number of prizes won for each general prize gate 9050D is tallied individually, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, and D1 to D4 are totaled for each general prize gate, and the total value is calculated. It is possible to display in the first area α.

Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winnings opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening Which of the items to display in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the game state or the like. For example, items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winnings opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the related items is to be displayed in the first area α may be selected by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030). (for example, an operation using the operation button 9030).

In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winnings opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Regarding each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the reference value is stored in the ROM 90121 in association with each item. Therefore, the production control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the total value of the items displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the total value has not reached the reference value , as shown in FIG. 79(4) to be described later, it is possible to display a message informing that the total value of the item displayed in the first area α does not reach the reference value of the item. . Thereby, the player grasps whether or not the total value of the items displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value compared to the reference value of the item, and selects a gaming machine. (whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine) can be used as a judgment material.

Next, a method for setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the tabulation period setting screen of FIG. 79 further sets the tabulation period when the selection screen of FIG. A selection screen for selecting whether or not is displayed, and the screen is displayed when a selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed) and

On the setting screen of FIG. 79(1), a message "Please set the aggregation period." On the setting screen, an icon containing the characters "10 minutes", an icon containing the characters "30 minutes", and an icon containing the characters "60 minutes" are displayed, and an icon called "Enter button after selection with the jog dial" is displayed. A message is displayed, and an arrow prompting the user to press the operation button 9030 (jog dial) after rotating it is displayed.

To set the counting period to 10 minutes, when the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is turned left to select an icon including the characters "10 minutes" and the operation button 9030 is pressed, the "setting The period is 10 minutes." is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the set period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Also, when setting the aggregation period to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. , a message "Set period is 30 minutes" is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the set period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. Further, in the case of setting the counting period to 60 minutes, by rotating the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the right to select an icon including the characters "60 minutes", pressing the operation button 9030 A message "The set period is 60 minutes." is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the set period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

In this way, it is possible to set a desired tallying period according to the player's operation. In the example of FIG. 79, 30 minutes is set as the aggregation period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79(3), the number of winnings to the general winnings per 30 minutes is displayed as "the number of winnings in general in the set period (D1)" in the first area α. In the example of FIG. 79(3), 30 is stored as the reference value for the number of prizes won to the general prize gates per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of prizes won to the general prize gates per 30 minutes is 37, the aggregate value exceeds the reference value. Therefore, there is no notification that the aggregated value does not reach the reference value.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 79(4), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of prizes won to the general prize gates per 30 minutes, whereas the number of prizes won to the general prize gates per 30 minutes is totaled. Since the value is 29, the total value has not reached the reference value. Therefore, it is notified that the aggregated value has not reached the reference value (display of a message "Below the reference value (30 times/30 minutes).").

(Items related to the number of prizes entered into the starting prize pool)
In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command that specifies which one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won when winning to the starting winning opening occurs. By the same method as the counting process when receiving a general winning mouth designation command specifying which one of the 1st to 4th general winning mouths has won Equivalent)”, “Today’s 1st starting prize winning ratio (equivalent to A2)”, “Number of prize balls awarded based on today’s 1st starting prize winning (equivalent to A3)”, and ``ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning the first start prize opening today to the total number of prize balls today (equivalent to A4)'', and ``today's second start prize opening (equivalent to A1)", "ratio of prizes to today's second starting prize opening (equivalent to A2)", "number of prize balls given based on winning to today's second starting prize opening (equivalent to A3)” and “ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of today’s second starting prize opening to the total number of today’s prize balls (equivalent to A4)”. can be displayed in the first area α.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first start winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B2)", "the number of winning prizes to the first start winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B2)" The number of prize balls given based on winning the 1 start prize mouth (equivalent to B3)", and "the number of prize balls given in the low base state to the first start prize mouth in the low base state Percentage of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning (equivalent to B4)”, “Number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B1)”, “Second start in the low base state Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to B2)", "Number of prize balls given based on winning to second start winning opening in low base state (equivalent to B3)", and "Granted in low base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on winning to the second start prize hole in the low base state for the number of prize balls (equivalent to B4)", can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. is.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first start winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C2)", "the number of winning prizes to the first start winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C2)" The number of prize balls given based on the winning of the 1 start prize opening (equivalent to C3)”, and “the number of prize balls given in the high base state to the first start prize opening in the high base state Percentage of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning (equivalent to C4)”, “Number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C1)”, “Second start in the high base state Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to C2)", "Number of prize balls given based on winning to second start winning opening in high base state (equivalent to C3)", and "Granted in high base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on winning to the second start prize hole in the high base state with respect to the number of prize balls (equivalent to C4)” can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. is.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first start winning opening in the set period (equivalent to D1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the set period (equivalent to D2)", "the first start winning opening in the set period Number of prize balls given based on winning a prize in the opening (equivalent to D3)" and "Number of prize balls given in a set period based on winning in the first start winning opening in a set period Percentage of the number of prize balls played (equivalent to D4)”, “Number of winnings to the second start winning opening during the set period (equivalent to D1)”, “Ratio to the second starting winning opening during the set period ( Equivalent to D2)", "Number of prize balls given based on winning in the second start prize opening in the set period (equivalent to D3)", and "Setting for the number of prize balls given in the set period The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting prize opening in the period (equivalent to D4)" can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α.

(Yakuren (Ren ratio), display of role ratio)
In addition, in the game machine 901, the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 also controls each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter , also referred to as "entering area"). Further, in the gaming machine 901, predetermined information such as a combination of roles (combination ratio) and role ratio can be displayed on a display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 and shown in FIGS.

As described above, the game machine maker usually designs the game board so that game media enter the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (so that the game passes the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether game media enter the general winning area at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in a gaming machine according to an embodiment to be described later, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in a gaming machine having a general winning area. The display of the character product ratio and the like will be described below. Hereinafter, the display of the total number of game balls and the ratio of the role items on the main board 9011 will be described.

A main board 9011 shown in FIG. 82 is a board for controlling games. The main board 9011 is enclosed in a board case 90201 as shown in FIG. The display monitor 9029 is arranged in front when the main board 9011 is viewed. Since the main board 9011 cannot be viewed when the glass door frame 903a is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 9011 is the back side of the game board 902 with the glass door frame 903a opened. It is the actual front, which is different from the front of the gaming machine 901 . However, the front when viewing the main board 9011 and the front of the gaming machine 901 may be common.

On the main board 9011, there is information about game winnings, for example, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting prize (navel), the number of prize balls for winning the second start prize (electric chew), the big winning prize ( The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls for winning the prize to the attacker) are input and totaled, and the display monitor 9029 displays the ratio of the number of prize balls for winning to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Consecutive (continuous ratio) (%) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls won in the second start prize hole (denchu) and the number of prize balls won in the big prize hole (attacker). The role ratio (%) is displayed. The number of winning balls (continuous ratio) is the ratio of the number of winning balls (number of consecutive winning balls below) due to winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The role ratio is the number of prize balls won in the second start prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls won in the big prize mouth (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (number of winning balls below) is the ratio occupied by The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls won in the big prize hole (attacker), the number of prize balls won in the second start prize hole (denchu), and the number of prize balls won in the big prize hole. (attacker) and the number of winning balls by winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (electric chew). In addition, the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball changes due to the change in the passable width of the game ball. be. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. , and the assumed winning ratio of game balls is a fixed accessory.

As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winning, the number of winning balls (general 2. The number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric prize balls), which is the number of prize balls for winning the start prize opening (electric chew), and the special electric prize, which is the number of prize balls for winning the big prize opening (attacker) Aggregate the number of balls (attacker's award number of balls). Assuming that the tally is one set, 10 sets, that is, 60,000 yakuren (continuity ratio) (%) and yaku ratio (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric prize balls by winning the first start opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) to be tallied The number of winning balls (the number of winning balls for the attacker) is recorded in a ring buffer, which has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. In addition, a considerable amount (for example, a few bytes) is stored for 11 sets of 66,000, and the cumulative role ratio (%) and role ratio (%) within the range of these values are calculated. can be calculated.

Display monitor 9029 displays 60,000 consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) (%), consecutive ratio (%), and cumulative consecutive consecutive ratio (%) and consecutive ratio (%) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, one display means switches between four displays for display. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display everything, but as the game progresses, the number of prize balls won by winning the first start opening (navel) and winning the second start winning opening (electric chew) are tallied. The number of prize balls due to the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls due to winning the big prize mouth (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying 60000 winning combinations (%) is reflected in the 60000 winning combination ratios (%) displayed after that, There is a possibility that there will be a discrepancy between the 60,000 winning combination (continuation ratio) (%) and the 60,000 winning combination ratio (%). Therefore, the number of prize balls for winning the first starter (navel), the number of prizes for the second starter prize (electric chew), the number of prizes for the big prize (attacker), and the total number of prize balls Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting the number and counting at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the timing of displaying 60,000 units (unit ratio) (%)). .

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning in the second start prize opening (denchu) and the number of prize balls due to winning in the big prize opening (attacker) are as follows. A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of obtained balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total accumulated number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. Also, the number of winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of game media by the attacker and the electric chew. Also, the number of consecutive winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out by winning game media to the attacker. Therefore, Yakuren (Ren ratio) can be calculated by the following formula (1). Also, the role ratio can be obtained by the following formula (2).
Consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) = [number of balls acquired in a row / total number acquired] x 100 (1)
Role ratio = [(number of balls acquired in a row + number of balls acquired in a row) / total number acquired] x 100 (2)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the role ratio is obtained by dividing 42,000 by 60,000 to obtain 0.70 (rounded down to three decimal places).
However, since the microcomputer used in the game machine cannot perform arithmetic operations below the decimal point, the following arithmetic operations are required.

First, the first calculation method will be explained. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4,200,000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60000. This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain the operation result up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, to obtain the operation result up to three digits below the decimal point, it is necessary to multiply by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be explained. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result can be obtained up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, division by 1000 is sufficient to obtain a calculation result up to three digits below the decimal point.

In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the role product ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in a 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the game machine can only perform calculations between values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower 1 byte may be truncated for ease of calculation.

A third calculation method, which is a simplified version of the second calculation method, will now be described. In the third calculation method, the total number of prize balls 00EA60h is rounded down to 00EAh, that is, the total number of prize balls is a decimal number. Calculate 234 in notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is truncated from 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

Then, as in the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). 156 is then divided by 2 to obtain 78 as the quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the role product ratio is obtained as 78%.

In the third calculation method, while the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can easily perform calculations, an error of +12% occurs. However, the error is +1% when both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are 10 times. In other words, as the period for calculating the role-product ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

Further, the board case 90201 is made of a translucent material so that the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized. The board case 90201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 9011 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat from the electrical components of the main board 9011 . The display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is not obstructed by the heat dissipation holes. It should be noted that the term “right front” here means a straight front with the main board 9011 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 9011 and an employee who is trying to visually recognize the main board 9011 .

Further, the board case 90201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main board 9011 . These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 9029 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, when the display monitor 9029 is arranged on the first portion of the main substrate 9011 (for example, the central portion of the main substrate 9011), the second portion of the main substrate 9011 different from the first portion Other electrical components may be arranged in the part (for example, the peripheral part of the main board 9011), and holes, heat radiation holes, and seals may be arranged in the part of the board case corresponding to the second part of the main board 9011. good. In particular, the heat radiation hole is preferably provided near the display monitor 9029 in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 9029 . Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat dissipation hole is arranged at a position that is not directly in front of the display monitor 9029 . According to this, the display monitor 9029 does not interfere with the visibility, so that the information regarding the winning can be easily confirmed.

Moreover, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap the portion of the substrate case 90201 corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 9011 . Specifically, the part of the board case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main board 9011 does not overlap the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. to According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered by the wiring.

In addition, the main board 9011 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying errors in the game machine. are preferably placed on both sides. The other electronic component referred to here is desirably, for example, a large control component such as a CPU.

In addition, a storage area for storing information on game wins (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total of information on game wins stored in 10 ring buffers with maximum 2-byte counters), prize balls The total number buffer) may continue to be stored without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further explained later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the memory area that stores information about the winning of the game, such as when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive winning balls is greater than the number of winning balls processing may be performed. Also, the abnormality count error display and warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed while performing the abnormality count error display and warning display, or after performing the initialization process. The abnormality count error display and warning display will be further described later.

Assuming that the total number of winning balls is 34,321 and the number of winning balls is 19,876, the role ratio (%) is calculated by dividing 19,876 by 34,321 as a divisor. 19876/34321=0.57912 . When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 90100, since calculation with a decimal point must be avoided, it is replaced with the following calculation formula. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is discarded, resulting in 19876/343=57.9475. Since the decimal point is rounded down, a role ratio (%) of 57% is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 9029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 for values other than the most significant bit), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799=100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 90100, it is 32799/327=100.3%, which is an error of +0.3%. When the calculation is performed by truncating the decimal point, for example, when the correct value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is 1 at 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of 1% is displayed, but even on the display of 1% error, it is possible to display the yaku ratio (%) (or yakuren (continuity ratio) (%)) with a very small error.

Also, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so if the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Furthermore, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1% and may become even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of acquired balls above a specific number (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display monitor 9029 displays the role ratio (%) and the role ratio (continuation ratio) (%). Even if it is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, the error may be large even if it is notified by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting an alarm sound, or blinking the displayed value. good.

In addition, the display monitor 9029 displays the role ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) on seven segments, and each value is switched every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). indicate. In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or an attacker. If the value is displayed as the value of the consecutive ratio (%), there is a risk that the value of the ratio (%) and the consecutive ratio (%) will deviate. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display the values calculated by calculating the role ratio (%) and the role ratio (continuation ratio) (%) within the same interrupt.

Also, if the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, if two 7 segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100%. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 9029 shown in FIGS. 83 and 84A can display numeric values in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numeric values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in part of the upper two digits.

In addition, in the above calculation method, an example was shown in which the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired ball objects, and the number of consecutive acquired ball objects were counted by a counter. A sensor provided detects that a game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, the number of prize balls is individually tallied, and then a counter for the number of winning balls and a counter for the number of consecutive winning balls. You may calculate the value to be aggregated into. In addition, using a sensor provided individually for the attacker and a sensor provided after the ejection path for ejecting the winning game media of the attacker and the winning game media of the electric chew merge, based on the detection result It is also possible to calculate a value to be added to a counter for the number of winning ball balls and a counter for the number of continuous winning ball balls. Hereinafter, the display of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, a sensor provided for each of the attacker and the electronic chew detects that a game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, the number of prize balls is tallied individually.

A display monitor 9029 is connected to the main board 9011 of the gaming machine 901 as shown in FIG. The main substrate 9011 is provided on the back side of the game board 902 (see FIG. 34) provided in the gaming machine frame 903 in the gaming machine 901, as shown in FIG. On the back side of the game board 902, in addition to the main board 9011, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 9012, a sound control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. there is The main board 9011 is arranged at a position not overlapping with each peripheral board other than the main board 9011 . In addition, the main board|substrate 9011 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main substrate 9011 may overlap each peripheral substrate so as to be on the upper side.

The RAM 90102 on the main substrate 9011 stores a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first start winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

The first gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 9021A. The second gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 9021B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 9022A. The second starting winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B.

The first general winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. A large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 .

A clear switch is connected to the main substrate 9011 . The clear switch is arranged on the back side of the game board 902 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio stored in the RAM 90102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when there is no choice but to redo the calculation of the role (repeated ratio) or role ratio, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the role (repeated ratio) or role ratio. is. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when data is being collected for performing normal yakuren (run ratio) and yakuratio calculations. Further, when the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data.

Also, the RTC 90106 is provided on the main substrate 9011 . The main board 9011 can detect the current time with the RTC 90106 . The RTC 90106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, and in this embodiment, the RTC 90106 can measure the operating hours of the game arcade.

The main board 9011 is housed in a board case 90201 as shown in FIG. 84(A). A caulking pin 9011B is attached to the board case 90201 . By providing the caulking pin 9011B, the main board 9011 is completely enclosed in the board case 90201, and tampering with the main board 9011 is prevented. The board case 90201 is a crimped board case (hereinafter also referred to as "crimped board case").

Also, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 . A seal 9011S is attached to the board case 90201 to prove that the main board 9011 is enclosed. The sealing seal 9011S is pasted over, for example, the detachable portion of the board case 90201 . The sealing seal 9011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 9011, and is arranged at a position different from a position where the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 9029. Thus, the display monitor 9029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal 9011S.

The display monitor 9029 has a four-digit display section of a first display section 9029A, a second display section 9029B, a third display section 9029C, and a fourth display section 9029D. Each of the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 9029A to fourth display section 9029D are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, it is possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

On the display monitor 9029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 84(B) is displayed. The tally period is displayed in the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage in the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D of the lower two digits. Display No. 1 displays a short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), and display No. 2 displays a short-term winning combination. In display No. 3, the total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) is displayed, and in display No. 2, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed.

The short term here means a period during which the number of awarded balls (the number of winning balls) was 60,000. The total cumulative period means the total period from the start of the calculation of the role ratio (repeated ratio) and role ratio, or the total period after resetting the calculation of the role ratio (retained ratio) and role ratio. do.

In the above example, the winning combination (running ratio) and winning ratio are calculated regardless of the game state, but may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the winning streak (continuous ratio) may be the ratio of the number of winning balls due to winning to the big winning opening during the jackpot game state to the total number of winning balls. In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls, out of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls due to winning the second start prize opening during the high base state and the big winning prize opening during the jackpot game state It may be the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by winning a prize.

When the display No. 1 short-term role combination (continuation ratio) is displayed, "y6." is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B. In addition, when the display No. 1 short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) is displayed, the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, When the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the first display section 9029A and the second display section 9029B.

When the total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B. Further, when the total cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) is displayed as a percentage (% display) in the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. When the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D.

The main board 9011, in calculating the role series (series ratio) and the role ratio, the game ball that entered the fourth general winning opening from the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening We are counting the number of intrusions. In the main process, the CPU 90103 controls the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the first starting switch 9022A and the second starting switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024A. A state confirmation process is performed to confirm the state of each switch of the winning opening switch 9024D (presence or absence of a detection signal).

In this state confirmation processing of each switch, based on the detection signal output from each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered. When detection signals are output from the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, When the detection signal is output from the second start opening switch 9022B, the values of the first start winning prize number counter and the second start winning prize number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 9023, When the value of the large winning prize counter is added and the detection signal is output from the first general winning prize port switch 9024A, the second general prize winning port switch 9024B, the third general winning prize port switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize winning port switch 9024D By adding the values of the first general winning counter, the second general winning counter, the third general winning counter, and the fourth general winning counter, the number of game balls entering each entry area (each winning The winning number of game balls into the mouth) is tallied. Note that the values of each counter are stored in the RAM 90102 .

In this way, the step for tallying the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch state confirmation process). ), it is possible to tally the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate tallying program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of programs to be executed. .

The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the number of winning balls into each winning hole based on the total number of winning balls into each winning hole, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 90102 for each winning hole. Let The number of winning game balls is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one winning to a winning opening by the number of winning times to the winning opening. The number of winning game balls is determined in advance for each winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 85, the number of prize balls for each winning hole classified here is as follows: general winning hole prize balls (first general winning hole to fourth general winning hole (sode) winning balls), 1st start prize mouth prize ball (prize ball for winning the 1st start prize mouth (navel)), normal electric prize ball (prize ball for winning electric chew), special electric prize ball (prize for attacker It is the number of prize balls of the prize ball). The RAM 90102 also stores the total number of prize balls. In addition, the CPU 90103 individually counts the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first start opening, but the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the first starting opening The number of game balls winning prizes may be aggregated. In addition, although the number of general winning prize balls and the number of first starting prize balls are calculated separately, the number of general winning prize balls and the number of first starting prize balls are calculated separately. , and the number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 90102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls. The ring buffer has 10 first to tenth storage areas each consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). In addition, the active buffer has a 0th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning hole, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and can store up to 6000 data with a margin.

In addition, the RAM 90102 is provided with storage areas for the sum of the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total cumulative total for each winning hole. The 10 sets of total sum and total cumulative storage area consist of a maximum 3-byte counter. I can remember.

In addition, the RAM 90102 is provided with a role ratio (continued ratio) role ratio storage area for storing the role ratios and the consecutive ratios (consecutive ratios) of 10 sets and the total sum. The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the role ratio and the role ratio (consecutive ratio) for the 10 sets and the total cumulative number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for the 10 sets and the total cumulative total. , 10 sets and the total cumulative role ratios and consecutive roles (continuous ratios) are stored in a consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio storage area. The combination (continuation ratio) role ratio storage area for storing the combination of roles and combination (continuation ratio) of 10 sets and the total cumulative total consists of a maximum 1-byte counter. The role ratios and the role ratios of the 10 sets and the total sum can be stored with a margin of a maximum of 1 byte if they are stored as integers, for example.

Here, the memory space of CPU90103 of the main board|substrate 9011 is demonstrated. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 90103 has a memory space for accessing the internal registers, the ROM 90101, the RAM 90102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 86, the address/data signal lines of the ROM 90101 are connected to the built-in ROM area of 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; the same shall apply hereinafter) of 16K bytes in the memory space. assigned to. The CPU 90103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

The address/data signal lines of the built-in registers are assigned to the built-in register areas FE00H to FEBFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 reads data from the built-in register and writes data to the register via this built-in register area.

The address/data signal lines of the RAM 90102 are assigned to the RWM area (built-in RAM area) of F000H to F3FFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 90102 and write data to the RAM 90102 . Note that other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are unused areas.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 87, a used area program area, a used area data area, a non-used area program area, and a non-used area data area are allocated to the built-in ROM area. A free area is allocated between the used area program area and the used area data area. Similarly, empty areas are allocated between the used area data area and the unused area program area, and between the unused area program area and the unused area data area. The CPU 90103 designates this built-in ROM area and reads data from the ROM 90101 .

Among these, the use area program area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 90103 and supplementary data (operand) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. Data of a game-related program relating to the progress of is stored. The game-related programs stored in the use area program area include a game control program, which is a program for controlling games, and a special symbol display output program, which is a program for displaying special symbols and general symbols. there is These game control programs and special symbol display output programs are stored in the use area program area. The game control program is a program relating to the progress of the game, and is a program that controls the progress of the game, such as a jackpot lottery program for a lottery for shifting to the jackpot game state.

The non-use area program area consists of instruction data (opcodes) for the CPU 90103 to calculate the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio, and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. data of a program for calculating and displaying a series of roles (continued ratio) and a role ratio (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a series of roles (continued ratio) role ratio related program). The Yakure (Ren ratio) role ratio related program includes the Yakure (Ren ratio) role ratio calculation program for calculating the Yakure (Ren ratio) and the role ratio, and the Yakure (Ren ratio) and the role ratio display monitor 9029 contains a role ratio display output program. In the non-use area program area, a combination of roles (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program and a combination of roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program are stored. The consecutive role (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program is a program different from the progress of the game.

Here, the used area program area and the non-used area program area will be further described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the configuration of a used area program area and a non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 88, in the use area program area, as game-related programs, there are "switch input processing", "digit output processing 1", "jump processing to non-use area (digit output processing 2)", and "error detection processing". "Random number update process" "Special figure process" "Normal figure process" "Information output process" "Ball process" "Test terminal process" "Solenoid process" "Memory display process" "Error notification process" "Unused area (role Each program of "jump processing to ratio calculation processing" is stored. In addition, in the non-use program area, each program of "digit output processing 2", "jump processing to use area (error detection processing)" and "role ratio calculation processing" is stored. In the CPU 90103, digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common and executed by one interrupt processing. Also, in the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2, the LEDs in the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, and the display monitor 9029 are displayed by dynamic lighting. However, instead of dynamic lighting, static lighting may be used.

Among these processes, the program that performs "digit output processing 1" corresponds to the special symbol display output program, and the program that performs "digit output processing 2" corresponds to the combination (continuation ratio) combination ratio display output program. . In addition, the program that performs from "error detection processing" to "error notification processing" (hereinafter also referred to as "game progress control processing") corresponds to the game control program, and the program that performs "role ratio calculation processing" (Continuous ratio) corresponds to a role ratio calculation program. In the combination of roles (continuation ratio) role ratio calculation program, the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the role ratio are calculated, and the display pattern when displaying the calculated combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the calculated role ratio on the display monitor 9029, in other words Then, the light emission pattern of the plurality of LEDs (first segment SG1 to seventh segment SG7 and dot SG8 shown in FIG. 100) on the display monitor 9029 is determined.

The use area data area stores reference data (for example, various lottery data described above) referenced by the control program stored in the use program area. In addition, in the non-use area data area, data used for displaying the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the ratio of roles are temporarily stored. For example, the non-use area data area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning hole and a combination (continuous ratio) role ratio storage area for the total total. In addition, in the unused area data area, there are an active buffer with a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer with a 1st to 10th storage area, and a number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. A storage area for the sum and a storage area for 10 sets of consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratios are provided.

In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to each address in the RAM area. , management data) is data of a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), it is divided into storage areas of the RAM 90102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area and stored in units of 1 byte. are doing.

In addition, a use area program area in which a special symbol display output program and a game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 90103, and a combination (continuous ratio) combination ratio display output program and a combination (continuation ratio) combination ratio calculation program are stored. A higher address (head address) different from that of the stored non-use area program area is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 89, the upper address of the subroutine in the use area program area storing the special symbol display output program and the game control program is "00". The upper address of the subroutine in the unused area program area in which the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program and the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program are stored is set to "01". Thus, the upper address of the program stored in the unused program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the used program area.

As call instructions for each of these programs, "CALLF" and "CALLmn" are used for the programs stored in the used area program area. Also, only "CALLmn" is used for the program stored in the non-use area program area, and "CALLF" is never used. The special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area program area are called by "CALLF" or "CALLmn", but here they are called by "CALLF". In addition, the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program and the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program stored in the unused area program area are called by "CALLmn", and cannot be called by "CALLF". do not have. Comparing these call instructions, "CALLF" is a call instruction that is shorter in tone and lighter in capacity than "CALLmn".

The CPU 90103 also has a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing the upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call a program omitting the upper address. A fixed value corresponding to an upper address is set in the Q register. For example, the fixed value "00" is set when calling a program stored in the used area program area, and the fixed value "01" is set when calling a program stored in the non-used area program area. be. In this way, the Q register can set a fixed value to the high-order address of the used area program area and then set a fixed value to the high-order address of the unused area program area to execute the program in the unused area program area. It is possible.

Next, the execution order of programs in interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 will be described. In principle, the CPU 90103 executes programs in order of addresses. Therefore, referring to FIG. 88, in executing the program, the CPU 90103 first executes "switch input processing" in the use area program area, and then executes "digit output processing 1" according to the special symbol display output program. Execute. When starting interrupt processing, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 outputs the digit signals of the special symbols and general symbols obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B and the normal symbol display device 9020. Execute the process to output to such as.

After executing "digit output processing 1", the CPU 90103 jumps from the use area program area to the non-use area program area, and executes "digit output processing 2" according to the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program. . When jumping from the used area program area to the unused area program area, a fixed value "01" is set in the Q register. The same applies hereafter. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting to the display monitor 9029 a digit signal regarding the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio obtained in the previous routine. Therefore, "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" are continuously executed.

After performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 jumps from the non-use area program area to the use area program area, and performs processing according to the game control program. When jumping from the unused program area to the used program area, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. The same applies hereafter. CPU90103, in the processing according to the game control program, "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special figure processing", "normal figure processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", "solenoid processing ”, ”storage display processing”, and ”error notification processing” are sequentially executed. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special figure, a general figure, etc. by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 90103 executes the "error notification process", and when the process according to the third program is completed, jumps from the used area program to the non-used area program, and performs the "role ratio calculation process". The CPU 90103 calculates a combination of roles (repeated ratio) and a role ratio by a "role ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal for the combination of roles (repeated ratio) and the role ratio. Thus, the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 ends.

In this way, the CPU 90103 executes "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display. Execute the display of the special figure and the general figure to the device 9020 and the display of the role combination (continuation ratio) and the role ratio to the display monitor 9029.

Next, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing another configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, as shown in FIG. 90, the use area program area includes "switch input processing", "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "general drawing processing", "information output processing", and "prize processing". Programs for sphere processing, test terminal processing, solenoid processing, memory display processing, error notification processing, and digit output processing 1 are stored. In the non-use program area, programs of "digit output processing 2" and "role ratio calculation processing" are stored.

Next, the execution order of programs in interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 in this example will be described. Referring to FIG. 90, when executing the program, the CPU 90103 first executes "switch input processing" in the use area program area, and then executes processing according to the third program. CPU90103, in the processing according to the game control program, "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special figure processing", "normal figure processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", "solenoid processing ”, “memory display processing” and “error notification processing” are sequentially executed. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special figure, a general figure, etc. by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 130 subsequently executes "digit output processing 1" according to the special symbol display output program. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 outputs the digit signals of the special symbols and general symbols obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display device 9020. Execute the process to output to such as. However, you may output the digit signal about the special figure and the normal figure etc. which were calculated|required by this routine.

Then, the CPU 90103 shifts to the non-use area program area as it is, and executes the "digit output process 2" according to the combination (continuous ratio) combination ratio display output program. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting to the display monitor 9029 a digit signal regarding the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio obtained in the previous routine. Therefore, "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" are executed in succession.

Thereafter, after performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes the "role ratio calculation process" according to the consecutive role (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program. The CPU 90103 calculates a combination of roles (repeated ratio) and a role ratio by a "role ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal for the combination of roles (repeated ratio) and the role ratio. Thus, the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 ends.

In this way, the CPU 90103 executes "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display. Execute the display of the special figure and the general figure to the device 9020 and the display of the role combination (continuation ratio) and the role ratio to the display monitor 9029.

For example, regarding the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 88 is area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. Also, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area is an area configuration pattern obtained by removing the jump processing between the used area program area and the unused area program area from the configuration shown in FIG. Let C.

In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 91(A), in one cycle of the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103, a special symbol display output program → a combination (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program → a game control program → The process is executed in the order of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program. Also, in the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. Consecutive ratio) The processing is executed in the order of the role ratio calculation program. In addition, in the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a special symbol display output program → a game control program → a combination of roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program → a combination of roles (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program are executed in order. Hereinafter, the interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. 91(A) is called first interrupt processing, the interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. 91(B) is called second interrupt processing, and the interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. The processing is called third interrupt processing.

Next, control for displaying a combination of roles (combination ratio) and a role ratio on the display monitor 9029 by the main board 9011 will be described. Here, the main board 9011 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items relating to the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the role ratio. FIG. 92A is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 92(A), when the display on the display monitor 9029 is started, the display No. 1 short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) is displayed first. The display No. 1 short-term winning streak (strong ratio) is displayed in green letters. In the display of display No. 1 short-term winning combination (continuation ratio), as shown in FIG. 92(B-1), the character "y" is displayed in the first display section 9029A, and "6. ” is displayed. In addition, short-term winning streaks (continuous ratios) are displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the short-term success rate (continuity ratio) is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. Display No. 2 short-term winning combination (continuation ratio) is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 92B-2, the character "y" is displayed in the first display portion 9029A, and the character "7." is displayed in the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. Short-term role ratios are displayed on the third display section 9029C and the fourth display section 9029D. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters "4." are displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the characters "3." are displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total winning combination (relation ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of display No. 3 total cumulative wins (combination ratio) is displayed in red. In the display of display No. 3, the total cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio), as shown in FIG. .” is displayed. In addition, the total cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) is displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the display No. 4 total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 92(B-4), the character "A" is displayed in the first display portion 9029A, and the character "7." is displayed in the second display portion 9029B. is displayed. Further, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative role ratio is 68%, the characters "6." are displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the characters "8." are displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

When the display of display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 92(B-5). Thereafter, display No. 1 short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) to display No. 4 total cumulative winning combination ratio are sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term winning combination ratio of display No. 2 to the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 are red. Thus, the display monitor 9029 switches and displays the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), and the total cumulative winning combination ratio every 30 seconds.

Further, the content displayed on the display monitor 9029 is not limited to the content described above and can be determined as appropriate. For example, in the above example, characters such as “y” and “A” are displayed on the first display section 9029A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display section 9029B to the fourth display section 9029D. Characters may be displayed on the display portion 9029B, and numerical values may be displayed on the first display portion 9029A, the third display portion 9029C, and the fourth display portion 9029D.

Numerical values may be displayed on all of the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D, and predetermined ratios and divisions may be indicated only by the numerical values. Alternatively, characters may be displayed at two positions of the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D, and numerical values may be displayed at the other two positions. Alternatively, a numerical range of characters may be set so that only characters are displayed in the first display section 9029A to the fourth display section 9029D. For example, "0" to "30" may be displayed as "P", "31" to "60" as "Q", and "61" to "100" as "R". Also, characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, and may be hiragana, katakana, kanji, or the like. Also, instead of characters, meaningless symbols or the like may be displayed.

Further, when displaying numerical values on the display monitor 9029, the colors and display modes may be changed according to the displayed numerical values. For example, in displaying the role ratio, if the displayed role ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be displayed in "blue", and if it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be displayed in "red". Further, if the displayed role ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be lit and displayed, and if it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be displayed blinking. Any one of the first display section 9029A to the fourth display section 9029D may be made to blink. For example, all of the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D may blink, two of the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B, or the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. may be made to blink. A non-blinking display unit may be lit or extinguished.

Also, in the main board 9011, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage area for the total sum and total cumulative total for 10 sets, and the combination (continuous ratio) role ratio storage area for storing the role ratio and combination (continuous ratio) for 10 sets and total cumulative are updated respectively. .

Updates in the active buffer and ring buffer move the number stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Also, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 93, the numbers of general prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas are 27, 81, 120, 36, 225, 87, and 66, respectively. ', '117', '45', and '21'. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is changed to "27", "81", and " 120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th memory area is set to "0" and the number of prize balls in the 10th memory area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the number of prize balls stored may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 shown in FIG. 82 includes a door opening sensor that detects opening of the glass door frame 903a. The opening of the glass door frame 903a does not correspond to an abnormality when it is performed by an employee, but it often corresponds to an abnormality when it is performed by a person other than the employee. Therefore, in this embodiment, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 includes a door opening sensor that detects opening of the glass door frame 903a. The door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main substrate 9011 when detecting opening of the glass door frame 903a.

Door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 903a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 903a by a person other than the employee. Here, door open detection is performed on the assumption that the glass door frame 903a is abnormally opened. Also, even if the glass door frame 903a is normally opened by an employee, the opening of the door is detected. Since there are many, a special problem can be prevented from arising.

Next, the control related to the display of the combination (continuation ratio) and the combination ratio executed on the main board 9011 will be described. In the main board 9011, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting interruption prohibition. In this initialization, for example, the RAM control area and RAM data area in RAM 90102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used to display the role ratio and the role ratio stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 90102 are maintained without being cleared. be. The data used for displaying the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 90102 are cleared by operating the clear switch. In addition, register setting of CTC built in microcomputer 90100 for game control is done. After initial setting, the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. The consecutive (continuous ratio)/role ratio related processing is executed in this timer interrupt processing. Further, in the display switching control process (step S90209 in FIG. 97) of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) and role ratio related processing, the consecutive consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program is executed, and in the other processing Consecutive ratio) A role ratio calculation program is executed. The role ratio calculation processing in the role ratio (continued ratio) role ratio calculation program includes other processing of calculating the role ratio (continued ratio) and the role ratio. However, in the role ratio calculation process, it is possible to perform the processing of calculating the role ratio (continuity ratio) and the role ratio, and prepare a separate program corresponding to the other processing in the role ratio (continuity ratio) role ratio calculation program. good.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio)/role ratio related process. On the main board 9011, as shown in FIG. 94, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the combination of roles (continuation ratio)/role ratio related process (step S90101). Whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal has been transmitted from the clear switch.

As a result, if a clear switch operation signal has been transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; YES), warning display preparation is performed (step S90102), and the process proceeds to step S90103. If the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and no abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; NO), winning information is acquired (step S90103). The winning information is that the game ball is detected by any of the first start-up switch 9022A and the second start-up switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. Obtained by

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (step S90104). The RTC 90106 measures and determines whether the current time is within business hours. As a result, if the current time is within business hours (step S90104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105). Whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed is determined by whether or not an open signal is transmitted from the door open sensor.

As a result, when the open signal is not output from the door open sensor and the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105; YES), the attacker wins a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time. It is determined whether or not there is an address (step S90106). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which it is impossible to win in a normal game. Specifically, since the maximum number of shots of game balls is 100 per minute, the upper limit can be determined as appropriate, for example, 100 per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. Unit time is measured by RTC90106. Also, the winning number of game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 .

As a result, if the attacker has not won a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time (step S90106; NO), the number of prize balls is added according to the winning information acquired in step S90103. Processing is performed (step S90107). Note that the processing for adding the number of prize balls is performed when preparation for warning display is not performed. Here, if the preparation for warning display is being carried out, the process for the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio related processing is terminated. In the number-of-prize-balls addition process, the general winning hole (sode), the general winning hole (navel), the normal electric prize ball (electric chew), and the special electric prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. Add the number of prize balls.

In addition, in the number of winning ball addition processing, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (navel), the normal electric prize ball (electric chew), the special electric prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer Calculate the total prize balls for each number of prize balls. Here, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches the predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is transferred to the first storage area of the ring buffer. move. Also, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. Also, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed out (calculation timer=0) (step S90108). As a result, when the calculation timer has not timed out (step S90108; NO), the consecutive roles (continuous ratio)/role ratio related process is terminated as it is. If the calculation timer has expired (step S90108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer=2000 ms) (step S90109).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by adding in step S90107 is the calculated execution number (step S90110). The number of calculation executions can be an appropriate number. It may be slightly less than 6000 total prize balls, for example 5900. Also, it is preferable that the calculated number of executions is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum number of payout balls from 6000.

As a result, when the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) is not the calculated execution number (step S90110; NO), the combination of roles (consecutive ratio) and role ratio related processing is terminated. Also, when the number of prize balls is the number of calculation execution (step S90110; YES), the winning combination (continuation ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated (step S90111). Here, a short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), a short-term winning combination ratio, a cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) (total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio)), and a cumulative cumulative winning combination ratio (total cumulative winning combination ratio) are calculated. Therefore, the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term winning combination ratio, the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), and the cumulative cumulative winning combination ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. Thereafter, preparation for display of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) and role ratio is performed (step S90112), and the series of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) and role ratio related processing is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined that it is not within business hours in step S90104 (step S90104; NO), if it is determined that the door frame is not closed in step S90105 (step S90105; NO), the attacker per unit time is determined in step S90106. When it is determined that the number of game balls has won a predetermined number or more (step S90106; YES), an abnormality count error display preparation is performed (step S90113).

Next, the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio display control processing will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio display control process. As shown in FIG. 95, in the combination of roles (continuous ratio)/role ratio display control process, it is determined whether or not the preparation for display of the combination of roles (continuous ratio)/role ratio has been completed (step S90201). If it is determined that the combination of roles (continuous ratio) and role ratio display preparation processing has not been completed (step S90201; NO), it is determined whether or not the preparation for display of abnormal count errors has been completed (step S90202).

As a result, when it is determined that preparation for display of anomaly count errors has been completed (step S90202; YES), an anomaly count error display is performed (step S90203). Abnormality count error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and "0" and "1" can be displayed in the lower two digits. Also, when performing the abnormal count error display, a predetermined abnormal count error display may be performed on other display devices, such as the image display device 905, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, etc. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 909 may be lit or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, predetermined alarm sounds may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be made on a 7-segment display provided on the main board 9011 for displaying an error in the gaming machine. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

When the abnormal count error display is performed, the control processing for the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio display control processing is terminated. In step S90202, if it is determined not to determine whether or not preparation for display of anomaly count error has been completed (step S90202; NO), it is determined whether or not preparation for warning display has been completed (step S90204).

As a result, when it is determined that preparation for warning display is completed (step S90204; YES), warning display is performed (step S90205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and "0" and "6" can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 9029 may blink, or the display monitor 9029 may be displayed while changing its display color in order to indicate that it is in a warning state. Alternatively, display may be performed by increasing the brightness of the display on the display monitor 9029 . Thus, it is preferable to make the warning display more conspicuous than other displays. It should be noted that after displaying the abnormality count error, the process may proceed to the determination of whether warning preparations have been completed (step S90204). Here, if it is determined that warning preparations have been completed (step S90204; YES)), an abnormality count error display and a warning display will be performed. In order to perform the abnormality count error display and the warning display on the display monitor 9029, for example, the abnormality count error display and the warning display may be repeatedly performed at intervals of several seconds, for example, five seconds. Moreover, you may display by another display method.

Further, when the warning display is performed, other display devices, for example, the image display device 905, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, etc. may be subjected to a predetermined warning display, The effect lamp 909 may be lit or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be made on a 7-segment display provided on the main board 9011 for displaying an error in the gaming machine. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

After displaying the warning, the yakuren (continued ratio)/role ratio control process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S90204 that preparation for warning display has not been completed (step S90204; NO), the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio control processing is terminated.

Also, if it is determined that preparations for display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio have been completed (step S90201; YES), display restriction confirmation processing is performed (step S90206). In the display restriction confirmation process, a process of determining whether or not to restrict the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the role ratio is executed. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display restriction confirmation processing.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not a door opening required error has been detected (step S90301). The door opening required error is an error that requires the gaming machine frame 903 to be opened forward from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. Errors occurring in the game machine 901 other than the abnormal count error include various errors shown in FIG. 98, for example. A brief description of each of these errors is provided.

Error 1: Magnet Error A magnet error (magnetic error) is an error due to the detection of a magnetic anomaly. When a magnet error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The magnet error is released by turning off the power switch. Also, the security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Prize Ball Abnormal Error The prize ball abnormal error is an error caused by detecting a predetermined number of abnormal prize balls, for example, 2000 or more. Abnormal prize balls are, for example, prize balls that are paid out when game balls have won more than the count number of the big winning opening. The prize ball abnormality error is released by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize ball error A prize ball error is an error that occurs when a prize ball is not paid out even though it is detected that a game ball has entered the winning hole. A prize ball error is an error that occurs when an abnormality in the payout switch is detected or when an abnormality in the payout case is detected. The prize ball error is canceled by canceling the error that has occurred, such as canceling the error.
Error 4: Out-of-Ball Error A out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when a game ball to be paid out is not on the back side of the game board 902 when it is detected that the game ball has entered the winning opening. The out-of-ball error is an error that is canceled when the supply of game balls is started.
Error 5: Radio Wave Abnormality Error A radio wave abnormality error is an error due to the detection of radio wave abnormality. A radio wave abnormality error is an error that is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error Main board communication failure error is an error caused by communication failure between the main board 9011 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is released when the communication between the main board 9011 and the payout control board is recovered.
Error 7: Card Unit Error A card unit error is an error caused by poor communication between the main board 9011 and the card unit. A card unit error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 9011 and the card unit is restored.
Error 8: Full tank error A full tank error is an error that occurs when the tray (upper tray or lower tray) from which game balls are dispensed becomes full and game balls cannot be dispensed. The full tank error is canceled when the game balls are removed from the tray to which the game balls are dispensed and the tray is no longer full.
Error 9: Accessory first activation error Accessory first activation error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when the accessory is activated for the first time. The role product first activation error is canceled by pressing the operation button 9030 .
Error 10: Illegal Winning Error An illegal winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball enters a large winning opening other than during operation. In the gaming machine 901, the special variable winning ball device 907 is the only big winning hole, so an illegal winning error is not detected, and this error occurs in a gaming machine having two or more big winning holes. When an illegal winning error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The fraudulent prize winning error is canceled after a predetermined period of time, for example, 3 minutes, has elapsed since the security information was output.
Error 11: RTC-SRAM abnormal error The RTC-SRAM abnormal error is an error that occurs when the power switch is turned on, when an RTC abnormality is detected, and when backup failure is detected. The RTC-SRAM abnormal error is canceled after a predetermined time, eg, 60 seconds, has passed since it occurred.
Error 12: RAM clear error A RAM clear error is an error that causes a cold start when the power is turned on. When a RAM clear error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main substrate 9011 to the hall computer. The time for which the security information is output is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is cleared after a predetermined time, such as 31 seconds, has passed since it occurred.
Error 13: Vibration detector abnormality error Vibration detector abnormality error is an error that is detected when the game machine vibrates. The vibration detection device abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined period of time, for example, 60 seconds, has passed since it occurred.
Error 14: Door Open Error A door open error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 903a is released from the gaming machine frame 903 or when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame. The door open error is canceled when the opened glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is closed.

Among these errors, errors 1 to 7 are door opening required errors that require opening the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. On the other hand, errors 8 to 13 are errors that do not require opening of the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error, and are not door opening required errors. Since the error 14 is a door open error, it is an unnecessary error to determine whether or not the game machine frame 903 needs to be opened.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 96, it is determined whether or not a door open required error has been detected, in other words, whether or not any of the door open required errors of error 1 to error 7 has been detected (step S90301). If the door open required error is detected (step S90301; YES), it is determined whether or not the door open required error flag is set (step S90302).

Here, if the door open required error flag is not set (step S90302; NO), the door open required error flag is set (step S90303). If the door open required error flag is set (step S90302; YES), the process proceeds directly to step S90304.

Next, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S90304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time to continue the limitation of the display of consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) after the door opening required error is cancelled. The measurement timer is a timer that measures time when it is set, and does not measure time when it is reset.

The time to continue the restriction of the display of the combination of roles (continuous ratio) after the door opening required error is canceled can be, for example, the time required for canceling the door opening required error or a somewhat longer time than that time. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Moreover, it is good also as long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required for canceling the door open required error may be uniformly fixed, or may be set according to the type of the door open required error. For example, errors 1, 2, 5, etc., which are canceled by turning off the power switch, shorten the time required to cancel the door opening required error, and error 3, such as the prize ball error, which needs to be canceled. may lengthen the time required to cancel the door opening required error.

If it is determined in step S90304 that the measurement timer has been set (step S90304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S90305). If it is determined that the measurement timer has not been set (step S90304; NO), the process proceeds directly to step S90306. The state in which the measurement timer is set when the door open required error is detected is a state in which the door open required error occurs again after the door open required error is canceled once. Therefore, by resetting the measurement timer in step S90305, if the door opening required error is detected again during the time measurement by the measurement timer, the door opening required error detected later is canceled. Time can be measured with a measurement timer.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306). As a result, when the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306; YES), the combination of roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display restriction is executed (step S90307), and the display restriction confirmation process ends. If the door open required error flag is not set (step S90306; NO), the display restriction confirmation process is terminated. For example, display of consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio display restriction is stopped.

If it is determined in step S90301 that the door open required error is not detected (step S90301; NO), it is determined whether or not the door open required error flag is set (step S90308). As a result, when it is determined that the door open required error flag is not set (step S90308; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306.

If it is determined in step S90308 that the door open required error flag is set (step S90308; YES), the door open required error is once detected and then the door open required error is canceled. (step S90309). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S90310).

If the measurement timer has not been set (step S90310; NO), it is immediately after the door opening required error is canceled. In other words, this flow is executed only after the door opening required error is cancelled. At this time, the measurement time t (measurement timer=t) is set in the measurement timer (step S90311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time during which the restriction on the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) after the door opening required error is cancelled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer has timed out (t=0) (step S90312). If the measurement timer has been set in step S90310 (step S90310; YES), it is determined whether or not the measurement timer has expired (t=0) (step S90312).

When step S90311 is passed through, the measurement timer is not set to 0 (the time is not up) (step S90312; NO), so the process proceeds directly to step S90306. After the measurement timer has been set, it is determined in step S90310 that the measurement timer has been set (step S90310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases as the flow loops, and when the time t has elapsed since the measurement timer was set, it is determined that the measurement timer has timed out.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer has timed out (t=0) (step S90312). Here, if the measurement timer has timed out (step S90312; YES), the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag are cleared (step S90313). If the measurement timer has not timed out (step S90312; NO), the process directly proceeds to step S90306 without clearing the measurement timer and the door open required error flag.

If step S90313 is not passed, the door open required error flag is not cleared, so it is determined in step S90306 that the door open required error flag is set (step S90306: YES). Therefore, the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display restriction is executed. Further, when the process goes through step S90313, the door open required error flag is cleared, so in step S90306 it is determined that the door open required error flag is not set (step S90306; NO). Therefore, the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display restriction is not executed. In this way, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not to execute the combination (continuous ratio) role ratio display restriction. In summary, in the display restriction confirmation process, the detection of the door opening required error and the time after the door opening required error is canceled until the measurement time (= time to continue the role ratio display restriction) has passed During this time, display of consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratios is restricted, and display of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratios is not limited during other times.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 95, it is determined whether or not display restriction is to be executed based on the determination made in the display restriction confirmation process shown in step S90206 (step S90207). As a result, if the display restriction is to be executed (step S90207; YES), the display restriction is executed (step S90208) to restrict the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio. Then, the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio display control processing is terminated.

If display restriction is not to be executed (step S90207; NO), display switching control processing is executed (step S90209), and the consecutive combination (continuous ratio)/character ratio display control processing is terminated. The display switching control process is executed according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display switching control processing. As shown in FIG. 97, in the display switching control process, first, it is determined whether or not the short-term consecutive consecutive (continuous ratio) display is being performed on the display monitor 9029 (step S90401). If the short-term consecutive (continuous ratio) display is being performed (step S90401; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the start of the short-term consecutive consecutive (continuous ratio) display. (step S90402). The predetermined time here can be set to any time, such as 30 seconds (30000 ms). Also, the predetermined time may be a time shorter than 30 seconds, such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or a time longer than 30 seconds, such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90402; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the display of the short-term ratio (continued ratio) continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S90402; YES), short-term role ratio display control is performed (step S90403), and the display switching control process ends. In the short-term role ratio display control, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the short-term role ratio display is set.

If it is determined in step S90401 that the short-term combination (continuous ratio) display is not performed (step S90401; NO), it is determined whether or not the short-term combination ratio is displayed (step S90404). . If the short-term role ratio display is being performed (step S90404; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the short-term role ratio display was started (step S90405).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90405; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term role ratio display continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S90404; YES), cumulative winning consecutive (continuous ratio) display control is performed (step S90406), and the display switching control processing ends. In the cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) display control, the cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) display is started is set. .

If it is determined in step S90404 that the short-term role ratio display is not performed (step S90404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative winning consecutive (continuous ratio) display is being performed (step S90407). . If the cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) display is being performed (step S90407; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) display was started. (step S90408).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90408; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the display of the cumulative total (continued ratio) continues. Also, when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S90408; YES), cumulative role ratio display control is performed (step S90409), and the display switching control process ends. In the cumulative role ratio display control, the cumulative role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the cumulative role ratio display is started is set.

If it is determined in step S90407 that the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) display is not performed (step S90407; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative winning combination display is being performed (step S90410). . When the cumulative role ratio display is being performed (step S90410; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the cumulative role ratio display was started (step S90411).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90411; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the display of the cumulative total (continued ratio) continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S90411; YES), short-term consecutive (continuous ratio) display control is performed (step S90412), and the display switching control process ends. In the short-term consecutive (continuous ratio) display control, the short-term consecutive consecutive (continuous ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the short-term consecutive consecutive (continuous ratio) display is set. . Thus, the display switching control process ends.

In the short-term role ratio display control in step S90403, the digit output process 2 is executed by the second program. Similarly, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed in the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) display control in step S90406, the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) display control in step S90409, and the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) display control in step S90412. be done.

In the gaming machine 901 described above, the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 are made common, and the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 are executed in one cycle of the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 . One cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 is approximately 4 ms, and the time required for the game progress control processing (game control program) is, for example, approximately 2 ms.

FIG. 99(A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow and the display state of the monitor when the third interrupt process is executed, and (B) is the signal flow when the first interrupt process is executed. 4 is a time chart showing the relationship between , and the display state of a monitor or the like. Here, in the first period, the symbol (character) corresponding to "0" is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1), and "y" is displayed on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2). Assume an example in which a symbol (character) corresponding to "1" is displayed on the symbol display device 904A and a symbol (character) corresponding to "6."

In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 91(C), the game progress process ( Game control program) is executed. Therefore, a difference of about 2 ms occurs between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (role combination (run ratio) role ratio display output program), as shown in FIG. 99(A). As shown, there is a delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first cycle, the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1) clearly displayed a symbol corresponding to "0", but the display monitor 9029 (SEG2) had a problem with the display. Specifically, the problem in the example of trying to display the character corresponding to "y" on the display monitor 9029 is as follows. The first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D in the display monitor 9029, as shown in FIG. 100, are provided with 8 LEDs arranged in 7 segments and the lower right dot. Assuming that these LEDs are the first segment SG1, the second segment SG2, the third segment SG3, the fourth segment SG4, the fifth segment SG5, the sixth segment SG6, the seventh segment SG7, and the dot SG8, the second segment SG2, the The 3rd segment SG3, the 4th segment SG4, the 6th segment SG6, and the 7th segment SG7 are displayed lightly. This problem occurs, for example, because the control that does not turn on the display monitor 9029 in the period before the first period has passed through to the first period. Also, regarding the character corresponding to "6." SG1, fifth segment SG5, and dot SG8 are displayed lightly. This problem also occurs, for example, because the control for turning on the LED corresponding to the character "y" on the display monitor 9029 in the first cycle has been broken through to the second cycle.

On the other hand, in the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 99(B), digit output process 2 (combination (combination ratio) combination ratio display output program) is executed following digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program). . Therefore, there is almost no difference between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (role combination (run ratio) role ratio display output program). , there is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, the symbol corresponding to "0" was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1) in the first cycle. In addition, all characters corresponding to "y" were clearly displayed on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2). In this way, in the first interrupt process, it is possible to prevent display problems on the LEDs of the display monitor 9029 .

As described above, in the gaming machine 901, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 displays the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term winning combination ratio, the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), and the cumulative winning combination ratio. . Also, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main substrate 9011 that controls the game so as not to hinder visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and windmills provided on the game board.

Moreover, the display monitor 9029 is arranged in front when the main substrate 9011 is viewed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered. Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation holes provided in the board case 90201 are not directly in front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 from becoming difficult to see due to the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 .

Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position not overlapping with each peripheral board other than the main board 9011 . For this reason, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be prevented from being obscured by peripheral boards such as the effect control board 9012 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 .

Also, on the display monitor 9029, the combination (relation ratio) and role ratio related to the relationship between the prize balls paid out by passing the electric chew or the attacker and the prize balls paid out by passing through the general winning opening are displayed. can do. Further, the display monitor 9029 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term winning streak (continuous ratio) and a cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) every predetermined period. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, it is possible to contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

In addition, since the display monitor 9029 displays the winning ball (short-term winning ball ratio) and the winning ball ratio (short-term winning ball ratio) for every 6000 winning balls, It is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit, such as 6000 numbers. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than when the number of prize balls is 6000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10000. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of winning balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

In addition, the display monitor 9029 displays the winning combination (continuous ratio) (short-term winning combination (continuous ratio)) and the role ratio (short-term winning combination) for each 6000 prize balls, as well as the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio). and cumulative role ratios are switched and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) or the short-term winning combination ratio with the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) or the cumulative cumulative winning combination ratio for each predetermined unit. Also, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 housed in the crimped board case. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of fraud such as falsification of the display on the display monitor 9029 .

Moreover, the game machine 901 is equipped with a detecting means for detecting fraudulent means that proper predetermined information cannot be displayed. Here, fraud includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game arcade, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open, winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of winning prizes, and the like. The game machine 901 operates during the business hours of the game arcade, and counting prize balls during hours other than the business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. Also, the gaming machine 901 is to be played with the door frame closed, and counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be a fraudulent act.

In addition, while the game machine 901 is playing, the game ball cannot be shot at a speed exceeding a certain speed. For example, the maximum number of shots of game balls is 100 per minute. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls in one minute is approximately 100 pieces. Therefore, if more than 100 game balls are detected in one minute or more than 20 game balls are won in 12 seconds, the probability of fraud is extremely high.

In the game machine 901, in order to detect fraud, when it is not during business hours, when the glass door frame 903a is not closed, and when a predetermined number or more of game balls have won the attacker per unit time, prize balls are determined. Eliminates addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress falsification of the information on the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) and the ratio of roles due to these frauds. Instead of the number of winning balls when the attacker wins a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time, fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time.

Further, in the gaming machine 901, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer provided in the RAM 90102 reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area of the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

The ring buffer is provided with first to tenth storage areas, and when the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer moves to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area erased. Therefore, since the data to be erased is in units of predetermined units, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. In addition, it is possible to increase the amount of data that remains without being erased.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area of the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with the data in the ninth storage area. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a partial storage area of the ring buffer, is erased. As a result, the amount of data to be erased can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity and to calculate the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio using a large amount of data.

When erasing the data in the ring buffer, it is also possible to erase all of the data in the first to tenth storage areas, instead of only erasing part of the data in the tenth storage area. good. In this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be more preferably prevented. Also, part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, all the data in the ring buffer may be erased at the beginning of business hours, and then a part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

Also, in the above example, data movement in the ring buffer is explained, but data other than the ring buffer, such as the storage area for storing total totals, may also be partially or entirely erased. may

Further, in the gaming machine 901, each data of the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term winning combination ratio, the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), and the cumulative winning combination ratio are displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. Note that the period for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be every hour. In addition, the displayed data may be data other than the data of the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term winning combination ratio, the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), and the cumulative cumulative winning combination ratio, or may be only a part of these data. good.

In addition, when displaying each data of short-term consecutive roles (continuous ratio), short-term consecutive ratio, cumulative consecutive ratio (continuous ratio), and cumulative consecutive ratio every 30 seconds, short-term consecutive consecutive ratios (continuous ratio) are The display is different from the data of Specifically, the short-term interest rate (total ratio) is shown in red, and the other data is shown in green. Therefore, it is possible to make the user recognize that new data will be displayed from the short-term consecutive ratio (continuous ratio).

Further, in the gaming machine 901, when an abnormal operation is performed, a warning is displayed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as abnormal operation. The clear switch is, so to speak, an emergency switch that is operated when an obstacle occurs in the calculation of the combination (relation ratio) or the ratio of roles. When this switch is operated, the data on the combination of roles (relationship ratio) and the ratio of roles can be falsified, so the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. Since the gaming machine 901 can warn the user of this abnormal operation by displaying a warning, it is possible to prevent fraud such as falsification of data.

In addition, in the game machine 901, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A, the second general winning port switch 9024B, and the third general winning port switch 9024C , based on the number of winning balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the role ratio are calculated. For example, using a sensor (count switch 9023) individually provided for the attacker and a sensor provided after the ejection path for ejecting the winning game media of the attacker and the winning game media of the electric chew merge, Based on the detection results, if the counter for the number of winning balls and the counter for the number of consecutive winning balls are calculated to calculate the winning combination (consecutive ratio) and the winning ratio, it is possible to identify which winning slot the payout is from. It is difficult to do, and there is a risk that the calculation of the Yaku ratio and Yakuren (Ren ratio) will become complicated. In this respect, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, the fourth general winning opening Winning of the game media is detected by the switch 9024D, and based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result, by calculating the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio, based on the winning to each winning opening You can judge the number of prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the winning combination (continuation ratio) and the winning ratio, and to perform the calculation with high accuracy.

Further, when a door opening required error occurs, it becomes necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. When the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the main substrate 9011 provided in the gaming machine frame 903 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 901 . Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 can be visually recognized by, for example, a player positioned outside the gaming machine 901 .

Here, in the gaming machine 901 described above, when a door opening required error occurs, the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio on the display monitor 9029 is restricted. Therefore, even if the door opening required error occurs and the display monitor 9029 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 901, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio).

Further, the limitation of the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) on the display monitor 9029 is executed when the door opening required error occurs. Therefore, even when the display monitor 9029 becomes visible to the player from outside the gaming machine 901 due to the need to open the gaming machine frame 903 due to the occurrence of the door opening required error, It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio (relationship ratio) from being seen.

In the gaming machine 901 described above, when the door opening required error occurs, the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio on the display monitor 9029 is limited. When the machine frame 903 is opened, the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) on the display monitor 9029 may be restricted. After the door opening required error occurs, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened and the restriction on the display of the role ratio (continued ratio) on the display monitor 9029 is executed, Ratio) It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio from being seen.

In addition, the restriction on the display of the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio on the display monitor 9029 is a predetermined time after the error requiring door opening is canceled, specifically, measured by the measurement timer after the error requiring opening the door is canceled. run until the specified duration has elapsed. Therefore, immediately after the door open required error is canceled, the game machine frame 903 is in the opened state even though the door open required error is cancelled. At this time, a player or the like can visually recognize the display monitor 9029 from outside the gaming machine 901 . In this regard, by continuing the restriction on the display of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) until the continuation time measured by the measurement timer has passed after the door opening required error is canceled, It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio (relationship ratio) from being seen.

Further, in the gaming machine 901 described above, the duration time is measured after the door opening required error is canceled, but after the door opening required error is canceled, the duration time after the gaming machine frame 903 is closed is calculated. may be measured. In this case, the duration time may be uniform regardless of the type of the door-opening error, or may be set according to the type of the door-opening error. Alternatively, the time may be shorter than the duration measured after the door opening required error is cancelled.

The above-mentioned door opening required error is an example, and other aspects may be adopted. For example, if the error canceling method is different, and error 1 to error 7 can be canceled without opening the gaming machine frame 903, these errors may be treated as errors other than the door opening required error. Conversely, if errors 8 to 13 are errors that cannot be cleared unless the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, these may be regarded as door opening required errors. Errors other than the errors shown in FIG. 98, such as an error in which a game ball cannot be fired from the ball shooting device, an error in which balls cannot be rented, an error in which the game board moves, etc., can be corrected by a procedure for releasing the door. It may be regarded as an error required. Also, even if it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 in order to cancel the error, the detection of the error is often detected outside the business hours of the gaming facility. In the case of errors that usually require repair outside of business hours, such as an error, a ROM check screen error, an electric chew or a big prize opening that does not open, you may treat it as an error other than the door opening required error.

In addition, in the gaming machine 901 described above, the aspect of the display restriction is to stop the display, but the display restriction may be in another aspect. For example, the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio may be made lighter or smaller, or a display different from the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 9029 . As a display different from the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio, an error display may be performed, or, for example, a display such as lighting all the segments may be used.

In the above game machine 901, the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 are provided on the back side of the game machine frame 903, so when the game machine frame 903 is opened Consecutive ratio) Although the display of the role ratio is limited, other modes may be adopted. For example, the main board 9011 may be provided on the surface of the game board 902 at a position where it cannot be seen from the outside of the game machine 901 by the glass door frame 903a when the glass door frame 903a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 9029 may also be provided on the surface of the game board 902 at a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 by the glass door frame 903a when the glass door frame 903a is closed. In the gaming machine of this aspect, instead of the aspect of restricting the display of the combination of roles (composition ratio) combination of roles when the frame 903 for the gaming machine is opened, the combination of combinations (composition ratio) is displayed when the glass door frame 903a is opened. Consecutive ratio) Display of the role ratio may be restricted. In addition, regarding the continuation of the restriction on the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio, instead of making the opening/closing of the game machine frame 903 a condition, the opening/closing of the glass door frame 903a may be made a condition. .

In addition, in the game machine 901, the CPU 90103 stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the use area program area in the built-in ROM area, and the combination (continuation ratio) role ratio display output program is stored in the non-use area program area. and a role ratio display program. In this way, by storing the special symbol display output program and the game control program, and the combined role (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program and the combined role (continuous ratio) role ratio display program in different areas, It is possible to make it easier to test programs related to games. Further, in the CPU 90103, the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 are shared and executed by one interrupt processing. Therefore, the digit output processing can be simplified.

Further, in making the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 common, the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 are continuously executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(A), in the first interrupt process, the special symbol display output program → consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program → game control program → consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio The programs are executed in the order of the calculation program. In addition, in the second interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the game control program → special symbol display output program → consecutive role (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program → consecutive role (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program I am running the program in order. For this reason, in both the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, between the special symbol display output program (first interrupt process) and the role combination (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program (second interrupt process) The game control program (game progress control process) and the role combination (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program (the role combination (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation process) are not interposed. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent delays in the digit output process 2, etc., the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, and the display monitor 9029 LED display defects can be eliminated. It is possible to prevent this, and to clearly display patterns, characters, and the like.

When digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common, the execution procedure of the first interrupt processing shown in FIG. 91(A) or the second interrupt processing shown in FIG. 91(B) is included. All you have to do is For example, any program may be executed before or after the execution order of the first interrupt process or the second interrupt process.

In addition, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, after executing the game control program, the combination (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program is executed. For this reason, before calculating the winning combination (continuous ratio) winning ratio, processing related to the main part of the game such as lottery for transition to the jackpot game state is executed. Therefore, game delay can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the combination of roles (continuation ratio) role ratio display output program is executed after the special symbol display output program is executed. In addition, after executing the special symbol display output program, before the consecutive role (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program is executed, specific programs such as the game control program and the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program is not running. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display defect of the LED on the display monitor 9029 .

Also, the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area are called using "CALLF" with a short tone. On the other hand, a call using "CALLmn" is made to the yaku (continued ratio) role ratio display output program and the yaku (continued ratio) role ratio calculation program stored in the non-use area, and the tone is changed. Calls with short "CALLF" are never made. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly progress the game.

Further, the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio displayed on the display monitor 9029 is determined by the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation process in the non-use area. The consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program and the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program are programs that are not related to the progress of the game. Since "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, is used for a program that is not related to the progress of the game, it is possible to reduce waste in program processing.

In addition, in the non-use area, a call is made by "CALLmn" with a relatively long tone, so in the used area, a call by "CALLF" with a short tone can be made. Therefore, it is possible to use a command with a short tone and high versatility such as "CALLF" for a program related to game control executed in the use area.

Further, the CPU 90103 has a Q register and calls a program by the Q register, so that the program can be called without designating an upper address. However, since the high-order address is set as a fixed value, for example, even if it can be used in the used area program area, it may not be used in the non-used area program area, and there is a possibility that versatility will be reduced.

In this regard, the upper address of the used area program area in the CPU 90103 is "00", the upper address of the unused area program area is "01", and the upper address of the unused area program area is the upper address of the used area program area. different from the address. Also, when calling a program stored in the used area program area, the Q register is set to a fixed value "00". Therefore, since the Q register can be used when calling the program stored in the use area program area, the program stored in the use area program area can be called simply by designating the lower address. In addition, since the upper address of the unused program area is different from the upper address of the used program area, the Q register is prevented from calling the program stored in the unused program area. When calling a program stored in the unused program area, the Q register is set to the fixed value "01". Therefore, since the Q register can be used even in the unused program area, it is possible to use the Q register even in the unused program area while securing the versatility of the Q register.

In the game machine 901 described above, the display monitor 9029 is arranged in the center of the back side of the main board 9011 in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it. may be placed. A plurality of examples will be specifically described below with respect to a mode in which the display monitor is arranged so as to be easily visible from an oblique direction (hereinafter referred to as a "display monitor arrangement mode").

The first display monitor arrangement mode is called the first display monitor arrangement mode, the second display monitor arrangement mode is called the second display monitor arrangement mode, and the nth display monitor arrangement mode is called the nth display monitor arrangement mode. A main substrate 9011 similar to the main substrate 9011 shown in FIG. 84(A) is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and all of the main substrates 9011 have the same structure. Moreover, the main board 9011 is housed in a board case 90202 as in the example shown in FIG. 84(A). Further, in the description of the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, left and right are based on the direction when the main substrate 9011 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame is the left side.

[Arrangement of the first display monitor]
FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 101, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129A is provided on the back side of the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130A is provided on the base member 90129A. The display monitor 90130A is housed in the board case 90202 together with the base member 90129A and the main board 9011. As shown in FIG.

The base member 90129A has a triangular prism shape with a right-angled triangular bottom surface, and is arranged such that its height direction extends along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side forming the right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle on the bottom surface of the triangular prism, which is the shape formed by the base member 90129A, is superimposed on the back surface of the main substrate 9011, and the other sides forming the right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle. A side surface of the triangular prism including one side extends in a direction perpendicular to the back surface of the main substrate 9011 . A side surface of the triangular prism including a side facing the right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle (hereinafter referred to as “inclined surface”) is arranged in an inclined direction with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011 .

The display monitor 90130A is provided on the inclined surface of the base member 90129A. The direction of the display monitor 90130A is inclined with respect to the back surface of the main board 9011 . FIG. 102 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is released from the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 102, when the gaming machine frame 903 to which the main board 9011 is attached is released from the outer frame 903A, the display monitor 90130A is positioned between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It is arranged so as to face the front when viewed from the open part.

When the game machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the game machine frame 903 and the outer frame. are placed in Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Second Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 103A is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 103A, in the second display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129B is provided on the back side of the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130B is provided on the base member 90129B. The display monitor 90130B is accommodated in the board case 90202 together with the base member 90129B and the main board 9011. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 83, the main board 9011 is attached to the back surface of the game board 902 (see FIG. 35) provided in the frame 903 for the game machine. The base member 90129B has a plate shape and stands on the back surface of the main board 9011 . Also, the main board 9011 and the base member 90129B are substantially perpendicular to each other. The display monitor 90130B is provided on the side surface of the base member 90129B. For this reason, the display monitor 90130B is arranged such that the surface of the upright portion of the main substrate 9011 provided in the game machine frame 903 on the open portion side of the door frame faces the open portion of the door frame. are placed. Also, the display monitor 90130B is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main board 9011 .

The display monitor 90130B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the back surface of the main substrate 9011 at a position protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 9011 . Also, the main substrate 9011 is attached to the back surface of the game board 902 provided in the game machine frame 903 . Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

In addition, in the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 90129A and 90129B are housed in the board case 90202. good.

[Third Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 103B is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 103(B), in the third display monitor arrangement mode, a buried inclined surface 9011K is formed on the rear surface of the main substrate 9011. As shown in FIG. The embedding inclined surface 9011K is formed to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011 .

The embedded inclined surface 9011K is formed as part of the printed base material of the main substrate 9011 . A display monitor 90130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 9011K of the main substrate 9011 . The display monitor 90130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 9011K, so that when the game machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the front is viewed from the opening portion between the game machine frame 903 and the outer frame. placed to face. Also, the main board 9011 and the display monitor 90130C are accommodated in the case 90202. As shown in FIG.

The display monitor 90130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame. are placed in Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Fourth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 104A is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129D from a first base member 90129D1 to a fourth base member 90129D4 are provided on the rear surface of the main board 9011. As shown in FIG. A first display monitor 90130D1 to a fourth display monitor 90130D4 are provided on each of these first base member 90129D1 to fourth base member 90129D4. A display monitor 90130D is formed by the first display monitor 90130D1 to the fourth display monitor 90130D4. The display monitor 90130D is accommodated in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011.

The first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 all have a common shape. This shape will be described using the first base member 90129D1. The first base member 90129D1 has a triangular prism shape with a right triangle bottom surface. The first base member 90129D1 has the same shape as the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode has a size equivalent to the size of the four 7-segments and the lower right dot (see FIG. 84(A)). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1 has a size equivalent to one 7-segment and the size of the lower right dot. A first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1 can display one 7-segment and the lower right dot.

The first base member 90129D1 is arranged on the back surface of the main substrate 9011 at a position slightly to the left of the substantially central position in the height direction. The second base member 90129D2 is arranged on the right side of the first base member 90129D1, and the third base member 90129D3 is arranged on the right side opposite to the left side of the second base member 90129D2 where the first base member 90129D1 is arranged. are placed in The fourth base member 90129D4 is arranged on the right side opposite to the left side of the third base member 90129D3 where the second base member 90129D2 is arranged. Thus, the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 are arranged side by side along the substantially horizontal direction.

A second display monitor 90130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 90129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 90130D3 and a fourth display monitor 90130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 90129D3 and the fourth base member 90129D4. Contents corresponding to the first display portion 9029A of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 84A are displayed on the first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the first base member 90129D1.

The content corresponding to the second display section 9029B of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 84A is displayed on the second display monitor 90130D2 provided on the second base member 90129D2. Contents corresponding to the third display portion 9029C of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 84A are displayed on the third display monitor 90130D3 provided on the third base member 90129D3. A fourth display monitor 90130D4 provided on the fourth base member 90129D4 displays the content corresponding to the fourth display section 9029D of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 84(A).

The display monitor 90130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame. are placed in Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Fifth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 104B is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 104(B), in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129E from a first base member 90129E1 to a fourth base member 90129E4 are provided on the rear surface of the main substrate 9011. As shown in FIG. A first display monitor 90130E1 to a fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on each of these first base member 90129E1 to fourth base member 90129E4. A display monitor 90130E is formed by the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4. The display monitor 90130E is accommodated in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011. As shown in FIG.

The first base member 90129E1 to fourth base member 90129E4 all have the same shape as the first base member 90129D1 to fourth base member 90129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. Further, the first display monitor 90130E1 to fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on the first base member 90129D1 to fourth base member 90129D4 in the same manner as the first display monitor 90130D1 to fourth display monitor 90130D4 provided on the first base member. 90129E1 to fourth base member 90129E4 are provided respectively.

The first base member 90129E1 is arranged above the substantially central position in the width direction of the rear surface of the main board 9011 . The second base member 90129E2 is arranged below the first base member 90129E1, and the third base member 90129E3 is arranged below the second base member 90129E2. The fourth base member 90129E4 is arranged below the third base member 90129E3. Thus, the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged side by side along the substantially vertical direction. Thus, the first to fourth base members 90129E1 to 90129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.

A first display monitor 90130E1 is provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 90129E1. Similarly, a second display monitor 90130E2, a third display monitor 90130E3, and a fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 90129E2, the third base member 90129E3, and the fourth base member 90129E4, respectively. there is The first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. The contents corresponding to 9029D are respectively displayed. Further, since the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged vertically, the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are also arranged vertically. Therefore, the 4-digit display on the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 may be arranged horizontally.

The display monitor 90130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame. are placed in Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Sixth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 105A is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 105(A), in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129F is provided on the upper surface of a substrate case 90202 that houses the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130F is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F. there is The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130F is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130F may be arranged horizontally.

The base member 90129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. A display monitor 90130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F has four 7-segments and a lower right dot (see FIG. 84(A)). The board case 90202 includes a board case main body 90202A and a lid body 90202B. The base member 90129F is provided in the board case 90202 across the board case main body 90202A and the lid body 90202B of the board case 90202 .

The display monitor 90130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged along the horizontal direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the whole can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903 . Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the game machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly opens it. confirmation work can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Seventh Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 105B is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 105B, in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129G is provided on the upper surface of a substrate case 90202 that houses the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130G is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129G. there is The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130G is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130G may be arranged horizontally. The base member 90129G is provided in the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A and the lid member 90202B of the substrate case 90202, like the base member 90129F of the sixth display monitor arrangement mode.

The base member 90129G has a triangular prism shape with a right triangle bottom surface, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901 . The right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle that forms the bottom of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side, which is opposite to the left side, which is the side on which the gaming machine frame 903 opens. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 90129G is an inclined surface that descends from the side (right side) opposite to the side (left side) on which the gaming machine frame 903 opens toward the side on which the gaming machine frame 903 opens. A display monitor 90130G is provided on this inclined surface.

The display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the board case 90202 and arranged along the horizontal direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the whole can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903 . Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the game machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly opens it. confirmation work can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

In addition, the upper surface of the base member 90129G provided with the display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode extends from the side opposite to the side where the game machine frame 903 opens toward the side where the game machine frame 903 opens. It is an inclined surface that descends Therefore, when the display monitor 90130G is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130G can be easily seen. Therefore, it is possible to more easily perform the work of confirming the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[8th Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 106A is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 106A, in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129H is provided on the left side of a board case 90202 that houses the main board 9011, and a display monitor 90130H is provided on the left side of the base member 90129H. It is The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130H is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130H may be arranged horizontally.

The base member 90129H has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. A display monitor 90130H provided on the left side of the base member 90129H has four 7-segments and a lower right dot (see FIG. 84(A)). The board case 90202 includes a board case main body 90202A and a lid body 90202B. The base member 90129H is provided in the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A and the lid member 90202B of the substrate case 90202 .

The display monitor 90130H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130H can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903 . Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the game machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly opens it. confirmation work can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Ninth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 106B, in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129I is provided on the right side of a substrate case 90202 that houses the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130I is provided on the right side of the base member 90129I. is provided. The base member 90129I is provided in the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A and the lid member 90202B of the substrate case 90202, like the base member 90129F of the sixth display monitor arrangement mode.

The base member 90129I has a triangular prism shape with a right-angled triangle bottom, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901 . The right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle forming the base of the triangular prism is located on the right side. For this reason, the left side surface of the base member 90129I is an inclined surface that leans to the right as it goes downward from above. A display monitor 90130I is provided on this inclined surface. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130I is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130I may be arranged horizontally.

The display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130I can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903 . Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the game machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly opens it. confirmation work can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

In addition, the left side surface of the base member 90129I on which the display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided is an inclined surface that leans toward the right side as the base member 90129I descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 90130I is viewed from the side on which the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130I can be easily seen. Therefore, it is possible to more easily perform the work of confirming the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

In addition, the display monitors 90130A to 90130I arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode all have an installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It may be provided in an adjusting means that is adjustable. The adjustment means includes, for example, a fixed portion fixed to the base members 90129A to 90129I or the embedded inclined surface 9011K, and a mounting portion movable with respect to the fixed portion. Either one should be installed. The adjusting means may be a manual type that can be operated by a store clerk or the like by opening the game machine frame 903, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjusting means. It's okay. Also, in the case of an electric type, it may be operated from an office or the like via a communication device or the like.

The range in which the mounting portion can move may be, for example, a range of movement associated with movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, or a range of movement associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Alternatively, the movement range may be a combination of the movement ranges associated with these movements. By providing the display monitors 90130A to 90130I in the adjustment means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the game machine frame 903 and the outer frame, the game machine 901 is installed. can be adjusted as desired.

Although the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode described above each show the arrangement of the display monitors, these arrangement modes may be combined. For example, by combining the eighth display monitor arrangement mode and the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the display monitors may be arranged across the upper surface and the left side surface of the board case 90202 .

[A game machine equipped with a vane-shaped variable winning ball device]
In the above example, a variable display game (special game) that performs variable display is executed, and when the display result of the variable display in the variable display game (special game) is a big hit, a so-called jackpot gaming state is controlled. The digipachi type gaming machine has been explained. On the other hand, it is also possible to use a so-called wing type game machine in which a game ball passes through a specific area (V area) provided inside an openable and closable vane-shaped variable winning ball device to control the jackpot game state. good. An example in which the present invention is applied to a wing type game machine will be described below. In the following, regarding the Hanemono type, differences from the gaming machine 901 will be mainly described, and common descriptions may be omitted.

FIG. 107 is a front view of a game machine provided with a vane-type variable winning ball device, and FIG. 108 is a front view of the variable winning ball device provided on the game board. As shown in FIG. 107, the pachinko game machine 90501 has a glass door frame 90502 shaped like a picture frame. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 90503 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 90502 . Below the hit ball supply tray 90503, there are a surplus ball receiver 90504 that stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 90503, and a speed at which the hit ball launcher shoots game balls (that is, the strength of the spring that repels the game balls). A batting operation handle (operation knob) 90505 for adjusting the depth) is provided.

The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball shot from the batted ball shooting device by rotating the operation knob 90505 . Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 90505 to the right, the speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device gradually increases, and when the speed exceeds a predetermined speed, the shot game ball passes through the ball hitting rail and enters the left area of the game area 90507 from above. When the operation knob 90505 is further rotated to the right, the shot game ball enters the right area of the game area 90507 from above. Therefore, by changing the amount of rotation while rotating the operation knob 90505 to the right, it is possible to adjust the force of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device, and to adjust the area in which the game ball is hit. .

A game board is detachably attached to the rear surface of the glass door frame 90502 . A game board is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes it and various parts attached to the plate-like body. A game area 90507 partitioned by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board.

Approximately in the center of the game area 90507, a vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520 is arranged. Below the vane-type variable winning ball device 90520, a variable winning ball device 90515 forming a first starting winning hole 90511, a second starting winning hole 90512, and a third starting winning hole 90513 is provided. Winning balls entering the first start winning opening 90511 are detected by the first starting opening switch 90511a, winning balls entering the second starting winning opening 90512 are detected by the second starting opening switch 90512a, respectively, on the back of the game board led to. Winning balls entering the third starting prize opening 90513, which is enabled to win by opening the variable winning ball device 90515, are detected by the third starting opening switch 90513a and guided to the back of the game board. The variable winning ball device 90515 is opened by a solenoid 90515a. Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning port 90511, the second start prize-winning port 90512, and the third start prize-winning port 90513 may be collectively referred to as "starting prize-winning port" or referred to as starting prize-winning ports 90511, 90512, and 90513. . Also, the first start switch 90511a, the second start switch 90512a, and the third start switch 90513a may be collectively referred to as "start switch" or expressed as start switch 90511a, 90512a, and 90513a. . A predetermined number of game balls, for example, 5 game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning the game balls in the start winning hole. The number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the starting prize winning opening may be common or may be different for each starting prize winning opening. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins in the first start prize winning port 90511 and the second start prize winning port 90512 is set to 5, and the number of prize balls when a game ball wins in the third start prize winning port 90513 The number of payouts may be two.

When the game ball enters the starting winning opening and is detected by the starting opening switch, the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By opening and closing control, the left open door 90576A on the left side moves leftward from the initial position, and the right open door 90576B moves rightward from the initial position, whereby the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened. , the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B return to their initial positions, so that the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 is closed. A state in which the vane-type variable winning ball device 90520 performs an opening operation in response to winning detection of the starting port switch is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520 may be referred to as an accessory. Various accessories are provided on the game board, and hereinafter, the term "accessories" refers to the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520. As shown in FIG.

Inside the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520, on the back side, there is provided an effect display device 90509 such as an LCD for effect display. The effect display device 90509 variably displays (variably displays) the effect pattern as identification information. In this embodiment, the effect display device 90509 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of "left", "middle", and "right".

A special symbol display 90508 for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information is provided on the right side of the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520 . The special symbol display 90508 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.

Above the special symbol display 90508, there is provided a special symbol start memory display 90518 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered into the start winning opening, that is, the number of starting memories. A special symbol starting memory display 90518 displays up to four starting memory numbers in the winning order. The special symbol start memory display 90518 increases the number of LEDs in the lighting state by 1 each time there is an effective start prize in the start prize openings 90511, 90512, and 90513. Then, every time the variable display is started on the special symbol display 90508, the number of LEDs in the lighting state is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start memory display 90518 shifts the lighting state every time the special symbol display 90508 starts variable display. As will be described later, the effect display device 90509 also displays the start memory number, so the special symbol start memory display 90518 may not be provided.

A normal symbol display 90510 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided on the left side of the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 . When the game ball passes through the gate 90532 provided on the right side of the game area 90507 and is detected by the gate switch 90532a, the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 90510 (in this example, the number display with the 7-segment LED). Variable display is started. In this embodiment, "7" is stop-displayed at the end of the variable display in the case of a hit, and other than "7" is stop-displayed in the case of a loss. In the case of winning, the variable winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined period of time. Incidentally, the winning probability of the normal symbol is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 90510, there is provided a normal symbol start memory display 90541 having four LED displays for displaying the number of passing balls that have passed through the gate 90532 . Each time the gate 90532 is passed, the normal symbol start memory display 90541 increases the lighting LED by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 90510 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one.

On the right side of the variable winning ball device 90515, there is provided a big winning opening in which the opening/closing plate 90516 is opened by the solenoid 90521 in the specific game state (jackpot game state). The opening/closing plate 90516 is a means for opening and closing the big winning opening. A winning ball that has entered the big winning hole is detected by a count switch 90523 . A predetermined number of game balls, for example, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning the game balls in the big winning opening.

At the left and right peripheries of the game area 90507, decorative lamps that blink during the game are provided, and at the bottom there is an out port 90526 for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.

Two speakers 90527 for emitting sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 90507 . A top frame lamp 90528a, a left frame lamp 90528b and a right frame lamp 90528c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 90507. Furthermore, decorative LEDs are installed around each structure (wing-shaped variable winning ball device 90520, etc.) in the game area 90507 . The top frame lamp 90528a, the left frame lamp 90528b, the right frame lamp 90528c, and the decorative LED are examples of decorative light emitters provided in the game machine.

The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 90507 through the hitting rail, and then drops in the game area 90507 . When the batted ball enters the starting winning opening and is detected by the starting opening switch, if the variable display of the design can be started, the special design starts to be variably displayed in the special design display device 90508, and the performance design in the performance display device 90509. starts variable display. If it is not possible to start the variable display of symbols, and if the number of starting prize winning memories, which is the reserved memory of the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol display device 90508, is not the upper limit number, the number of starting winning prize memories is increased by one. That is, the lighting LED in the special symbol start memory display 90518 is increased by one.

The variable display of the special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 90508 is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. When the special symbol at the time of stop is a jackpot symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, "3", "7"), the first jackpot game state of the jackpot game state (without going through the starting operation state It shifts to the jackpot game state to be started). Also, in the case of a small winning pattern (specifically, "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", "9"), it shifts to the starting operation state. do. In the starting operation state, when the game ball enters the special area provided inside the vane-type variable winning ball device 90520, the second jackpot game state (the jackpot game state started after passing through the starting operation state) is shifted to. . It should be noted that the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state is the normal state. In addition, after the jackpot game state is completed, it shifts to a normal state or a time-saving state (a state in which the variable winning ball device 90515 is easily opened by shortening the average fluctuation time of special symbols and performance symbols). do. The time saving state can be continued until the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, and when the conditions for transition to the big hit game state are satisfied before the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened 100 times. , the game state shifts from the time saving state to the jackpot game state. In addition, when the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened 100 times without satisfying the transition condition to the jackpot game state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 34, the gate 90532 is provided on the right side of the game area 90507 in this embodiment. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time-saving state is controlled, in order to pass the game ball through the gate 90532, it is better to shoot the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area 90507 (so-called right hitting). be advantageous. Also, as shown in FIG. 34, in this embodiment, the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 90507 . Therefore, in this embodiment, during the big win game, the game ball is shot (so-called right hit) aiming at the right side of the game area in order to make the game ball enter the big winning opening. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if it is neither a time saving state nor a big hit game (if it is a normal state), the game ball is shot aiming at the left side of the game area 90507 (so-called left hitting).

A left gate 90517 is provided to the left of the game area 90507, and a game ball passing through the left gate 90517 is detected by a left gate switch 90517a. A right gate 90519 is provided on the right side of the game area 90507, and a game ball passing through the right gate 90519 is detected by a right gate switch 90519a.

In this embodiment, when a transition of a predetermined game state is performed, control is performed to shift the game state based on the game ball passing through the left gate 90517 or the right gate 90519 . Specifically, in this embodiment, when the big win pattern is derived and displayed, or when the game ball wins in the specific winning hole 90566 in the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520, the big win game is immediately started. Instead, a big hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the gate. In addition, in this embodiment, since the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 90507 (during the big hit game, the game ball is hit to the right), the game ball passes through the right gate 90519. A game is started. In addition, the big hit game is not started based on the game ball passing through the left gate 90517 or the right gate 90519, but when the big hit pattern is derived and displayed, or when the specific winning ball in the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 A big win game may be started immediately when a game ball enters the mouth 90566, or a big win game may be started after a predetermined time has passed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the big hit game is finished, the game ball passes through the left gate 90517 or the right gate 90519, and the state is shifted to a state in which a new variable display can be started. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the left gate 90517 when it is controlled to the normal state after the jackpot game ends because it is hit to the left in the normal state and to the right in the time saving state. Based on this, the state is shifted to a state in which a new variation display can be started, and when the state is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the big hit game, the state is shifted to the time-saving state based on the game ball passing through the right gate 90519, and a new variation is performed. Transition to a state in which display can be started. It should be noted that it is not shifted to a state in which a new variation display can be started based on the game ball passing through the left gate 90517 or the right gate 90519, but when the big hit game is finished or when the big hit game is finished. The state may be changed to a state in which a new variable display can be started, for example, when a predetermined time has passed since.

Next, the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 will be described. When the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are opened by driving the open/close motor 90575, the vane type variable winning ball device (accessory) 90520 becomes ready for game balls to enter. A game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 passes through a passage or the like and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 90520 . In addition, in FIG. 108, a state in which the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 90520 (difficult to enter) is shown by solid lines. A state in which 90576B is open and the game ball can enter (easy to enter) the accessory 90520 is indicated by a phantom line.

A left movable member 90577 and a right movable member 90578 are provided on both left and right sides of the accessory 90520, respectively. The portion that moves in the left movable member 90577 is the left movable portion 90577A, and the portion that moves in the right movable member 90578 is the right movable portion 90578A. The left movable portion 90577A is driven by the left movable portion drive solenoid 90577B, and the right movable portion 90578A is driven by the right movable portion drive solenoid 90578B. The left movable portion 90577A and the right movable portion 90578A each move vertically.

At the lowest part of the accessory 90520, a specific winning opening 90566 forming a specific area is provided. In addition, an outlet is provided behind the position where the specific winning opening 90566 is provided in the accessory 90520, and inside the accessory 90520, there is a passage for distributing game balls to the specific winning opening 90566 or the outlet. is provided. A specific area switch 90566A is provided in the specific winning opening 90566, and a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 90566 is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, and a game ball that has entered the outlier is detected by the outlier area switch. be done. A predetermined number of game balls, for example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning the game balls in the specific winning hole 90566 and the outlier. It should be noted that the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game balls in the specific winning opening 90566 and the outlier may be the same or may be different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the specific winning hole 90566 may be 10, and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in a winning hole may be 3. Further, when a game ball enters the exit, no prize ball is paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

On the condition that the game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 wins the specific winning opening 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, it is possible to shift to the second jackpot game state. In addition, when the game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 wins the exit, it is not possible to shift to the second big winning game state.

An example of how a game progresses in this gaming machine 90501 will be described. In the gaming machine 90501, when a game ball wins in any of the first start prize winning port 90511, the second start prize winning port 90512, and the third start prize winning port 90513 in the normal state, it is either a big hit, a small win, or a loss. A lottery (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "big hit lottery") that determines the is executed. As a result of the jackpot lottery, it is determined to be a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbols and the effect symbols is started, and the special symbol display device 90508 stops and displays the symbols according to the result of the jackpot lottery.

When the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, after stopping and displaying the pattern (symbol corresponding to the jackpot) on the special pattern display 90508, the game state changes from the normal state to the jackpot game state (first jackpot game state). In the jackpot game state, the opening/closing control of the big winning opening by the opening/closing plate 90516 is performed 16 times (16 rounds, opening permissible time of 1 round is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds, 7 rounds or 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. Incidentally, when the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the accessory 90520 is not controlled to be open. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the accessory 90520 may be controlled to be open.

When the result of the big win lottery is determined to be a small win, after the special pattern display device 90508 stops and displays the pattern (symbol corresponding to the small win), the accessory 90520 is controlled to be in an open state. A start-up operation is initiated. In the starting operation state, the accessory 90520 is in the open state for 0.9 seconds. The number of times to be in the open state (number of times of opening) is one time, two times or three times. In the starting operation state, when the game ball wins the accessory 90520, furthermore, the game ball wins the specific prize winning port 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, V winning occurs. When V winning occurs, the game state is shifted to a big win game state (second big win game state). When the game ball enters the hole and V winning does not occur, the second jackpot game state is not entered. That is, it becomes disengaged and maintains its normal state.

When the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a loss, after stopping and displaying the symbol (symbol corresponding to the loss) on the special symbol display device 90508, the accessory 90520 cannot be controlled to the open state. do not have. In this case, the game state does not shift to the jackpot game state, and the normal state is maintained.

Incidentally, the jackpot includes a non-time-saving jackpot and a time-saving jackpot. In either case, when the variation of the special symbols is completed, the state of the 16-round big win game (first big win game state) is directly entered without going through the starting operation state, but in the case of the time-saving big win, the big win game ends. Later, the game state shifts to the time saving state (on the other hand, in the case of the non-time saving jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is the normal state).

There are three types of small hits, that is, first to third small hits. The first small win is a small win in which the accessory 90520 opens once in the starting operation state, the second small win is a small win in which the accessory 90520 opens twice, and the third small win is a small win in which the accessory 90520 opens twice. 90520 is a small hit that opens three times. Also, in the case of losing, the accessory 90520 does not perform the opening action.

In addition, when the accessory 90520 performs the opening action in the first small win or the second small win, the second big win when V wins becomes a non-time-saving big win, and after the second big win game state is completed, the normal transition to state. In addition, the second big win in the case of winning V when the accessory 90520 performs the opening action in the third small win becomes a time-saving big win, and after the second big win game state is completed, the state shifts to the time-saving state.

The game machine 90501 is provided with a main board and a display monitor similar to the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided in the game machine 901. The ratio is calculated and the calculated role ratio is displayed on the display monitor. The display monitor is arranged in front of the main board when viewing the main board so as not to hinder visibility. This point is the same as the game machine 901 described above. Further, the procedure for calculating the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio, the displaying procedure, and the like are the same as those of the gaming machine 901 described above.

The winning combination (continuation ratio) and the winning ratio in the gaming machine 90501 can be obtained by the above formulas (1) and (2). The number of winning prize balls in the gaming machine 90501 is determined by the winning of game balls in the variable winning ball device 90515, the specific winning port 90566 and the out-going port in the vane-type variable winning ball device 90520, and the large winning port provided with the opening/closing plate 90516. Refers to the total number of game balls to be paid out.

In addition, when the first jackpot game state is being executed, the number of consecutive winning prize balls in the gaming machine 90501 is the number of game balls paid out by winning the game balls to the big winning opening provided with the opening/closing plate 90516. refers to the total number. In addition, when the second jackpot game state is executed, the number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball to a big winning opening having an opening/closing plate 90516 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "big winning opening winning") It may be the total number, and the game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening and the specific winning opening 90566 and the missing It may be the total number of game balls paid out due to the winning of game balls in the mouth (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "momentary winning").

The "at the time of the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big winning game state" in the opportunity winning may be the time of opening the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520 at which the V winning has occurred, or the V winning has occurred. It may include a series of opening due to winning the start winning opening that triggered the opening of the vane type variable winning ball device. For example, when the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened by winning the game ball to the third start winning port 90513 whose number of opening times of the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 is 3 times, and there is V winning at the time of opening The opportunity winning may be the winning of a game ball for the specific winning hole 90566 of the vane-type variable winning ball device 90520 and the outboard at the time of opening three times.

In addition, when the number of continuous prize winning balls is the total number of game balls paid out by the big winning opening prize and the opportunity winning prize, the winning to the specific winning opening 90566 of the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 and the off-going opening will be the opportunity winning. Whether or not depends on whether or not the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big win gaming state occurs. For this reason, the total number of game balls paid out by winning the specific winning hole 90566 of the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 and the winning hole (hereinafter referred to as "temporary storage opportunity winning prize ball number") is temporarily stored, and the second jackpot game is played. When the V winning that triggered the transition to the state occurs, the number of temporarily stored opportunity winning prize balls may be added to the number of continuous accessory winning prize balls as the total number of game balls paid out by the opportunity winning. good. The timing of adding the temporary memory opportunity winning prize balls to the number of consecutive prize winning balls may be an appropriate timing. For example, it may be the timing to shift to the second jackpot game state and count the number of game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening, or to count the number of winning balls paid out by winning the big winning opening. When starting, the timing may be just before displaying the combination (run ratio) on the display monitor 9029 during or after counting the number of game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening.

After storing the temporarily stored opportunity winning prize balls, the temporarily stored opportunity winning prize balls may be erased when the V prize that triggered the shift to the second big winning game state does not occur. When the game ball wins in the specific winning hole 90566, since the V winning that triggered the transition to the second jackpot game state has occurred, the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 is substantially removed. The total number of game balls to be paid out by winning a prize to the mouth may be temporarily stored. The judgment that the V winning that triggered the transition to the second jackpot game state does not occur is, for example, that the V winning has not occurred after a predetermined time has passed since the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520 was opened. can do.

In addition, as the role series (continuous ratio) and the role ratio displayed on the display monitor, the short-term role series (continuous ratio), the short-term role ratio, the cumulative role series (continuous ratio), the cumulative role ratio, as in the gaming machine 901 described above. and so on. Also, the display monitor may be attached to the main board in the same manner as the gaming machine 901 described above. Further, as the layout of the display monitor, various layouts described in connection with the gaming machine 901 may be used.

The gaming machine 90501 described above is a gaming machine provided with a vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520 . In a gaming machine equipped with such a vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520, the main board displays the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio. Also, the display monitor is provided on the main board that controls the game so as not to hinder visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and windmills provided on the game board.

In addition, in the gaming machine 90501 equipped with the vane-type variable winning ball device 90520, the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated in a manner different from that of the gaming machine 901 . Even in the gaming machine 90501 equipped with such a vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520, the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio can be calculated and displayed on the display monitor attached to the main board.

In addition, in the game machine 90501, the variable winning ball device 90515 is used as the third starting winning port 90513 among the starting winning ports for opening and closing the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 90520. Only those without variable winning ball devices such as the opening 90511 and the second starting winning opening 90512 may be used. Also, the starting winning hole may be only a variable winning ball device such as the third starting winning hole 90513 .

In addition, the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the third starting prize winning port 90513 is added to the number of winning prize balls used for calculating the role ratio, but the first start winning prize port 90511 and the second The number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the start prize winning port 90512 is not added to the number of winning prize balls and the number of continuous winning prize balls.

In addition, in the gaming machine 90501, when a game ball enters the starting winning hole, a big winning lottery is executed. It may be a mode in which an operation is performed. Also, instead of the big win lottery, a lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 90520 is opened may be performed, or both the big winning lottery and the lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 90520 is opened may be performed. . In addition, in the lottery for the number of times of opening, the number of times such as 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, etc. may be drawn, and 0 times may be included in the target of the number of times of opening.

In addition, the game machine 90501 is set with a jackpot game state (a first jackpot game state and a second jackpot game state), and the game machine 90501 includes a large winning ball device 90520 with a variable vane type and an opening/closing plate 90516. A prize opening is provided. On the other hand, a mode may be adopted in which a big win game state is set and only the vane-type variable winning ball device is provided without providing the big winning hole. In this case, in the jackpot game state, the vane-type variable winning ball device may perform opening/closing operation or open operation for a certain period of time.

Further, in a mode in which only the vane-type variable winning ball device is provided, V winning may be set as a continuation condition of the jackpot game state. For example, when shifting to the jackpot game state, the maximum continuation round may be set so that the continuation of the next round may be determined when there is a V win during one round.

(Modified example regarding display control and display items of winning number information)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, items related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 9041A and 9041B, a passing gate designation command that specifies which gate the game ball has passed is transmitted from the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) to the production control board 9012 (production control CPU 90120), the effect control CPU 90120 can count the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B and display it in the first area α.

For example, by the same method as the counting process when receiving a general winning mouth designation command that specifies which one of the 1st to 4th general winning mouths has been won, the number of gate passages for today (equivalent to A1), today's Gate passage ratio (equivalent to A2), number of gate passages in low base state (equivalent to B1), gate passage ratio in low base state (equivalent to B2), number of gate passages in high base state (equivalent to C1), high base The gate passage ratio of the state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages during the set period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passage ratio during the set period (corresponding to D2) can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. . Also, these items can be aggregated for each gate (for each of the gates 9041A and 9041B) and displayed in the first area α.

(2) In addition, since the effect control CPU 90120 receives a large winning opening winning command from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to count the number of winnings to the large winning opening, Based on this, the number of awarded balls can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

For example, by the same method as the tally processing when receiving a general winning mouth designation command specifying which one of the first to fourth general winning mouths has been won, the number of prizes won in today's big winning mouth (to A1 equivalent)”, “Ratio of prizes to today’s big prizes (equivalent to A2)”, “Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings to today’s big prizes (equivalent to A3)”, “Today’s total The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the number of prize balls won in the big prize hole today (equivalent to A4), "the number of prizes won in the big prize hole during the set period (equivalent to D1)" , "ratio of winning prizes to large winning openings during set period (equivalent to D2)", "number of prize balls awarded based on winning to large winning openings during set period (equivalent to D3)", and "during set period The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning in the big prize hole during the set period to the number of given prize balls (equivalent to D4)" can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. be.

Here, ``the ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the big prize hole today to the total number of prize balls of the day (equivalent to A4)'', ``the number of prize balls given during the set period When the ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the big prize hole in the set period for the number (equivalent to D4) is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), that effect is notified. You can make it work. For example, in the first area α, it is possible to display a message saying "The percentage of prize balls for big prizes exceeds the reference value (60%)."

In addition, the total number of prize balls is controlled by the special variable prize ball device 907 and the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second start prize mouth controlled by the normal variable prize ball device 906B. When the ratio of the total number of prize balls given based on the winning to the big prize opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), it may be notified to that effect. For example, in the first area α, a message such as "Ratio of prize balls exceeds the reference value (70%)" may be displayed.

(3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side, the effect control CPU 90120 receives each command from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each entry area. Although an example of tallying the number of entry of game balls into each entry area was described based on totaling the number of entry of the game ball, or based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each entry area, the production control CPU 90120 Enters the game ball into each entry area It is also possible to aggregate the numbers.

It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 90100 on the side of the main board 9011 or the number of game balls entered into each entry area counted in the performance control CPU90120 (counter value corresponding to each switch) is sent to the performance control CPU90120 and can be displayed on the image display device 905 . For example, by outputting a command specifying the number of entries to each entry area counted from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012, in the effect control CPU90120, to each entry area based on the command It is possible to specify the number of entries and display it in the first area α.

In addition, the number of entries into each entry area counted on the game control microcomputer 90100 side is displayed on the main substrate 9011, such as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. It is also possible to display the In addition, when the ratio of the number of winning times to the general winning opening to the number of winning times to the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, By performing a specific display different from the display result of the variable display of the special symbol, it may be notified to that effect. In addition, as the display device provided on the main board 9011 on which the aggregated results are displayed, not only the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, etc., but also the aggregated results are displayed. A display device provided exclusively for the display may be used. Also, the display device may be in any form such as a lamp, LED, 7-segment, liquid crystal display, EL panel, or light guide plate.

The value of each counter stored in the RAM 90102 (the number of entries into each entry area) is, for example, the game state flag stored in the RAM 90102. When a reset operation for resetting the game parlor side (for example, a clerk) is performed for resetting the flag corresponding to the game state for doing so, it is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 and displayed on the image display device 905 for a certain period of time. A reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 9011 . The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the game board 902, and uses the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 903 to rotate the game board 902 forward with respect to the game machine frame 903. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back side of the game board 902 can be operated.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the counting period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α. A totaling period is set in the gaming machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or set by an operation on the gaming hall side), and the number of prizes won during the set totaling period Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings to the general winning openings per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (eg, 60 times/60 minutes). In this case, the fact may be notified.

(5) In addition, when no prize is won in a specific prize winning slot for a predetermined period of time, the first area α may be notified of the fact. For example, if the number of winnings to the general winning slots has not occurred for 10 minutes, the message "No general winnings for 10 minutes" may be displayed in the first area α. This predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game arcade side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), or an operation by the player (for example, an operation using the operation button 9030). may be settable by

(6) It should be noted that the above-described embodiment can be applied to a game machine equipped with a sorting device in which the winning ratio between the starting winning opening and the general winning opening becomes a specific ratio (for example, 1:1). , information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings to each winning slot can be displayed in the first area α. For example, the gaming machine disclosed in JP 2014-117434 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, but such shaking By providing a sorting device, it is also possible to alternately sort the game balls received by the sorting device into the starting prize winning opening and the general winning prize opening. The above-described embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine in which the distribution device alternately distributes game balls to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening, and the winning number information related to the winning number to each winning opening is sent to the first winning opening. It can be displayed in area α. However, since the number of wins to the general prize gate is naturally determined according to the number of wins to the start prize gate, the ratio of the number of wins to the general prize gate to the number of wins to the start prize gate is displayed as shown above. you don't have to.

(7) In FIG. 79, the counting period can be set according to the player's operation, but the winning number information is reset according to the player's operation, and counting of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You can do it. For example, when the player performs an operation to start tallying, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and then the effect control CPU 90120 issues a general winnings opening designation command. The number of winnings to the general winnings opening displayed in the first area α may be incremented by one each time it is received.

In addition, it is also possible to change the tabulation period once set according to the player's operation before the set period elapses. For example, although the tallying period is initially set to 30 minutes, the player may reset the tallying period to 10 minutes before the set period elapses in order to know the tallying result quickly. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation results for a longer period, the player resets the period before the set period elapses to extend the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Also good. In addition, it may be possible to extend the set total period according to the player's operation after the set period has elapsed. For example, after the set totaling period of 10 minutes has passed and the totaling results for the 10 minutes have been displayed, the player performs an extension operation in order to grasp the totaling results for a longer totaling period. The counting period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both the counting result for 10 minutes and the counting result for 60 minutes including the 10 minutes are obtained).

(8) In addition, in the demo screen displayed on the image display device 905, or in the first area α in the state where the game is being played (the state where the game end determination is not made and the demo screen is not displayed) , an image explaining which of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening each winning opening provided on the game board surface is displayed. Also, the number of prize balls in each winning hole may be notified.

(9) In the above embodiment, the game hall settings are prioritized over the player settings, but conversely, the player settings may be prioritized over the game hall settings. That is, the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 9030 is pressed while an icon including the word "display" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. (The display control shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 is executed.) When the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the characters "not displayed" selected on the selection screen shown in FIG. It may be set so that it is not displayed on the device 905 (the display control in FIG. 77 is executed).

It is also possible to determine whether or not to display the winning number information according to the order of the received setting operations, with the same priority given to the game hall setting and the player setting. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information with priority given to the last accepted setting operation (latest setting operation). For example, even when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 38(1) to (3). If set, information on the number of prizes won is displayed (the display control of FIGS. 75 and 76 is executed). 38 (1) to (3), even if the player setting screens (1) to (3) in FIG. If so, the winning number information is displayed (the display control of FIGS. 75 and 76 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the player setting screens shown in FIGS. , the winning number information is not displayed (the display control in FIG. 77 is executed). 38 (1) to (3), even if it is set to display the winning number information, after that, the operating portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position). ), the winning number information is not displayed (the display control in FIG. 77 is executed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the display changeover switch 9032 is operated by the game arcade clerk to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 . By operating , it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 . While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, the player cannot set whether to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, FIG. 38 (1) to It is also possible to omit the setting screen on the player side as shown in (3). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 only on the gaming arcade side.

Conversely, by operating the operation button 9030, the player (and the store clerk of the game hall) can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905. It is also possible that only the player side does not provide means for setting whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided). In the case of such a configuration, it is possible for the player and the game parlor staff to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). . In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a setting operation common to the player and the game arcade.

(10) Winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described in FIG. is displayed on the display position (second position) only in the maintenance mode, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 9031 is set to the non-display position (first position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 905 . That is, it may be handled in the same way as the information in the prize number management table shown in FIG. 36(a).

In this way, winning number information related to the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. It may be information that can be displayed on the image display device 905 only when the game is played, and that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state in which a player can play a game (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed), a state in which the game end determination is not performed (a state in which a special game is being executed, a normal game, etc.) is being executed and a jackpot game state), the information is not displayed on the image display device 905, and the demo screen is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the start of power supply to the gaming machine. (before power supply to the game machine), or it may be possible to display only for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when an operation is performed to stop the power supply to the gaming machine. good.

(11) In addition, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) explained in FIG. It may be possible to display on the image display device 905 also in the mode of . In the case of such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only the first area α The winning number information may be displayed. In other words, the display area of the winning number information may be made different between the period in which no game is played and the period in which the game may be played.

In addition, in the maintenance mode, the information on the number of winnings for all items that have been aggregated is displayed, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the game center side or by the player's operation, or Winning number information of a predetermined main item) may be displayed. In other words, the items of winning number information to be displayed may differ between the period in which no game is played and the period in which the game may be played.

(12) In addition, in the game mode, while the demo screen is displayed due to the determination of the end of the game, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β. On the other hand, it is also possible to display the winning number information only in the first area α during a period in which the game end determination is not performed and the game is determined to be in progress. In other words, the display area of the win number information may be made different between the period during which it is determined that no game is being played and the period during which it is determined that the game is being played.

In addition, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the determination of the end of the game, the information on the number of winnings for all items that have been aggregated is displayed. During the period when it is determined to be medium, the win number information of some items (items set by the operation of the game arcade or the player, or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the items of winning number information to be displayed may differ between the period during which it is determined that no game is being played and the period during which it is determined that the game is being played.

(13) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (image size) of specific images (error message, fourth pattern, decorative pattern, and pending information) are set to display winning number information ( 75 and 76) and the setting of not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 77) are not changed (shared), while other images (background images) are set to display the winning number information and winning numbers. The visible range is set to be different between the setting of not displaying the information and the setting of displaying the winning number information (FIG. 80(a)), as shown in FIG. The display position and display range (image size) of all images other than the winning number information, including the background image, may be made common by setting the winning number information not to be displayed (FIG. 80(b)). . As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load due to the display/non-display setting of the number-of-winnings information.

(14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (size of the image) of the decorative pattern are set to display winning number information (FIGS. 75 and 76) or not to display winning number information (FIG. 77). ), but the display position and display range of the decoration pattern may be changed according to the display/non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 81, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 81(a)), the setting for not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 81 ( In b)), the intervals between the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R may be widened. In other words, when the winning number information is not displayed, the decorative symbols may be variably displayed using the entire screen. In this example, the decoration symbol display area 905L for not displaying the number-of-wins information is included in the first area α. In this way, when the number-of-wins information is not to be displayed, the decorative symbols in the first area α may be displayed in a variable or stationary manner. In this way, the entire screen may be used to perform the effect, thereby increasing interest.

(15) In the above embodiment, the game machine errors include magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, and radio wave anomaly. (abnormal prize balls, etc.), fraudulent prize winning abnormality in the big winning opening (abnormality in which winning to the big winning opening is detected even though the big winning opening is not open), or malfunction of various parts of the pachinko machine 901 etc.

[Other Modifications]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. It should be noted that the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above presentation modes may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above presentation modes and the following modified examples may be combined. You may make it combine the control and structure of the said game machine arbitrarily.

In the above-described embodiment, game balls that do not pass through the gate 9041B are displaced from the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the members that define the flowing direction of the game ball. It shall be possible to win any prize. With such a configuration, even if the game ball does not pass through the gate 9041B in the variable probability state or the time saving state, it can be expected to win a prize in a general prize winning port provided downstream of the gate 9041B. Decrease can be suppressed. Also, game balls that do not pass through the gate 9041B may win either the third general prize-winning port 9050C or the fourth general prize-winning port 9050D at a higher rate than the game balls that pass through the gate 9041B. . With such a configuration, even when the frequency of the game ball passing through the gate 9041B is low in the variable probability state or the time saving state, it can be expected to win a prize in a general prize winning port provided downstream. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Furthermore, by executing a specific effect based on winning a prize in a general winning slot, the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the above embodiment, executing a specific effect at a different rate depending on the game state includes executing the specific effect only in a certain game state and not executing the specific effect in other game states. . Further, in the above-described embodiment, the execution of the specific effect at different ratios depending on the game period may be executed only during a certain game period, and may not be executed during other game periods. included.

In the above-described embodiment, in order to execute the production at a higher rate in the first state than in the second state different from the first state, the production can be executed only in the first state. , which also includes not executing the effect in the second state. Here, the division between the first state and the second state is, in addition to the division according to the game state described above, the division according to the number of reserved memories, the division according to the execution period of the special game (special game classification of whether or not variable display is being executed), classification according to the type of variation pattern (for example, classification of whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect, or , classification whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect), classification according to a specific performance timing (for example, before the reach state is established in the variation pattern with the ready-to-win effect or after establishment, or before or after execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect).

In the first to twelfth presentation modes, the specific presentation may be executed only in either one of (1) normal state and (2) probability variable state or time saving state. For example, (1) only in the normal state, the specific effect can be executed, and (2) in the variable probability state or the time saving state, the specific effect may not be executed. In addition, in the 13th to 24th production forms, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, and (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, either A specific effect may be executed only in one case. For example, (1) Only in the period after reach state establishment in reach fluctuation, specific effect can be executed, (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or in the period before reach state establishment in reach fluctuation, specific It is also possible not to execute the production.

In the first production form to the 12th production form, the gaming state is (1) normal state, or (2) depending on whether it is a variable probability state or a short time state, the execution ratio of the specific production, and the execution Although the type of the specific effect is different, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state, based on the effect execution conditions common to when the game state is the normal state, whether or not the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect to be executed The type may be determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the specific performance and the type of the specific performance to be executed may be determined based on the performance execution condition common to the variable probability state or the time saving state. . In addition, the classification of the game state is not limited to (1) normal state, (2) probability variable state or time saving state, for example, (1) high base state, (2) The classification may be whether it is in the high base state, or the classification may be whether it is in (1) the big winning game state or (2) it is not in the big winning game state.

In the thirteenth production form to the twenty-fourth production form, the game period is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, or (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation Depending on whether it is a period, whether or not to execute a specific effect and the type of specific effect to be executed are determined. is 1 or less; (2) The classification may be whether or not it is a period during which the variable display of decorative symbols is not executed.

Also, (1) a period during which variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed, or (2) a period during which variable display (reach variation) with reach effect is executed, It may be a division. Also, it may be divided into (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effect is performed, or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effect is performed. . Furthermore, whether it is (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect good.

In the first to fourth production forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth production forms, only one of the specific production A and the specific production B can be executed as the specific production, but both the specific production A and the specific production B may be executable. That is, when the winning condition is met, one of the variable result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect that meets the predetermined condition is executed (for example, if the number of pending memories is 1 or less, the variable result notice effect is executed. However, if the number of pending memories is 2 or more, the pre-reading announcement effect is executed), or both of them may be executed at the same time. For example, if the pre-reading announcement effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the display information (display part) corresponding to the pending memory, the above-mentioned variable result announcement effect (only voice effect, or voice effect and character effect) The look-ahead foretelling effect can be executed at the same time, and the player can grasp that both the variable result foretelling effect and the look-ahead foretelling effect are executed. Also, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display or the determination result at the time of start winning. For example, if the display result of the variable display that is executed when the winning condition is met is a big hit pattern, the variable result notice effect is preferentially executed, and the display result of the variable display that is executed when the winning condition is met. If there is a reserved memory that is determined to be a big hit in the determination at the time of start winning although it is a missing symbol, it is preferable to preferentially execute the look-ahead notice effect.

In the above-described embodiment, it is set whether or not to display the number of winnings by the operation button 9030 only during the period determined by the effect control CPU 90120 to be in a non-gaming state (only when the demo screen is displayed). Although a possible example has been described, this is not limited to such a form, regardless of the game state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot game state), and the execution status of the special symbol game (special symbol Whether or not the variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the special game), the execution status of the general pattern game (whether the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the general pattern game ), the operation button 9030 may be used to set whether or not to display the number of winnings. That is, even during a period during which a game is played, for example, during a period during which variable display of decorative symbols is executed or during a period during which a jackpot game state is controlled, the operation button 9030 can be used to determine whether or not to display the number of winnings. It may be settable. In such a configuration, when it is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, regardless of the game state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot game state), Game execution status (whether or not variable display of special symbols is being executed, number of pending memories of special game), execution status of general-purpose game (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, The total number of wins on the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of pending memories of the general-purpose game.

In the above-described embodiment, there is no limitation on the period during which the display changeover switch 9032 can be operated. , It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings. It is also possible to limit the period during which the setting operation is possible on the game arcade side without being limited to such a form. For example, as a configuration without the display changeover switch 9032, when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the game hall side, the setting screen shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (3) It is assumed that the operation buttons 9030 are used for selection and determination. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot game state), or the execution status of the special symbol game (whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed) , The number of reserved memories of the special game) and the execution status of the normal game (whether variable display of normal patterns is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal game), Figure 38 (1) ~ The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period during which the jackpot game state is controlled, the period during which the variable probability state or the time saving state is controlled, the period during which the special game is executed, the period when the reserved memory number of the special game is not 0, etc. The setting screens shown in 38(1) to 38(3) may not be displayed, and the setting operations on the game arcade side may be prohibited.

In the above embodiment, by switching the display changeover switch 9032 that cannot be operated by the player, only when the game hall side is set to display the number of winnings to the general winnings (setting the operation unit to the second position) , a setting screen (FIGS. 38(1) to 38(3)) is displayed to enable the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winnings slot. Regardless of the form, both the player side and the game hall side can set whether or not to display the number of prizes won in the general winning slot as a configuration without the display switching switch 9032 that can be operated only by the game hall side. Common setting screen (similar to FIGS. 38(1) to 38(3)) for selecting and determining whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings by operating the operation button 9030 screen) may be displayed. In the configuration for displaying such a common setting screen, even if the game hall clerk sets the display of the number of winnings to the general winnings not to be displayed, after that, the player can set the number of winnings to the general winnings. If it is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the received setting later.

Also, by switching the display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only on the game hall side, the number of winnings to the general winnings is displayed (setting the operation unit to the second position), and by operating the operation button 9030 The image display device 905 displays common information (for example, the number of wins to each general prize hole and the total number of wins stored in the display control table) when the setting is made to display the number of wins to the prize holes. You can let them do it. In such a configuration, even if it is set not to display the common information by switching the display changeover switch 9032, if the common information is set to be displayed by operating the operation button 9030 after that, Common information may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the received settings later.

In the above embodiment, the period (game state) during which the number of winnings in the general winnings can be displayed may be limited. For example, during the period in which the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the number of winnings to the general winning openings may not be displayed during the period from when the ready-to-win state is established until the determined decorative patterns are derived and displayed. . In addition, in a predetermined game state such as a variable probability state or a time saving state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, in which period (game state) the number of winnings in the general winnings opening can be displayed or not be displayed is determined by the setting means (for example, the display switching switch 9032) on the game hall side. It may be settable, or may be settable by the player's setting means (for example, the operation button 9030).

In the above embodiment, in the pachinko machine 901, the player inputs the player ID (for example, the ID of the recording medium owned by the player or the personal identification ID registered on the website) with the operation button 9030. By doing so, the game data including the number of winnings to the general winning openings after the input of the player ID can be aggregated, and the operation button 9030 can be operated when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is finished. Then, the game data collected after the input of the player ID may be output to the image display device 905 as a two-dimensional code. A player captures a two-dimensional code (information that can specify a player ID and game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, and an information management server connected to the information terminal and the Internet. and the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code, and the information management server The game data managed by is updated. Since the player can access the information management server using the information terminal and check the stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), as a result, the player wins the general prize slot. It becomes possible to grasp the number. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 905 may be set by setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game arcade side, or by setting means on the player side. (For example, the operation button 9030) may be settable.

In such a form, a privilege may be awarded to the player according to the number of wins in the general winning slots stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of prizes won in the general prize gate exceeds a predetermined number, the player with that player ID is provided with a background image, application software, etc. that can be used on the information terminal as a privilege. Also good. Also, points corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning slot may be awarded to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points possessed by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may be allowed to exchange part or all of the owned points for a privilege.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has explained an example in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed. It may be something to report what has been done. For example, at the timing when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, a winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 905, and a winning notification sound effect or voice may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. You can do it. In the case of such a configuration, as in the above-described embodiment, setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side sets whether or not to notify that the game ball has won the general winning hole. It may be made possible, or may be set by the player's side setting means (for example, the operation button 9030).

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is possible to notify the state of winning to the general winning opening. Specifically, the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings to each general winnings opening and the frequency of winnings (ratio of the number of winnings to the general winnings opening to the number of shot balls to the game area, or general winnings per hour). The number of prizes won to the general prize gates) may be displayed, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed according to the number of prizes won to the general prize gates or the frequency of winning. Also, when a prize is won in a general prize-winning slot, the winning in the general prize-winning slot may be announced by voice from the speakers 908L and 908R. Such voice notification makes it easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning prizes in the general prize winning openings. Further, when a prize is won in the general prize-winning slot, the ball-hitting operation handle, the operation button 9030, etc. may be vibrated. Such bodily sensation notification makes it easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning prizes in the general prize winning openings.

The number of winnings and the frequency of winnings in each general winning slot can be displayed on the image display device 905, and can also be output to a management device such as a hall computer communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is possible to manage the number of prizes awarded to each general prize gate for each machine. This information can be used, for example, for maintenance of the gaming machine.

(2) In the pachinko machine 901, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, and a different sound effect than when a game ball wins in another winning hole such as a starting winning hole. should be output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be made different for each of the general winning openings. Further, in such a configuration, when a specific general winning slot is won, the sound effect may not be output.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect and the effect mode may be changed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning hole. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning hole, the execution ratio and the effect mode of the notice effect change, and a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable It is preferable that the changed execution ratio and effect mode are continued until the number of times of display is executed.

(4) In the pachinko game machine 901, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decorative symbol variable display that is executed after the game ball wins the general prize winning opening, and the music is changed for a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined number of times of variable display. Until then, it is preferable to continue the music after the change. Further, when the number of winnings to the general winning openings reaches a predetermined value, a specific song (for example, a song during the jackpot) may be output. Also, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a general prize-winning slot or the number of game balls that have won a prize in a general prize-winning slot has reached a predetermined number, the player reproduces a plurality of music pieces (BGM). Music (BGM) may be selectable.

Further, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole, the music being reproduced may be continuously output. For example, when the big win game state is controlled, based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning hole, the music during the big win may be continuously output even after the big win game state is over. Also, a stage change may be executed to change the background image of the decoration pattern and the music (BGM) based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning slot. It should be noted that the destination stage (background image and music) may be changed according to which one of the plurality of general prize gates the player has won.

(5) In the above embodiment, the specific effect executed based on the winning of the general winning slot is the variable result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect related to the display result of the special game. The specific effect is not limited to such a form, and may be an effect unrelated to the display result of the special game. For example, an effect may be such that a general winning hole in which a game ball has not won is displayed among a plurality of general winning holes, and a character appears when a game ball wins in the general winning hole.

(6) In the pachinko machine 901, although game balls are being shot into the game area, no game balls enter the general winning holes for a predetermined period of time, or the frequency of winning the general winning holes is less than the threshold. In some cases, the image display device 905 may perform a specific notification, such as displaying that no winning has occurred in the general winning slot. In addition, in spite of the fact that the game ball is launched into the game area, if the game ball does not win a prize only in a specific general prize winning port among a plurality of general prize winning ports for a predetermined period of time, or if the game ball does not win a prize in a specific general prize winning port If the frequency is less than the threshold value, a specific notification such as displaying on the image display device 905 that no prize has been awarded to the specific general prize winning slot may be executed.

(7) In the pachinko game machine 901, when simultaneous performance is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), according to the number of winnings to the general winning openings until the simultaneous performance is executed, or all at once A specific effect may be executed according to the winning in the general prize winning slot during the effect period. In addition, the decoration design may be changed, the stop design may be changed, or a sliding performance may be executed according to the winning in the general winning opening during the variable display of the decoration design.

(8) In the pachinko machine 901, each time a game ball wins a prize in a general winning slot, the number of objects displayed on the image display device 905 is increased by one to recognize the winning in the general winning slot and the number of winnings. You can make it easier. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 901, only the number of prize balls put out based on the winning to the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning to the general winning opening is accumulated. When the number reaches a predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying on the image display device 905 "100 shots exceeded!" may be executed. In addition, if the timing at which the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning in the general prize hole reaches a predetermined number is a period in which a game machine error is notified based on fraud detection or failure detection, The notification of the game machine error is displayed with priority over the specific performance, and the reserved specific performance is executed after the end of the notification of the game machine error.

(9) In the pachinko game machine 901, a winning sound is output each time a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole. You may make it output preferentially. Also, every time a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, the image display device 905 displays a winning prize, and during notification of a gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display. You can let them do it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the big winning opening and the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state]. In such a configuration, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball into the big prize opening is added to the [number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state] being displayed. At the same time, it is preferable to add the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game balls into the general prize winning opening. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per one display update may be increased apparently. In addition, according to the winning timing of the game ball to the big winning opening, [the number of winning balls paid out in the jackpot game state] is updated, and according to the winning timing of the game ball to the general winning opening, [in the big winning game state The display may be updated according to individual winning timings, such as updating the number of awarded balls].

(11) In the pachinko game machine 901, the number of winning balls may be varied according to the general winning opening. For example, when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B of the left gaming area 9010A, 10 prize balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening of the right gaming area 9010B When game balls enter 9050C and the fourth general winning hole 9050D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko game machine 901, an effect may be executed to encourage a game ball to enter the general winning hole. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings, such as the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the 14th effect form, the plurality of An image display device 905 informs a general winning hole in which no game ball has won among the general winning holes, and executes an effect suggesting the player to aim at the general winning hole in which the game ball does not win. It's good to be Further, in a form in which a specific effect is executed based on the fact that game balls enter a plurality of winning holes in a specific order, such as the eighth effect form and the sixteenth effect form, the winning hole to be awarded and the It is preferable that the image display device 905 informs the player of the order in which the prize should be awarded so that the player can understand it. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, "Aim for the first general prize winning opening!" , "Aim for the 1st starting prize opening!" After confirming the winning to the general winning opening 9050B, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) In addition, in the game area 9010, there is provided a guidance route for the game ball heading for the general winning opening, and if the entry sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guidance route. Alternatively, based on the detection of the game ball by the entry sensor, an effect may be executed to inform in advance that the game ball will enter the general prize winning opening. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole. In addition, a fixed period is secured from the entry of the game balls into the general prize winning opening until the execution of the payout of the prize balls, and the performance based on the winning of the game balls into the general prize winning opening is executed within this period. You can do it.

(14) If a stage on which game balls can roll is provided below the image display device 905, an entrance to a general prize-winning opening and a guidance route leading to the general prize-winning opening is provided on the stage. It may be configured such that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general prize winning opening or the entrance to the guide route.

(15) An effect may be executed in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 is updated each time a prize is won in the general prize pool. For example, the character grows each time a prize is won in the general prize pool, and when a predetermined number of prizes is reached (when the character has grown to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (granting of benefits, etc.) is executed. You can do it. In addition, each time you win a prize in the general prize pool, an effect that increases the gauge will be executed, and when the predetermined number of wins is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (a privilege will be given) etc.) may be executed. In such a form of presentation, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. You can let it be.

(16) In the above embodiment, depending on the gaming state when the winning condition is met, the type of specific effect to be executed (fluctuation result notice effect, pre-reading notice effect) is different, and is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although an example with different sounds has been described, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed according to the game state without being limited to such a form. In addition, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, compared to the normal state, the production by the game effect lamp 909 and the played music are often flashy to improve interest, so the mode of the specific production is also more. It may be arranged in a flashy manner so that it is easy for the player to understand.

(17) Even though a certain number of game balls have been shot into the game area 9010, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings and the winning frequency do not meet the reference value, the player is usually informed. Information of a game machine that is difficult to control, for example, a latent probability variable state, a limiter, etc., may be reported.

(18) In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is met has been described. When the winning condition is established in the state where the sum of the number and the second reserved memory number) is also 0, neither the variable result announcement effect nor the look-ahead announcement effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect unrelated to the display result of the special game (for example, the appearance of a specific character or the reproduction of a specific music) as the specific effect.

(19) In addition, when the winning condition is established in a state where the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved memories (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 0 Execution of the specific performance may be suspended, and thereafter, the specific performance may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed or at the timing when the number of reserved memories becomes 2 or more. That is, the specific effect is not executed immediately based on the establishment of the prize winning condition, but the specific effect that has been withheld based on the establishment of the condition for starting the special game or the establishment of the condition for starting the special game is executed. You can make it run.

(20) In the above embodiment, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the fact that the game balls do not win to the general winning openings (for example, "the number of winnings to the general winning openings is small too much.”) may be displayed on the image display device 905 . Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, the general It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball will not win in the winning hole. The store clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings by shooting the game balls into the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. It should be noted that regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings in a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number, the image display device 905 displays that the game balls will not win to the general winning openings. You can do it. In addition, similar to the display control of the number of winnings to the general winning openings, based on the settings of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings in a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number, the general The image display device 905 may display that the game ball will not win in the winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings in a predetermined period is greater than the predetermined number, it indicates that the game balls are excessively winning to the general winning openings (for example, "the general winning opening The number of prizes won is too large.”) may be displayed on the image display device 905 . Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, the general It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball has won excessively in the winning hole. The store clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings by shooting the game balls into the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 9012 is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the game information management device that manages the game information. The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general winning signal when detecting the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (for example, a 1-pulse signal is output for each winning) ), the game information management device may manage the number of winnings to the general winning openings for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device stores, as game information, the number of wins to general winning holes per predetermined period (for example, one hour) and the number of winnings to general winning holes per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6000 shots). Alternatively, the winning rate to the general winning openings (the number of winnings to the general winning openings/the number of driven balls) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 increases the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 905 each time the general winning opening is won. The mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed each time a prize is won in the prize winning slot. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed according to the number of prizes won in the general prize gate.

(24) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is set, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 as the information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning slot). However, it is not limited to such a form, and may be notified by sound using speakers 908L and 908R, game effect lamp 909, decorative LED, and lighting/extinguishing control of 7 segments. can be Further, it is not limited to the form in which all the information in the winning number management table is notified, and only the information about the winning openings in which the number of payouts, the winning rate, etc. are not within a predetermined reference range (or are within the reference range) is notified. You can do it.

(25) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is in effect, the information in the winning number management table is stored as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning slot) as shown in FIG. Although the example of notifying (displaying) in a manner unrelated to the effect executed in the game has been described, it is not limited to such a form, and even if it is notified in a manner corresponding to the manner of the effect executed in the game good. By notifying in a mode corresponding to the mode of presentation, it is possible to simply confirm the mode of notifying which type of model the information is, compared to the case of notifying only with table data as shown in FIG. can be easily comprehended. Note that the effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demonstration screen effect, a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, a jackpot effect, etc., and is not limited to the effect displayed on the image display device 905. Or it may be a production by a lamp. In addition, to notify in a manner corresponding to the aspect of the presentation means, for example, displaying or outputting a voice such that a character appearing in the announcement presentation or the ready-to-win presentation reads out the information in the winning number management table, or depending on whether or not there is a change. Regardless, the resident character displayed on the image display device 905 to give a notice or explain the game may output a display or a sound such that the information on the winning number management table is read aloud. In addition, the information of the prize number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game without being limited to the character image.

(26) In the above embodiment, operating means such as the mode switch 9031 operated to display the information of the winning number management table as the information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning slot). However, although an example has been described in which it is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it and only the staff of the game hall can operate it, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the player and the staff of the game hall cannot operate it. Alternatively, it may be provided at a position that can be operated only by a person concerned such as an inspector, an inspector, or a manufacturer of the game machine. Also, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with ten counters of a maximum of 2 bytes was used as a storage area for storing information about game wins. can also be set. At this time, the above-mentioned display monitor 9029 displays two types, the above-mentioned role ratio (%) and the above-mentioned role ratio (continuation ratio) (%), from the total number of winning balls of the game media (prize balls) paid out from the game machine. The calculation method for doing this is not limited to the method described above, but may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 109, when totaling the total number of winning balls, the number of winning ball balls, and the number of continuous winning ball balls, the upper 16 bits are used for the calculation. you can go By the way, assuming that the number of balls acquired per day is 30,000 using a 4-byte counter, 4294836225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of balls acquired per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075/365 days. = about 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. may be provided at other positions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 110A, a main board 9011C without a display monitor and a display board 9011D are provided separately from the main board 9011C, and the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are connected by a harness 9011E. Therefore, a display monitor 9029 may be provided on the display substrate 9011D. In this case, the main substrate 9011C receives the calculation of the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio displayed on the display monitor 9029 and the data used for these calculations. The main substrate 9011C transmits the calculated combination of roles (continuation ratio), the ratio of roles, and information on the control for displaying these to the display substrate 9011D via the harness 9011E. The display board 9011D may display the roster (run ratio) and the role ratio on the display monitor 9029 based on the data transmitted from the main board 9011C.

The main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are housed in a board case 90201A, which is a crimped board case. A caulking pin 9011B is attached to the board case 90201A in the same manner as the board case 90201 shown in FIG. 84(A). By providing the caulking pin 9011B, the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are completely enclosed in the board case 90201A, thereby preventing tampering with the main board 9011C. Also, the substrate case 90201A is provided with holes and heat radiation holes, and is provided with a predetermined seal, similarly to the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 84(A). These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 9029 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 110B, the display substrate 9011D may be provided outside the substrate case 90201B, which is a caulked substrate case, and the main substrate 9011C may be enclosed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display board 9011D is connected to the main board 9011C with a harness 9011E.

Further, as shown in FIG. 110(C), the display substrate 9011D may be enclosed in a substrate case 90201C, and the main substrate 9011C may be enclosed in a substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display board 9011D is connected to the main board 9011C with a harness 9011E. Also, the board case 90201C is provided with holes and heat radiation holes, and is provided with a predetermined seal, similarly to the board case 90201 shown in FIG. 84(A). These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 9029 . Note that the substrate case 90201C that encloses the display substrate 9011D may not be a caulked substrate case, or may be a caulked substrate case.

Also, as shown in FIG. 110(D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. good too. Here, the label 9011R may be arranged at a position that partially hides the display monitor 9029 . In this way, since a part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden by the label 9011R, for example, when the glass door frame 903a is opened, the player cannot easily see the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio. can be done. Moreover, even when the label 9011R is attached, it may be attached at a position that does not hide the display monitor 9029 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, electric accessories such as a large winning opening (attacker) opened and closed by a solenoid and a second starting winning opening (electric chew) are used as movable accessories. Instead, a so-called mechanical accessory that opens and closes by the weight of the game ball itself may be used as the movable accessory. Also, although a 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 9029, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment LED. Also, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used instead of the LED. In addition, the display monitor 9029 is provided with four-digit display portions of the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D, but the number of digits is not limited to four digits, and may be another number of digits. For example, it may be 2 digits, 8 digits, or 10 digits.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 903a or the game machine frame 903 is opened regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, for example, the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the ratio of roles. You may need to take measures such as removing errors. For example, in order to pay out game balls, a replenishment mechanism for replenishing game balls (replenishment balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 902 . In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball jam occurs, the glass door frame 903a or the game machine frame 903 may be opened to eliminate the ball jam and cancel the error. In the case of releasing the error by opening the glass door frame 903a or the game machine frame 903 regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, the role combination (continuation ratio) or role ratio for the display monitor 9029 etc. may not be displayed.

In addition, at this time, in order not to display the role combination (continuation ratio), role ratio, etc. on the display monitor 9029, there should be no error in the display of the role combination (continuation ratio), role ratio, etc. may be used as a condition. The error in the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio here is, for example, the detection of an abnormal operation determined in step S90101 shown in FIG. Acquisition may be detection of a predetermined number or more winnings for the attacker per unit time determined in step S90106. By making it a condition that no error has occurred in the display of such a combination of roles (repeated ratio) and the role ratio, the information of the combination of roles (repeated ratio) and the role ratio can be seen by the player. situation can be contained.

In addition, regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, the glass door frame 903a or the game machine frame 903 is opened to cancel the error. It is also possible to wait for a predetermined period of time, for example, one minute, until the role ratio and the like are displayed, and then display them after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. After the occurrence of the error is canceled, it is often the case that the cause of the error occurrence cannot be completely removed, and similar errors continue to occur. By displaying the combination of roles (repeated ratio), the role ratio, etc. on the display monitor 9029 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the information of the combination of roles (repeated ratio), the role ratio, etc. can be displayed to the player even when such an error occurs. You can prevent the situation from being seen. The predetermined period can be arbitrarily set, and may be longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Also, the predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of failure of the image display device 905, the predetermined period for the ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 9029, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as "error display") for displaying an error. This error indicator is preferably located remotely from the display monitor 9029 . Specifically, the display monitor 9029 may be arranged on the right one third of the main board 9011 and the error indicator may be arranged on the left one third of the main board 9011 . In addition, in order to make the display monitor 9029 easier to understand, the location of the display monitor 9029 on the main board 9011 may be printed on the board case 90201 in characters, or a sticker may be pasted on the board case 90201. You can leave it. Moreover, the display monitor 9029 may be provided in the payout control board which is a part of the main board 9011 .

(29) In the above embodiment,
Using the pachinko machine as an example, we explained how to calculate the role ratio (%) and the consecutive ratio (%) and display them on the display monitor. A value corresponding to a run (run ratio) (%) may be calculated and these values may be displayed on a display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided on the main board of the slot machine, for example, like the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 described above.

A role ratio or a role ratio (ream ratio) in a slot machine is, for example, a payout of game value (game value, hereinafter also referred to as "medals") accompanying the progress of the game of the slot machine. is in operation, and whether or not the slot machine is loaded with any accessory other than the first class special accessory.

For example, the first-class special accessory, the second-class special accessory, and the normal accessory are set as accessories, and the first-class special accessory is not installed as the accessory in the slot machine, and the normal role is set. When only other accessories such as objects are mounted, the role ratio is calculated by the number of medals paid out while the accessories are in operation with respect to the total number of medals paid out. In addition, if the slot machine is equipped with only the first class special accessory as accessories and no accessory other than the first class special accessory is installed, the winning combination (continuation ratio) is the total payout of medals. It is calculated according to the number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory for the number.

An example of a method for calculating the combination ratio (%) in the slot machine will be described below. Here, an example will be described in which only the first class special accessory is mounted as the special game state with the first class special accessory as the special game state. In the slot machine, when the number of bets is set, the variation of the symbols can be started, and a prize is generated according to the result of the variation of the symbols. Winning in the slot machine includes granting prizes accompanied by the granting of game values, replay winnings that allow the start of symbol fluctuations without setting the number of bets, and shifting to a special game state in which the occurrence probability of granting prizes is increased. There are bonus prizes. Here, the winning combination (continuation ratio) (%) in the slot machine is the cumulative total of gaming value ( Equivalent to the total number of winning balls in the pachinko machine described above), the cumulative total of gaming value obtained by winning prizes as a result of symbol changes during the period when the special game state is entered (the above-mentioned (equivalent to the number of consecutive winning balls in a pachinko game machine). For example, if the number of medals, which is an example of the game value obtained during the period of 6000 symbol changes, is 16000, prizes are awarded during the transition to the special game state. When the number of medals obtained by is 9,000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9,000 by 16,000 is the Yakuren (Ren ratio) (%).

Also, the main board of the slot machine is provided, for example, in the back of the outer frame. Therefore, when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the appearance of the main board when viewed from the outside of the slot machine is different from that of the gaming machine 901 . Since reels and the like are housed in the outer frame of the slot machine, the outer frame of the slot machine is often larger than that of the pachinko game machine. Further, due to its structure, the main board of the slot machine is often attached to the back of the outer frame (the inner surface of the plate material on the back side). For this reason, when the door frame of the slot machine is opened, the light may not reach the main board sufficiently. numbers, letters, etc.) are preferably displayed brightly with a large amount of light.

Further, in the slot machine, the display monitor is arranged so that it can be easily viewed from an oblique direction with respect to the main board provided at the back of the outer frame. An arrangement that facilitates visual recognition from an oblique direction is, for example, an arrangement in which when the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the opening between the door frame and the outer frame faces the front. By arranging the display monitor in this way, when the sales clerk or the like confirms the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio, the sales clerk or the like does not open the game machine frame 903 widely, but slightly opens it. It is possible to confirm the role ratio (representative ratio) only by doing. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, when the door frame is opened from the outer frame, as an arrangement facing the front when viewed from the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, it has an inclined surface like the base member 90129A shown in FIG. The display monitor may be attached to the inclined surface of the base member whose surface faces the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. Alternatively, the inclined surface may be an embedded inclined surface formed in the main substrate. In addition to these, a display monitor may be provided on a base member such as one of the base members 90129A to 90129I on which the display monitors 90130A to 90130I are provided. Further, when the display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main board and the main board and the display monitor may be housed in the board case, or the display monitor may be placed outside the board case housing the main board. may be provided.

Further, these display monitors may be provided in adjusting means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitors with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. Since the display monitor is provided in the adjustment means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, adjustment according to the wishes of the game hall where the slot machine is installed is possible. It can be carried out. Also, the adjustment means may be manual or electric.

Although the main board of the slot machine is provided in the back of the outer frame, it may be provided in another position. For example, it may be provided on the right side or left side of the outer frame when viewed from the player side. When the display monitor is provided on the right side of the outer frame, it is provided on the side corresponding to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. be able to.

Further, in the slot machine, as in the pachinko game machine, the main board may be provided on the back side of the door frame. However, slot machines do not have a game board equivalent to a pachinko game machine, and the door frame is provided with a viewing window for viewing the reels. should be provided. Also, in a pachinko game machine, instead of providing the main board on the back side of the game board, the main board may be provided on the back or on the left and right sides of the outer frame like a slot machine.

In addition, although an example of displaying the calculated role ratio (%) and role consecutive (continuous ratio) (%) on the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided on the main board is shown, the payout control is not limited to this. A display monitor may be provided on another substrate such as a substrate, a game board surface, a game machine frame (underframe), or the like. In addition, it is not limited to providing a dedicated display monitor for displaying the role ratio (%) and the role ratio (continuation ratio) (%), and existing display devices (for example, image display device 905, error display 7-segment display, credit display or payout number display in a slot machine, etc.) may be used to display predetermined information such as win ratio (%) and win ratio (combination ratio) (%).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the slot machine described above, the predetermined information is the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination (accumulated winning combination (continuous ratio) and cumulative winning combination), but other information may be used. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the predetermined information may be the number of game balls paid out (=the number of prize balls). Further, in a slot machine, a machine division (=(the number of medals to be paid out/the number of medals to be inserted)×100) or the difference between the number of medals to be inserted and the number of medals to be paid out may be used. Further, these numerical values may be information calculated for each predetermined number of games or for each predetermined number of inserted medals. Further, predetermined information such as the number of consecutive roles (continuous ratio), the ratio of roles, and the machine ratio may be calculated for a predetermined period of time, for example, 400 games or 6000 games, and the predetermined information for each number of games may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may also be displayed.

Some slot machines are provided with so-called settings. A setting is a numerical value obtained by classifying the probabilities in a slot machine into stages. For example, six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided. Information such as role ratios and role ratios displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each setting, or when displaying for each setting, the settings may also be displayed. good too.

Also, some slot machines allow one game to be executed with different numbers of inserted medals (number of bets). For example, the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) for executing one game can be selected from 1 to 3, and one game can be executed by inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as winning combination (running ratio) and winning ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each number of inserted coins (number of bets). There are also slot machines in which the required number of inserted coins (the number of bets) varies depending on the game state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required number of inserted coins is two when the game state is bonus, and the required number of inserted coins is three when the game state is not bonus. In such a slot machine, it may be possible to display information such as winning combination (running ratio) and winning ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the gaming state and the number of inserted coins.

In addition, in the slot machine, the predetermined information includes, for example, a winning combination (repeated ratio) and a winning ratio calculated based on the normal bonus and the special bonus, and for example, an advantage other than during a bonus in the game state of the slot machine. When a section and a non-advantageous section are set, the ratio between the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section is displayed. good too. The display monitor also displays, as predetermined information, the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as "the number of games in the advantageous section"), the number of games in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section, in addition to the role ratio. A ratio (hereinafter referred to as “advantage/non-advantage ratio”) may be displayed. The number of continuous games in the advantageous section and the advantageous/non-advantage ratio may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor different from the role ratio (repeated ratio), or may be displayed with a time difference using a common display monitor. good. For example, using a common display monitor, the number of advantageous section games → advantageous/non-advantageous ratio → short-term combination (continuous ratio) → short-term combination ratio → cumulative combination (continuous ratio) → cumulative combination ratio → number of advantageous section games → . . . etc. may be displayed in order.

Further, the number of games in the advantageous interval may be the number of games in the ongoing advantageous interval while the advantageous interval is continuing, or may be a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000G in the past. Alternatively, it may be the number of games in the advantageous section played during a predetermined period, for example, on the current day. The advantage/non-advantage ratio may be the number of games per 3000 G in the past for a predetermined number of games, for example, or may be the advantage/non-advantage ratio for a predetermined period of time, for example, on the current day.

Also, the ratio between the difference between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the advantageous section and the number of difference between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the non-advantageous section may be displayed. The point is that the ratio between the medals paid out in the advantageous section and the medals paid out in the non-advantageous section should be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section. By lowering the medal payout ratio in the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce fluctuations in the increase or decrease of medals. In addition, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, the advantageous section may be limited to certain limits, such as a predetermined number of games, an upper limit on the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section, or a machine discount during the advantageous section. .

The advantageous section is a section in which the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of inserted medals (mechanical rate) is higher than that of the non-advantageous section. Since the machine rate is high, it is an advantageous section for the player. Advantageous sections include, in addition to the bonus period in which normal and special accessories are in operation, during replay time (RT), during assist time (AT), during assist replay time (ART), etc. can be done. The machine ratio in the advantageous section often exceeds 100%, but may be less than 100% (so-called reduced RT, etc.). If the machine rate in the advantageous section is less than 100%, the more the game is continued, the more medals are consumed. be advantageous.

During the replay time means, for example, a state in which the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay is higher than in the state other than during the replay time. During the replay time, since the replay probability is higher than during the non-replay time, the consumption of medals can be reduced, so the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

"During the assist time" means, for example, a state of navigating the operating procedure when a conditional device is established in which a winning combination is displayed on the activated line when a prescribed condition such as a prescribed operating procedure is satisfied. . Navigation of the operation procedure includes, for example, navigation of the stopping order when three reels are stopped in a predetermined stopping order, or navigation of a predetermined symbol when stopping and displaying the symbol. It happens. During the assist time, the operation procedure is not navigated in a state other than during the assist time, so it is uncertain whether or not the operation procedure will be executed. However, during the assist time, the operation procedure is navigated. Therefore, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combination can be aligned with the activated line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

During the assist replay time means a state in which the replay time and the assist time are executed at the same time. The slot machine is designed to progress the game by increasing or decreasing medals by combining these advantageous intervals and non-advantageous intervals. Here, each of the advantageous sections such as during the bonus, during the replay time, during the assist time, and during the assist replay time may be more advantageous than the non-advantageous section, but the degree of advantage may be small.

All or part of these may be used as the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information. For example, in a slot machine in which a plurality of advantageous intervals are provided as advantageous intervals, the advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be limited to only the advantageous intervals in which the machine discount exceeds 100%. Further, even if the same type of advantageous section is used, whether or not it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be changed depending on the transition condition. For example, in a slot machine that shifts to a replay time immediately after the bonus period ends and after a predetermined number of games, for example, 1000 games have passed since the bonus period ends, the replay shifts immediately after the bonus period ends. The time period is regarded as an advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information, and the ratio displayed as the predetermined information is calculated during the replay time, which is shifted after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus period. It may not be set as an advantageous section for

During the replay time that shifts immediately after the end of the bonus period, it is a so-called chance replay time in which the player who has obtained many medals during the bonus period is given a chance to obtain further medals. On the other hand, during the replay time, which shifts after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus period, it is a so-called relief replay time in which a player who has lost many medals is given relief for the lost medals. The chance replay time is defined as an advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information, and the remedial replay time is defined as an advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information. You can choose not to.

In addition, in calculating other numerical values such as the number of consecutive roles (continuous ratio), role ratio, or machine ratio in the slot machine, one game is executed by inserting a predetermined number of medals, for example, three medals, for the replay. , the calculation may be performed assuming that three medals are paid out. Alternatively, the replay may be regarded as not having been played, and other numerical values such as the winning combination (running ratio), the winning ratio, or the machine allocation may be performed in the slot machine.

In addition, the ring buffer provided in the RAM 90102 in the pachinko game machine stores the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. On the other hand, in the ring buffer of the slot machine, for example, the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section for each predetermined number of medals to be paid out may be stored. The number of medals to be paid out for the section and the non-advantageous section may be stored. The predetermined number of sheets here may be, for example, 500 sheets or 1000 sheets. Any other appropriate number of sheets may be used. Also, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. Assuming that the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is 15, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in 400 games is 6000. Therefore, the maximum number of payouts for 400 games can be stored in a 2-byte storage area with plenty of room.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the production control board (sub side) of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of ready-to-win production and the presence or absence of pseudo consecutive, one fluctuation when starting the fluctuation Although an example of transmitting a pattern designation command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the production control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the main board (main side), in the first command, determines whether or not there is a pseudo run, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc. before reaching reach (if not reaching reach, so-called Send a command (e.g., previous variation pattern specification command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (e.g., previous variation pattern) before the second stop). A command (for example, post-fluctuation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (for example, post-fluctuation pattern) after becoming reachable (after the so-called second stop if not reaching reach) may be transmitted. .

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the main board may notify the variation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board may select the specific variation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. ), the second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands in this manner, the amount of data that must be stored as variation pattern specifying commands can be reduced.

During the variable display of the special symbols, only one type of missing symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. . Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the image display operation of the image display device for executing the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation of the speaker, and the lighting operation of the game effect lamp and the decorative LED , can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of winning, but is a gaming machine that encloses game media and pays points based on the occurrence of winning. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that provides

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. Alternatively, it may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device such as a computer device. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the above embodiment, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (electric chew prize balls number), and the number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls) are recorded in a ring buffer, which has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. However, in place of this format, the present invention can adopt a format having only two types of total sums as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Specifically, it has RWM 9010000 for total cumulative storage and RWM 9010001 for total cumulative storage. Information (number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), special electric prize balls number (attacker's award number of balls)) is accumulated and stored in RWM 9010000 and 9010001. Furthermore, by deleting the information on the winning of the game from the RWM 9010000 for total cumulative storage at a predetermined timing, the continuous ratio and the role ratio calculated based on the total from the timing of deletion to the present are the short-term continuous ratio and the winning ratio. It can be displayed as a short-term role ratio, and the continuous ratios and role ratios calculated based on the sum of the RWM 9010001 for total cumulative storage can be displayed as cumulative continuous ratios and cumulative role ratios. By adopting such a configuration, it is sufficient to have a plurality of storage areas for simply accumulating and storing information relating to game wins, and it is not necessary to store and update a certain amount of information like a ring buffer. It is preferable because

Note that the predetermined trigger can be, for example, the turning on or off of the power supply. According to this, it is possible to aggregate the information about the winning of the game from the time the power is turned on, that is, to display the consecutive ratios and role ratios of the day as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term consecutive ratios. In this case, if an RWM 9010002 is provided for saving the accumulated value of the RWM 9010000 for storing the total total when it is erased, and the accumulated value of this RWM 9010002 is displayed as a short-term continuous ratio and a short-term role ratio, the power supply It is preferable because the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term winning ratio for one day before the introduction can be displayed. By using a real-time clock or the like at a predetermined timing, it is also possible to accurately aggregate short-term continuous ratios and short-term role ratios for, for example, one day or one hour.

Further, the predetermined trigger may be a game-related trigger such as setting change, door opening, or touch sensor detection of a steering wheel. According to this, even if it is not a period of one day like when the power is turned on, short-term continuous ratio and short-term It is preferable because the role ratio can be displayed. Also, the same effect can be obtained by setting the predetermined trigger as the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of times the player wins a big hit.
It should be noted that two areas may be formed in the RWM area of the memory space instead of having two RWMs such as the RWMs 9010000 and 9010001 .

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 112 may be used in place of the ring buffer format. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, an area 9020000 for aggregating information on game wins, an area B1 for storing the accumulated results of information on game wins for the 6000th game, and an accumulated result for the 12000th game are stored. area B2, 18000 . In the area 9020000, information related to the winning of the game is added and updated. Information (number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), special electric prize balls number (attacker's award number of balls)) is stored in area B1. Furthermore, on the condition that the number of winning balls reaches 12000, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2, and the information regarding the winning of the game cumulatively stored in the area 9020000 is moved to the area B1. Memorize. In this way, the information of the area 9020000 is put into the area B1 every 6000th, and the information of the other areas is shifted. Further, after the number of winning balls reaches 66000, the information relating to the winning of the game stored in the area B10 is erased, and the information in the area B9 is controlled to be transferred to the area B10.

By configuring in this manner, the continuous ratio and the role ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the area 9020000 can be displayed as the cumulative continuous ratio and the cumulative role ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of area B10 from area 9020000, it is possible to display the latest 60000 consecutive ratios and role ratios (that is, for approximately 10 hours) as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term role ratios. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 9020000, it is possible to display the last 6000 consecutive ratios and role ratios (for approximately one hour) as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term role ratios.

Also, instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 112, only the area B10 may be provided as shown in FIG. According to this, it is not possible to obtain detailed continuous ratios and role ratios for about one hour, but it is possible to display the latest 60000 short-term continuous ratios and short-term role ratios (for about 10 hours), so the capacity is also large. As little as possible is preferable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 114 can be used in place of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it has RWM 9030000 for total cumulative storage and RWM 9030001 for total cumulative storage, and information related to game winning (first start opening (navel) and general winning opening (sode) to display consecutive ratios and role ratios. ), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric prize balls), the number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls)) are accumulated in RWM9030000 and 9030001. Try to remember.
The RWM9030000 for total cumulative storage accumulates and stores from the first number of prize balls, while the RWM9030001 for total cumulative storage stands by without storing the number of prize balls from the first to 60000. The number of prize balls is accumulated and stored from the 60001st prize ball. According to this, the difference between the RWM9030000 for total cumulative storage and the RWM9030001 for total cumulative storage is 60000, and by subtracting the RWM9030001 for total cumulative storage from the RWM9030000 for total cumulative storage, the continuous ratio and the role ratio for 60000 are obtained. It can be displayed as a short-term continuous ratio and a short-term winning ratio. Further, the continuous ratio and the winning combination calculated based on the tallying of the RWM 9030000 for total cumulative storage can be displayed as the cumulative continuous ratio and the cumulative winning combination.

Also, in the above embodiment, a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 115 may be used in place of the ring buffer format. Specifically, total counters 9040000, 9040001 and total total counter 9040002 are provided, and the total total counter 9040002 contains information (first starting port (navel) and general The number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls)) It is made to accumulate and memorize from the first number. The continuous ratio and the winning ratio calculated based on the tally of the total cumulative counter 9040002 can be displayed as the cumulative continuous ratio and the cumulative winning ratio.

On the other hand, two cumulative counters 9040000 and 9040001 are used to display 60000 consecutive ratios and winning ratios as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term winning ratios. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 9040000 starts tallying from the first prize ball, and clears when the number of prize balls reaches 60000. On the other hand, the cumulative counter 9040001 starts tallying from the 30000th ball, and is cleared when the 90000th prize ball is reached. Then, when trying to calculate the short-term continuous ratio and short-term role ratio for 60000 pieces, for example, for the 30001st to 60000th pieces, the calculation is based on the tally of the cumulative counter 9040000, and the 60001st to 90000th pieces is calculated based on the tally of the cumulative counter 9040001 .
In this way, since the cumulative counters 9040000 and 9040001 tally the number of prize balls so as to deviate by 30,000, when trying to display the short-term consecutive ratio and the short-term role ratio, it is possible to display the short-term consecutive ratio and the short-term winning ball ratio within at least 30,000. That is, it is possible to display the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term role ratio within 5 hours ago. According to this, it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity and to display the relatively recent short-term consecutive ratio and short-term winning ratio, which is preferable.

(Performance display)
In addition, in the gaming machine 901, performance information (described later) can be displayed in place of or in addition to display of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) and role ratio. Hereinafter, displaying performance information is also referred to as performance display. In the game machine 901, for example, the performance is displayed on a display monitor (such as the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later) provided on the main board 9011. FIG.

116 and 117 are explanatory diagrams related to performance information. FIG. 116A shows an example of performance information items displayed by the gaming machine 901 . The gaming machine 901 can display a real-time base value and a previous accumulated base value as performance information, as shown in the item name column of FIG. 116(A). The real-time base value of the item number “bL” is the base value (real-time value during measurement) for every 60000 outs in the normal state. More specifically, the real-time base value is the number of game balls used (fired) in the normal state, up to 60000 (0 to 59999), and the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls being measured ( %). The previous cumulative base value of the item number “b6” is the base value (previously measured cumulative value) for every 60000 outs in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative base value is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls used (shot) in the normal state, which is the number of 60000 game balls measured last time. .

The normal state in performance display is a state managed or controlled by the game state flag described above. Specifically, it is a state in which both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off (except for the state in which the round playing flag is on). That is, in the performance display, the state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are off is referred to as the normal state. The probability variation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation state. A time saving flag is a flag which shows whether it is a time saving state. The in-round game flag will be described later.

It should be noted that the normal state in the performance display, the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, the flag during the round game has been described as all of the off state, other displays (the number of prize balls on the main board 9011 side and the effect control board 9012 side Also in the display related to etc.), the state when all of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are in the off state may be the normal state. For example, the items B1 to B4 in FIG. 78 may be counted when all of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are in the OFF state. Also, for example, in connection with FIG. 84 (B), it was explained that the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the role ratio may be calculated in consideration of the game state, but for example, the normal state (probability variation flag, time saving flag, It is also possible to calculate and display the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio in the state where all of the round game flags are off.

FIG. 116(B) shows the values totaled (updated) on the game control microcomputer 90100 side for performance display. The base values shown in FIG. 116(A) are calculated based on the values shown in FIG. 116(B). Specifically, the above-mentioned base value is the number of winning balls from all winning holes (the number of winning balls from the first general winning hole 9050A, the number of winning balls from the second general winning hole 9050B, etc.) number of prize balls, number of prize balls by winning the third general prize opening 9050C, number of prize balls by winning the fourth general prize opening 9050D, number of prize balls by the first starting prize opening, number of prize balls by the second start prize opening, It is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls by the big winning opening. That is, in the gaming machine 901, in the normal state, each value shown in FIG. 116B is aggregated, and the aggregated value is used to calculate the real-time base value and the previous accumulated base value shown in FIG. 116A. Calculate and display.

FIG. 116C shows how performance information is displayed. The gaming machine 901 displays the performance information on the display monitor provided on the main board 9011 in the display mode shown in FIG. 116(C). Specifically, when displaying the real-time base value, the gaming machine 901 displays (blinks or lights up) "bL." , a number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "--" is displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of the total four digits. Although the lower 2 digits of the total 4 digits are the original real-time base value, the display of all 4 digits including the upper 2 digits may be referred to as the display of the real-time base value. Further, when displaying the previous cumulative base value, the gaming machine 901 displays (blinks or lights) “b6.” indicating that it is the previous cumulative base value in the upper two digits of the total four digits. A number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "--" is displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of the total four digits. Although the lower two digits of the total four digits are the original previous accumulated base value, the display of all four digits including the upper two digits may be referred to as the display of the previous accumulated base value.

FIG. 117(A) shows sections (aggregation section, evaluation section) according to the total number of outs (total number of shots). The "factory shipment test section" in FIG. 117A is a section in which the total number of outs is less than 300. The “first interval” is the first interval among the intervals managed for every 60000 total outs (0 to 59999). “Second section” is the second section of the above sections. "Third section" is the third section among the above sections. In FIG. 117A, subsequent sections are omitted.

FIGS. 117B to 117F show how performance information is displayed according to each section (and the number of pieces in each section). In each of FIGS. 117(B) to 117(F), the left side shows the display mode of the real-time base value, the right side shows the display mode of the previous cumulative base value, and the double-headed arrow in the center shows the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value. It indicates that it will switch.

FIG. 117B shows a display mode of performance information displayed in the factory shipping test section shown in FIG. 117A. In the factory shipment test section, as shown in FIG. The previous cumulative base value whose two digits are "b6. (flashing)" and whose lower two digits are "-- (lighting)" are alternately displayed every five seconds. In addition, the radial highlighting shown in the left upper two digits "bL." and the right upper two digits "b6." in FIG. 117(B) is blinking. It indicates the purpose. The same applies to FIGS. 117(C), 117(D), 117(E), 138 and 139. FIG.

FIG. 117C shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the first interval shown in FIG. 117A. When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the first section, the upper two digits are "bL. (flashing)" and the lower two digits are numerical values, as shown in FIG. 117(C). (%) lighting (“32 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 117 (C)), and the upper two digits are “b6. (flashing)” and the lower two digits are “--( Lighting)” and the previous accumulated base value are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

FIG. 117(D) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is from 6000 to 59999 in the first interval shown in FIG. 117(A). When the total number of outs is from 6000 to 59999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 117(D), the upper two digits are "bL." (%) lighting (“33 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 117 (D)), and the upper two digits are “b6. (flashing)” and the lower two digits are “--( Lighting)” and the previous accumulated base value are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

FIG. 117(E) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the section after the second time shown in FIG. 117(A). When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the second and later sections, the upper two digits are "bL. (flashing)" and the lower two digits are "bL. The real-time base value, which is the numerical value (%) lighting (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 117 (E)), and the upper two digits being “b6. (lighting)” and the lower two digits being the numerical value (% ) (“33 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 117(E)) is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

FIG. 117(F) shows a display mode of the performance information displayed when the total number of outs is from 6000 to 59999 in the section after the second time shown in FIG. 117(A). When the total number of outs is from 6000 to 59999 in the second and later sections, as shown in FIG. 117(F), the upper two digits are "bL. The real-time base value, which is the numerical value (%) lighting (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 117 (F)), and the upper two digits being “b6. (lighting)” and the lower two digits being the numerical value (% ) (“33 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 117(F)) and the previous accumulated base value are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

The configuration and the like of the game machine 901 when performance is displayed will be described below. FIG. 118 is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 119 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. The gaming machine 901 for performing the performance display described above may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, for example.

In FIG. 118, reference numeral 90700 near the tip of the guide rail (near the game ball exit) is a shot ball detector equipped with a shot detection sensor 90700A (see FIG. 119). FIG. 118 shows an example in which the launch ball detector 90700 is arranged near the exit of the guide rail, but other positions of the guide rail (for example, near the center of the guide rail (for example, at the same height as the normal symbol display 9020) location), a location closer to the ball launcher on the guide rail (near the entrance, etc.). 118, the same components as in FIG. 34 are given the same reference numerals as in FIG. ) will be omitted.

In FIG. 119, reference numeral 901130 denotes a display monitor that displays performance information. Reference numeral 90700A is a launch detection sensor. In FIG. 119, the same components as in FIG. 82 are denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIG. 82, and descriptions of these components (same configurations as in FIG. 82) are omitted.

120 to 127, the operation of the gaming machine 901 when performance is displayed will be described.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol processing (also called special symbol process processing). In the special figure process shown in FIG. 120, the CPU 90103 executes the state control process (step S901101A). State control processing will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes start winning determination processing (step S901102). In the start prize determination process, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a start prize based on the detection signals from the first start switch 9022A and the second start switch 9022B, and determines whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed. , Various commands (reservation memory count notification command, start winning judgment result designation command, etc.) are set to be sent.

Following the start winning determination process of step S901102, CPU90103 selects one of the processes of steps S901110 to S901117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in RAM90102 (game control flag setting unit in RAM90102) and run.

The special symbol normal process of step S901110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In the special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B based on the presence or absence of suspension data (suspension storage). In addition, in the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable display result is to be a "jackpot" using a random number for determining the special symbol display result, and if it is determined to be a "jackpot", the random number for determining the jackpot type is used. It determines which jackpot type to use and the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game. In addition, in the special symbol normal process, when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit", the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) is set to ON state, and "big hit". Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot type determined when determined is stored in a jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control buffer setting section in the RAM 90102). In the special symbol normal process, for example, when a fixed special symbol is determined, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

The variation pattern setting process of step S901111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In the variation pattern setting process, a process of determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the like are performed. In the variation pattern setting process, for example, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process of step S901112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In the special symbol variation process, the process of varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, etc. are performed. . In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of step S901113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In the special design stop processing, in the first special design display device 904A and the second special design display device 904B, the fixed special design, which is the variable display result of the special design, is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special design fixed display time). etc. In the special symbol stop processing, when the special figure determination display time has elapsed, the big hit flag is referred to and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" or "4". Specifically, when the jackpot flag is ON (when the fixed special pattern is the jackpot pattern), the jackpot flag is cleared to be turned off, and the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (when the finalized special symbol is a lost symbol), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S901114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In the jackpot opening preprocessing, a process of waiting until the waiting time (waiting time for the start of the big win) until the end of the execution time of the fanfare effect (also called the effect at the start of the jackpot) executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 elapses. Also, setting for opening the big winning opening after the elapse of the waiting time for the performance at the start of the big winning is performed. In the big hit opening pre-processing, when the setting for opening the big winning opening is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process during jackpot opening of step S901115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In the jackpot open process, the process of determining whether or not the conditions for returning the jackpot to the closed state from the open state have been established (the elapse of the jackpot opening upper limit time, or the winning of the upper limit number) A setting or the like is performed for returning the big winning opening to a closed state. In the jackpot opening process, when the setting for returning the jackpot to the closed state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The jackpot open post-processing of step S901116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". In the jackpot opening post-processing, processing for determining whether or not the number of times of execution of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a predetermined number is performed. In the jackpot open post-processing, if the number of round execution times has not reached a predetermined number, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", and if the predetermined number of times has been reached, the value of the special process flag is changed to "7". update to

The jackpot end processing of step S901117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In the jackpot end processing, processing of waiting until the end of the execution time of the ending production (also referred to as the jackpot end production) executed on the production control board 9012 (jackpot end production waiting time) elapses, etc. is done. In the jackpot end processing, when the waiting time for performance at the end of the jackpot has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing an example of the state control process executed in step S901101A of FIG. In the state control process shown in FIG. 121, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S902001). When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; YES), CPU90103 determines whether the round game flag provided in RAM90102 (game control flag setting unit in RAM90102) is on. (step S902002). The in-round game flag is one of the flags that define the normal state, as described above. If the round playing flag is ON at step S902002 (step S902002; YES), the state control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the round playing flag is off in step S902002 (step S902002; NO), the CPU90103 determines whether the state change switching wait flag provided in RAM90102 (game control flag setting unit in RAM90102) is on. It is determined whether or not (step S902003). The state change switch wait flag is a flag provided for setting a state change switch wait time (described later) only once when the round playing flag is off.

If the state change switch wait flag is off in step S902003 (step S902003; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the state change switch wait time (step S902004). Specifically, CPU90103 is a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is the stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer provided in RAM90102 (game control timer setting unit in RAM90102), a predetermined Sets the state change switching wait time. The state change switching waiting time set in the processing of step S902004 is a time shorter than the jackpot start time production waiting time set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop processing (FIG. 122). Although the details will be described later, the time T1 in FIG. 128 is the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big win, and the time T2 in FIG. 128 is the waiting time for state change switching.

Following step S902004, the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching wait flag to the ON state (step S902005). Then, the state control process ends.

If the state change switch wait flag is ON in step S902003 (step S902003; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switch wait time has elapsed (step S902006). In the process of step S902006, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S902004 has timed out (whether the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Just do it. If the state change switching wait time has not elapsed in step S902006 (step S902006; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting time has passed in step S902006 (step S902006; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching wait flag to turn it off (step S902007), and turns the round game flag on. set (step S902008).

Following step S902008, the CPU 90103 performs setting for ending the time saving state and the variable probability state (step S902009). In the process of step S902009, CPU90103 performs the process etc. which clear a time saving flag and a probability variation flag, and are made into an OFF state. In addition, in the process of step S902009, when a value (value other than 0) is set to the probability variable number count value which is the stored value of the probability variable number counter provided in RAM90102 (game control counter setting unit in RAM90102) may execute a process of initializing the probability variation count value to "0". In addition, in the process of step S902009, when a value (value other than 0) is set to the time saving number count value which is the stored value of the time saving number counter provided in RAM90102 (game control counter setting unit in RAM90102) may execute a process of initializing the time saving frequency count value to "0". It should be noted that the time-saving number counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of times of execution or the number of times remaining) of the special game in which the time reduction control and the high opening control are performed. The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the number of remaining times) of the special figure game in which the probability variation control is performed.

Following the process of step S902009, CPU90103 performs the setting for transmitting a game state designation|designated command with respect to the production|presentation control board 9012 from the main board|substrate 9011 (step S902015). Thereby, the change (transition) of the game state in the pachinko game machine 901 can be notified to the effect control board 9012 side. Then, the state control process ends.

In the state control process shown in FIG. 121, the game state designation command is transmitted even when the game state changes or does not change, but when the game state changes (for example, time saving state or The game state designation command may be transmitted only when the variable probability state changes to the normal state, etc.). On the side of the effect control board 9012, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011. Instead of this, the current game state is determined based on the hit start designation command or the like. may be specified. The same applies to the state control processing shown in FIG.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; NO), CPU90103 determines whether the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S902010). When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round playing flag is on (step S902011). If the round playing flag is off at step S902011 (step S902002; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the round playing flag is ON at step S902011 (step S902011; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the round playing flag to turn it off (step S902013).

Following step S902013, CPU90103 performs the setting for starting the time saving state and probability variation state (step S902014). In the process of step S902014, the CPU90103 sets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to the ON state according to the jackpot type (value stored in the jackpot type buffer; jackpot type buffer value), and counts the probability variation count according to the jackpot type. Set the initial value to the value and time saving count value. For example, in the case of a variable probability big hit in which the variable probability state and the short time state continue until the next big win after the end of the big win, the variable probability flag and the short time flag are set to the ON state. Also, for example, after the end of the big hit, in the case of a probability variable big hit in which the probability variable state and the time saving state continue until the next big win or until the 100th special game is finished, the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are turned on. 100 is set as an initial value to the probability variable number count value, and 100 is set as an initial value to the time saving number count value. Also, for example, after the end of the big hit, the variable probability state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit or until the 30th special game is completed, and furthermore, after the 31st special game, until the next big hit In the case of a probability variable jackpot in which the time saving state continues until 100 special games are completed, the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to the ON state, the probability variable number count value is set to 30 as an initial value, and the number of time saving is set. 100 is set as the initial value for the count value. Also, for example, in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot where the time saving state continues until the next big win after the end of the big win or until the 100th special game is finished, the time saving flag is set to the ON state, and the time saving number of times. 100 is set as the initial value for the count value. Also, for example, in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot that does not become a variable probability state or a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot, nothing is done (neither the probability variable flag nor the time-saving flag is set to the on state, and the probability variable number count value No value is set for the count value).

After step S902014, the CPU 90103 executes the process of step S902015 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing executed in step S901113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 122, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the flag during special symbol confirmation display provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit is ON (step S902291). Here, the special figure fixed display flag is set to ON state by the process of step S902295 in response to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is off at step S902291 (step S902291; NO), the CPU 90103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the confirmation special symbol (step S902292). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902293). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 sets the special figure confirmation display time, which is the stop display time of the confirmation special symbol (step S902294). Specifically, the CPU90103, as the timer initial value of the special figure confirmation display time timer value which is the stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in the RAM90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM90102), a predetermined Set the special figure confirmation display time.

Following the processing of step S902294, the CPU 90103 sets the special figure confirmation display flag to the ON state (step S902295), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

At step S902291, when the special figure confirmation display flag is ON (step S902291; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S902296). In the process of step S902296, for example, whether the special figure confirmation display time timer timer initial value is set in step S902294 has timed out (whether the special figure fluctuation time timer value has become 0) If it is determined good. If special figure decision display time has not passed in step S902296 (step S902296; NO), special design stop processing is ended.

When the special figure confirmation display time has passed in step S902296 (step S902296; YES), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S902297), whether or not the big hit flag is on Determine (step S902298). If the jackpot flag is ON (step S902298; YES), the waiting time for the effect at the start of the jackpot is set (step S902299). Specifically, the CPU 90103 is provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102) as the timer initial value of the production waiting time timer value at the start of the big hit, which is the stored value of the production waiting time timer at the start of the big hit. A predetermined performance waiting time at the start of a big win is set. Following the processing of step S902299, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902300). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the big hit flag to turn it off (step S902301), and sets the big hit start time flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting section in the RAM 90102) to on (step S902302). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S902305), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the jackpot flag is off at step S902298 (step S902298; NO), it is determined whether or not to terminate the time saving state or the variable probability state (step S902306). In the process of step S902306, the CPU90103 updates the respective count values depending on whether or not the value (value other than 0) is set to the probability variable number count value and the time saving number count value, and the time saving state and the probability variable state It is determined whether or not to terminate. For example, if a value is set in the time-saving number count value (for example, the time-saving state continues until the next big hit or until the 100th special game is completed). is 100 times or less), the time saving number count value is decremented by 1 and updated. In addition, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the time saving frequency count value after updating matches the time saving end determination value (for example, "0"), and the time saving frequency count value after updating does not match the time saving end determination value. determines not to end the time saving state. Also, for example, if a value is set for the probability variable number count value and the time saving number count value When the special game played after the big hit is 100 times or less, etc., the probability variation number count value is updated by subtracting 1, and the time reduction number count value is updated by subtracting 1. In addition, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the probability variation count value after the update matches the probability variation end determination value (for example, "0"), and the probability variation count value after the update does not match the probability variation end determination value. Determines not to end the probability variable state, and determines that the probability variable state is terminated when it matches, and determines whether the time saving count value after the update matches the time saving end judgment value (for example, "0") If the updated time saving number count value does not match the time saving end decision value, it is decided not to end the time saving state. In addition, the CPU 90103 clears the variable probability flag to turn off when determining to end the variable probability state, and clears the time saving flag to turn off when determining to end the time saving state.

Following the processing of step S902306, settings are made for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the game state in the pachinko game machine 901 can be notified to the effect control board 9012 side. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated (initialized) to "0" (step S902308), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

It should be noted that, in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 122, the game state designation command is transmitted even when the game state changes or does not change, but when the game state changes (for example, time saving state or when the state changes from the variable probability state to the normal state, etc.), the game state designation command may be transmitted. It should be noted that, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, but instead of this, the effect is controlled independently of the side of the main board 9011. The current game state may be identified by counting the number of times the variable display is executed on the board 9012 side.

FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit opening pre-processing executed in step S901114 of FIG. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 123, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (step S902131). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the ON state in response to the jackpot flag being ON in the special symbol stop processing (step S902302 in FIG. 122).

If the jackpot start time flag is not ON at step S902131 (step S902131; NO), the big winning opening determination process (see FIG. 125) is executed (step S90220), and the process proceeds to step S902138. In this way, in addition to the process during the opening of the big win in step S901115, by executing the big winning opening determination process in the process after opening the big win in step S901114, winning exceeding the winning upper limit judgment value (over winning) is suitably detected. be able to. For example, it is possible to suitably detect over-winning during the next opening standby (during step S902138 (YES)). Incidentally, the big winning opening determination processing will be described later.

In addition, although it has been explained that the addition of the number of prize balls is excluded when more than the predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning hole per unit time, over winning is not excluded. In other words, even if there is a prize that exceeds the above-mentioned "prize upper limit judgment value", if the number of excess prizes is within the range that is generally assumed to be over prize (for example, up to about +3), prize balls (actual payout , reflected in performance information). Excluded from the addition of the number of winning balls is due to cheating, and when the number of excess winnings is outside the range generally assumed as over winning.

If the jackpot start flag is ON in step S902131 (step S902131; YES), it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the jackpot start effect waiting time has passed (step S902132). In the process of step S902132, for example, whether or not the waiting time timer at the start of the jackpot, in which the timer initial value is set at step S902299 of the special symbol stop processing, has timed out (the waiting time timer value at the start of the jackpot has become 0 or not).

If the waiting time for the performance at the start of the big win has not passed (step S902132; NO), the pre-processing for opening the big win is ended.

If the waiting time for the production at the start of the big win has passed (step S902132; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the flag at the time of the start of the big win (step S902134). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening (step S902135). Specifically, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is initialized to "1". Subsequently, the CPU 90103 reads the jackpot type buffer value (step S902136), and sets the opening control pattern corresponding to the read jackpot type buffer value (step S902137). In other words, the opening control pattern of the special variable winning ball device 907 (big winning opening) is set according to the big hit type determined in the special symbol normal processing. In the opening control pattern, for example, an upper limit time for opening the big winning opening for each round is set.

Following the processing of step S902137 or the processing of step S90220, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not it is waiting for the next opening (step S902138). That is, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval period until the opening of the big winning opening as the next round. In the process of step S902138, for example, whether the round start waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902366 of the jackpot open post-processing has timed out (whether the round start waiting time timer value has become 0) should be determined. If it is waiting for opening next time (step S902138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the big hit opening pre-processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is not waiting to be opened next time (step S902138; NO), that is, if the interval period has ended, the CPU 90103 controls the start of opening the big winning opening (step S902139). For example, the CPU 90103 sets the opening time of the large winning opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S902137 and the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter, and sets the opening time of the large winning opening. set as Specifically, in the process of step S902139, for example, the CPU90103 is the stored value of the open time timer provided in the RAM90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM90102) step as the timer initial value of the open time timer value In the opening control pattern set in S902137, the upper limit time for opening the big winning opening (upper limit time for the open state) of the corresponding round is set. In addition, in the process of step S902139, by transmitting a solenoid driving signal through the solenoid circuit 90111, the solenoid 9028 for the grand winning entrance door may be turned on. In addition, in the case of the first round (when the big hit opening pre-processing is executed following the special symbol stop processing), since the round start waiting time (interval period) is not set (because it is zero), the step In the process of S902138, it is immediately determined that the next opening standby is not in progress.

Following the processing of step S902139, the CPU 90103 sets the effect control board 9012 to transmit the notification command during opening of the big winning opening (step S902140). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" (step S902141), and the big hit opening preprocessing is ended.

FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of the process during jackpot opening executed in step S901115 of FIG. In the process during the opening of the jackpot shown in FIG. 124, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the upper limit time for opening the big winning opening has passed (step S902121). If the large winning opening opening upper limit time has not passed (step S902121; NO), a large winning opening determination process is executed (step S90220).

Figure 125 is the jackpot opening pre-processing of Figure 123 (step S901114), the jackpot opening process of Figure 124 (step S901115), the jackpot opening post-processing of Figure 126 (step S901116), and the jackpot ending process of Figure 127 (step S901117) It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening determination process executed in .

In the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 125, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the detection signal transmitted from the count switch 9023 is turned on (step S90221). If the count switch 9023 is not ON (step S90221; NO), the big winning opening determination process is terminated.

When the count switch 9023 is ON (step S90221; YES), transmission setting of the large winning opening winning notification command for notifying the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening is performed with respect to the effect control board 9012. (Step S90222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is "5", which is the value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S90223). If the value of the special figure process flag is not "5", which is the value corresponding to the big hit open process (step S90223; NO), the big winning opening determination process is terminated.

If the value of the special figure process flag is "5" which is the value corresponding to the big hit open process (step S90223; YES), the winning number counter provided in RAM90102 (game control counter setting unit in RAM90102) is stored The winning number count value, which is the value, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90224). Then, the big winning opening determination process is terminated. When the process of step S90224 is performed in the big winning opening determination process, the prize ball payout process is performed in the prize ball process. Also, as shown in FIG. 116(B), if all of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are in the OFF state, the number of prize balls by the big winning opening is updated in relation to the performance display. . However, as shown in FIG. 121, at least during the period from the start of the first round (closed to open the door of the big winning door → open) to the end of the final round (open to closed the door of the big winning door), during the round game Since the flag is in the ON state rather than the OFF state, the number of prize balls by the big winning hole is not updated during the period.

Return to FIG. Following the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 125, it is determined whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (for example, "10") (step S902126). If the winning upper limit judgment value is not reached (step S902126; NO), the process during big hit opening is ended.

On the other hand, if the upper limit time for opening the large winning opening has passed in step S902121 (step S902121; YES), or if the winning upper limit determination value has been reached in step S902126 (step S902126; YES), the opening of the large winning opening is controlled (step S902127). That is, the CPU 90103 determines to end the current round game, and sets the big winning opening to be in a closed state. For example, it may be set to stop transmission of the drive signal to the solenoid 9082 . Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the winning number counter and initializes the winning number count value to "0" (step S902128). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" (step S902129), and the process during big hit opening is ended.

FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of the process after opening the jackpot executed in step S901116 of FIG. In the jackpot opening post-processing shown in FIG. 126, the CPU 90103 first executes the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 125 (step S90220). In this way, in addition to the process during the opening of the big win in step S901115, by executing the big winning opening determination process in the process after opening the big win in step S901116, winning exceeding the winning upper limit judgment value (over winning) is suitably detected. be able to.

After executing the large winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 125, the CPU 90103 updates the large winning opening opening number count value by 1 (step S902364). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened after the update reaches the maximum value (step S902365).

In addition, in step S902365, the above-mentioned "maximum value" to be compared with the count value of the number of opening times of the big winning opening after the update is the number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. That is, the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened to be compared with the above "maximum value" is the one after updating (step S902364), and the initial value of the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is "1" (of FIG. 123). S902135), the above "maximum value" must be a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. For example, in the case of a 6-round jackpot (when the upper limit number of rounds is 6), the above "maximum value" is "7", and in the case of a 16-round jackpot (when the upper limit number of rounds is 16), The "maximum value" is "17". In addition, instead of the post-update count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened, the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened before the update may be compared with the "maximum value". In that case, the "maximum value" should be set as the upper limit of the number of rounds.

If the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is other than the maximum value (step S902365; NO), the round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S902366). Specifically, for example, CPU90103, as a timer initial value of the round start waiting time timer value is a stored value of the round start waiting time timer provided in RAM90102 (game control timer setting unit in RAM90102), a predetermined Sets the round start wait time.

Following step S902366, the CPU 90103 sets the effect control board 9012 to transmit a notification command after the opening of the big winning opening (step S902367). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (step S902368), and the process after opening the big hit is ended. In this way, until it is determined that the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened after updating is the maximum value by the processing of step S902365, by repeatedly executing the processing of steps S901114 to S901116 shown in FIG. A plurality of rounds can be executed with the big winning opening opened in the big winning game state. In addition, by setting the round start waiting time in the processing of step S902366, the processing of step S901114 shown in FIG. Step S902138; YES), the next round can be started after a desired interval period.

At step S902365, if the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is the maximum value (step S902365; YES), the waiting time for the effect at the end of the big hit is set (step S902369). Specifically, for example, the CPU 90103 is the stored value of the production waiting time timer at the end of the jackpot provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102) Timer initial value of the production waiting time timer value at the end of the jackpot , a predetermined performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot is set.

Following step S902369, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902370). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" (step S902371), and the process after opening the jackpot is terminated. Thus, by setting the waiting time for the effect at the end of the big hit in the process of step S902369, according to the end of the ending effect executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 (step S902321 in FIG. 127; YES), Special symbol normal processing of step S901110 shown in 120 can be executed.

FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process executed in step S901117 of FIG. In the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 127, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the jackpot end effect has passed (step S902321). In the processing of step S902321, for example, whether or not the waiting time timer at the end of the jackpot, in which the timer initial value is set at step S902369 of the processing after the opening of the jackpot, has timed out (the waiting time timer value at the end of the jackpot has become 0). or not). At step S902321, if the waiting time for the end of the jackpot effect has not passed (step S902321; NO), the big winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 125 is executed (step S90220), and the jackpot end processing is finished. In this way, in addition to the process during the opening of the jackpot of step S901115, by executing the jackpot determination process in the jackpot end process of step S901117 as well, winning exceeding the winning upper limit determination value (over winning) can be suitably detected. can be done.

In step S902321, when the waiting time for the end of the jackpot has passed (step S902321; YES), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" (step S902325), and the execution of the jackpot end processing is terminated.

120 to 127, the operation and the like of the gaming machine 901 when performance display is performed have been described. According to the flow charts shown in FIGS. After the symbols are stopped and displayed, the game is controlled to a big win game state, but the round game in-progress flag is turned on before the first round is opened. A detailed description will be given below.

(A) End of fanfare effect→first release of special variable winning ball device After the jackpot design has been stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special design confirmation display time), the CPU 90103 determines the execution time of the fanfare effect in the special design stop processing. Waiting time until the end of (big hit start time production waiting time) is set (step S902299 in FIG. 122), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". In addition, the CPU 90103 opens the big winning opening (step S902139 in FIG. 123) after the waiting time has passed (step S902132 in FIG. 123; YES) in the big hit opening preprocessing. That is, the special variable winning ball device 907 is closed before the end of the fanfare effect, and is opened for the first time after the end of the fanfare effect.

(B) Set the round game flag to the on state → end of fanfare effect Also, when the value of the special process flag is updated to "4", the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting time (Fig. 121 Step S902004), after the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902006 in FIG. 121; YES), the in-round game flag is set to the ON state (step S902008 in FIG. 121). As described above, the state change switching waiting time is shorter than the waiting time for the big win start effect (execution time for the fanfare effect). That is, before the end of the fanfare effect, the in-round-game flag is turned on.

From the above (A) and (B), the in-round game flag is set to the ON state→the end of the fanfare effect→the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened for the first time. In other words, the in-round-game flag is turned on before the opening of the first round.

Also, as described above, the game state in which the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are collected for performance display is called a normal state. This is a game state in which all medium flags are off (see FIG. 116). Therefore, at least when the round playing flag is on, it does not correspond to the normal state, so at least when the round playing flag is on, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not collected for performance display. That is, at least when the round game in-progress flag is on, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not reflected in the performance display.

According to the above (A) and (B), since the round game flag is turned on at the stage before the opening of the first round, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are set at a certain stage before opening the first round at the latest. The number is not reflected in the performance display (more precisely, it is not reflected). In addition, the expression "at the latest" means that the game state during the execution of the special game before the special game that stopped and displayed the jackpot pattern was a probability change state or a time saving state (that is, at least the probability change flag or the time saving flag If one is on), the stage before the above "a stage before opening the first round" (for example, the stage during execution of the special game before the special game in which the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed) ), the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls have not already been reflected in the performance display.

FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. In the figure, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of game balls. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905 . The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is, from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the shot ball detector 90700 (shot detection sensor 90700A), the state (open state) of the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning entrance door) , closed state), and the winning timing to the big winning opening (the detection timing of the game ball by the count switch 9023).

As shown in FIG. 128, a jackpot pattern (shown as a fixed decorative pattern "777" on the image display device 905 in the figure) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern in the special game (in more detail, shown in FIG. 122). When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed) and the waiting time for the start of the big hit (illustrated as a fanfare effect in the figure) ends, the special variable winning ball device 907 opens for the first time (1R opening in the figure) ) is performed. It should be noted that the big-hit performance in the image display device 905 is a performance performed during execution of the big-hit opening process (FIG. 124). In addition to the effect performed during the execution of the jackpot opening process (FIG. 124), the effect performed during the execution of the jackpot opening post-processing (FIG. 126) may also be called a jackpot effect.

The timing t1 shown in the lower part of FIG. 128 is the timing when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game. Timing t3 is the timing at which the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened for the first time after the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big win is over. The time T1 between the timing t1 and the timing t3 is the waiting time for the big hit starting effect set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop processing (FIG. 122). Timing t2 and the like will be described later.

FIG. 128 schematically shows how three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) shot by the batted ball shooting device are detected by the shot detection sensor 90700A. The game ball a is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t1 (for example, during the ready-to-win effect), and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, the closed state of the big winning entrance door). A game ball or the like that has flowed down on the front side). The game ball b is a game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at timing t2, picked up by the big winning entrance door at timing t3 (at the moment of opening), and detected by the count switch 9023. The game ball c is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing slightly later than the timing t2, is picked up by the winning entrance door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and is detected by the count switch 9023.

Time T2 between timing t1 and timing t2 is the state change switching wait time set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 121). In addition, the game ball b detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at timing t2 flows down the game area 9010 at the slowest possible flow speed after being detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, and the large winning entrance door immediately after opening , and detected by the count switch 9023. In other words, the game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing earlier than the timing t2 is not detected by the count switch 9023. In other words, the timing t2 is the earliest timing at which a game ball picked up by the large winning entrance door at the moment it is opened can be detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A.

That is, game balls detected by the count switch 9023 exist among the game balls detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A before the opening of the big winning entrance door (for example, during the execution period of the fanfare effect). A game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at any timing of the time T3, such as ball c), and a game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A before the opening of the big winning entrance door are counted by the count switch 9023. In order not to reflect the game balls that can be detected in the performance display, the in-round game flag is set to the ON state at timing t2 (when time T2 has elapsed) (step S902008 in FIG. 121).

It should be noted that, hypothetically, if the in-round game flag is set to the ON state at timing t3 (if it is not reflected in the performance display from the opening timing of the big winning door), for example, the game ball c will be displayed at time T3. A game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at any timing is reflected in the performance display as the number of hit balls, but is not reflected in the performance display as the number of prize balls in the case of winning the big prize opening. Mismatching occurs and an accurate performance indication cannot be obtained. On the other hand, if the round game in-progress flag is set to the ON state at timing t2 (when time T2 has elapsed), the above-described problem is resolved.

Although timing t2 is the earliest timing at which a game ball picked up by the grand prize door at the moment of opening can be detected by launch detection sensor 90700A, timing t2 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t2 may be the average timing at which the game ball picked up by the large winning entrance door at the moment it is opened is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, or the timing later than the average timing. may That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T2) set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 121) takes into account the game ball flow time (fired ball detector 90700→special variable winning ball device 907). If it is However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to use the timing t2 as the earliest timing. The same applies to FIG. 131 as well.

[Modified example of launch ball detector]
FIG. 129 is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 130 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. The gaming machine 901 for performance display may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, for example.

In Figure 129, reference numeral 90701 above the first pass gate 9041A is a first shot ball detector comprising a first shot detection sensor 90701A (see Figure 130). All game balls passing through the left playing area 9010 A pass through the first shot ball detector 90701 . That is, the first shot ball detector 90701 (first shot detection sensor 90701A) detects all game balls passing through the left game area 9010A. Reference numeral 90702 above the second pass gate 9041B is a second projectile ball detector comprising a second projectile detection sensor 90702A (see FIG. 130). All game balls passing through the right playing area 9010B pass through the second shot ball detector 90702 . That is, the second shot ball detector 90702 (second shot detection sensor 90702A) detects all game balls passing through the right game area 9010B.

FIG. 129 shows an example in which the ball detectors 90701 and 90702 are arranged above the pass gates 9041A and 9041B. , etc.). In FIG. 129, the same components as in FIG. 118 are assigned the same reference numerals as in FIG. 118, and descriptions of the components (same configurations as in FIG. 118) are omitted.

In FIG. 130, reference numeral 90701A is the first firing detection sensor. Reference numeral 90702A is a second firing detection sensor. In FIG. 130, the same configurations as in FIG. 119 are denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIG. 119, and descriptions of the configurations (same configurations as in FIG. 119) are omitted.

The operations shown in FIGS. 120 to 127 are also applied to the gaming machine 901 configured as shown in FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. 118 and 119, and the special figure processing when performance is displayed on the gaming machine 901 with the configuration shown in FIGS. 129 and 130. It is common to the figure processing.

FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 configured as shown in FIGS. In FIG. 131, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of game balls. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905 . The bottom side of the display of the image display device 905 shows, from top to bottom, detection timing of game balls by shot ball detectors 90701 and 90702 (shot detection sensors 90701A and 90702A), special variable winning ball device 907 (big winning entrance door). It shows the state (open state, closed state) and the winning timing to the big winning opening (the detection timing of the game ball by the count switch 9023).

Also, in FIG. 131, three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) fired by the batted ball launcher are detected by the first shot detection sensor 90701A (or the second shot detection sensor 90702A). Schematically shows how it is done. The game ball a is detected by the first ejection detection sensor 90701A (or the second ejection detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t1, and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, the game ball is in a closed state. A game ball or the like that has flowed down on the front side of the big winning entrance door). The game ball b is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at timing t2, picked up by the grand prize entrance door at timing t3 (moment of opening), and detected by the count switch 9023. It is a game ball that is played. The game ball c is detected by the first firing detection sensor 90701A (or the second firing detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and is picked up by the winning entrance door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, It is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023 .

The first shot ball detector 90701 (first shot detection sensor 90701A) and the second shot ball detector 90702 (second shot detection sensor 90702A) can detect the game ball at the same time. Even in this case, each game ball detected at the same time can be captured (counted) as the number of hit balls. For example, for one of them, by shifting the timing of execution of processing (processing to count) executed after detection, each game ball detected at the same time may be captured as the number of hit balls.

118 and the first ball detector 90701 and the second ball detector 90702 shown in FIG. 129 are different, the positions shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the game ball fired by the batted ball launcher is detected by the first shot ball detector 90701 (or the second shot ball detector 90702). It takes longer than the time until the game ball shot by the hitting ball shooting device is detected by shot ball detector 90700 in the configuration of FIG. 129 and 130, the game ball detected by the first shot ball detector 90701 (or the second shot ball detector 90702) reaches the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 907. The game ball detected by the shot ball detector 90700 in the configuration of FIGS.

Therefore, the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 131) set in the configuration of FIGS. 129 and 130 is equal to the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. time T2).

In addition, the first ball detector 90701 and the second ball detector 90702 (or parts including the first ball detector 90701 and the second ball detector 90702 (referred to as part A)) are attached to the game board 902. It may be detachable. Also, the game board 902 is composed of a part A and one or more parts other than the part A, and the part A may be detachable from the one or more parts other than the part A. For example, in FIG. 129, the portion including the first shot ball detector 90701 and the second shot ball detector 90702 (the portion above the dashed line P in the figure) may be detachable.

[Modification using out-sphere detector]
FIG. 132 is a front view of a pachinko game machine. 133 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 132. FIG. The gaming machine 901 for performance display may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, for example.

In FIG. 132, reference numeral 90710 within a dashed line is an out ball detector including an out ball detection sensor 90710A. The out-ball detector 90710 is arranged at a position that cannot be visually recognized from the front side, but is illustrated using a broken line in FIG. 132 for convenience of explanation. Moreover, the code|symbol 9052 is an out port. Entering the winning gate (1st general winning gate 9050A, 2nd general winning gate 9050B, 3rd general winning gate 9050C, 4th general winning gate 9050D, 1st starting winning gate, 2nd starting winning gate, big winning gate) The missing game ball is taken into the out port 9052 .

The out-ball detector 90710 detects all game balls shot into the game area 9010 by the hitting ball shooting device. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 9010 is a winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth general winning opening 9050D, first starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, big winning opening), or entering the out opening 9052 without entering the winning opening. Both the game balls that have entered the winning hole and the game balls that have been taken into the out hole 9052 are finally collected in one path on the back (or inside) of the game board 902 . Out-ball detector 90710 is arranged on the above-mentioned path, so it detects all game balls shot into game area 9010 by the hitting ball shooting device.

FIG. 132 shows an example in which the out-ball detector 90710 is placed in the center in the left-right direction (below the out port), but if all game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, the right side in the left-right direction) The out-ball detector 90710 may be arranged on the left side in the left-right direction, etc.). In FIG. 132, the same configurations as in FIG. 118 are assigned the same reference numerals as in FIG. 118, and the description of the configurations (same configurations as in FIG. 118) is omitted.

In FIG. 133, reference numeral 90710A is an out ball detection sensor. In FIG. 133, the same components as in FIG. 119 are denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIG. 119, and descriptions of these components (same configurations as in FIG. 119) are omitted.

132 and 133, the state control process of step S901101B (FIG. 134) is executed instead of the state control process of step S901101A (FIGS. 120 and 121). It should be noted that other special figure processing (each processing shown in FIGS. 122 to 127) is also applied to the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of state control processing executed in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. In the state control process shown in FIG. 134, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S902021). When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S902021 (step S902021; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round playing flag is on (step S902022). If the round playing flag is off at step S902022 (step S902022; NO), the state control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the round playing flag is ON at step S902022 (step S902022; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching wait flag is ON (step S902023).

If the state change switch wait flag is off in step S902023 (step S902023; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the state change switch wait time (step S902024). Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets a predetermined state change switching waiting time as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S902024 is a time shorter than the jackpot end time effect waiting time set in step S902369 of the jackpot opening post-processing (FIG. 126). Although the details will be described later, the time T4 in FIG. 135 is the waiting time for effect at the end of the jackpot, and the time T5 in FIG. 135 is the waiting time for state change switching.

Following step S902024, the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching wait flag to the ON state (step S902025). Then, the state control process ends.

If the state change switch wait flag is ON in step S902023 (step S902023; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switch wait time has elapsed (step S902026). In the process of step S902026, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S902024 has timed out (whether the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Just do it. If the state change switching wait time has not elapsed in step S902026 (step S902026; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S902026 (step S902026; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching wait flag to turn it off (step S902027), clears the round playing flag, and It is turned off (step S902028).

Following step S902028, CPU90103 performs the setting for starting the time saving state and probability changing state (step S902029). The processing of step S902029 is the same as the processing of step S902014 of the state control processing (step S901101A) shown in FIG.

Following step S902029, CPU90103 performs the setting for transmitting a game state designation|designated command with respect to the production|presentation control board 9012 from the main board|substrate 9011 (step S902035). Thereby, the change (transition) of the game state in the pachinko game machine 901 can be notified to the effect control board 9012 side. Then, the state control process ends.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S902021 (step S902021; NO), CPU90103 determines whether the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S902030). When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S902030 (step S902030; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S902030 (step S902030; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round playing flag is on (step S902031). If the round playing flag is ON at step S902031 (step S902032; YES), the state control process is terminated.

If the round playing flag is off at step S902031 (step S902031; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the waiting time for the big hit start effect has passed (step S902032). In the processing of step S902032, as in the processing of step S902132 of the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S901114) shown in FIG. It is sufficient to determine whether or not the time effect waiting time timer has timed out. At step S902032, if the waiting time for the performance at the start of the big hit has not passed (step S902032; NO), the state control process is terminated.

At step S902032, if the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big hit has passed (step S902032; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the round playing flag to the ON state (step S902033).

Following step S902033, the CPU 90103 performs setting for ending the time saving state and the variable probability state (step S902034). The process of step S902034 is the same as the process of step S902009 of the state control process (step S901101A) shown in FIG.

Following the processing of step S902034, the CPU 90103 executes the processing of step S902035 described above, and terminates the state control processing.

FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 configured as shown in FIGS. In FIG. 135, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of game balls. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905 . The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 shows, from the top, the state (open state, closed state) of the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning opening door), the winning timing to the large winning opening (game by count switch 9023) ball detection timing), and the game ball detection timing by the out ball detector 90710 (out ball detection sensor 90710A).

As shown in FIG. 135, the special variable winning ball device 907 completes the final opening (shown as final R opening in the same figure), and a big hit ending effect (shown as the ending effect in the same figure) is performed.

Timing t4 shown in the lower part of FIG. 135 is the timing at which the final opening of the special variable winning ball device 907 ends (the timing at which the big winning opening door is closed). In addition, the timing t4 is also the start timing of the ending effect. Timing t6 is the ending timing of the ending effect. The time T4 between the timing t4 and the timing t6 is the waiting time for effect at the end of the jackpot set in step S902369 of the jackpot opening post-processing (FIG. 126). Timing t5 and the like will be described later.

FIG. 135 schematically shows how three game balls (game ball d, game ball e, and game ball f) fired by the batted ball launcher are detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A. . The game ball d is picked up by the big winning door at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t4, detected by the count switch 9023 at a timing slightly later than the timing t4, and detected by the out ball detection sensor at a timing earlier than the timing t5. A game ball detected by the 90710A. The game ball e is picked up by the big winning door at timing t4 (the moment it closes), detected by the count switch 9023 at timing later than timing t4, and detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at timing t5. It is a game ball. The game ball f is a game ball that is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, a game ball that has flowed down on the front side of the large winning opening door that is in a closed state), and is before timing t5 (further than timing t6). It is a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at a late timing.

Time T5 between timing t4 and timing t5 is the state change switching wait time set in step S902024 of the state control process (FIG. 134). In addition, the game ball e picked up by the big winning gate at timing t4 moves at the slowest possible speed to the position detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after being picked up by the big winning gate (middle of movement). (detected by count switch 9023 in ) and detected by out ball detection sensor 90710A. In other words, the game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at a timing later than the timing t5 is not detected by the count switch 9023. In other words, the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment it closes can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A.

In other words, game balls detected by the count switch 9023 exist among the game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the closing of the big winning entrance door (for example, during the execution period of the ending effect). A game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at any timing of time T5, such as the game ball d), and a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the closing of the big winning door, the count switch. In order not to reflect the game ball that can be detected by 9023 in the performance display, the in-round game flag is cleared to the off state at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed) (step S902028 in FIG. 134). In other words, until the timing t5 (time T5), the in-round game flag is maintained in an ON state and is not reflected in the performance display.

Incidentally, hypothetically, if the in-round game flag is cleared to the OFF state at timing t4 (when reflected in the performance display from the closing timing of the big winning gate door), winning the big winning gate before timing t4 However, when a game ball detected by the out-ball detection sensor 90710A after timing t4 (a game ball fired at a slightly earlier timing than the game ball d) enters the big winning hole, the number of prize balls is displayed in the performance display. Although it is not reflected in the performance display, it is reflected in the performance display as the number of shot balls. On the other hand, if the round game in-progress flag is cleared to the OFF state at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed), the above-described problem is resolved.

Although timing t5 is the latest timing at which a game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment it closes can be detected by out ball detection sensor 90710A, timing t5 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t5 may be the average timing at which the game ball picked up by the large winning entrance door at the moment it closes is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, or at a timing earlier than the average timing. There may be. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) set in step S902024 of the state control process (FIG. 134) takes into consideration the movement time of the game ball (special variable winning ball device 907→out ball detector 90710). If it is However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to use the timing t5 as the latest timing.

FIG. 136 is a configuration example of an out-sphere detector. The out-sphere detector 90710 described above may be, for example, as shown in FIG. 136(A). The out ball detector 90710 shown in FIG. 136(A) includes a main body 90720 and a harness 90730. The main body 90720 has an opening (passing portion) 90721 through which a game ball that has entered one of the winning openings or a game ball taken into the out opening 9052 passes, and an out ball detection that detects a game ball passing through the opening 90721. A sensor 90710A and a connection portion 90722 are provided. The harness 90730 includes a signal line 90734 to which connection portions (connection portions 90732 and 90733) are connected at both ends, a connection portion (connector) 90732 for connecting to the connection portion 90722 on the main body 90720 side, and a main substrate 9011 side. A connecting portion (connector) 90733 for connecting with a provided connecting portion (not shown) is provided. FIG. 136(A) (similar to FIG. 136(B)) shows a state in which the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 are connected. Note that the out-ball detector 90710 (harness 90730) and the main board 9011 can be detached from each other at the connecting part (the connecting part 90733, the connecting part on the main board 9011 side). Also, the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be detachable at the connecting portions (connecting portions 90722, 90732).

The game balls that have entered one of the winning openings or the game balls taken into the out opening 9052 are finally collected in one path and all pass through the opening 90721 . When the game ball that has passed through the opening 90721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, a detection signal indicating that the game ball has been detected is output to the main substrate 9011 side via the harness 90730 . Since the game balls detected by the out ball detector 90710 are tallied (counted) as the number of hit balls, the out ball detection sensor 90710A may be called a count switch.

Note that the out ball detector 90710 detects when the harness 90730 is disconnected from the main body 90720 (when the connecting portion 90722 on the main body 90720 side and the connecting portion 90732 on the harness 90730 side are not properly connected), and when the harness 90730 If there is a disconnection (intermediate disconnection of the signal line 90734, disconnection between the signal line 90734 and the connection part 90732, disconnection between the signal line 90734 and the connection part 90734, etc.), the ON signal is always turned on. It is configured to output to the substrate 9011 side. Therefore, the CPU 90103 can detect the disconnection of the harness or the like by monitoring the signal input from the out ball detector 90710 in the error detection process described above. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that a harness disconnection or disconnection has occurred when the ON signal is continuously input for a predetermined time or longer.

At least part of the detection signal output by the out-ball detector 90710 when the game ball passes through the opening 90721 may be composed of a predetermined on/off pattern. When at least part of the detection signal is composed of a predetermined on/off pattern, the CPU 90103 can detect signal corruption due to noise or the like by monitoring the signal input from the out ball detector 90710 .

Also, the out-sphere detector 90710 may comprise a clasp 90740 having a screw hole 90741 as shown in FIG. 136(B). Alternatively, the out-sphere detector 90710 (body 90720) may be attachable with a clasp 90740. Note that the clasp 90740 is an example of a fixing member for fixing the main body 90720 to the gaming machine 901 or the like, and any member can be used as long as the main body 90720 can be fixed to the gaming machine 901 or the like. good too.

Also, the harness 90730 (at least part of the connection portions 90732, 90734, and signal line 90734) may be protected by a cover or the like. Also, the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be separate bodies. That is, the main body 90720 of the out ball detector 90710 may be connectable to the harness 90730 which is a separate body.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error notification processing for errors related to performance display. FIG. 138 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to performance display. In the error notification process shown in FIG. 137, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal output from the out ball detector 90710 is detected (step S901200).

If there is an abnormality in the out-ball detector 90710 (for example, harness disconnection, disconnection, garbled signal, etc.), the CPU 90103 detects an out-ball in a process (error detection process described above) different from the error notification process. A reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal output from the device 90710 is detected. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when the ON signal continues for a predetermined period of time. In addition, at least part of the detection signal output from the out ball detector 90710 is made up of a predetermined on/off pattern, and the CPU 90103 detects that the received signal input is different from the predetermined on/off pattern. If there is, it may be determined that the signal is garbled.

If reception abnormality is not detected in step S901200 (step S901200; NO), CPU90103 determines whether the reception error flag provided in RAM90102 (for example, game control flag setting unit) is on ( step S901201). If the reception error flag is ON in step S901201 (step S901201; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the reception error flag to turn it off (step S901202), and proceeds to step S901205. If the reception error flag is off in step S901201 (step S901201; NO), the process skips step S901202 and proceeds to step S901205.

If reception abnormality is detected in step S901200 (step S901200; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the reception error flag is on (step S901203). If the reception error flag is off in step S901203 (step S901203; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the reception error flag to on (step S901204), and proceeds to step S901205. If the reception error flag is ON in step S901203 (step S901203; YES), the process skips step S901204 and proceeds to step S901205.

Following any of the processes of step S901201 (NO), step S901202, step S901203 (YES), and step S901204, it is determined whether or not the reception error flag is ON (step S901205).

If the reception error flag is off in step S901205 (step S901205; NO), the CPU 90103 performs control so that the performance is displayed in the normal mode (normal mode) (step S901206). In the process of step S901206, the CPU 90103 controls performance display to be performed in the display modes shown in FIGS. 117B to 117F. Then, the error notification process ends.

If the reception error flag is ON in step S901205 (step S901205; YES), the CPU 90103 controls to display the error notification mode (step S901207). In the process of step S901207, for example, the CPU 90103 controls so that the display mode shown in FIG. 138A is displayed. In the display mode of FIG. 138A, the upper two digits are "-- (blinking)" and the lower two digits are "-- (lighting)". Then, the error notification process ends.

It should be noted that, in the event of a reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal by the out-ball detector 90710, the number of hit balls (FIG. 116(B)) is not automatically updated, but the number of prize balls in each winning hole ( FIG. 116(B)) is not updated either. In other words, the CPU 90103, as in the case of the consecutive (continuous ratio)/role ratio related processing (FIG. 94, etc.), controls the first start switch 9022A and the second start switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first start switch 9022A. When a game ball is detected by any of the general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, the respective winning information is obtained (received), but in a situation where the number of driven balls is not updated, there is no winning. The number of prize balls addition processing based on the information is not performed.

According to the error notification process shown in FIG. 137, normally the upper two digits are displayed as "bL. (flashing, lighting)" or "b6. (flashing, lighting)" (Fig. 117 (F)), and when reception is abnormal, "-- (lit)" is displayed (FIG. 138 (A)). In other words, when the reception is abnormal, the upper two digits are displayed in a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal.

Note that the display mode shown in FIG. 138A is an example. For example, in the processing of step S901207, control may be performed so that display is performed in the display mode of FIG. 138(B) instead of the display mode of FIG. 138(A). As in FIG. 138A, the upper two digits in FIG. Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal.

Further, for example, in the process of step S901207, control may be performed so that display is performed in the display modes of FIG. 138(C) and FIG. 138(D). The upper two digits "E. (blinking)" in FIG. 138(C) and the upper two digits "Er. (blinking)" in FIG. 138(D) remind us of "Err". Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits (or the upper two digits), the abnormality can be easily recognized.

Also, in FIGS. 138A to 138D, the lower two digits are "-- (lighting)", but the lower two digits may be "-- (blinking)" or other indications. It may be an aspect.

When it is normal, that is, in the display by the processing of step S901206, the display contents are displayed as shown in FIGS. changes, but when there is an abnormality, that is, in the display by the processing of step S901207, the display is always (that is, even if the reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 117A, and five seconds after the start of display) time), the display contents do not change. That is, the display when there is an abnormality is simpler than the display when it is normal. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that something is not normal (or that something is wrong) without causing confusion or extra burden.

FIG. 139 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to performance display. 138(A) to 138(D) described above are displayed even if reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. Even when the content does not change but is abnormal, the data is displayed according to the section shown in FIG. 117(A) and every 5 seconds, for example, as shown in FIGS. You may change the display content. The display modes of FIGS. 139(A) to 139(E) differ from the display modes of FIGS. 117(B) to 117(F) in that the lower two digits are blinking. According to the error notification mode of FIG. 139, since the display content changes according to the section, in addition to the abnormal state, the section (the section shown in FIG. It is also possible to recognize the real-time base value at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) and the previous accumulated base value.

It should be noted that the lower two digits of the real-time base values in FIGS. , 139(D) and 139(E), the lower two digits indicating the previous cumulative base value may be, for example, "Er. (flashing)". That is, in FIGS. 139(A) to 139(E), the lower two digits may be "-- (blinking)" or "Er. (blinking)". According to this display mode, it is possible to recognize the section (the section shown in FIG. 117A) at the time of occurrence of the abnormality (immediately before the occurrence), in addition to the abnormality.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 137, when the error (abnormality) is resolved, the display returns to the normal mode (step S901206). You may continue the display of a mode (step S901207). Further, when the error is resolved, the normal mode display may be resumed, but the error may continue to be notified.

As a first example, after the error is resolved, in the display of the normal mode (FIGS. 117(A) to 117(F)), the lowest (fourth digit) dot blinks (or lights up). good too. As a second example, a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130 (for example, one digit) is arranged on the main substrate 9011, and after the error is resolved, the display monitor 901130 is returned to the normal mode display. At the same time, a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130 may continue to report that an error has occurred (for example, "E. (flashing)", etc.).

In addition, the first example above is exactly the same as the display in the normal mode when the error is resolved (except for the blinking (lighting) of the lowest dot that indicates that an error has occurred). However, in the display mode of the first example, in order to provide information that is provided (displayed) in the display in the normal mode (other than the lowest dot is the display in the normal mode. (because they are the same), it was expressed as returning to the normal mode of display. In addition, the display monitor (display monitor different from the display monitor 901130) that notifies that there is an error in the second example above is designed so that the display is not cleared when the power is turned off due to a power failure, similar to the display monitor 901130. do. In other words, the information indicating that an error has occurred is not cleared due to a power failure such as a power failure.

It should be noted that, in the mode of displaying the performance information as well as the mode of displaying the role series (continuous ratio) and the role ratio described above, a clear switch is connected to the main substrate 9011, and by operating the clear switch, the data is stored in the RAM 90102. You may clear the data used for performance display. The clear switch in the mode of displaying the performance information is operated when the calculation of the performance information has to be redone, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the performance information. Consecutive ratio), when the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data, as in the aspect of displaying the role ratio.

When the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying performance information, an error is displayed in the same manner as when the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying the yakuren (run ratio) and yakuratio (Figs. 94 and 95). 138 and 139). Further, when the clear switch is operated when reception is abnormal, both the error display and the warning display may be performed. For example, an error display and a warning display may be displayed in order. When performance is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 139, for example, error display (real-time base value), error display (previous accumulated base value), and warning display may be displayed in order.

Further, in the aspect of displaying the performance information as well as the aspect of displaying the role series (relationship ratio) and the role ratio described above, an error indicator may be provided on the main substrate 9011 in addition to the display monitor 90130. good. If an error indicator is provided separately from the display monitor 90130 on the main substrate 9011 , the error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 9029 . In addition, in the configuration in which the display monitor 90130 and the error indicator are provided on the main substrate 9011, when the reception is abnormal, information indicating the reception abnormality is displayed on the error indicator, and the display monitor 90130 is shown in FIG. You may display by the display mode shown in FIG.

In addition, when the reception is abnormal, for example, the first special symbol display device 904A, such as performing a predetermined error display in the second special symbol display device 904B, etc., so that it can be recognized that the reception is abnormal can be Further, a predetermined error display may be performed on the image display device 905 by transmitting an abnormality detection designation command designating that a reception abnormality has occurred, or the game effect lamp 909 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined sound (including voice) may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R.
In addition, by transmitting information to the effect that reception abnormality has occurred, an information display device (for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko game machine 901, a call lamp provided above the pachinko game machine 901 device, etc.) or an information management device (hall computer, etc.) may be configured to be able to recognize that reception is abnormal.

In addition, other devices (error indicator, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905, game effect lamp 909, speakers 908L, 908R, information display device, information management device etc.), the display may be erased on the display monitor 90130 regardless of whether or not the reception abnormality is made recognizable. In other words, when a reception abnormality occurs, for example, all four digits of the display monitor 90130 are extinguished (the "extinction" does not mean the non-display of the "blinking" but always the non-display). Alternatively, one digit (or two or three digits) of all four digits on the display monitor 90130 may be turned off. That is, the display when the reception is abnormal (display by the process of step S901207) is at least the display when the reception is normal (the display by the process of step S901206). It is acceptable if the performance display is restricted by using a specific function, or the performance display is restricted by erasing part or all of the performance display.

Figure 140 is the flowchart which shows one example of timer interruption processing which CPU90103 does (timer interruption processing for game control). In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 140, the CPU 90103 first executes an error detection process (step S9010), and notifies the error when an error (abnormality) is detected (step S9011). In the processing of steps S9010 and S9011, for example, the CPU 90103 monitors the signal output from the out-ball detector 90710, detects abnormal reception of the signal output from the out-ball detector 90710 (step S9010), is detected, it is reported on the display monitor 901130 or the like (step S9011).

After step S9011, the CPU 90103 executes random number update processing (step S9012). In the random number update process of step S9012, the CPU 90103 updates, for example, game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for judging big hit types, random numbers for judging variation patterns, etc.). Following step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol processing (special symbol process processing) (step S9013). In the special figure process of step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes various processes shown in FIGS. 120 to 127 and 134, for example.

After step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes performance information update processing (steps S9014A and S9014B). Details of the performance information update process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes performance information display processing (step S9015). In the performance information display process of step S9015, the CPU 90103 displays the performance information updated in the performance information update process (steps S9014A and S9014B) on the display monitor 901130 as shown in FIG.

After step S9015, the CPU 90103 executes prize ball processing (step S9016). In the prize ball processing of step S9016, the CPU 90103, for example, calculates the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of various switches, and controls the payout mechanism so that the calculated number of game balls are paid out. Following step S9016, the CPU 90103 executes a normal pattern process (normal pattern process process) (step S9017). In the normal pattern process of step S9017, the CPU 90103 controls, for example, the normal variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 9020 and the operation of the movable wing pieces in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. After step S9017, the CPU 90103 executes information output processing (step S9018). In the information output process of step S9018, the CPU 90103, for example, an information display device (for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko game machine 901, a call lamp device provided above the pachinko game machine 901, etc.), Various types of information such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, and abnormality information are output to an information management device (hall computer, etc.). Then, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, the processing of steps S9010 to S9018 shown in FIG. 140 is for explaining a part of the processing executed in the game control timer interrupt processing, and the CPU 90103 performs steps S9010 to S9018 in the game control timer interrupt processing. Other processing (for example, switch processing to input (determine) the state of the detection signal input from the various switches, processing to transmit the production control command from the main board 9011 side to the production control board 9012 side, etc.) can be executed be.

In the case of the configuration of FIG. 119, in the above switch processing, the first start switch 9022A and the second start switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, and the firing detection A detection signal from sensor 90700A or the like is output to CPU 90103 . In the case of the configuration of FIG. 130, the detection signals of the first ejection detection sensor 90701A and the second ejection detection sensor 90702A are output to the CPU 90103 instead of the ejection detection sensor 90700A. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 133, the detection signal of the out-ball detection sensor 90710A is output to the CPU 90103 instead of the firing detection sensor 90700A.

Also, the execution order of each process of steps S9010 to S9018 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 140 is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 90103 may execute the information output process prior to the random number update process, or may execute the normal figure process immediately after the special figure process.

Also, the grouping of each process (unit of each process) such as the error detection process (step S9010) and the error notification process (step S9011) is an example. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 137, the CPU 90103 may execute the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) as one process. It should be noted that the processing of step S901206 in the error notification processing of FIG. Equivalent to.

The relationship between error notification processing (step S9011) and performance information display processing (step S9015) in game control timer interrupt processing in FIG. 140 and error notification processing in FIG. 137 is supplemented. As described above, the error notification process of FIG. 137 may be regarded as a combination of the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) of FIG. , for the convenience of explanation (for the purpose of explaining that the display mode (normal mode, error notification mode) of the display monitor 901130 differs depending on the presence or absence of an abnormality), it may be regarded as one. .

Further, FIG. 140 shows the game control timer interrupt processing in the case of displaying the performance information, but the same applies to the game control timer interrupt processing in the case of displaying the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio. That is, the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 140 is the process of updating the role series (continuous ratio) and role ratio, and the performance information display process (step S9015) is used to display the role series (continuous ratio) and role ratio. It should be processed. It should be noted that the relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 140 and each process shown in FIGS. The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the control timer interrupt process and the error notification process in FIG. 137 is the same.

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014A) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014B) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

The CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 141 in the aspect of executing the state control process (step S901101A) of FIG. That is, the performance information update process (S9014A) in FIG. 90702 (second fire detection sensor 90702A). On the other hand, the CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 142 in the aspect of executing the state control process (step S901101B) of FIG. In other words, the performance information update process (S9014B) in FIG. 142 is executed in a configuration provided with the out ball detector 90710 (out ball detection sensor 90710A).

In the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 141, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S9020). If the variable probability flag is not ON in step S9020 (step S9020; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S9021).

If the time saving flag is not ON in step S9021 (step S9021; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round playing flag is ON (step S9022). In addition, in the case of the start of the jackpot game state shown in FIGS. In step S902008 after the elapse of time T2), since the state is changed from OFF state to ON state, the processing of step S9022 is whether or not the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has elapsed at the start of the jackpot game state. It can be said that it judges

If the round playing flag is not turned on at step S9022 (step S9022; NO), that is, if the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has not elapsed, the CPU 90103 determines the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls. Then, the base value, which is the performance information, is calculated (step S9023). In the process of step S9023, for example, the CPU 90103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 116(B)), Based on the detection result (detection signal) of 90700A, etc., the number of hit balls is added (FIG. 116(B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous total base value are calculated (FIG. 116(A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014A) ends.

On the other hand, the variable probability flag is ON in step S9020 (step S9020; YES), or the time saving flag is ON in step S9021 (step S9021; YES), or if the round playing flag is ON in step S9022 ( Step S9022; YES), the performance information update process (step S9014A) ends without performing the process of step S9023.

In the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 142, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S9030). If the variable probability flag is not ON in step S9030 (step S9030; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S9031).

If the time saving flag is not ON in step S9031 (step S9031; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round playing flag is ON (step S9032). It should be noted that when the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 135 is completed, the round playing flag is set in step S902024 of the state control processing (FIG. 134) after the state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 135) has passed. Since the ON state→OFF state in step S902028, the process of step S9032 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed at the end of the jackpot game state. I can say

If the round game in progress flag is not turned on at step S9032 (step S9032; NO), that is, if the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed, the CPU 90103 determines the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls. Then, the base value, which is the performance information, is calculated (step S9033). In the process of step S9033, for example, the CPU 90103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection result (detection signal) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 116(B)), and detects out balls. Based on the detection result (detection signal) of the sensor 90710A, the number of hit balls is added (Fig. 116(B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous accumulated base value are calculated (Fig. 116(A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014B) ends.

On the other hand, the variable probability flag is ON in step S9030 (step S9030; YES), or the time saving flag is ON in step S9031 (step S9031; YES), or if the round playing flag is ON in step S9032 ( Step S9032; YES), the performance information update process (step S9014B) ends without performing the process of step S9033.

According to the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 141 and the performance information update process (step S9014B) of FIG. The number of prize balls and the number of hit balls, which are the basis of the display, are added. Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the performance information update process (step S9014A) in FIG. 141 and the performance information update process (step S9014B) in FIG. The state of the flag is referred to, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are added, and the base value, which is the performance information, is calculated. Because the relationship with time is different (specifically, in the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 141, the round game flag is turned off before the time T2 elapses, and the performance information update process (step S9014B) of FIG. Then, after the time T5 has elapsed, the in-round game flag is in an off state), which has been described with reference to separate drawings.

In addition, the processing shown in FIGS. 140 to 142 is the detection result of the switch processing when all of the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are in the off state (various switch output results of various winning openings, launch detection sensor 90700A, etc.) is reflected (added) as performance information, and when at least one of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag is in the ON state, the detection result by the switch processing is not reflected as the performance information. This is the process. In other words, the game ball is detected in the switch process regardless of the state of the flag, and it is determined whether or not the detection result is reflected as the performance information according to the state of the flag. However, when all of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are in the off state, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are reflected as performance information, and the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are reflected as performance information. Other processing may be used as long as the processing does not reflect the number of prize balls or the number of hit balls as performance information when at least one of them is in the ON state. For example, switch processing related to the number of hit balls (shooting detection sensor 90700A, first shooting detection sensor 90701A, second shooting detection sensor 90702A, out ball detection when all of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are off) Detection by the sensor 90710A) is executed, and if at least one of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag is in the ON state, the switch processing regarding the number of hit balls may not be executed. In other words, it may be a process of judging whether or not to execute the switch process regarding the number of hit balls according to the state of the flag. In addition, regarding the switch processing related to the number of prize balls (detection by the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, etc.) 140 to 142, the flag indicates whether or not the detection result is to be reflected in the performance information. You may judge according to a state.

FIG. 143 is an example of an arrangement position of an out-sphere detector. FIG. 143(A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the game machine frame 903 for supporting and fixing the game board 902 is released from the outer frame 903A. A main board 9011 and the like are mounted on the back side of the game board 902 . A base member 901129 is provided on the main board 9011 , and a display monitor 901130 is provided on the base member 901129 . The display monitor 901130 is accommodated in the board case 90202 together with the base member 901129 and the main board 9011 .

Note that the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. 143(A) (the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 143(B) is the same) is arranged such that the rear surface of the main board 9011 is positioned horizontally in the center and vertically upward. Although located, the display monitor 901130 may be located at other locations on the back surface. For example, on the rear surface of the main substrate 9011, it may be arranged in the center in the horizontal direction and on the lower side in the vertical direction. In addition, when it is arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the main substrate 9011, it is convenient that the display contents are easy to see when the salesclerk or the like confirms the display contents while standing. Moreover, when it is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main substrate 9011, it is convenient that the display contents are easy to see when the salesclerk or the like sits down or bends down to confirm the display contents. Various wiring (signal lines) may exist above the main board 9011 of the game board 902 . And it is assumed that such wiring bends, or bundled things come off, and the main substrate 9011 is covered. When the display monitor 901130 is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main substrate 9011, it is less likely that the display monitor 901130 is covered with the bent wiring, which is advantageous compared to the case where the display monitor 901130 is arranged on the upper side. Also, although related to the above, the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. The mode of arrangement is the same. However, the appearance of the display monitor 901130 and the mode of arrangement on the main substrate 9011 are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, the display monitor 901130 may have the appearance of the display monitors 90130B, 90130C, 90130D, 90130E, 90130F, 90130G, 90130H, and 90130I shown in FIGS.

In FIG. 143(A), the game board 902 (for example, the bottom part, the lower part, etc. of the game board) has winning openings (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth General winning opening 9050D, 1st start winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, big winning opening) and game balls taken into the out opening 9052 are discharged to the outside (game ball exit hole ) 902A are provided. Passages a, b, and c indicated by dashed lines are passages (ball recovery passages) through which game balls that have entered the prize winning opening and game balls taken into the out opening 9052 pass. Even if it is a game ball that has entered the winning opening or a game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052, it passes through one of the passages a, b, and c, and is finally discharged to the outside from the opening 902A. be done.

The out ball detector 90710 is provided on the game board 902 side, as shown in FIG. 143(A). Specifically, the out ball detector 90710 is provided at a position capable of detecting the game ball discharged from the opening 902A. In other words, like the opening 902A, the out ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning opening or the game ball taken into the out opening 9052 .

The game ball detected by the out ball detector 90710 is collected by the ball receiving member 901700 provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). Also, the signal line 90734 of the out-sphere detector 90710 is connected to the main substrate 9011 . That is, the game ball ejected from the opening 902A of the game board 902 passes through the opening 90721 of the out ball detector 90710 and is collected by the ball receiving member 901700 to the game island. A game ball passing through the opening 90721 is detected by an out ball detection sensor 90710A, and a detection signal is output to the main substrate 9011.

The bottom of the ball receiving member 901700 (the part on which the game ball rides) is provided with an opening (hole for the exit of the game ball) 901701, and although not shown, the bottom is inclined toward the opening 901701. are doing. That is, the game ball reaching the ball receiving member 901700 from the gaming machine 901 (opening 90721) passes through the opening 901701 and is discharged to the outside (lower side) of the ball receiving member 901700.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 143(B), the out ball detector 90710 may be provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). In the example of FIG. 143(B), the out ball detector 90710 is provided at a position capable of detecting a game ball ejected from the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 . In other words, similar to the opening 901701, the out ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game balls that have entered the winning opening or the game balls taken into the out opening 9052, and the opening of the ball receiving member 901700. A game ball ejected from 901701 is detected. Note that the clasp 90740 is omitted in FIG. 143(B).

FIG. 143A shows an example in which the out-ball detector 90710 is installed using the clasp 90740, but the out-ball detector 90710 may be installed using a fixing member other than the clasp 90740. The same applies to the example of FIG. 143(B).

143(A) and 143(B), the out-ball detector 90710 is an external part, but the game board 902 or the like may be provided with the out-ball detector 90710 from the beginning. For example, in FIG. 143(A), an out ball detector 90710 may be provided below the opening 902A of the game board 902 (same position as in FIG. 143(A)). Also, an out ball detection sensor 90710A may be provided in the opening 902A of the game board 902 (the opening 902A of the game board 902 corresponds to the opening 90721 of the main body 90720). The same applies to the example of FIG. 143(B).

Although three passages (passages a, b, and c) are shown in FIG. 143(A), the game ball entering the winning opening or the game ball taken into the out opening 9052 finally reaches the opening 902A. However, the number and shape of the passages are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 143(A). The same applies to the example of FIG. 143(B).

It should be noted that the state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 135) set in the process of step S902024 in FIG. It is affected by the required time until the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A. Specifically, the shorter the required time, the shorter the state change switching waiting time (time T5) can be (not necessarily shortened).

Therefore, in order to shorten the state change switching waiting time (time T5), for example, in the configuration of FIG. You may do so. Specifically, the length of the passage through which the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 passes (for example, passage a, etc.) is shortened, or the game ball passing through the passage is inclined to immediately enter the opening 902A. or guidance may be provided. In the configuration of FIG. 143(B), instead of or in addition to the above, the time required for the game ball discharged from the game machine 901 (opening 90721) to reach the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 is short. You should make it so that As an example, the inclination of the bottom of the ball receiving member 901700 may be increased.

In addition, the opening 902A of the game board 902 and the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 may be widened so that the game balls do not get clogged and the game balls flow quickly. A plurality of openings may be provided, or the ball receiving member 901700 may be provided with a plurality of openings.

When widening the opening 902A of the game board 902, a plurality of out-ball detectors 90710 (out-ball detection sensors 90710A) may be provided so that game balls discharged from the widened opening 902A can be detected without omission. can be The same applies to widening the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 . Also, when a plurality of openings are provided in the game board 902, a plurality of out ball detectors 90710 ( Out ball detection sensor 90710A) may be provided. The same applies to the case where the ball receiving member 901700 is provided with a plurality of openings.

When a plurality of out ball detectors 90710 (out ball detection sensor 90710A) are provided, game balls can be detected at the same time. , and each game ball detected at the same time may be captured as the number of hit balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A shooting device (for example, a batted ball shooting device, etc.) for shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball, etc.) to a game area (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) is provided, and an advantageous condition is established (for example, the first, second Special symbol display devices 904A, 904B derivation display of confirmed special symbols that are big hits and small winning symbols, derivation display of confirmed decorative symbols that are big hit combinations in image display device 905, passing of game balls in a specific area, etc.) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) based on
Detecting means capable of detecting game media shot into the game area (for example, a ball detector provided on the guide rail (Fig. 118), ball detectors 90701 and 90702 (Fig. 129) provided in the game area etc.) and
a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) that can be changed to an open state in which game media shot into the game area can win;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 906B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 9050A to 9050D that become the general winning areas, and the big winning hole a payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.;
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state (for example, CPU90103 for determining whether or not the game state based on probability variation flag and time saving flag, etc.),
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) For example, an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 143, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 116, etc.),
The variable winning means is
Change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 131, the big winning opening at timing t3 based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol at timing t1 door changes from closed state to open state, etc.),
The determination means is
A predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 131, time T3 before timing t3 at which the big winning door changes from the closed state to the open state) Timing t2, etc.), it is determined that it is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 121, the round game flag is turned on at timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses state, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, a game ball (for example, a game ball in FIG. 128 c, etc.) from the calculation of the performance display, an accurate base value can be calculated.

In addition, the gaming machine 901 described above
Variable display means (for example, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905, etc.) that performs variable display and derives and displays the display result,
The state (for example, the state at timing t2) before the change to the open state is
A special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 131, the image display device 905 is performing a fanfare effect, etc.) is.

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, the game balls (such as game balls c shown in FIGS. 128 and 131) that are shot after the fluctuation is stopped (after the stop display) and have the possibility of winning the special variable winning ball device 907 are not included, and the predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.

In the above-described embodiments (FIGS. 121, 128, 128, etc.), the in-round-game flag is turned on from off during the execution of the fanfare effect after the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed. Before the execution of (during execution of ready-to-win effect, etc.), the round game in-progress flag may be changed from the off state to the on state. For example, if the execution time of the fanfare effect is short (for example, 2 or 3 seconds), a game ball with a possibility of winning the special variable winning ball device 907 will be detected by the launch detection sensor before the start of the fanfare effect. 90700A and the first shot ball detector 90701 (second shot ball detector 90702) may be detected, so the special variable winning ball device 907 does not include game balls that may win prizes in the performance display. In addition, the in-round-game flag may be turned on from the off state before execution of the fanfare effect. Specifically, for example, with reference to the special symbol fluctuation time, it is sufficient to set the in-round game flag to the ON state at the timing before the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol. It should be noted that the in-round-game flag may be turned on from the off state at the start of execution of the fanfare effect.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
The detection means can be detachable (for example, as shown in FIG. 129, a first ball detector 90701 and a second ball detector 90702 can The part above the dashed line P including is detachable, etc.).

As a result, it is possible to cope with a case without a detection means. Moreover, maintenance becomes easy.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
The detection means is
It is configured as a unit that can be arranged on a game board (for example, game board 902) that forms a game area (for example, the first ball detector 90701 and the second ball detector 90702 are shown in FIG. 129). is constructed as a unit above the dashed line P).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
In the game area,
There are a left game area (for example, left game area 9010A, etc.) and a right game area (for example, right game area 9010A, etc.) as areas through which the game medium ejected by the shooting device can pass,
The unit (for example, the portion above the dashed line P in FIG. 129) is
Left detection means (for example, the first shot ball detector 90701, etc.) for detecting game media passing through the left game area, and right detection means (for example, second shot detection means) for detecting game media passing through the right game area. sphere detector 90702, etc.).

Thereby, it can be detected even if it is shot to any of the game areas.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
The detection means is
Any winning area provided in the game area is provided on the upstream side in the flow path of the game medium (for example, as shown in FIG. It is provided above the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907. Also, as shown in FIG. The detector 90702 is provided above the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907).

This enables reliable detection.

In addition, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display explained in FIGS. 116 to 143,
A shooting device (for example, a batted ball shooting device, etc.) for shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball, etc.) to a game area (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) is provided, and an advantageous condition is established (for example, the first, second Special symbol display devices 904A, 904B derivation display of confirmed special symbols that are big hits and small winning symbols, derivation display of confirmed decorative symbols that are big hit combinations in image display device 905, passing of game balls in a specific area, etc.) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) based on
a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) that can be changed to an open state in which game media shot into the game area can win;
Variable winning control means (for example, CPU 90103 etc. for executing special figure processing shown in FIG. 120) capable of performing a predetermined number of round games that change the variable winning means to the open state;
Game media that have passed through one of the winning areas provided in the game area (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth general winning opening 9050D, first starting winning opening game balls, etc. that have won any of the openings, the second start winning opening, and the big winning opening) and game media that have not passed through any of the winning areas (such as game balls that have been taken into the out opening 9052). (For example, as shown in FIG. 143(A), the position where the game ball discharged from the opening 902A of the game board 902A can be detected, or the ball receiving member 901700 as shown in FIG. 143(B) detection means (e.g., out-ball detector 90710, etc.) provided at a position capable of detecting a game ball ejected from the opening 901701, and capable of detecting a game medium passing through the flow path;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 906B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 9050A to 9050D that become the general winning areas, and the big winning hole a payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.;
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state (for example, CPU90103 for determining whether or not the game state based on probability variation flag and time saving flag, etc.),
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) For example, an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 143, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 116, etc.),
The variable winning control means is
Starting the round game based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, controlling the large winning entrance door from the closed state to the open state based on the stop display of the big win symbol),
The determination means is
Until a predetermined period of time elapses after the predetermined number of round games are completed and the variable winning means changes to the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. from timing t4 to timing t5 when time T5 has passed), it is determined that the state is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the state control process in FIG. 134, the timing when the state change switching waiting time (time T5) passes At t5, the in-round game flag is cleared to the OFF state, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the out ball detector 90710 at any timing of the time T5 (for example, the game ball d in FIG. 135, etc.) is not included in the calculation of the performance display. base value can be calculated.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
The state when the predetermined period of time elapses (for example, the state at timing t5) is
This is a special state after the predetermined number of round games have ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 135, an ending effect is being executed on the image display device 905, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, even if the game ball is detected by the out-ball detector 90710 during the ending production, the game ball (such as the game ball d shown in FIG. 135) that has the possibility of winning the special variable winning ball device 907 , is not included in the calculation of the predetermined information (performance information), it is possible to calculate accurate predetermined information.

In addition, in the above embodiment (FIGS. 134, 135, etc.), the round playing flag is turned off from the ON state during the execution of the ending effect after the final round, but after the execution of the ending effect (no time saving During the first variable display in the normal jackpot, etc., the round-playing flag may be changed from the on state to the off state. For example, if the execution time of the ending effect is short (for example, 2 or 3 seconds), the game balls that have the possibility of winning the special variable winning ball device 907 will Since there is a possibility of being detected by the special variable winning ball device 907, the round game flag is turned off after the execution of the ending effect so as not to include the game ball that may win a prize in the performance display. may Specifically, for example, the state change switching waiting time set in step S902024 in FIG. It should be noted that the in-round-game flag may be turned off from the on state at the end of execution of the ending effect.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
The detection means is detachable (for example, the out ball detector 90710 is detachable with a clasp 90740 as shown in FIG. 136(B)).

As a result, it is possible to cope with a case without a detection means. Moreover, maintenance becomes easy.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
The detection means is
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 902, etc.) that forms the game area (for example, out ball detector 90710 is configured as a game board 902 as shown in FIG. 143(B)). It is configured as a unit that can be placed in the

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

In addition, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display explained in FIGS. 116 to 143,
A gaming machine capable of executing a game and being controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player,
Detecting means (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 136, 143, etc.) capable of detecting game media (for example, the game area 9010, etc.) used in the game;
a signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136);
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, etc.);
Abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, CPU 90103 etc. that executes the error notification process in FIG. 137);
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 906B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 9050A to 9050D that become the general winning areas, and the big winning hole a payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.;
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) For example, an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 143, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 116, etc.),
When the abnormality detection means detects an abnormality in the reception state, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted).

This prevents the information display means from displaying incorrect information. It should be noted that, for example, if an illegal act such as pulling out the harness 90730 (connecting parts 90732 and 90733) is performed in order to make the value of the performance display better, at least the performance display by the display monitor 901130 is restricted. It is possible to prevent a situation in which numbers due to fraudulent acts are displayed as if they are valid.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display mode of the information display means is changed (for example, a display mode as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139). , etc.).

As a result, confirmation can be made without providing a new display means.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
The abnormality detection means can detect disconnection of the signal line (for example, it can detect by monitoring a signal input from the out ball detector 90710),
It is possible to inform the outside (for example, the game effect lamp 909, the speakers 908L and 908R, the display device of the card unit, the call lamp device, the hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line has been detected.

As a result, it is possible to recognize the door without opening the door.

Also, in the gaming machine 901 described above,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit that can be placed on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 143(B)).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Also, in FIGS. 116 to 143, the pachinko game machine is shown as a game machine that displays performance, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are displayed according to the operation of the control lever by the player. (rotate the reels) and stop the symbols in response to the operation of the stop button by the player. (for example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.)).

For example, a slot machine that displays performance is a slot machine that can execute a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, bonus etc.) that is advantageous to the player. etc.), and a signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, a slot for detecting a detection signal from an inserted medal sensor, etc.). a signal line output to the main board side of the machine, etc.), receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board of the slot machine, a predetermined connection section provided on the main board side, etc.), and the detection signal Abnormality detecting means (for example, CPU of the main board of the slot machine, etc.) capable of detecting abnormalities in the reception state of the slot machine, and predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the combination (role) of specific symbols on each reel is stopped, etc.) Payout means (for example, a hopper motor or the like for paying out medals stored in a hopper tank from a medal payout opening) for paying out game media based on the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state. Information capable of displaying predetermined information (e.g., information indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of insertions, etc.) calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state. display means (for example, a display section provided on the main board of the slot machine), and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, display by the information display means is restricted (for example, error and limit the display of information indicating the above ratio, etc.) It may be a slot machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display 4B Second special symbol display 5 Effect display device 25D Right-handed display unit 30 Right-handed notification LED
103 CPUs
120 Production control CPU
901 Pachinko game machine 902 Game board 903 Game machine frame 903a Glass door frame 903A Outer frame 904A, 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R Speaker 909 Game effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Sound control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switches 9022A, 9022B Starting port switch 9023 Count switch 9029 Display monitor 9030 Operation button 90100 For game control Microcomputer 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 90105, 90125 I/O
90120 Production control CPU
90123 Display control unit 901000 Movable accessory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Abnormality determination means capable of determining abnormality in response to a plurality of types of events having different priorities;
Abnormality notification control means capable of notifying the determined abnormality when the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means;
an external output means capable of outputting an external output signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the abnormality determination means determines an abnormality;
state control means for controlling a state corresponding to the determined abnormality based on the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination means;
with
The abnormality notification control means terminates the notification and starts notification of the newly determined abnormality when the priority of the abnormality newly determined by the abnormality determination means is higher than the priority of the abnormality being reported. On the other hand, if a new abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means when the state controlled by the state control means is the predetermined state, the control of the predetermined state is triggered regardless of the priority of the abnormality. We will continue to inform you about the abnormalities that have become
When the state controlled by the state control means is a predetermined state, the external output means outputs the predetermined state regardless of the priority of the abnormality when the abnormality determination means determines a new abnormality. It is possible to continue the output of the external output signal corresponding to the abnormality that triggered the control ,
The predetermined state is a game stop state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images